HomeMy WebLinkAbout109420 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO INC - PURCHASE ORDER - 7702516 (3)FORT COLLINS UTILITIES
WORK ORDER NO. H-WRF-2007-10
DWRF PRIMARY &
SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL
City of Fort Collins
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND/OR CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION, DO NOT RELEASE WITHOUT PERMISSION OF THE SENIOR
BUYER OR DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING AND RISK MANAGEMENT
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO INC.
March 2007
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 3
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
Location: Assemby, Description � LabuxArbouttk MidilerMMourit8ubAi8oiiitt Equ Alhioutti OihirM(ou� 'tofafMltit;
Dewatering
020- Misc Site Demolition
Demo Wall for Pipe Pene
500
- -
150
50
700
Demo FRP
500
-
200
50
750
Demo Scrubber
500
-
223
75
798
unassigned
Material Testing -Pipe
400
- 4,665
100
50
5,215
Core Drill 14.0' Hole
75
-
150
15
240
Demo Handrail
2
-
15
-
17
Demo Metal Rantngs
250
-
25
-
275
Demo Centrate Tank
4,400
- -
1,200
200
5,800
Tap Saddle 4 x 1'
189
0 -
10
5
204
Tap Saddle 8 x 1'
189
0 -
10
5
204
Modify Handrail
300
258 -
50
15
823
FRP Covers
252
3,172
70
35
3,529
Al Covers
738
0 -
103
41
882
Sub - Special Coatings
- 73,D44
-
-
73,044
Bird Screens
30
507 -
12
-
549
Pipe Support Fixed 36'
130
2,700 -
70
4
2,904
Pipe Support Fixed 30"
195
2,714 -
105
5
3,020
Pipe Support Slip 36'
65
1,350 -
35
2
1,452
Pipe Support Slip 30"
130
1,809 -
70
4
2,013
Pipe Support 18" Fixed
120
2,764 -
30
7
2,921
Pipe Support 18" Sop
120
2,7M -
30
7
2,921
Pipe Support 14' Fixed
120
2,764 -
30
7
2,921
Pipe Support 14' Sip
80
1,843 -
20
5
1,947
Pipe Support 12' Fixed
20
461 -
5
- 1
487
Pipe Support 12' SIP
40
921 -
10
2
974
Pipe Support 12" Hangers
60
1,382 -
15
4
1,481
Pipe Support 8" Fixed
20
461 -
5
1
487
Pipe Support 8" Slip
40
921 -
10
2
974
Pipe Support 8' Hangers
20
461 -
5
1
487
Pipe Support 4' Fixed
120
2,764 -
30
7
2,921
Pipe Support 4' Slip
60
1,352 -
15
4
1,461
'Stainless Steel Hardware (ADD)'
132
278 -
12
422
'Btfy Lever Dartpner I T (ADD)'
84
-
30
8
122
Bty Lever pamper 30'
34
0 -
10
3
47
Bty Lever Dampnsr 18"
24
5
1
30
Sty Laver Dampner 14"
48
10
3
61
Bty Lever Dampner 8"
84
-
30
6
122
Bty Lever Dampner 4"
14
-
5
1
20
Ban SW 1501t 1'
S
-
5
-
10
Exp Joint 18"
78
-
15
4
98
Exp Joint 14'
104
- -
20
8
130
Exp Joint 12"
26
-
5
1
33
Exp Joint 8"
26
-
5
1
33
Exp Joint 10"
836
-
160
45
1,041
Exp Joint 4"
78
-
15
4
98
Flex Conn Flange 30"
195
0 -
30
a
233
Flex Conn Flange 36"
130
0 -
20
6
156
'Exp Joint Quote (V.E.)'
13,256
-
13,256
PVC Pipe Soh 80 1
23
0
10
3
36
PVC Pipe Sch 80 8
57
0 -
39
4
100
PVC Pipe Sch 80 12
243
0 -
95
9
347
PVC Pipe Soh 8014
108
0 -
42
4
154
- PVC Pipe & Filings Quote
0
6,980
-
-
6,960
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
2
0 -
0
0
2
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 14
12
0
0
0
12
damages will include but not be limited to all costs of
repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or
damaged by correction, removal or replacement of
CONTRACTOR's defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall
not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times (or
Milestones) because of any delay in performance of the
Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's
rights and remedies hereunder.
ARTICLE 14—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION
Schedule of Values.
14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in
paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments
and will be incorporated into a form of Application for
Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on
account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of
units completed.
Application for Progress Payment.
14.2. At least twenty days before the date established for
each progress payment (but not more often than once a
month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by
CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the
date of the Application and accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of
materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another
location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment
shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other
documentation warranting that OWNER has received the
materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and
evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by
appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to
protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be
satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with
respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement. Any funds that are withheld by the OWNER
shall not be subject to substitution by the CONTRACTOR
with securities or any arrangements involving an escrow or
custodianship By executing the application for payment
form the CONTRACTOR expressly waives his right to the
benefits of Colorado Revised Statutes, Section 24-91-101
et sea.
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title.
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the
Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time
of payment free and clear of all Liens.
Review of Applications for Progress Payment:
14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of
each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
recommendation of payment and present the Application
to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR
indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. Ten days after presentation of the
Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's
recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject
to the provisions of the last sentence of paragraph 14.7)
become due and when due will be paid by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR.
14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a
representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on
ENGINEER's on -site observations of the executed Work
as an experienced and qualified design professional and on
ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and
the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of
ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief:
14.5.1. the Work has progressed to the point
indicated,
14.5.2. the quality of the Work is generally in
accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to
an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole
prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results
of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract
Documents, to a final determination of quantities and
classifications for Unit Price Work under
paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated
in the recommendation), and
14.5.3. the conditions precedent to
CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment
appear to have been fulfilled insofar as it is
ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work.
However, by recommending any such payment
ENGINEER will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that: (i)exhaustive or continuous on -site
inspections have been made to check the quality or the
quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities
specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract
Documents or (ii) that there may not be other matters or
issues between the parties that might entitle
CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or
entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR.
14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment,
including final payment, shall not mean that ENGINEER
is responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or
for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or
performance of Work, or for any failure of
CONTRACTOR to perform or furnish Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole
or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it
would be incorrect to make the representations to
29
OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.5. ENGINEER may
also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of
subsequently discovered evidence or the results of
subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment
previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER
from loss because:
14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work has
been damaged requiring correction or replacement,
14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by
Written Amendment or Change Order,
14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct
defective Work or complete Work in accordance with
paragraph 13.14, or
14.7.4. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.4 inclusive.
OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount
recommended by ENGINEER because:
14.7.5. claims have been made against OWNER on
account of CONTRACTOR's performance or furnishing
of the Work,
14.7.6. Liens have been filed in connection with the
Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a
specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the
satisfaction and discharge of such Liens,
14.7.7. there are other items entitling OWNER to a set-
off against the amount recommended, or
14.7.8. OWNER has actual knowledge of the
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
paragraphs 14.7.1 through 14.7.3 or paragraphs 15.2.1
through 15.2.4 inclusive;
but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate
written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the
reasons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR
the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed
to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when
CONTRACTOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the
reasons for such action.
Substantial Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work
is substantially complete (except for items specifically
listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that
ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection
of the Work to determine the status of completion. If
ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially
complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in
writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
30 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER
will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate
of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of
Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the
certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven
days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which
to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any
provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after
considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that
the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will
within fourteen days after submission of the tentative
certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing,
stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of
OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the Work
substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said
fourteen days execute and deliver to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be
completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the
tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after
consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the
time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial
Completion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division
of responsibilities pending final payment between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security,
operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance
and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform
ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing the
definitive certificate of Substantial Completion,
ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding
on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment.
14.9. OWNER shall have the right to exclude
CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of
Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow
CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct
items on the tentative list.
Partial Utilization:
14.10. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any
substantially completed part of the Work, which: (i) has
specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or
(ii) OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR agree
constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended
purpose without significant interference with
CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the
Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
14.10.1.OWNER at any time may request
CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use
any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to
be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of
the Work is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR
will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that such
part of the Work is substantially complete and request
ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work.
n
1
CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and
ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers
any such part of the Work ready for its intended use
and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that
part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either
such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and
ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of
the Work to determine its status of completion. If
ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to
be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify
OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the
reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of
the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions
of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with respect to
certification of Substantial Completion of that part of
the Work and the division of responsibility in respect
thereof and access thereto.
14.10.2. No occupancy or separate operation of part
of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance
with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of
property insurance.
Final Inspection:
14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the
entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER
and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in
writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals
that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR
shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such work or remedy such deficiencies.
Final Application for Payment:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such
corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered
in accordance with the Contract Documents all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of
insurance required by paragraph 5.4, certificates of
inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in
paragraph 6.19) and other documents, CONTRACTOR
may make application for final payment following the
procedure for progress payments. The final Application for
Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously
delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the
Contract Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.4.13,
(ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment, and
(iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed
in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or
waivers of Liens and as approved by OWNER,
CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full
and affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and
receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment
for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls,
material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's
property might in any way be responsible have been paid or
otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9199)
to furnish such a release or receipt in full,
CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against
any Lien. Releases or waivers of liens and the consent of
the surety to finalize payment are to be submitted on
forms conforming to the format of the OWNER'S standard
forms bound in the Proiect manual.
Final Payment and Acceptance:
14.13. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of
the Work during construction and final inspection, and
ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation as required by the
Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other
obligations under the Contract Documents have been
fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of
the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing
ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present
the Application to OWNER for payment. At the same
time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER
and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject
to the provisions of paragraph 14.15. Otherwise,
ENGINEER will return the Application to
CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for
refusing to recommend final payment, in which case
CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. Thirty days after presentation to
OWNER of the Application and accompanying
documentation, in appropriate form and substance and
with ENGINEER's recommendation and notice of
acceptability, the amount recommended by ENGINEER
will become due and will be paid by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR subject to paragraph 17.6.2 of these
General Conditions.
14.14. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final
completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of
CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and
recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating
the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not
fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage
stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been
furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent
of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the
Application for such payment. Such payment shall be
made under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of
claims.
Waiver of Claims:
14.15. The making and acceptance of final payment will
constitute:
14.15. La waiver of all claims by OWNER against
CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from
unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after
31
final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.11, from
failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the
terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or
from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under
the Contract Documents; and
14.15.2. A waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR
against OWNER other than those previously made in
writing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE 15—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION
OWNER May Suspend Work:
15.1. At any time and without cause, OWNER may
suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not
more than ninety days by notice in writing to
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date
on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall
resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR
shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly
attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR
makes an approved claim therefor as provided in
Articles 11 and 12.
OWNER May Terminate:
15.2. Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the
following events:
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient
skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or
failure to adhere to the progress schedule established
under paragraph 2.9 as adjusted from time to time
pursuant to paragraph 6.6);
15.2.2. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or
Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of
ENGINEER; or
15.2.4. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any
substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents;
OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the
surety, if any) seven days' written notice and to the extent
permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services
of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the site
and take possession of the Work and of all
CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to
the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR
(without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or
conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and
equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
32 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and
finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such
case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any
further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid
balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs,
losses and damages sustained by OWNER arising out of
or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be
paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses and
damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR
shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs,
losses and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed
by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and when so
approved by ENGINEER incorporated in a Change Order,
provided that when exercising any rights or remedies
under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to
obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so
terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of OWNER against
CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter
accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due
CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release
CONTRACTOR from liability.
15.4. Upon seven days' written notice to
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or
remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Agreement. In
such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without
duplication of any items):
�1
15.4.1. for completed and acceptable Work executed
in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to
the effective date of termination, including fair and -1
reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such
Work;
15.4.2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective
date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required
by the Contract Documents in connection with
uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for
overhead and profit on such expenses;
15.4.3. for all claims, costs, losses and damages
incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with
Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and
15.4.4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable
to termination.
CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of
anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss
arising out of or resulting from such termination.
CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate.
15.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the
Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days
by OWNER or under an order of court or other public
authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application
for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted or
OWNER fails for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any
sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR
may, upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and
ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not
remedy such suspension or failure within that time,
terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER
payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.4.
In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice
to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to
act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it
is submitted, or OWNER has failed for thirty days to pay
CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due,
CONTRACTOR may upon seven days' written notice to
OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of
all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest
thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.5 are not
intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making claim
under Articles 11 and 12 for an increase in Contract Price
or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage
directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping Work as
permitted by this paragraph.
ARTICLE 16—DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that OWNER and CONTRACTOR
have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving
disputes between them that may arise under this
Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure,
if any, shall be as set forth in Exhibit GC -A, "Dispute
Resolution Agreement", to be attached hereto and made a
part hereof. If no such agreement on the method and
procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached,
and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.10, 9.11 and
9.12, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such
rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect
of any dispute.
ARTICLE 17—MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract
Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be
deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to
the individual or to a member of the firm, or to an officer of
the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or
sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the
last business address known to the giver of the notice.
17.2. Computation of Time.
17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the
Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such
period. If the last day of any such period falls on a
Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday
by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will
be omitted from the computation.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9199)
17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured
from midnight to the next midnight will constitute a
day.
Notice of Claim:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury
or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or act of the other party or of any of the other
parry's employees or agents or others for whose acts the
other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing
to the other party within a reasonable time of the first
observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of
this paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute
for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute
of limitations or repose.Cumuladve Remedies:
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these
General Conditions and the rights and remedies available
hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but
without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and
obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by
paragraphs 6.12, 6.16, 6.30, 6.31, 6.32, 13.1, 13.12, 13.14,
14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available
to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in addition
to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation
of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them
which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or
Regulations by special warranty or guarantee or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions
of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated
specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with
each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which
they apply.
Professional Fees and Court Costs Included.
17.5. Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs,
losses and damages", it shall include in each case, but not
be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs.
17.6. The laws of the State of Colorado apply to this
Agreement. Reference to two pertinent Colorado statutes
are as follows,
17.6.2. If a claim is filed, OWNER is required by
law (CRS 38-26-107) to withhold from all payments to
CONTRACTOR sufficient funds to insure the
payment of all claims for labor, materials, team hire,
sustenance, provisions, provender, or other supplies
used or consumed by CONTRACTOR or his
33
subcontractors in or about the performance of the Work.
Such funds must be withheld until said claims have
been paid or such claims as filed have been withdrawn,
such payment or withdrawal to be evidenced by filing
with OWNER a receipt in full or an order for
withdrawal in writing and signed by the person filing
such a claim or his duly authorized agents or assigns.
Such funds shall not be withheld longer than ninety (90)
days following the date fixed for final settlement, as
published in a public newspaper in accordance with the
law, unless an action is commenced within that time to
enforce such unpaid claim and a notice of Hs pendens is
filed with the OWNER. At the expiration of such
ninety (90) day period, OWNER shall pay to
CONTRACTOR such moneys and funds as are not the
subject of suit and lis pendens notices, and shall retain
only sufficient funds to insure the payment of
judgements which may result from the suit.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
34 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
(This page left blank intentionally.)
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 35
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
E]CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
36 W/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
EXHIBIT GC -A to General Conditions
of the Construction Contract Between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR
DISPUTE RESOLUTION AGREEMENT
OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereby agree that
Article 16 of the General Conditions of the Construction
Contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR is
amended to include the following agreement of the parties:
16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in
question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising
out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach
thereof (except for claims which have been waived by the
making or acceptance of final payment as provided by
paragraph 14.15) will be decided by arbitration in
accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration Association then
obtaining, subject to the limitations of the Article 16. This
agreement so to arbitrate and any other agreement or
consent to arbitrate entered into in accordance herewith as
provided in this Article 16 will be specifically enforceable
under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction.
16.2. No demand for arbitration of any claim, dispute
or other matter that is required to be referred to
ENGINEER initially for decision in accordance with
paragraph 9.11 will be made until the earlier of (a) the date
on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision or
(b) the thirty-first day after the parties have presented their
evidence to ENGINEER if a written decision has not been
rendered by ENGINEER before that date. No demand for
arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter will
be made later than thirty days after the date on which
ENGINEER has rendered a written decision in respect
thereof in accordance with paragraph 9.11; and the failure
to demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will
result in ENGINEER's decision being final and binding
upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER
renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been
initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will
not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the
decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. No demand
for arbitration of any written decision of ENGINEER
rendered in accordance with paragraph 9.10 will be made
later than ten days after the party making such demand has
delivered written notice of intention to appeal as provided
in paragraph 9.10.
16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be
filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and
with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will
be sent to ENGINEER for information. The demand for
arbitration will be made within the thirty -day or ten-day
period specified in paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all
other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute
or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall
any such demand be made after the date when institution of
legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute
or other matter in question would be barred by the
applicable statute of limitations.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
16.4. Except as provided in paragraph 16.5 below,
no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract
Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any
other manner any other person or entity (including
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant and the officers,
directors, agents, employees or consultants of any of them)
who is not a party to this contract unless:
16.4.1. the inclusion of such other person or entity is
necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among
those who are already parties to the arbitration, and
16.4.2. such other person or entity is substantially
involved in a question of law or fact which is common
to those who are already parties to the arbitration and
which will arise in such proceedings, and
16.4.3. the written consent of the other person or
entity sought to be included and of OWNER and
CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion,
which consent shall make specific reference to this
paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent
to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described
in such consent or to arbitration with any party not
specifically identified in such consent.
16.5. Notwithstanding paragraph 16.4, if a claim,
dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR involves the Work of a Subcontractor,
either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such
Subcontractor as a party to the arbitration between OWNER
and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall
include in all subcontracts required by paragraph 6.11 a
specific provision whereby the Subcontractor consents to
being joined in an arbitration between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR involving the Work of such
Subcontractor. Nothing in this paragraph 16.5 nor in the
provision of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall
create any claim, right or cause of action in favor of
Subcontractor and against OWNER, ENGINEER or
ENGINEER's Consultants that does not otherwise exist.
16.6. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be
final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having
jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to
modification or appeal.
16.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that they
shall first submit any and all unsettled claims,
counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question
between them arising out of or relating to the Contract
Documents or the breach thereof ("disputes"), to mediation
by the American Arbitration Association under the
Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American
Arbitration Association prior to either of them initiating
against the other a demand for arbitration pursuant to
paragraphs 16.1 through 16.6, unless delay in initiating
arbitration would irrevocably prejudice one of the parties.
The respective thirty and ten day time limits within which
to file a demand for arbitration as provided in paragraphs
16.2 and 16.3 above shall be suspended with respect to a
dispute submitted to mediation within those same
applicable time limits and shall remain suspended until ten
days after the termination of the mediation. The mediator
of any dispute submitted to mediation under this Agreement
shall not serve as arbitrator of such dispute unless otherwise
agreed.
GC -AI
FJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) GC -Al
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/94)
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Pape 4
DWRF Odor Control 3/22t2007 9:10 AM
ry" ,W...:
n, + �`rr,`S,yPn•-. s� ♦.tit"".te"M r...F-. .�.s..-a luyf :5 J-xi.,�44.�,v 1.,......,..X;�..�4e¢os,'""re'".'GrnSaffi.
unassigned
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 8
25
0
- 0
0
25
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 12x12x8
25
0
- 0
0
25
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 14x14x6
25
0
- 0
0
25
PVC 80 Reducer 1012
25
0
0
0
25
PVC 80 Reducer 12x8
25
0
- 0
0
25
PVC 80 Flange Adpt
104
0
- 0
0
104
PVC 80 Flange 150M S 8
35
0
- 0
0
35
'Fiberglass Gooseneck 12" (ADD)'
216
- 12
4
232
'Fiberglass Pipe Spool Piece 12" (ADD)'
216
- 12
4
232
Fiberglass Pipe 14"
1,628
- 140
49
1,817
Fiberglass Pipe 18"
1,860
160
56
2,076
Fiberglass Pipe 12"
512
- 44
15
571
Fiberglass Pipe 8"
698
60
21
779
Fiberglass Pipe 8'
1,581
- 136
48
1,765
"Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Pipe (V.E J'
102,864
- -
-
102,864
Fiberglass Pipe Venda Quote Flange Pks
0
61,232
- -
-
51,232
Fiberglass Pipe 30"
2,651
- 570
43
3,263
Fiberglass Pipe 36'
1,302
- 280
21
1,603
Fiberglass Pipe Tee 18"
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 4518'
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 90 18"
31
- 10
1
42
Fiberglass Pipe Wye 18'kt4l"
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe Reducer 18"x14"
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 90 14'
78
- 25
4
106
Fiberglass Pipe Reducer 14"x12'
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 45 14"
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 22.514"
31
- 10
1
42
Fiberglass Pipe Reducer 12'x8"
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 90 8"
93
- 30
4
127
Fiberglass Pipe 90 8"
124
- 40
6
170
Fiberglass Pipe Tee 8"
16
5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 45 8"
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 22.5 8"
31
- 10
1
42
Fiberglass Pipe Red Tee 12'
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe Red Tee 14'
16
5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe Red Tee 8'
16
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 36"
65
10
1
76
Fiberglass Pips 90 30"
130
- 20
2
152
Fiberglass Pipe ECC Rec. 36"x30"
65
- 10
1
76
Fiberglass Pipe 30" VO Spool
65
- 10
1
76
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 36'
65
- 10
1
76
*Holes in Pipe for Drains (V.E.p
44
- 10
-
54
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Conditions of the Contract
These Supplementary Conditions supplement the General and Supplementary
Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990
edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract
Documents executed under the Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Master
Agreement dated March 28, 2006.
SC-4 Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Reference Points
4.2.1.2.1. No drawing or physical condition in or relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures (except underground facilities referred to in paragraph 4.3) which
are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the
Contract Documents, except the following:
DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY ODOR CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS prepared by
MWH, Inc. dated March 2007.
SC-5 Bonds and Insurance
5.4.7.2 MWH, Inc, 1801 California St, 29th Floor, Denver, CO 80202
7/96 Section 00800 Page 1
:�
a
SECTION 00900
ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS, AND PAYMENT
00950 Contract Change Order
00960 Application for Payment
CHANGE ORDER NO.
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACTOR:
D 0. NUMBER:
NDOR NUMBER:
CHARGE NUMBER:
DESCRIPTION
DWRF Primary and Solids Odor Control
Hydro Construction, Inc.
In preparing change orders show inorder as separate numbered paragraphs the
following:
1. Reason for change. 2. Description of change.
3. Change in contract cost. 4. Change in contract time
(Attach additional sheets as required)
ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST
TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS
TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDERS
`TAL THIS CHANGE ORDER
rAL % OF ORIGINAL CONTRACT, THIS CO:
TOTAL % OF ORIGINAL CONTRACT, ALL CO'S:
ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $0.00
(Assuming all change orders approved)
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
(Contractor's Representative)
REVIEWED BY: DATE:
(Project Manager)
APPROVED BY: DATE:
(Senior Utilities Engineer)
APPROVED BY: DATE:
(Utilities General Manager)
APPROVED BY: DATE:
(Purchasing Agent Over $30,000)
CC: City Clerk Purchasing
Contractor Project File
Stormwater Finance Manager
NOTE: Signature of Contractor indicates
agreement herewithin, including any adjustment
in contract sum or contract time.
CHANGFRMALS
PROJECT: DWRF Primary and Solids Odor Control
Page 1 of 1
OWNER: City of Fort Collins Utilities CONTRACTOR: Hydro Construction, Inc.
APPLICATION NUMBER:
700 Wood Street 301 East Lincoln Ave
APPLICATION DATE:
Fort Collins, CO 80522 Fort Collins, CO 80524
PERIOD BEGINNING:
ENGINEER: CH2M Hill, Inc.
PERIOD ENDING:
P.O Box 241325
Denver, CO 80224
PROJECT NUMBER:
CHANGE ORDERS:
PAY APPLICATION:
RETAINAGE:
NUMBER DATE AMOUNT
Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with the Contract.
The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows.
Original Contract Amount:
Net Change by Change Order:
Retainage to Date:
Revised Current Contract Amount:
Retainage Previous:
Change In Retainage:
Total Work Completed to Date:
Total Change Order Work to Date:
Total Stored to Date:
Total Completed and Stored Materials to Date:
Less Previous Payment:
Amount due this Pay Application (before retainage):
Less Retainage:
Net Charge by Change Order: $ -
AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION:
Change Order %: 0.00%
CERTIFICATION:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with
the WORK have been satisfied as required in paragraph 14.3 of the General Conditions of the Contract.
The above Amount Due this Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR's Project Manager.
Date: By:
Jim Eurich
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager.
Date: By:
-
Lincoln Mueller, Jr. PT
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER.
Date: By:
Owen Randall, P.E.
City Of Fort Collins
Page 1 of 4
Pay Request
Period Ending:
Item #
Description
Quantit
UOM
Contract
Summary
This Period
Previous
Total
to Date
Cost
Remaining
Percent
Complete
Unit Price
Total
Quantity
Total
Quantity
Total
Quantity
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
18a
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25a
26
27
28
Combined
Total Contract Amount
Total This Period
Previous Billings
Total Completed to Date
Balance Remaining —
Percent Complete
Crosscheck
Original Contract Amount
Change Orders To Date (see attached)
Adjusted Contract Amount
Total Completed to Date
Total Materials Remaining @ Site
Total Change Order Work to Date (see attached)
Value of Work in Place
Percent Complete including Stored Materials
Less Retention Q 10% up to 50% complete, 5% beyond 50% of Adjusted Contract
Total to Date Less Retention
Less Previous Billings
Total Due
0
Page 2 of 4
1007
Change
Order #
Description
Quantity
UOM
Change Order Summa
This
Period
Previous
Total to Date
cost
Remaining
Percent
Complete
Unit Price
Total Amount
Quantity
I Amount
Quantity
Amount
Quantity
I Amount
1
Total Amount of Change Orders $ -
Total This Period
Previous Billings
I VI I ....pm,ov w vme
oaiance rcemaming
rWG FIL l UIIIPAele
Page 3 of 4
,
����
�
7�.�rl.
��7 f�N.u�GZfi
G�7 tub
L'gII'L7 �
�'�Trrr� �.u`'L•^IIi
C��L7 tub
[!� tu' �
Total Materials Procured as Stored Materials
Materials Installed This Penod — — j
Materials Installed Previous I
Total Materials Remaining @ Site
Page 4 of 4
Section
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pages
01010 Summary of Work ............................................... ............................... 01010-1 - 01010-
01070 Abbreviations of Institutions ........... ......... ............ ............... .......... ..... .01070-1 - 01070-
01090 Reference Standards........................................................................
01090-1 - 01090-
01300 Contractor Submittals........................................................................01300-1
- 01300-
01530 Protection of Existing Facilities..........................................................01530-1
- 01530-
01560 Temporary Environmental Controls...................................................01560-1
- 01560-
01600 Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.............................01600-1
- 01600-
01640 Demolition and Reconstruction..........................................................01640-1
- 01640-
01655 Gravity Pipeline Testing.....................................................................
01655-1 - 01655-
01656 Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection .............................................
01656-1 - 01656-
01660 Startup..............................................................................................
01660-1 - 01660-
01700 Project Closeout................................................................................01700-1
- 01700-
6
4
2
8
4
2
4
8
6
4
6
2
MWH-4/5/2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ISSUED FOR BIDDING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
No Text
l
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 5
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
LocNitin Auerit6y� 6arwiPUeli'.:LfKKrKMeinFMitiiaildAntdlutiF
Gen. Cond.
unassigned
As Built Drawings & Records
0
0
-
-
500
500
Survey & Layouts
0
0
2,000
500
260
2,750
Project Photos
0
0
-
-
300
300
Project Signs
300
0
-
50
500
650
Project Manager
62,400
-
-
13,000
2,600
78,000
Project Engineer
44.200
-
-
3,900
-
48,100
General Superintendent
57,200
-
-
13,000
2,600
72,800
FRP Site Visit
-
0
-
-
2,000
2,000
Office Trailer
-
-
-
2,400
-
2AW
Postage & Courier Services
-
0
-
-
1,200
1,200
Internet Charges
-
0
-
-
640
840
Temporary Toilets
-
0
-
1,440
-
1.440
Safety Officer
0
-
1,820
-
-
1,820
Safety Equipment
-
-
-
1,000
-
1,000
Temporary Fences
-
-
8
-
750
758
Weeldy Owing
2,600
0
-
-
1.300
3,000
Dump Fees LS
-
-
1.500
1,500
Office Equipment
-
0
-
-
500
500
Misc. Tools
-
-
-
7,000
7.000
Start -Up
2,500
250
260
3,000
Winter Conditions
1,000
0
-
500
2,800
4,300
Pipe Detail
-
-
4,500
-
-
4,600
OR Load Misc Deliveries
500
- -
-
500
250
12W
Site Storage - Open Field
-
-
-
1.300
1,300
Hydraulic Crane 18 ton
0
-
-
23,700
900
24.600
Cat BaddoelLoader 426
0
-
-
25,010
226
26,235
Slit Fence
360
0
-
250
1,250
1,860
Erosion Control Monitoring
936
0
-
-
500
1,436
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The WORK to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing plant, tools,
equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles, and furnishing all labor,
transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications,
and performing all work or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in
strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The WORK shall be complete, and all
work, materials, and services not expressly indicated or called for in the Contract
Documents that may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the
WORK in good faith, shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as though originally so
indicated, at no increase in cost to the OWNER.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The WORK of this Contract comprises the treatment of foul air from the Drake Water
Reclamation Facility (DWRF) in organic biofilters. Three biofilter cells will treat air from
the Preliminary/Primary areas at DWRF. This area includes the Headworks Screening
Storage Room, Headworks Bar Screen Room, Headworks Screw Pumps and Metering
Vault, Grit Chambers, and Primary Clarifiers. For the areas that are currently open to the
atmosphere (Primary Clarifiers, Metering Vault, and Screw Pump Wetwell), new covers
will be added. From all of these enclosed spaces, the air will be transported via two fans
through new and existing odor control ductwork to the new odor control biofilters.
Two biofilter cells will treat air from the Solids area at DWRF. This area includes the
Sludge Holding Tank, Centrate Tank, Dewatering Building and Truck Bay, North
Process Train (NPT) Splitter Box, NPT Screw Pumps, and the Dissolved Air
Floatation Thickener (DAFT). New covers will be added to the Centrate Tank, NPT
Splitter Box, and NPT Screw Pumps. From the enclosed spaces, the air will be
transported via two fans through new foul air ductwork to the new odor control
biofilters.
2. All of the biofilters are composed of concrete tanks with an HDPE air plenum and a
mixture of wood chips and compost. The air will flow from the bottom of the tank,
through the air plenum and through the bed of media where microorganisms within
the compost will treat the air to achieve a finished air quality of less than 200
Dilutions/Threshold.
B. The WORK is located at the Drake Water Reclamation Facility at 3036 Environmental
Drive, Fort Collins, Colorado.
1.3 CONTRACT METHOD
A. The WORK hereunder will be constructed under a single lump sum contract.
1.4 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Where two or more contracts are being performed at one time on the same Site or
adjacent land in such manner that work under one contract may interfere with work
under another, the OWNER will determine the sequence and order of the Work in either
or both contracts. When the Site of one contract is the necessary or convenient means
MWH-4/5/2007 SUMMARY OF WORK
ISSUED FOR BIDDING (R1) PAGE 01010-1
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
of access for performance of work under another, the OWNER may grant privilege of
access or other reasonable privilege to the contractor so desiring, to the extent, amount,
and in manner and at time that the OWNER may determine. No OWNER determination
of method or time or sequence or order of the work or access privilege shall be the basis
for a claim for delay or damage except under provisions of the General Conditions for
temporary suspensions of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations so
as to cause a minimum of interference with the work of such other contractors, and shall
cooperate fully with such contractors to allow continued safe access to their respective
portions of the Site, as required to perform work under their respective contracts.
B. Interference With Work On Utilities: The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with all
utility forces of the OWNER or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in the
relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities that interfere with the
progress of the WORK, and shall schedule the WORK so as to minimize interference
with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities.
1.5 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the fact that there shall be close
coordination with the OWNER in accommodating interruption in process flow, and the
CONTRACTOR shall so schedule its construction operations that no interference with
the operation of the plant will occur during this critical period.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the current air flow rate in classified areas
(Headworks Building and Dewatering Building) until the new system is able to provide
the required minimum of 12 air changes per hour.
1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE
A. The CONTRACTOR's use of the Site shall be limited to its construction operations,
including on -Site storage of materials, on -Site fabrication facilities, and field offices.
1.7 OUTAGE PLAN AND REQUESTS
A. Unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise, the CONTRACTOR shall not
remove from service, de -energize, or modify settings for any existing operating tank
pipeline, valve, channel, equipment, structure, road, or any other facility without
permission from the ENGINEER.
1. Outages shall be coordinated with the OWNER.
B. Where the WORK requires facility modifications or new facility construction, and
connection of new facilities to existing facilities, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a
detailed outage plan and schedule for the ENGINEER'S approval a minimum of 2 weeks
in advance of the time that such outage is planned.
C. A completed System Outage Request form (blank furnished by the ENGINEER) shall
accompany each outage plan. The outage plans shall be coordinated with the
construction schedule and shall meet the restrictions and conditions of the Contract
Documents. The outage plan shall describe the CONTRACTOR's method for preventing
bypassing of other treatment units; the length of time required to complete said
operation; any necessary temporary power, controls, instrumentation or alarms required
to maintain control, monitoring, and alarms for the treatment plant processes; and the
manpower, plant, and equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR for proper operation
MWH-4/5/2007 SUMMARY OF WORK
ISSUED FOR BIDDING (R1) PAGE 01010-2
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
of associated treatment units. All costs for preparing and implementing the outage plans
shall be at no increase in cost to the OWNER.
D. The ENGINEER shall be notified in writing at least one week in advance of the required
outage if the schedule for performing the work has changed or if revisions to the outage
plan are required.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide written confirmation of the shutdown date and time 2
working days prior to the actual shutdown.
1.8 OWNER USE OF THE SITE
A. The OWNER may utilize all or part of the existing Site and facilities to conduct OWNER's
normal operations. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate and coordinate with the
OWNER to facilitate the OWNER's operations and to minimize interference with the
CONTRACTOR's operations at the same time. In any event, the OWNER shall be
allowed access to the Site during the period of construction.
1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Progress Meetings:
The ENGINEER will schedule and hold regular on -Site progress meetings at least
biweekly and at other times as requested by CONTRACTOR or as required by
progress of the WORK. The CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and all subcontractors
active on the Site shall attend each meeting. CONTRACTOR may at its discretion
request attendance by representatives of its suppliers, manufacturers, and other
subcontractors.
2. The ENGINEER will preside at the progress meetings and will arrange for keeping
and distributing the minutes. The purpose of the meetings is to review the progress
of the WORK, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and
resolve other problems which may develop. During each meeting, the
CONTRACTOR shall present any issues that may impact its progress with a view to
resolve these issues expeditiously.
1.10 Agreed Modifications to Base Specifications
A. The base set of specifications provided by the Engineer has been reviewed by the
Engineer, Owner, and Contractor and the following modifications shall be in force
during this Project:
Section
Paragraph
Comment/Change
01010
1.1.A
Delete last sentence
01010
1.3.A
Add to the end of the sentence the following words: "under
guaranteed maximum rice"
01010
1.7.A.1
Add to the end of the sentence the following words: "during
construction progress meetings"
01010
1.7.13 — E
Delete subsections B, C, D, and E
01300
1.4.17
Second sentence should read: "Except where indicated otherwise,
manuals shall be submitted for review in draft form a minimum of
14 Days prior to the start of performance testing for each piece of
equipment."
MWH-4/5/2007 SUMMARY OF WORK
ISSUED FOR BIDDING (R1) PAGE 01010-3
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
01530
1.5.A
First sentence should begin, "Lawn or landscaped areas outside of
the work zone damaged during construction shall."
01600
1.5.E — E
Delete existing text for subsections B, C, D, and E and add: 'B.
CONTRACTOR to store materials appropriately."
01600
1.7.A
Delete "subject to the following requirements:" from the last
sentence in the paragraph.
01600
1.7.A.1 — 6
Delete subsections 1 through 6
01600
1.7.13 — D
Delete subsections B through D
01655
2.1
Fort Collins Utilities does not require a mandrel test. Section 2.1 is
not applicable.
01655
1.7.3.2.E
Fort Collins Utilities does not require a mandrel test.
01660
1.3.A
Replace "Not less than 60 Days prior to startup" and replace with "In
an agreed upon timeframe prior to startup"
01660
3.3.A.2
Add "c. Related product (e.g. polymer, magnesium hydroxide, or
ferric)"
01660
3.3.E
Sentence should read "The CONTRACTOR shall maintain as
appropriate for the project the following during testing and startup
and submit originals to the ENGINEER."
01660
3.4.0
In the first sentence, replace "demonstrate" with "assist the OWNER
with"
01660
3.5.A
The sentence should be revised to read "The CONTRACTOR shall
assist the OWNER in start up of the plant and operation of it without
malfunction during the commissioning phase"
01660
3.5.E — F
Delete subsections B, C, D, E, and F
01700
1.3
Delete subsection 1.3. It is not applicable to this project.
01700
1.4.A.6
Replace "Bonds" with 'Warranty"
01700
1.6
Delete subsection 1.6
02200
3.5
Delete subsection 3.5
02490
2.1.E.1
Add to end of the sentence "where vehicular traffic is expected"
02591
1.4.13
Fort Collins Utilities does not require a mandrel test.
02591
1.4.E
Change 36-inches to 30-inches
02591
2.2.0
Add the following sentence before the last sentence "Gasket
material shall be suitable for the product being delivered"
02595
2.1.B
Delete subsection B.
03310
2.1.A
Replace "new material" with "in good condition"
MWH-4/5/2007 SUMMARY OF WORK
ISSUED FOR BIDDING (R1) PAGE 01010-4
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
04255
1.3.13
Add the following as subsection 1.3.13.3:
3. Certifications
a. Certification of installer qualifications demonstrating
compliance with the qualifications requirements
indicated. Include a list of 5 similar completed
projects with addresses of the project location, date of
project completion, and contact information of the
consultant firm of record, general contractor, and
owner.
b. Certification from the masonry veneer unit
manufacturer certifying that the units conform to
ASTM C 90.
1) For each type of masonry veneer unit, certified
preconstruction test reports, including
compressive strength, absorption, dimensional
analysis, unit weight, and moisture content in
accordance with ASTM C 140.
c. Certification from the mortar manufacturer certifying
that the mortar conforms to the property specifications
of ASTM C 270. Certification shall indicate the
proposed mortar proportions to be used.
d. Certified mortar test results before construction in
accordance with ASTM C 270
04255
1.3.0
Delete subsection C.
04255
2.7.A.2
For this project, galvanized steel may be used instead of Type 304
stainless steel.
04255
2.7.B.1.a
For this project, galvanized steel may be used instead of Type 304
stainless steel.
04255
2.7.B.2.a
For this project, galvanized steel may be used instead of Type 304
stainless steel.
06610
1.1.A
Delete "design" from the first sentence.
06610
1.2.13
Delete subsection B
06610
1.2.D
Delete subsection D
07190
1.3.E
Delete subsection E
07190
1.4.0
Delete subsection C
07920
1.3.D
First sentence should begin, "Certificates: If requested by the
ENGINEER in the event of material failure, certificates from..."
15006
1.1.0
Delete subsection C
15200
3.1.0
Delete the last sentence.
15215
1.2.A
Delete subsection A. It is not applicable to this project.
15215
3.2
Delete subsection 3.2
15721
3.2.A
Delete subsection A
15721
3.2.13
Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: "Prior to
installation of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall schedule
and installation training program to be provided by the
Manufacturer's Representative."
15802
1.4.A
TAB coordination meeting will take place during construction
progress meetings,
15802
1.6.13.2
AABC should be replaced with CTAB
15802
3.1.D
Delete "and at no additional cost to the Owner"
15802
3.4.A — B
Delete subsections A and B
15811
1.3.B.2
Delete subsection 2
MWH-4/5/2007 SUMMARY OF WORK
ISSUED FOR BIDDING (R1) PAGE 01010-5
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
15812 11.2.13 1 Delete subsection B
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 SUMMARY OF WORK
ISSUED FOR BIDDING (R1) PAGE 01010-6
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01070 -ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Wherever in these Specifications references are made to the standards, specifications,
or other published data of the various international, national, regional, or local
organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation
only. As a guide to the user of the Specifications, the following acronyms or
abbreviations which may appear shall have the meanings indicated herein.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
AA Aluminum Association
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturer's Association — ABMA
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
ACI American Concrete Institute
AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association
AGA American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
AHA American Hardboard Association
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
Al The Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association
AIIM Association for Information and Image Management
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc
ANS American Nuclear Society
ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc.
APA The Engineered Wood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
APWA American Public Works Association
ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASA Acoustical Society of America
ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT American Society of Nondestructive Testing
ASQ American Society for Quality
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWCI American Wire Cloth Institute
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
MWH-4/5/2007 ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01070-1
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BBC Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators
International
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association
CABO Council of American Building Officials
CDA Copper Development Association
CEMA Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute
CLPCA California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association
CMAA A division/section of the Material Handling Industry of America
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DCDMA Diamond Core Drilling Manufacturers Association
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
El Energy Institute
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ETL Electrical Test Laboratories
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FCI Fluid Controls Institute
FEMA Federal Emergency Management Association
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FM Factory Mutual System
FPL Forest Products Laboratory
HI Hydronics Institute, Hydraulic Institute
HSWA Federal Hazardous and Solid Waste Amendments
IAPMO Intemational Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
ICBO Intemational Conference of Building Officials
IBC Intemational Building Code
ICC Intemational Code Council
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
ICCEC Electrical Code
ICC-ES International Code Council Evaluation Service
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IFC International Fire Code
IFGC Intemational Fuel Gas Code
IMC Intemational Mechanical Code
IME Institute of Makers of Explosives
IPC Intemational Plumbing Code, Association Connecting Electronic Industries
IRC Intemational Residential Code
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISDI Insulated Steel Door Institute
ISEA Industrial Safety Equipment Association
ISO Intemational Organization for Standardization
ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers
ITU-T Telecommunications Standardization Sector of the International
Telecommunications Union
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
LRQA Lloyd's Register Quality Assurance
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MWH-4/5/2007 ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01070-2
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
MIL
Military Standards (DoD)
MPTA
Mechanical Power Transmission Association
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's
NACE
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
DASMA
Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International
NAPF
National Association of Pipe Fabricators
NBBPVI
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
NCCLS
National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC
National Electrical Code
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NETA
International Electrical Testing Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association or National Fluid Power Association
NISO
National Information Standards Organization
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
NLGI
National Lubricating Grease Institute
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
NSF
National Sanitation Foundation
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA
Portland Cement Association
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PPI
Plastic Pipe Institute
RCRA
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service, a division of the California Redwood
Association, CRA
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association
RVIA
Recreational Vehicle Industry Association
RWMA
Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers
SDI
Steel Door Institute, Steel Deck Institute
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
SPFA
Steel Plate Fabricator's Association
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SSBC
Southern Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress
SSPC
Society for Protective Coating
SSPWC
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
STLE
Society of Tribologists and Lubricating Engineers
TAPPI
Technical Association of the Worldwide Pulp, Paper, and Converting
Industry
TFI
The Fertilizer Institute
TIA
Telecommunications Industries Association
TPI
Truss Plate Institute
UBC
Uniform Building Code
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WDMA
National Window and Door Manufacturers Association
WEF
Water Environment Federation
WI
Woodwork Institute
WRI
Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc.
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
MWH-4/5/2007
ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAGE 01070-3
170635
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
170635
- END OF SECTION -
ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
PAGE 01070-4
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Headworks
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 6
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
020• Misc Site Demolition
Demo Fans
400
- -
40
40
480
Demo Duct
288
- -
280
5
573
Care Roof
216
- -
210
426
Drill Holes - Screw Pumps
288
- -
260
-
568
Temp Ventilation
900
-
8,125
1,200
10.225
Demo Handrail
144
- _
140
-
284
X-Ray
0
- 3,000
-
3.000
unassigned
•
Material Testing -Pipe
400
- 6,220
100
50
6,770
Modify Handrel
120
258 -
50
-
428
FRP Covers
1,085
4,827 -
107
53
6,051
Patch Membrane Small Openings
-
- 4,000
-
-
4,000
Pipe Support 36" Fixed Wall
130
2,700 -
70
4
2.904
Pipe Support 36" Slip Roof
195
4,050 -
106
5
4,356
Pipe Support 36" Fixed Roof
260
5,401 -
140
7
5,806
Pipe Support 14" Fined
20
461 -
5
1
487
Pipe Support 14" Slip
20
461 -
5
1
487
Pipe Support 20" Fixed
40
461 -
5
1
507
Pipe Support 20" Sup
40
461 -
5
1
507
Pipe Support 12" Fixed
200
2.303 -
25
6
2,534
Pipe Support 12" Stip
100
2,303 -
25
6
2.434
Pipe Support 6" Fixed
160
3,685 -
40
10
3,895
Pipe Support 14" Fixed
220
5,067 -
55
13
5,355
Pipe Support 20" Fixed
200
2,303 -
25
6
2.534
Btly lever Dampner 36"
34
10
3
47
Btly Lever Dampner 12"
14
-
5
1
20
Btly Lever Dampner 6"
56
-
20
6
82
Btfy Lever Dampner 16'
96
-
20
6
122
Btly Lever Dampner 14"
96
-
20
6
122
Exp Joint 20'
130
-
20
6
156
Exp Joint 36"'
195
-
30
8
233
Exp Joint 14'
78
-
15
4
98
Exp Joint 12"
78
-
15
4
98
Exp Joint 6"
105
-
20
6
130
Exp Joint 20"
65
-
5
1
71
"Exp Joint Quote (V.E.)'
11,248 -
-
-
11,248
Fiberglass Pipe 14"
2,093
0 -
180
63
2,336
Fiberglass Pipe 12"
1,814
0 -
156
55
2,024
Fiberglass Pipe 6"
837
0 -
72
25
934
Fiberglass Pipe 14'
1,674
-
144
50
1,868
Fiberglass Pipe 16"
419
-
36
13
467
Fiberglass Pipe 20"
556
84
8
650
Fiberglass Pipe 20"
1,302
-
196
20
1,518
'Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Pipe (V.E.)"
102,864 -
-
-
102,864
Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Flange Pks
0
72,018 -
-
-
72,018
Fiberglass Pipe 36'
2,744
-
590
44
3,378
Fiberglass Pipe 36" Wye
140
-
30
2
172
Fiberglass Pipe 36' Tea
47
-
10
1
57
Fiberglass Transion Filling
31
-
10
1
42
Fiberglass Pipe 45 Ella 2D'
65
-
5
1
71
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ella 12"
65
-
5
1
71
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Etia 12"
65
-
5
1
71
Fiberglass Pipe Tee 20'
65
-
5
1
71
Fiberglass Pipe 90 20"
130
-
10
1
142
Fiberglass Pipe Reducer 20' x 16"
130
-
10
1
142
Fiberglass Pipe 45 Ells 39"
130
-
20
2
152
SECTION 01090 - REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Titles and subtitles accompanying specification
sections and paragraphs are for convenience and reference only and do not form a part
of the Specifications.
B. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to
published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood
that wherever no date is indicated, only the latest specifications, standards, or
requirements of the respective issuing agencies that have been published as of the date
that the Contract is advertised for Bids shall apply; except to the extent that said
standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or
governing codes. No requirements set forth in the Specifications or shown on the
Drawings will be waived because of any provision of or omission from said standards or
requirements.
C. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or implies)
that specific WORK is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities who must be
engaged to perform that WORK. Such assignments shall be recognized as special
requirements over which the CONTRACTOR has no choice or option. These
requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building
codes and similar regulations governing the WORK; also they are not intended to
interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such
assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of
WORK is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations.
Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of Contract
requirements remains with the CONTRACTOR.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the WORK in accordance with the Contract
Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and
specifications.
B. References to 'Building Code" or "Uniform Building Code" shall mean Uniform Building
Code of the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). Similarly, references
to "Mechanical Code" or "Uniform Mechanical Code," "Plumbing Code" or "Uniform
Plumbing Code," "Fire Code" or "Uniform Fire Code," shall mean Uniform Mechanical
Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Fire Code of the International Association of
Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) as amended by the local jurisdiction.
"Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall mean the National Electric Code
of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The latest edition of the codes as
approved by the Municipal Code and used by the local agency as of the date that the
WORK is advertised for Bids shall apply to the WORK herein, including all addenda,
modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto.
C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and the other Contract
Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought
to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification and direction prior to ordering or
MWH-4/5/2007 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION • PAGE 01090-1
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
providing any materials or furnishing labor. The CONTRACTOR shall bid for the most
stringent requirements.
D. References to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926,
Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA),
including all changes and amendments thereto.
E. References to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety
and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and
amendments thereto.
1.3 REGULATIONS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible that all WORK included in the Contract
Documents, regardless if indicated or not, shall comply with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA,
NFPA, and any other federal, state, and local regulations governing the storage and
conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products.
B. Where no specific regulations exist and the OWNER has not waived the requirement in
writing, chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping and storage in underground
locations shall be double containment piping and tanks or be installed in separate
concrete trenches and vaults with an approved lining that cannot be penetrated by the
chemicals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01090-2
170635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01300 - CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
PART1--GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Wherever submittals are required in the Contract Documents, submit them to the
ENGINEER.
B. Within 7 Days after the date of commencement as stated in the Notice to Proceed, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items for review:
1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitutes ("Or -
Equal") submittals listed in the Bid. The schedule of submittals shall be based on
CONTRACTOR's priority, planned construction sequence and schedule, long lead
items, and size of submittal package and allowance for resubmittals.
2. A list of permits and licenses the CONTRACTOR shall obtain, indicating the agency
required to grant the permit and the expected date of submittal for the permit and
required date for receipt of the permit.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Wherever called for in the Contract Documents or where required by the ENGINEER,
the CONTRACTOR shall furnish one copy plus one reproducible copy, of each Shop
Drawing submittal. Shop Drawings may include detail design calculations, shop -
prepared drawings, fabrication and installation drawings, erection drawings, lists, graphs,
catalog sheets, data sheets, and similar items. Whenever the CONTRACTOR is
required to submit design calculations as part of a submittal, such calculations shall bear
the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the appropriate discipline and in the
state wherein the project is located, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Shop Drawing submittals shall be accompanied by the ENGINEER's standard submittal
transmittal form. A reproducible copy is available from the ENGINEER. A submittal
without the form or where applicable items on the form are not completed will be
returned for resubmittal.
C. Organization:
1. A single submittal transmittal form shall be used for each technical specification
section or item or class of material or equipment for which a submittal is required. A
single submittal covering multiple sections will not be acceptable, unless the primary
specification references other sections for components. Example: if a pump section
references other sections for the motor, shop -applied protective coating, anchor
bolts, local control panel, and variable frequency drive, a single submittal would be
acceptable. A single submittal covering vertical turbine pumps and horizontal split
case pumps would not be acceptable.
2. On the transmittal form, index the components of the submittal and insert tabs in the
submittal to match the components. Relate the submittal components to
specification paragraph and subparagraph, Drawing number, detail number,
schedule title, room number, or building name, as applicable.
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3. Unless indicated otherwise, terminology and equipment names and numbers used
in submittals shall match those used in the Contract Documents.
D. Format:
1. When possible, the CONTRACTOR shall provide electronic submittals posted to the
team's ProjectWise folder. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER when
the submittal is posted and ready for review.
2. If the submittal can not be posted electronically, the minimum sheet size shall be 8'/z
inches by 11-inches. Maximum sheet size shall be 24=inches by 36-inches. Every
page in a submittal shall be numbered in sequence. Each copy of a submittal shall
be collated and stapled or bound, as appropriate. The ENGINEER will not collate
sheets or copies.
3. Where product data from a manufacturer is submitted, clearly mark the proposed
model proposed, with complete pertinent data capacities, dimensions, clearances,
diagrams, controls, connections, anchorage, and supports. Sufficient level of detail
shall be presented for assessment of compliance with the Contract Documents.
4. Each submittal shall be assigned a unique number. Submittals shall be numbered
sequentially, and the submittal numbers shall be clearly noted on the transmittal.
Original submittals shall be assigned a numeric submittal number followed by a
decimal point and a numeric digit to distinguish between the original submittal and
each resubmittal. For example, if submittal 25.1 requires a resubmittal, the first
resubmittal will bear the designation "25.2" and the second resubmittal will bear the
designation "25.3" and so on.
E. Disorganized submittals that do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents
will be returned without review.
F. Except as may otherwise be indicated, the ENGINEER will return prints of each
submittal to the CONTRACTOR with comments noted thereon, within 14 Days following
receipt by the ENGINEER. It is considered reasonable that the CONTRACTOR will
make a complete and acceptable submittal to the ENGINEER by the first resubmittal on
an item. The OWNER reserves the right to withhold monies due to the CONTRACTOR
to cover additional costs of the ENGINEER's review beyond the first resubmittal. The
ENGINEER'S maximum review period for each submittal or resubmittal will be 14 Days.
Thus, for a submittal that requires 2 resubmittals before it is complete, the maximum
review period could be 42 Days.
G. If a submittal is returned to the CONTRACTOR marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN,"
formal revision and resubmission will not be required.
H. If a submittal is returned marked MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," CONTRACTOR
shall make the corrections on the submittal, but formal revision and resubmission will not
be required.
I. If a submittal is returned marked "AMEND -RESUBMIT," the CONTRACTOR shall revise
it and shall resubmit the required number of copies. Resubmittal of portions of multi -
page or multi -drawing submittals will not be allowed. For example, if a Shop Drawing
submittal consisting of 10 drawings contains one drawing noted as "AMEND -
RESUBMIT," the submittal as a whole is deemed "AMEND -RESUBMIT," and 10
drawings are required to be resubmitted.
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
J. If a submittal is returned marked "REJECTED -RESUBMIT," it shall mean either that the
proposed material or product does not satisfy the specification, the submittal is so
incomplete that it cannot be reviewed.
K. Resubmittal of rejected portions of a previous submittal will not be allowed. Every
change from a submittal to a resubmittal or from a resubmittal to a subsequent
resubmittal shall be identified and flagged on the resubmittal.
L. Fabrication of an item may commence only after the ENGINEER has reviewed the
pertinent submittals and returned copies to the CONTRACTOR marked either "NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." Corrections indicated on
submittals shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents and shall not be taken as changes to the contract requirements.
M. Submittals shall be carefully reviewed by an authorized representative of the
CONTRACTOR prior to submission to the ENGINEER. Each submittal shall be dated
and signed by the CONTRACTOR as being correct and in strict conformance with the
Contract Documents. In the case of Shop Drawings, each sheet shall be so dated and
signed. Any deviations from the Contract Documents shall be noted on the transmittal
sheet. The ENGINEER will only review submittals that have been so verified by the
CONTRACTOR. Non -verified submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR without
action taken by the ENGINEER, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
N. Corrections or comments made on the CONTRACTOR's Shop Drawings during review
do not relieve the CONTRACTOR from compliance with Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Review is for conformance to the design concept and general compliance
with the Contract Documents only. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for confirming and
correlating quantities and dimensions, fabrication processes and techniques,
coordinating WORK with the trades, and satisfactory and safe performance of the
WORK.
1.3 SAMPLES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the number of samples indicated by the Specifications.
If the number is not indicated, submit not less than 3 samples. Where the amount of
each sample is not indicated, submit such amount as necessary for proper examination
and testing by the methods indicated.
B. Samples shall be individually and indelibly labeled or tagged, indicating the salient
physical characteristics and manufacturer's name. Upon acceptance by the ENGINEER,
one set of the samples will be stamped and dated by the ENGINEER and returned to the
CONTRACTOR, one set of samples will be retained by the ENGINEER, and one set
shall remain at the Site in the OWNER's office until completion of the WORK.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, the OWNER's Representative will select colors and textures
from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or equipment
lines. If certain samples represent non-standard colors, materials, products, or
equipment lines requiring an increase in Contract Times or Price, the CONTRACTOR
shall clearly state so on the transmittal page of the submittal.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule sample submittals such that:
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
I . Sample submittals for color and texture selection are complete so the OWNER's
Representative has 14 Days to assemble color panels and select color and texture
dependent products and materials without delay to the construction schedule, and
2. After the OWNER's Representative selects colors and textures, the CONTRACTOR
has sufficient time to provide the products or materials without delay to the
construction schedule. The Contract Times will not be extended for the
CONTRACTOR's failure to allow enough review and approval or selection time,
failure to submit complete samples requiring color or texture selection, or failure to
submit complete or approvable samples.
1.4 TECHNICAL MANUAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit technical operation and maintenance information for
each item of mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment in an organized
manner in the Technical Manual. It shall be written so that it can be used and
understood by the OWNER's operation and maintenance staff.
B. The Technical Manual shall be subdivided first by specification section number; second,
by equipment item; and last, by "Category." The following "Categories" shall be
addressed (as applicable):
1. Category 1 - Equipment Summary:
a. Summary: A table shall indicate the equipment name, equipment number, and
process area in which the equipment is installed.
2. Category 2 -"Operational Procedures:
a. Procedures: Manufacturer -recommended procedures on the following shall be
included in Part 2:
1) Installation
2) Adjustment
3) Startup
4) Location of controls, special tools, equipment required, or related
instrumentation needed for operation
5)
Operation procedures
6)
Load changes
7)
Calibration
8)
Shutdown
9)
Troubleshooting
10)
Disassembly
11)
Reassembly
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
12) Realignment
13) Testing to determine performance efficiency
14) Tabulation of proper settings for pressure relief valves, low and high
pressure switches, and other protection devices
15) List of all electrical relay settings including alarm and contact settings
3. Category 3 - Preventive Maintenance Procedures:
a. Procedures: Preventive maintenance procedures shall include manufacturer -
recommended procedures to be performed on a periodic basis, both by
removing and replacing the equipment or component, and by maintaining the
equipment in place.
b. Schedules: Recommended frequency of preventive maintenance procedures
shall be included. Lubrication schedules, including lubricant SAE grade, type,
and temperature ranges, shall be covered.
4. Category 4 - Parts List:
a. Parts List: A complete parts list shall be furnished, including a generic
description and manufacturer's identification number for each part. Addresses
and telephone numbers of the nearest supplier and parts warehouse shall be
included.
b. Drawings: Cross -sectional or exploded view drawings shall accompany the
parts list. Part numbers shall appear on the drawings with arrows to the
corresponding part.
5. Category 5 - Wiring Diagrams:
a. Diagrams: Category 5 shall include complete internal and connection wiring
diagrams for electrical equipment items.
6. Category 6 - Shop Drawings:
a. Drawings: This category includes approved shop or fabrication drawings with
ENGINEER comments and corrections incorporated, complete with
dimensions.
7. Category 7 — Safety:
a. Procedures: This category describes the safety precautions to be taken when
operating and maintaining the equipment or working near it.
8. Category 8 - Documentation:
a. Equipment warranties, affidavits, certifications, calibrations, laboratory test
results, etc. required by the Technical Specifications shall be placed in this
category.
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
9. Category 9 — Spare Parts List:
a. Spare parts information for mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation
equipment. The spare parts list shall include those spare parts that each
manufacturer recommends be maintained by the OWNER in inventory.
b. Sources and Pricing: The spare parts list shall include a current list price of
each spare part. Each manufacturer or supplier shall indicate the name,
address, and telephone number of its nearest outlet of spare parts to assist the
OWNER in ordering.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall cross-reference spare parts lists to the equipment
numbers designated in the Contract Documents.
C. Format:
1. Each Technical Manual shall be bound in standard size 3 ring hardcover binders
labeled on the spine and cover with project name, OWNER's project number,
specification section number, equipment name, and equipment identification number
2. Each Binder shall contain its own detailed table of contents at the front, plus a
summary level table of contents information for the other binders in a multi -binder
set.
3. Documents in binders shall be 3 hole punched, no text shall be punched out, and
pages larger than 8'/2 by 11 shall be folded to 8'/z by 11.
4. Each final set of Technical Manuals shall include a CD with electronic files:
a. Project specific files created in Microsoft Office, AutoCad, Microstation, Adobe
Acrobat portable document format, or other software required by the OWNER.
b. Manufacturer literature in Adobe Acrobat portable document format.
D. Manuals shall be complete for each piece of equipment prior to final acceptance of the
equipment by the OWNER. Except where indicated otherwise, manuals shall be
submitted for review in final form a minimum of 30 Days prior to the start of performance
testing for each piece of equipment.
E. Review Process:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 3 draft Technical Manuals for each Specification
Section that requires a Manual. The ENGINEER will retain one copy, will forward
one copy to the OWNER, and will return one copy to the CONTRACTOR with
review comments.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall incorporate comments into the draft and submit 5
identical copies of the final Manual for acceptance.
3. Electronic copies will be accepted in lieu of copies during the review process,
however, the final manuals to be submitted to the OWNER need to be in a hard -
copy format.
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
F. Manuals shall be complete for each piece of equipment prior to final acceptance of the
equipment by the OWNER. Except where indicated otherwise, manuals shall be
submitted for review in final form a minimum of 30 Days prior to the start of performance
testing for each piece of equipment.
1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain one set of Drawings at the Site for the preparation of
record drawings. On these, it shall mark every project condition, location, configuration,
and any other change or deviation that may differ from the Contract Drawings at the time
of award, including buried or concealed construction and utility features that are revealed
during the course of construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the
horizontal and vertical location of buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated,
or that were not indicated on the Contract Drawings. Said record drawings shall be
supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or as CONTRACTOR is directed,
to fully indicate the WORK as actually constructed. These record drawings are the
CONTRACTOR's representation of as -built conditions. The drawings shall include
revisions made by addenda and change orders, and shall be maintained up-to-date
during the progress of the WORK. Red ink shall be used for alterations and notes. Notes
shall identify relevant Change Orders by number and date.
B. In the case of those drawings that depict the detail requirement for equipment to be
assembled and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and the like, the
record drawings shall be updated by indicating those portions superseded by change
order drawings or final Shop Drawings, and by including appropriate reference
information describing the change orders by number and the Shop Drawings by
manufacturer, drawing, and revision numbers.
C. Disorganized or incomplete record drawings will not be accepted. The CONTRACTOR
shall revise them and resubmit within 10 Days.
D. Record drawings shall be accessible to the ENGINEER during the construction period.
E. Final payment will not be acted upon until the record drawings have been completed and
delivered to the ENGINEER at the end of the project. Said up-to-date record drawings
shall be in the form of a set of prints with carefully plotted information overlaid.
F. Information submitted by the CONTRACTOR will be assumed to be correct, and the
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of such information.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01300-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 7
DWRF Odor Control 3/2212007 9:10 AN
Location - Auerriby Daeriplbn . Labor'Alidalit . Miih(a1 MN1,trit: Ylub AnaG'itE �l1gk
unassigned
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 14"
31
- 10
1 42
Fiberglass Pipe Tee 12"
62
- 20
3 85
Fiberglass Pipe Blind Flange 12"
16
- 5
1 21
Fiberglass Pipe Fig Adpt 6"
62
- 20
3 85
Fiberglass Pipe Tee 14"
62
20
3 85
Fiberglass Pipe 90 14'
62
- 20
3 85
Fiberglass Pipe 45 14'
47
- 15
2 64
Fiberglass Pipe Blind Flange 14"
31
- 10
1 42
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 20'
16
10
1 27
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 36"
65
- 10
1 76
SECTION 01530 - PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all existing utilities and improvements not designated
for removal and shall restore damaged or temporarily relocated utilities and
improvements to a condition equal to or better than prior to such damage or temporary
relocation, all in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT
A. General: All paved areas including asphaltic concrete berms cut or damaged during
construction shall be replaced with similar materials of equal thickness to match the
existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing requirements
have been called for in the Contract Documents. The pavement restoration requirement
to match existing sections shall apply to all components of existing sections, including
sub -base, base, and pavement. Pavements which are subject to partial removal shall be
neatly saw cut in straight lines.
B. Permanent Resurfacing: In order to obtain a satisfactory junction with adjacent
surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall saw cut back and trim the edge so as to provide a
clean, sound, vertical joint before permanent replacement of an excavated or damaged
portion of pavement. Damaged edges of pavement along excavations and elsewhere
shall be trimmed back by saw cutting in straight lines. All pavement restoration and other
facilities restoration shall be constructed to finish grades compatible with adjacent
undisturbed pavement.
1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS
A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall protect underground Utilities and other
improvements that may be impaired during construction operations, regardless of
whether or not the Utilities are indicated on the Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall take
all possible precautions for the protection of unforeseen utility lines to provide for
uninterrupted service and to provide such special protection as may be necessary.
B. Except where the Drawings indicate Utilities have been field located during design or
certain utility locations shall be exposed as part of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall
be responsible for exploratory excavations as it deems necessary to determine the exact
locations and depths of Utilities that may interfere with its work. When such exploratory
excavations show the utility location as shown on the Drawings to be in error, the
CONTRACTOR shall so notify the ENGINEER.
C. The number of exploratory excavations required shall be sufficient to determine the
alignment and grade of the utility.
D. Utilities to be Removed: Where the proper completion of the WORK requires the
temporary or permanent removal and/or relocation of an existing utility or other indicated
improvement, the CONTRACTOR shall remove and, without unnecessary delay,
temporarily replace or relocate such utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to
the ENGINEER and the facility owner. In all cases of such temporary removal or
relocation, restoration to the former location shall be accomplished by the
CONTRACTOR in a manner that will restore or replace the utility or improvement as
MWH-4/5/2007 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01530-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
nearly as possible to its former locations and to as good or better condition than found
prior to removal.
E. Underground Utilities Indicated: Utility lines that are indicated or the locations of which
are made known to the CONTRACTOR prior to excavation and that are to be retained,
and all utility lines that are constructed during excavation operations shall be protected
from damage during excavation and backfilling. If damaged, the utility lines shall be
immediately repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise repaired by
the owner of the damaged utility. If the owner of the damaged facility performs its own
repairs, the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse said owner for the costs of repair.
F. Underground Utilities Not Indicated: In the event that the CONTRACTOR damages
utility lines that are not indicated or the locations are not made known to the
CONTRACTOR prior to excavation, a verbal report of such damage shall be made
immediately to the ENGINEER followed by a prompt written report. The ENGINEER will
immediately notify the owner of the damaged utility. If the ENGINEER is not immediately
available, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the utility owner of the damage.
G. Costs of locating and repairing damage not due to failure of the CONTRACTOR to
exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not indicated
in the Contract Documents with reasonable accuracy, will be paid for as extra work in
accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. This includes equipment on
the project that was actually working on that portion of the WORK that was interrupted or
idled by removal or relocation of such utility facilities, and which was necessarily idled
during such work.
H. Approval of Repairs: All repairs to a damaged utility or improvement are subject to
inspection and approval by an authorized representative of the utility or improvement
owner before being concealed by backfill or other work.
I. Maintaining in Service: Unless indicated otherwise, oil and gasoline pipelines, power,
and telephone or the communication cable ducts, gas and water mains, irrigation lines,
sewer lines, storm drain lines, poles, and overhead power and communication wires and
cables encountered along the line of the WORK shall remain continuously in service
during all the operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to .
the ENGINEER are made with the owner of said pipelines, duct, main, irrigation line,
sewer, storm drain, pole, or wire or cable. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
and shall repair all damage due to its operations, and the provisions of this Section shall
not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not
discovered until after completion of the backfilling.
1.4 TREES OR SHRUBS WITHIN STREET RIGHTS -OF -WAY AND PROJECT LIMITS
A. General: Except where trees or shrubs are indicated to be removed, the
CONTRACTOR shall exercise all necessary precautions so as not to damage or destroy
any trees or shrubs, including those lying within street rights -of -way and project limits,
and shall not trim or remove any trees unless such trees have been approved for
trimming or removal by the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. Trees and shrubs which
are damaged during construction shall be trimmed or replaced by the CONTRACTOR or
a certified tree company under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or the OWNER.
Tree trimming and replacement shall be accomplished in accordance with the following
paragraphs.
MWH-4/5/2007 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01530-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Trimming: Symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or torn branches
left; clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Spikes shall not be used
for climbing live trees. Cuts over 1 Yz inches in diameter shall be coated with a tree paint
product that is waterproof, adhesive, and elastic, and free from kerosenes, coal tar,
creosote, or other material injurious to the life of the tree.
C. Replacement: The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the OWNER if any tree or
shrub is damaged by the CONTRACTOR's operations. If, in the opinion of the OWNER,
the damage is such that replacement is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall replace the
tree or shrub at its own expense. The tree or shrub shall be of a like size and variety as
the one damaged, or, if of a smaller size, the CONTRACTOR shall pay to the OWNER a
compensatory acceptable payment, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional agency
or OWNER. The size of the tree or shrub shall be not less than 1 inch in diameter, nor
less than 6 feet in height. Planting of replacement trees and shrubs shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of the nursery furnishing the plants.
1.5 LAWN AREAS
A. Lawn or landscaped areas damaged during construction shall be repaired to match the
pre -construction condition to the satisfaction of the land owner and the OWNER.
1.6 NOTIFICATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
A. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all
water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric
power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities;
and all roadway and state highway rights -of -way, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the
respective authorities representing the owners or agencies responsible for such facilities
not less than 3 days nor more than 7 days prior to excavation so that a representative of
said owners or agencies can be present during such work if they so desire.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01530-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01530-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 DUST ABATEMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall prevent its operation from producing dust in amounts
damaging to property, cultivated vegetation, or domestic animals, or causing a nuisance
to persons living in or occupying buildings in the vicinity of the Site. The CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible for any damage resulting from dust originating from its operations.
Dust abatement measures shall be continued until the CONTRACTOR is relieved of
further responsibility by the ENGINEER.
B. Storage Piles: Enclose, cover, water (as needed), or apply non -toxic soil binders
according to manufacturer's specifications on material piles (i.e., gravel, sand, dirt) with a
silt content of 5 percent or greater.
C. Active Areas of Site: Water active construction areas and unpaved roads as needed
and as requested by ENGINEER.
D. Inactive Areas of Site: Apply non -toxic soil stabilizers according to manufacturer's
specifications to inactive construction areas, or water as needed to maintain adequate
dust control.
E. Vehicle Loads: Cover or maintain at least 2-feet of freeboard vertical distance between
the top of the load and the top of the trailer sides on trucks hauling dirt, sand, soil, or
other loose materials off of the Site.
F. Roads: When there is visible track -out onto a paved public road, install wheel washers
where the vehicles exit and enter onto the paved roads and wash the undercarriage of
trucks and any other equipment leaving the Site on each trip. Sweep the paved street at
the end of each shift with a Mobil Athey or similar water spray pick-up broom -type street
sweeper as necessary or as dieected.
G. Vehicle Speeds: If watering of unpaved roads is not sufficient to control dust, reduce
vehicle speeds to 15 mph or less on such roads.
1.2 SEDIMENTATION ABATEMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of
spoil, silt, and waste materials in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local
rules and regulations and the Contract Documents.
B. Install and maintain erosion and sediment control measures, such as swales, grade
stabilization structures, berms, dikes, waterways, filter fabric fences, and sediment
basins.
C. Filter fabric barrier systems, if used, shall be installed in such a manner that surface
runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be
retained and accumulated.
D. Remove and dispose of sediment deposits at the designated spoil area. If a spoil area is
not indicated, dispose of sediment off -Site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or
MWH-4/5/2007 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01560-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
floodplain. Sediment to be placed at the spoil area should be spread evenly, compacted,
and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way.
E. Maintain erosion and sediment control measures until final acceptance or until requested
by the ENGINEER to remove it.
1.3 RUBBISH CONTROL
A. During the progress of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and other
areas for which it is responsible in a neat and clean condition and free from any
accumulation of rubbish. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of rubbish and waste
materials of any nature and shall establish regular intervals of collection and disposal of
such materials and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall also keep its haul roads free from
dirt, rubbish, and unnecessary obstructions resulting from its operations. Disposal of
rubbish and surplus materials shall be off the Site in accordance with local codes and
ordinances governing locations and methods of disposal and in conformance with
applicable safety laws and the particular requirements of Part 1926 of the OSHA Safety
and Health Standards for Construction.
1.4 SANITATION
A. Toilet Facilities: Fixed or portable chemical toilets shall be provided wherever needed
for the use of employees. Toilets shall conform to the requirements of Part 1926 of the
OSHA Standards for Construction.
B. Sanitary and Other Organic Wastes: The CONTRACTOR shall establish a regular
daily collection of sanitary and organic wastes. Wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities
provided by the CONTRACTOR or organic material wastes from any other source
related to the CONTRACTOR's operations shall be disposed of away from the Site in a
manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and in accordance with Laws and Regulations
pertaining thereto.
1.5 CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals used on the WORK or furnished for facility operation, whether defoliant, soil
sterilant, herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification,
shall show approval of either the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the U.S.
Department of Agriculture. Use of such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in
strict accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01560-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. The word "Products," as used in the Contract Documents, is defined to include
purchased items for incorporation into the WORK, regardless of whether specifically
purchased for the project or taken from CONTRACTOR's stock of previously purchased
products. The word "Materials," is defined as products that must be substantially cut,
shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed,
or applied to form WORK. The word "Equipment" is defined as products with operational
parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including
products with service connections (wiring, piping, and other like items). Definitions in this
paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories,"
"furnishings," special construction," and similar terms that are self-explanatory and have
recognized meanings in the construction industry.
B. Neither "Products" nor "Materials" nor "Equipment" includes machinery and equipment
used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the WORK.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of WORK, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide products, materials, and equipment of a singular generic
kind from a single source.
S. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for
CONTRACTOR's selection of a product, material, or equipment, the CONTRACTOR
shall select an option that is compatible with other products, materials, or equipment.
Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product, material and equipment
selections.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver and store the WORK in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations and by methods and means that prevents
damage, deterioration, and loss including theft. Delivery schedules shall be controlled to
minimize long-term storage of products at the Site and overcrowding of construction
spaces. In particular, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure coordination to ensure minimum
holding or storage times for flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive
materials to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Products shall be transported by methods to avoid damage and shall be delivered in
undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers and packaging.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products,
materials, and equipment by methods to prevent soiling and damage.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protection during handling to prevent
marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces.
MWH-4/5/2007 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01600-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Products shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with
seals and labels intact and legible. Sensitive products shall be stored in weather -tight,
climate -controlled enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained
within tolerances required by manufacturer's recommendations.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, products shall be placed on sloped supports
above ground. Products subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet
covering and ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation.
C. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area and
shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter.
D. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall
periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under
required conditions.
E. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance and
inspection of stored items.
1.6 MAINTENANCE OF PRODUCTS IN STORAGE
A. Stored products shall be periodically inspected on a scheduled basis. The
CONTRACTOR shall maintain a log of inspections and shall make the log available on
request.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements and
recommendations.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain manufacturer -required environmental conditions
continuously.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are
not adversely affected and that weathering of finishes does not occur.
E. For mechanical and electrical equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy of the
manufacturer's service instructions with each item and the package exterior shall contain
notice that instructions are included.
F. Products shall be serviced on a regularly scheduled basis, and a log of services shall be
maintained and submitted as a record document prior to final acceptance by the
OWNER in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.7 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS OR "OR -EQUAL" ITEM
A. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents by using the
name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular manufacturer, the naming of the
item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required. If the name is
followed by the words "or equal" indicating that a substitution is permitted, materials or
equipment of other manufacturers may be accepted if sufficient information is submitted
by the CONTRACTOR to allow the ENGINEER to determine that the material or
equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named, subject to the following
requirements:
MWH-4/5/2007 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01600-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitution
product, material or equipment shall be upon the CONTRACTOR.
2. The ENGINEER will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and quality of any
such substitution and the ENGINEER's decision shall be final.
3. The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about
the proposed substitution.
4. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish a special performance
guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitution.
5. Acceptance by the ENGINEER of a substitution item proposed by the
CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for full
compliance with the Contract Documents and for adequacy of the substitution.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs of implementing accepted substitutions,
including redesign and changes to WORK necessary to accommodate the
substitution.
B. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will include the following:
1. If the CONTRACTOR wishes to provide a substitution item, the CONTRACTOR
shall make written application to the ENGINEER on the "Substitution Request
Form."
2. Unless otherwise provided by law or authorized in writing by the ENGINEER, the
"Substitution Request Form(s)" shall be submitted within the 35-day period after
award of the Contract.
3. Wherever a proposed substitution item has not been submitted within said 35-day
period, or wherever the submission of a proposed substitution material or equipment
has been judged to be unacceptable by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall
provide the material or equipment indicated in the Contract Documents.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall certify by signing the form that the list of paragraphs on
the form are correct for the proposed substitution.
5. The ENGINEER will evaluate each proposed substitution within a reasonable period
of time.
6. As applicable, no shop drawing submittals shall be made for a substitution item nor
shall any substitution item be ordered, installed, or utilized without the ENGINEER'S
prior written acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S "Substitution Request Form."
7. The ENGINEER will record the time required by the ENGINEER in evaluating
substitutions proposed by the CONTRACTOR and in making changes by the
CONTRACTOR in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby.
C. The CONTRACTOR's application shall address the following factors that will be
considered by the ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitution:
1. Whether the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitution will prejudice
the CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time.
MWH-4/5/2007 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01600-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2. Whether acceptance of the substitution for use in the WORK will require a change in
any of the Contract Documents to adapt the design to the proposed substitution.
3. Whether incorporation or use of the substitution in connection with the WORK is
subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
4. Whether all variations of the proposed substitution from the items originally specified
are identified.
5. Whether available maintenance, repair, and replacement service are indicated. The
manufacturer shall have a local service agency (within 50 miles of the site) that
maintains property trained personnel and adequate spare parts and is able to
respond and complete repairs within 24 hours.
6. Whether an itemized estimate is included of all costs that will result directly or
indirectly from acceptance of such substitution, including cost of redesign and
claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change.
7. Whether the proposed substitute item meets or exceeds the experience and/or
equivalency requirements listed in the appropriate technical specifications.
D. Without any increase in cost to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
and pay all costs in connection with proposed substitutions and of inspections and
testing of equipment or materials submitted for review prior to the CONTRACTOR's
purchase thereof for incorporation in the WORK, whether or not the ENGINEER accepts
the proposed substitution or proposed equipment or material. The CONTRACTOR shall
reimburse the OWNER for the charges of the ENGINEER for evaluating each proposed
substitution.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01600-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page a
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
y� n , k:.' S4erb
m lmilYld�'S
m,.wz$.'*.�"`+u5w.fw�....r«ipP.. ^u.. �'u7yTtuy
Misc. Covers
unassigned
Demo Beams
150
-
- 25
- 175
Demo Plywood
65
-
- 35
- 100
Beam
-
386
- 20
- 406
Angle Frame
185
77
- 15
- 277
FRP Covers
342
4,305
- 95
48 4,790
FRP Covers
234
2.946
- 65
33 3,277
FRP Covers
891
11,217
- 240
124 12,479
FRP Hatches
378
1,236
- 15
- 1,829
FRP Hatches
252
824
- 10
- 1,086
FRP Hatches
252
824
- 10
- 1,086
FRP Stop log Hatches
504
1,648
- 20
- 2,172
SECTION 01640 - DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
PART1--GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall demolish and reconstruct civil, landscaping, structural,
architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation facilities as indicated, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully coordinate the WORK in areas where existing
facilities are interconnected with new facilities and where existing facilities remain
operational. The WORK as indicated is not all inclusive, and the CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible to perform the reconstruction indicated plus work that can be reasonably
inferred from the Contract Documents as necessary to complete the Project. The
Specifications and Drawings identify the major facilities that shall be demolished and
reconstructed, but auxiliary utilities such as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication,
fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily shown.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall note that the Drawings used to indicate demolition and
reconstruction are based on facility record drawings. These record drawings have been
reproduced to show existing conditions and to clarify the scope of WORK as much as
possible.
C. While demolition and reconstruction are being performed, the CONTRACTOR shall
provide adequate access for the continued operation and maintenance of equipment and
treatment processes. The CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain fences, warning
signs, barricades, and other devices around the reconstruction as required for the
protection of the CONTRACTOR's employees and the OWNER's personnel at the plant.
The CONTRACTOR shall remove such protection when reconstruction activities are
complete, or as work progresses, or when directed by the ENGINEER.
1.3 DEMOLITION
A. Pavement, structures, equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, electrical gear,
instrumentation, utilities, and related appurtenances such as anchors, supports, and
hardware indicated or required to be demolished as part of the WORK shall be removed
and disposed of unless otherwise indicated. Removal of buried structures, utilities, and
appurtenances includes the related excavation and backfill as required. Removed items
shall be disposed of offsite by the CONTRACTOR.
1.4 SALVAGE
A. Equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances
indicated to be salvaged shall be removed without any degradation in condition from that
prior to removal. Salvaged items shall be stockpiled and protected on the Site at a
location directed by the OWNER's Representative. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible to properly safeguard the salvaged items against damage and loss during
removal and handling.
MWH-4/5l2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1.5 RELOCATION
A. Equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances
required to be relocated shall be removed without any degradation in condition from that
prior to removal. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to properly safeguard the
relocated items against damage and loss during removal, handling, storage, and
installation in the new location.
1.6 ABANDONMENT
A. Equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances
required to be abandoned shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR as indicated.
1.7 REHABILITATION
A. Civil, landscaping, structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and
instrumentation WORK disturbed or damaged by reconstruction activities shall be
repaired and rehabilitated as indicated.
B. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced with new items to restore items or surfaces
to a condition equal to and matching prior to damage.
C. In buildings with reconstruction work, the CONTRACTOR shall not use any OWNER
equipment (e.g., bridge cranes and monorails) unless authorized in advance in writing by
the OWNER's Representative. Such authorization shall be subject to documentation by
the CONTRACTOR of the load proposed to place on the equipment and be subject to
OWNER requirements for crane use for operating and maintenance needs. Any damage
to a crane shall be repaired or replaced to the OWNER's or OWNER's Representative's
satisfaction.
1.8 DISPOSAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the offsite disposal of debris resulting from
reconstruction in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and requirements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate demolition and reconstruction WORK with the
OWNER and ENGINEER. Unless otherwise indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for the sequence of activities. WORK shall be performed in accordance with
applicable safety rules and regulations.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that any utilities connected to structures, equipment,
and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned are rendered
inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities
before proceeding with demolition and reconstruction.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to
limit the WORK activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the scope
MWH-4/5/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
indicated is required, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the OWNER prior to
commencing.
3.2 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES
A. Before beginning any reconstruction, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully survey facilities
and examine the Specifications and Drawings to determine the extent of reconstruction
and coordination with the WORK. Facilities not subject to reconstruction shall be
protected and maintained in accordance with Section 01530 - Protection of Existing
Facilities. Damaged existing facilities shall be repaired to the previous condition or
replaced.
B. Persons shall be afforded safe passages around areas of demolition.
C. Structural elements shall not be overloaded. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for shoring, bracing, or adding new supports as may be required for adequate structural
support as a result of WORK performed under this Section. The CONTRACTOR shall
remove temporary protection when the WORK is complete or when so authorized by the
OWNER's Representative.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully consider bearing loads and capacities before
placement of equipment and material on Site. In the event of any questions as to
whether an area to be loaded has adequate bearing capacity, the CONTRACTOR shall
consult with the ENGINEER prior to the placement of such equipment or material.
3.3 DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RELOCATION
A. The Contract Documents indicate facilities to be demolished, salvaged, and/or relocated.
Auxiliary utilities including such services as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication,
fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily indicated.
The CONTRACTOR shall verify the scope of the WORK to remove the equipment
indicated; coordinate its shutdown, removal, replacement, or relocation; and submit an
outage plan, if required by the ENGINEER. The removal of facilities for demolition,
salvage, and relocation shall include the following requirements:
1. Equipment supports, including concrete pads, baseplates, mounting bolts, and
support hangers, shall be removed. Damage to the structure shall be repaired as
indicated.
2. Exposed piping including vents, drains, and valves shall be removed. Where
exposed piping penetrates floors and walls, the piping, including wall thimbles, shall
be removed to a minimum depth of 2-inches. Resultant openings in the structure
shall be repaired as indicated.
3. Electrical control panels, junction boxes, motor control centers, and local switches
and pushbuttons shall be removed.
4. Exposed electrical conduits and associated wiring shall be removed. Resultant
openings in structures shall be repaired as indicated.
5. Connections to embedded electrical conduits shall be removed a minimum of 2-
inches inside the finished surface of the structure. Wiring shall be removed and the
resulting openings shall be repaired as indicated.
MWH-4/5/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
6. Associated instrumentation devices shall be removed.
7. Auxiliary utility support systems shall be removed.
8. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned such that little or no evidence of the previous
equipment installation will remain.
9. Asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs, and gutters shall be removed as necessary
to perform reconstruction. The limits of removal shall be sawcut. When the required
improvements have been constructed, new asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs,
and gutters shall be placed to match the original unless otherwise indicated.
10. Footings, foundation walls, below -grade construction and concrete slabs on grade
shall be demolished and removed to a depth that will not interfere with new
construction, but not less than 36-inches below existing ground surface or future
ground surface, whichever is lower.
11. Below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures shall be
completely filled. Fill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 02200 -
Earthwork. After fill and compaction, surfaces shall be graded to meet adjacent
contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures, or as indicated.
12. When pipe is removed, the CONTRACTOR shall plug the resulting open ends
whether or not so indicated. Where removed piping is exposed, the remaining piping
shall be blind -flanged or fitted with a removable cap or plug.
13. When piping is removed from structures, the CONTRACTOR shall fill resulting
openings in the structures and repair any damage such that the finished
rehabilitated structure shall appear as a new homogeneous unit with little or no
indication of where the new and old materials join. The openings in water -bearing
structures shall be filled with non -shrink grout to be watertight and reinforced as
required or indicated. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to
view, the grout shall be recessed approximately %-inch and the recessed area filled
with cement mortar grout.
14. Electrical reconstruction shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR in a safe and
proper manner to avoid injury from electrical shock to the OWNER's and
CONTRACTOR's personnel. Electrical equipment to be shut off for a period of time
shall be tagged, locked out, and sealed with a crimped wire and lead seal and made
inoperable. At no time shall electrical wiring or connections that are energized or
could become energized be accessible to CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or other
personnel without suitable protection or warning signs.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a functional test of relocated and reinstalled
equipment to ensure the equipment functions in the manner documented during the
initial inspection. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the relocated equipment does not
function in a satisfactory manner, the CONTRACTOR shall make repairs and
modifications necessary to restore the equipment to its original operating condition at no
additional cost to the OWNER.
3.4 ABANDONMENT
A. Facilities to be abandoned shall be prepared as indicated. Where buried piping is to be
abandoned, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the abandoned pipe for a distance of 5-
MWH-4/5/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
feet from any connecting structures. Openings at the structures shall be repaired. The
remaining pipe shall be capped at both ends prior to backfill. Buried piping, 12-inches
diameter or greater shall be completely sand -filled prior to closure of the piping ends.
3.5 REHABILITATION
A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be affected by
WORK necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible to rehabilitate those areas affected by its construction activities.
B. Where new rectangular openings are to be installed in concrete or concrete masonry
walls or floors, the CONTRACTOR shall score the edges of each opening (both sides of
wall or floor slab) by saw -cutting clean straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-inch and
then chipping out the concrete. Alternately, the sides of the opening (not the corners)
may be formed by saw cutting completely through the slab or wall. Saw cuts deeper than
1-inch (or the depth of cover over existing reinforcing steel, whichever is less) shall not
be allowed to extend beyond the limits of the opening. Comers shall be made square
and true by a combination of core drilling and chipping or grinding. Necessary
precautions shall be taken during removal of concrete to prevent debris from falling into
or entering adjacent tanks in service or from damaging adjacent equipment or piping.
Saw cuts allowed to extend beyond the opening shall be repaired by filling with non -
shrink grout. The concrete around any exposed reinforcement steel shall be chipped
back and exposed reinforcement steel cut a minimum of 2-inches from the finished face
of the new opening and be painted with epoxy paint. The inside face of the new opening
shall be grouted with an epoxy cement grout to fill any voids and cover the exposed
aggregate and shall be trowel -finished to provide a plumb and square opening.
C. Where new piping is installed in existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall accurately
position core -drilled openings in the concrete as indicated or otherwise required.
Openings shall be of sufficient size to permit a final alignment of pipelines and fittings
without deflection of any part and to allow adequate space for satisfactory packing where
pipe passes through the wall to provide watertightness around openings so formed. The
boxes or cores shall be provided with continuous keyways to hold the filling material in
place, and they shall have a slight flare to facilitate grouting and the escape of entrained
air during grouting. Before placing the non -shrink grout, concrete surfaces shall be
sandblasted, thoroughly cleaned of sand and any other foreign matter, and coated with
epoxy bonding compound.
D. Pipes, castings, or conduits shall be grouted in place by pouring in grout under a head of
at least 4-inches. The grout shall be poured or rammed or vibrated into place to fill
completely the space between the pipes, castings, or conduits, and the sides of the
openings so as to obtain the same watertightness as through the wall itself. The grouted
casings shall then be water cured.
E. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the non -shrink grout
shall be recessed approximately'/2-inch and the recessed area filled with cement mortar
grout.
F. When new piping is to be connected to existing piping, the piping shall be cut square
and ends properly prepared for the connection. Any damage to the lining and coating
shall be repaired. Dielectric insulating joints shall be installed at interconnections
between new and existing piping.
MWH-415/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
G. Where equipment, piping, and supports, electrical panels and devices, conduits, and
associated appurtenances are removed, the CONTRACTOR shall rehabilitate the
affected area such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains.
Openings in concrete floors, walls, and ceilings from piping, conduit, and fastener
penetrations shall be filled with non -shrink grout and finished to match the adjacent area.
Concrete pads, bases associated with equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be
removed by chipping away concrete and cutting any exposed reinforced steel and
anchor bolts a minimum of 2-inches below finished grade and be painted with epoxy
paint. The area of concrete to be rehabilitated shall be scored by saw cutting clean,
straight lines to a minimum depth of 1'/2 inches, and concrete within the scored lines
removed to a depth of 1'/2 inches (or the depth of cover over reinforcing steel, whichever
is less). The area within the scored lines shall be patched with non -shrink grout to match
the adjacent grade and finish. Abandoned connections to piping and conduits shall be
terminated with blind flanges, caps, and plugs suited for the material, type, and service
of the pipe or conduit.
H. Reinforcement to remain in place shall be protected, cleaned, and extended into new
concrete. Reinforcement not to be retained shall be cut-off as follows:
1. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, reinforcement shall
be cut-off flush with the concrete surface at the removal line.
2. Where the concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, the
reinforcement shall be cut back 2-inches below the finished concrete surface, the
ends painted with epoxy paint and the remaining holes patched with a cement
mortar grout.
I. Where handrailing is removed, post embedments and anchors shall be removed and
post holes shall be filled with non -shrink grout flush to the floor surface. At the point of
continuation of existing handrailing, a new post with rail connections matching the
existing handrailing system shall be installed. New posts in existing concrete floors shall
be installed in core -drilled socket holes and the annular space between the post and
hole filled with non -shrink grout.
J. Where reconstruction activities damage the painting and coating of adjacent or nearby
facilities, the damaged areas shall be surface prepared and coated to match existing.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Demolition and removal of debris shall minimize interference with roads, streets, walks,
and other adjacent occupied or used facilities and shall not be closed or obstructed
without permission from the OWNER. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed
or obstructed traffic ways.
B. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from reconstruction operations shall be
legally removed and disposed of. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be
cleaned prior to demolition and the wash water properly disposed of. No trace of these
structures shall remain prior to placing of backfill in the areas from which structures were
removed.
C. Refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and clearing operations
shall not be burned.
MWH-4/5/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3.7 OCCUPANCY AND POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes, and other suitable methods shall be
used to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the area. The CONTRACTOR shall
comply with government regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
B. Water shall not be used if it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, or pollution.
3.8 CLEANING
A. During and upon completion of WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove tools
and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas
affected by WORK in a clean, approved condition.
B. Adjacent structures shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by reconstruction,
as directed by the ENGINEER or governing authorities, and adjacent areas shall be
returned to pre -construction condition.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01640-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01655 - GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall test gravity pipelines in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 — Contractor Submittals.
B. Furnish:
1. A testing plan and schedule including methods for water conveyance, control, leak
testing, and water disposal shall be submitted in writing for approval.
2. Where deflection testing of flexible pipe is required, submit a method for mandrel
testing or other measurement, as applicable to pipe size.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 DEFLECTION MANDREL
A. Mandrel Design: The CONTRACTOR shall construct a mandrel of steel or rigid plastic
which can withstand a force of 200 psi without deforming. The mandrel shall have 9 or
more 'runners" or legs, as long as the number is an odd number. The mandrel barrel
length shall be at least 75 percent of the pipe inside diameter.
B. Mandrel Diameter: The outside diameter shall taper out to 95 percent of the inside
diameter of the pipe. For the purpose of determining the mandrel diameter, the inside
diameter of the pipe shall be the average outside diameter of the pipe minus 2 minimum
wall thicknesses for OD controlled pipe and shall be the average inside diameter for ID
controlled pipe, all dimensions in accordance with the respective pipe standards.
Statistical or "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. The
mandrel shall be stamped or engraved at a location other than a runner with the pipe
size and material it is intended to test.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Gravity sewer pipes and service laterals shall be tested for exfiltration or infiltration and
deflection as indicated. Leakage tests shall be completed and approved prior to placing
of permanent resurfacing of pavement. When leakage or infiltration exceeds the allowed
amount, the CONTRACTOR shall locate the leaks and make the necessary repairs or
replacements to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the allowable limits. Individually
detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of whether the test results are acceptable
or not.
MWH-4/5/2007 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01655-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Unless otherwise indicated, water for testing will be furnished by the OWNER; however,
the CONTRACTOR shall convey the water from the OWNER -designated source to the
points of use.
C. No materials shall be used that would be injurious to pipeline structure and future
function. Air test gauges shall be laboratory-caiibrated test gauges, and if required by the
ENGINEER, shall be recalibrated by a certified laboratory prior to the leakage test. Air
test gauges shall have a size and pressure range appropriate for the pipe being tested.
D. Testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the OWNER's Representative.
3.2 TESTING SCHEDULE
A. Leakage Tests:
Perform the type of leakage tests determined from the table below, based on pipe
size, slope between manholes (Criterion 1), and difference in water levels (Criterion
2).
Criterion 1
Criterion 2
Test Water vs Ground Water Delta
Manhole Delta H, feet
H, feet
less than or
greater than 10
greater than or
Nominal Pipe
Size
equal to10 ft
ft
equal to 4 ft
less than O ft
less than or
equal to 24
See Criterion 2
Infiltration or Air
Exfiltration
Infiltration or Air
See Note 1
inches
greater than
See Criterion 2
See Criterion 2
Exfiltration
Infiltration
24 inches
Note 1. If groundwater is present, perform an infiltration test or air test at the option of the
CONTRACTOR; if no ground water is present, perform an air test.
2. Definitions:
a. Delta H is the difference between 2 elevations, expressed in feet.
b. Manhole Delta H is the invert elevation difference in 2 adjacent manholes.
c. Test Water vs Ground Water Delta H is the required elevation of water surface
for testing minus the average elevation of ground water adjacent to the pipe to
be tested. Units are feet.
3. For pressure sewers and force mains, conduct water pressure tests as required by
Section 01656 - Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection.
B. Deflection Tests: Flexible pipe 30-inches and smaller shall be tested for deflection by
the mandrel test or a method approved by the ENGINEER. Larger flexible pipe shall be
tested by a method approved by the ENGINEER. Excessively deflected pipe shall be
removed and replaced.
3.3 WATER EXFILTRATION TEST
A. Each section of sewer shall be tested between successive manholes by closing the ^`
lower end and the inlet sewers of the upper manhole with stoppers or inflatable plugs.
MWH-41512007 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01655-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1 � l
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 9
DWRF Odor Control 312212007 9:10 AM
Location Aseemby ` 0eeorlpflod Laboi'Amotint Martel Anion It liub Air (wnf t:aoln. b"IINY 11 fio�it nl ;
Primary Sio
020-
Site Demolition @ Biofilter
Demo Asphalt
298
-
- 280
120
688
Demo Curbs
168
-
- 163
70
401
026.1-
PD Manhole
Excavation & Backfill
896
-
- 1,536
-
2,432
Gravel Base - Refill
8
39
- 19
-
66
Manhole 4'
154
1,935
- 110
-
2,199
Grout Invert
171
630
-
15
816
Manhole Steps
29
0
- -
-
29
External Wrap
65
57
-
-
122
02610-
NPW - 3" Pipe A
Trench Expo & Lay Pipe 4- V
1,919
-
- 830
32
2,782
Trench Box 8' Deep
_
_ 540
_
540
Utility Bed Peastone
73
760
- 98
-
931
utiliy Cover Peastone
73
760
98
-
931
Spoils to Waste
_
_
_ 13
_
13
PVC Sch 60 Pipe 4
461
0
- 240
24
725
PVC Sch 80 45 bend 4
11
0
- 1
-
11
PVC Sch 80 90 ell 4
151
0
- 7
158
PVC Sch 60 Tee 4
195
0
- 6
-
201
PVC Sch 80 Caps 4
13
0
_ 1
-
14
Water Tap Saddle 6 x 3"
219
0
- 25
_
244
Plug Valve 1501t 3"
87
0
- 10
-
97
Sleeve & Cauking
32
103
- 5
1
141
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
17
0
- 8
2
27
PVC 40 90 Ell SxS 1
20
0
- i
-
21
Yard Hydrant
99
0
- 20
10
129
02621-
54" Upstream of Fans
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8-10'
684
-
- 578
8
1,269
Trench Box 10' Deep
-
-
- 114
-
114
Utility Bed Peastone
25
258
- 33
-
316
Spoils to Waste
-
-
- 2
-
2
HD PE Pipe Cep 30
35
0
- 5
-
40
HDPE Caps 54
45
0
- 5
-
50
HDPE 54
480
0
- 200
10
690
HDPE 54" 90 ell
55
0
- 10
-
65
HDPE Tee 54
195
0
- 30
-
225
Pipe Support
108
2,700
- 10
2
2.821
Sty Lever Damper 36"
36
0
- 10
6
52
Flex Conn Flange 36"
130
0
- 20
6
166
Fiberglass Pipe 38"
188
- 40
3
229
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 36"
130
- 20
2
152
02642-
Plant Drain - Pipe A
Demo DI Pipe 6"
25
-
- 4
_
29
Trench Excov & Lay Pipe 6- V
448
-
- 378
8
834
Trench Box B' Deep
_
_
_ 125
-
126
Utility Bed Peastone
17
177
- 23
-
217
Utility Cover Peastone
17
177
- 23
-
217
Spoils to Waste
_
_
_ 3
-
3
SDR 35 4
26
0
- 56
14
96
SDR 35 Fittings
19
0
_ -
-
19
SDR 35 Fittings
38
0
- -
-
38
SDR 35 Fittings
227
0
_ -
-
227
SDR 35 Fittings
120
0
- -
-
120
SDR 35 Fittings
30
0
_ _
-
30
Clearaul Cap 4
45
0
- -
-
45
Floor Drain 4"
140
- 20
8
168
02642•
Plant Drain _ Pipe H
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 4. V
336
- 284
6
625
The pipe and manhole shall be filled with water to a point 4-feet above the centerline of
the sewer at the center of the upper manhole; or if ground water is present, 4-feet above
the average adjacent ground water level, whichever is higher.
B. Water shall remain in the pipe for at least one hour or until the water level stabilizes,
whichever is longer, before the test begins. The minimum test duration shall be 4 hours.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, the CONTRACTOR shall measure exfiltration. Measure the
amount of water added to the upstream manhole to maintain the water level at the
elevation set above. Compare the amount added to the allowable leakage calculated
below, and if the amount added is equal to or less than the allowable amount, the tested
section of the pipe has passed.
D. The allowable leakage will be computed by the formula:
Where:
E = 0.000012 LD (H)"'
E = Allowable leakage in gallons per minute of sewer tested.
L = Length of sewer and lateral connections tested, in feet.
D = Internal diameter of the pipe in inches.
H = Elevation difference in feet between the water surface in the upper
manhole and the centerline of the pipe at the lower manhole; or if
ground water is present above the centerline of the pipe in the lower
manhole, the difference in elevation between the water surface in
the upper manhole and the ground water at the lower manhole.
3.4 WATER INFILTRATION TEST
A. The end of the sewer at the upper structure shall be closed to prevent the entrance of
water, and pumping of ground water shall be discontinued for at least 3 days, after which
the section shall be tested for infiltration.
B. The infiltration into each individual reach of sewer between adjoining manholes shall not
exceed that allowed by the formula above, where H is the difference in the elevation
between the ground water surface and the invert of the sewer at the downstream
manhole.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, infiltration shall be measured by the CONTRACTOR.
3.5 AIR PRESSURE TEST
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, and labor for making an air
test. Air test equipment shall be approved by the ENGINEER.
B. The CONTRACTOR may conduct an initial air test of the sewer main line after
densification of the backfill but prior to installation of the service laterals. Such tests will
be considered to be for the CONTRACTOR's convenience and need not be performed in
the presence of the ENGINEER.
MWH-4/5/2007 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01655-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Each section of sewer shall be tested between successive manholes by plugging and
bracing all openings in the pipe and the upper ends of all service laterals. Prior to
insertion in the sewer, each plug shall be checked with a soap solution to detect any air
leakage. If any leaks are found, the air pressure shall be released and the leaks
eliminated or the plug replaced.
D. The test of the pipe and service laterals shall be conducted in the presence of the
ENGINEER. Testing of pipe, regardless of the pipe material, shall be performed in
accordance with ASTM F 1417 - Standard Test Method for Installation of Plastic Gravity
Sewer Line Using Low Pressure Air.
E. Air pressure in the sewer fine shall be increased to 4.0 psi above groundwater pressure
(1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of water elevation above the highest point of the pipe). Do not
allow the pressure at any point in the pipe to reach 9 psi under any circumstances. Allow
the pressure to stabilize for 5 minutes, then reduce the pressure to 3.5 psi above
groundwater pressure and start the test. Stop the air release and record the decrease in
pressure over time.
F. Pass/Fail Criterion: The time taken for the pressure to decrease from 3.5 to 2.5 psi
above groundwater pressure shall be equal to or greater than the time below.
Nominal Pipe
Diameter, inches
Minimum Time,
min:sec
Length for Minimum
Time, ft
Increased Time for
Longer Lengths,
seconds per foot
4
3:46
597
.0380
6
5:40
398
0.854
8
7:34
298
1.520
10
9:26
239
2.374
12
11:20
199
3.418
18
17:00
133
7.692
24
22:40
99
13.674
30
28:20
1 80
21.366
36
34:00
1 66
30.768
G. Testing criteria of pipe 12-inches and larger may be adjusted if the ENGINEER
approves. The air pressure decrease may be 0.5 psi instead of 1.0 psi, and the
corresponding minimum times will be one-half of the tablulated times.
H. For pipe larger than 24-inches, air pressure tests may be performed on each joint. The
time for the pressure to fall from 3.5 to 2.5 psi, both above groundwater pressure, shall
not be less than 10 seconds regardless of pipe diameter.
I. If the time is less than the allowable time, the pipe will be considered defective and shall
be repaired and retested.
3.6 DEFLECTION TEST
A. Mandrel Test:
The CONTRACTOR shall test all flexible pipe 30-inches and smaller for deflection,
joint displacement, and other obstructions by passing the mandrel through the pipe
not less than 30 days after completion of the trench backfill, but prior to permanent
pavement resurfacing.
MWH-4/5/2007 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01655-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2. Pipe with diameter less than the mandrel will be considered defective, and the
CONTRACTOR shall replace it.
B. Flexible pipe in sizes larger than 30-inches shall have deflections measured by a rigid
metal bar, a rigid frame, or other method approved by the ENGINEER.
1. The average inside diameter shall be measured before the pipe is installed and
backfilled.
2. Deflection is defined as the difference between vertical inside diameter in the pipe
before and after installation and backfilling.
3.7 MANHOLE TEST
A. Sewer manholes shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage prior to backfilling. Prior to
testing, manholes shall be visually inspected for obvious defects. Leaks or cracks shall
be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
B. Hydrostatic Testing: All pipes entering the manhole shall be sealed at a point outside
the manhole walls to include testing of the pipe to manhole joints. The manhole shall be
filled with water to a level 2-inches below the top of the frame. Safety lines shall be
secured to all plugs utilized. After a period of at least one hour to allow the water level to
stabilize, the manhole shall be refilled and the water level shall be marked. The water
level shall again be checked after 4 hours. If the water level falls more than 1-inch, the
leakage shall be considered excessive, and the CONTRACTOR shall make repairs and
retest the manhole. The exterior of the manhole shall be inspected during this period for
visible evidence of leakage. Visible moisture, sweating, or beads of water on the exterior
of the manhole shall not be considered leakage, but any water running across the
surface will be considered leakage and shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
ENGINEER regardless of the volume of water lost.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01655-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-415/2007 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01655-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01656 - PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall test and disinfect potable water pipelines and appurtenant
piping, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess
testing and disinfection water and dechlorination of such water if required to satisfy
permit limits.
C. Testing will be performed by the Fort Collins Water Quality Laboratory.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Contractor Submittals.
B. Furnish:
1. A testing plan and schedule, including method for water conveyance, control,
disposal, and disinfection shall be submitted in writing for approval.
2. Resume of experienced technician, if liquid chlorine is proposed.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All test equipment, chemicals for chlorination, temporary valves, bulkheads, and other
water control equipment, and choice of disinfectant shall be as determined by the
CONTRACTOR. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the WORK for
future conveyance of potable water.
B. Chlorine for disinfection may be in the form of liquid chlorine (i.e., bleach), sodium
hypochlorite solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets.
1. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B301 -
Liquid Chlorine, and shall be used only when each of the following conditions are
satisfied:
a. Appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors are used.
b. An experienced technician directly supervises.
c. Appropriate safety practices are observed.
2. Sodium and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA B300 -
Hypochlorites.
C. Dechlorination agents may be sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosulfate.
MWH-4/5/2007 PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01656-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Water for testing and disinfecting water pipelines will be furnished by the OWNER;
however, the CONTRACTOR shall convey the water from the OWNER -designated
source to the points of use.
B. All pressure pipelines shall be tested; those for potable water shall be disinfected. All
chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the OWNER's
Representative.
C. Disposal of flushing water and water containing chlorine shall be by methods acceptable
to the OWNER's Representative.
D. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during the Contract Time
to maximize the degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the WORK is accepted by
the OWNER. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by the Fort Collins Water Quality
Laboratory. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory with the State
Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency.
3.2 PIGGING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall clean the system thoroughly by pigging to remove sand, grit,
gravel, stones, fluids, construction waste, and all material which would not be found in a
properly cleaned pipeline. Pigging shall obtain a smooth interior pipe surface free from
any material or fluid not used in cleaning.
B. Pigging shall be defined as passage of a sufficient number of pigs through the pipeline to
achieve the clean conditions required. Flushing will not be acceptable as a substitute for
pigging.
C. Provision for pig access and egress points and disposal of water and materials shall be
the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
D. Pigs shall be individually marked and their location shall be controlled and monitored so
that no pigs remain in the system after cleaning.
E. Pigging may be done in conjunction with initial filling for the hydrostatic test.
3.3 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES
A. Pipelines 30-inches diameter and larger shall be visually inspected that all debris has
been removed prior to flushing.
B. Prior to hydrostatic testing, pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. The
CONTRACTOR shall test pipelines in sections. Sections to be tested shall be defined by
isolation valves in the pipeline. Where such valves are not present, the CONTRACTOR
shall install temporary bulkheads or plugs for the purpose of testing. Sections that do not
have isolation valves shall be tested in segments approved by the ENGINEER. Sections
that have a zero leakage allowance may be tested as a unit. No section of the pipeline
shall be tested until field -placed concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 Days. The
test shall be made by closing valves when available or by placing bulkheads and filling
the line slowly with water. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ascertaining that
MWH-4/512007 PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01656-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without
damage to or movement of the adjacent pipe. Unharnessed sleeve -type couplings,
expansion joints, or other sliding joints shall be restrained or suitably anchored prior to
the test to avoid movement and damage to piping and equipment. Remove or protect
any pipeline -mounted devices that may be damaged by the test pressure. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient temporary tappings in the pipelines to allow for
trapped air to exit. After completion of the tests, such taps shall be permanently plugged.
Care shall be taken that air relief valves are open during filling.
C. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at
which the air can be released through the release valves at a reasonable velocity. The
air within the pipeline shall be allowed to escape completely. The differential pressure
across the orifices in the air release valves shall not be allowed to exceed 5 psi at any
time during filling. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed
to stand under a slight pressure for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar
lining, as applicable, to absorb water and to allow the escape of air from air pockets.
During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If
leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to the ENGINEER shall be taken.
D. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding the indicated test pressure on the pipeline
segment for a period of 4 hours. The test pressure for yard piping shall be as indicated
on the Piping Schedule measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being
tested. No pressure test will be required for a reservoir overflow line. Visible leaks that
appear during testing shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. Add
water to restore the test pressure if the pressure decreases 5 psi below test pressure
during the test period.
E. The maximum leakage for yard piping shall be as indicated on the Piping Schedule. Pipe
with welded joints shall have no leakage. Exposed piping shall show no visible leaks and
no pressure loss during the test. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage
test, the CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective
measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall again test the pipeline, repeating as
necessary until the pipeline passes.
3.4 DISINFECTING PIPELINES
A. General: Potable water pipelines except those appurtenant to hydraulic structures shall
be disinfected in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C651 - Disinfecting
Water Mains, using the Continuous -Feed Method as modified herein.
B. Chlorination: A chlorine -water mixture shall be uniformly introduced into the pipeline by
means of a solution -feed chlorinating device. The chlorine solution shall be introduced at
one end of the pipeline through a tap in such a manner that as the pipeline is filled with
water, the dosage applied to the water entering the pipe shall be approximately 50 mg/I.
Care shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the line being disinfected
from flowing back into the line supplying the water.
C. Retention Period: Chlorinated water shall be retained in the pipeline for at least 24
hours. After the chlorine -treated water has been retained for the required time, the free
chlorine residual at the pipeline extremities and at other representative points shall be at
least 25 mg/I. If testing does not demonstrate a residual of 25 mg1I or greater, the
disinfection procedure above shall be repeated.
MWH-4/5/2007 PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01656-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
D. Chlorinating Valves: During the process of chlorinating the pipelines, valves and other
appurtenances shall be operated from closed to full open to closed while the pipeline is
filled with the heavily -chlorinated water.
E. Sampling Ports: The CONTRACTOR shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as
defined on AWWA C651. Taps may be made at manways and air valves to help facilitate
the spacing requirement.
F. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall
be flushed from the pipeline until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in
the water leaving the pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in the system or
is acceptable for domestic use. Any release of chlorinated water shall comply with
federal, state, and local regulation and the permits for the project. Chlorine in excessive
amounts shall be treated before discharge.
G. Bacteriological Testing: After final flushing and before the pipeline is placed in service,
a sample, or samples shall be collected from the end of the line, and shall be tested for
bacteriological quality in accordance with the requirements of the State Department of
Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. For this purpose the pipe shall be re -filled
with fresh potable water and left for a period of 24 hours before any sample is collected.
If testing does not demonstrate a free chlorine residual after the 24-hour period, the
disinfection procedure above shall be repeated. If the initial disinfection treatment fails to
produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the disinfection procedure shall be
repeated until acceptable results are obtained.
3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM
A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior
surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or
sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before installation. Thorough flushing
shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until
discolored water is eliminated.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01656-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01660 - STARTUP
PARTI -- GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Plant startup is prerequisite to satisfactory completion of the contract requirements and
shall be completed within the Contract Times.
B. Conduct all testing, check out, startup, and related requirements indicated in the
Contract Documents and provide documentation of same to the ENGINEER prior to
requesting Substantial Completion from the ENGINEER. Where manufacturer on -site
inspections are required before startup, the manufacturer shall furnish a written
statement that the installation and check out is complete and proper and that the item(s)
are ready for startup
C. Startup of a treatment plant is a highly complex operation requiring the combined
expertise of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, and OWNER. The
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all parties for a successful startup.
The ENGINEER and OWNER will be available for technical and operational advice prior
to and during startup.
D. General requirements for startup activities are included in this section. More specific
requirements may also be included in other portions of the Contract Documents
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Startup is defined as testing, demonstrations, and other activities as required to achieve
Substantial Completion. Startup includes pre -commissioning and commissioning
activities, manufacturer's services, certifications of readiness for testing, and
troubleshooting, checkout, and shakedown activities.
B. Pre -commissioning is the systematic demonstration through testing and extended
operation that major equipment and auxiliary systems, including related components,
sub -systems, and systems operate properly and consistent with their intended function.
Pre -commissioning involves balancing, adjustments, calibration, loop checks, and loop
validation. Pre -commissioning shall simulate shutdown conditions, failure conditions,
power fail and restart, bypass conditions, and failure resets. Pre -commissioning will not
be considered complete until successful results and documentation of tests and
manufacturer's certifications required by the Contract Documents are submitted and
accepted by the ENGINEER. Pre -commissioning of all portions of the WORK shall be
successfully completed prior to starting Commissioning.
C. Commissioning is the verification that the complete WORK functions on an extended
basis in full conformance with the Contract requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Startup Plan: Not less than 60 Days prior to startup, submit for review a detailed Startup
Plan. The CONTRACTOR shall revise the Plan as necessary based on review
comments. The Plan shall include:
1. Schedules for manufacturers' equipment certifications
MWH-4/5/2007 STARTUP
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01660-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2. Schedules for submitting final Technical Manuals,
3. Schedule for training the OWNER's personnel,
4. List of OWNER and CONTRACTOR -furnished supplies
5. Detailed schedule of operations to achieve successful pre -commissioning and
commissioning.
6. Checklists and data forms for each item of equipment
7. Address coordination with the OWNER's staff.
8. Designate the roles and responsibilities of any Subcontractors that may be involved
in startup activities.
9. Safety, startup, and testing procedures and proposed inspection and certification
forms and records.
10. Interconnection of new to existing facilities
a. Date and time frame of proposed shutdown or interconnection, including
sequence of events and activities to be conducted.
b. A detailed description of sequences and activities for the planned shutdown and
interconnection.
c. Staff, equipment, and materials that will be at the Site before commencing the
shutdown.
d. Other provisions so that interconnection, testing, and startup will be completed
within the planned time.
11. Hydrostatic testing of water -holding structures and pipelines and other potable water
equipment. Schedule and plan shall indicate source of water, testing and
disinfection sequence, disinfection procedures, and the disposal of the water
following disinfection.
B. System Outage Requests: Request for shutdown of systems as necessary to test or
start up new facilities.
C. Records and Documentation:
1. Where required by the specifications, submit equipment installation certifications
under those sections.
2. Records of startup as indicated below.
MWH-4/5/2007 STARTUP
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01660-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC.
DWRF Odor Control
Oml
02642-
Plant Drain - Pipe H
Trench Box 8' Deep
_
95
-
95
Utility Bed Peastone
13
133
- 17
-
163
Utility Cover Peastone
13
133
- 17
-
163
Spoils to Waste
-
2
-
2
SDR 35 4
14
0
- 42
11
67
SDR 35 Fittings
76
0
- -
-
76
SDR 35 Fittings
19
0
- -
-
19
SDR 35 Fittings
22
0
- -
-
22
SDR 35 Fittings
43
0
- -
-
43
SDR 35 Fittings
65
0
- -
-
65
02643.
Plant Drain - Pipe B
Demo DI Pipe 6'
25
- 4
-
29
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8.10'
2,250
-
- 1.901
25
4,176
Trench Box 10' Deep
-
-
- 375
-
375
Utility Bed Peastone
39
409
- 53
-
501
LNHKy Cover Peastone
39
409
- 53
-
501
Spoils to Waste
- 7
7
SDR 35 6
239
0
- 125
-
364
SDR 35 Fittings
22
0
- -
-
22
Concrete Encasement
1,060
1,540
-
350
2,940
02643-
Plant Drain - Pipe D
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 10.12'
468
-
- 396
5
868
Trench Box 12' Deep
-
68
-
68
Utility Bed Passions
5
57
- 7
-
70
Utility Cover Peastone
5
57
- 7
-
70
Spoils to Waste
1
1
SDR 35 4
34
0
- 18
-
52
SDR 35 Fittings
19
0
- -
-
19
Concrete Encasement
225
330
- -
75
630
02643-
Plant Drain - Pipe E
Trench Excery & Lay Pipe 10.12'
1,040
-
- 878
11
1,929
Trench Box 12'Deep
-
-
- 150
-
150
Utility Bed Passions
12
127
- 16
-
155
Utility Cover Peastane
12
127
16
-
155
Spoils to Waste
_
_
2
-
2
SDR 35 4
76
0
- 40
-
116
SDR 35 Fittings
19
0
-
-
-19
Concrete Encasement
315
462
-
105
882
02643•
- Plant Drain . Pipe F
Trench Excav & lay Pipe 10.1T
260
-
- 219
3
482
Trench Box 12'Deep
-
- 36
-
38
Utility Bed Peastone
3
33
- 4
-
40
Utility Cover Peastone
3
33
- 4
-
40
Spoils to Waste
-
-
- 1
-
1
SDR 35 6
19
0
- 10
-
29
SDR 35 Fittings
22
0
-
22
02643-1-
Plant Drain - Pipe C
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 10.12'
1,040
-
- 876
-11
1,929
Trench Box 12' Deep
-
-'
- 160
-
150
Utility Bed Peastone
12
127
- 16
-
155
Utility Cover Passions
12
127
- 16
-
155
Spoils to Waste
2
-
2
SDR 35 4 -
76
0
40
-
116
SDR 35 Fittings
22
0
-
22
Concrete Encasement
225
495
- -
113
833
0312•
Grout @ Pipe Entry
Grout
32
122
- -
3
157
0312•
Grout @ Pipe Entry
Finsh/Slope
0
0
Page 10
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 MALFUNCTIONS
A. During the extended operational demonstrations, all components, subsystems, systems,
and equipment must properly run continuously 24 hours per day at rates indicated by the
ENGINEER throughout the test period. Unless indicated otherwise, if any item fails or
malfunctions during the test, the item shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero
with no credit given for the operating time before the failure or malfunction. Malfunctions
satisfying all 3 of the following conditions will allow the demonstration period to resume
at the elapsed time when the malfunction started:
1. Malfunction did not cause any interruption of the continuous operation of any other
components, subsystems, systems, and equipment.
2. Malfunction was corrected without causing or requiring any components,
subsystems, systems, and equipment to cease operations.
3. Malfunction was corrected within one hour of the time the malfunction was detected
(the one hour period includes the time required to locate the cause of the
malfunction, beginning upon CONTRACTOR's notification from the ENGINEER that
a malfunction has occurred and ending when the item is corrected and the system
is successfully placed back into operation).
B. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for manufacturer's representatives to visit the Site as
often as necessary to correct malfunctions.
3.2 PREREQUISITES
A. Pre -commissioning and commissioning activities shall be scheduled in coordination with
the OWNER.
B. The following shall be completed before pre -commissioning begins.
1. All Technical Manual information required by the Contract Documents has been
submitted.
2. Safety equipment, emergency shower and eyewash units, fire extinguishers, gas
detectors, protective guards and shields, emergency repair kits, safety chains,
handrails, gratings, safety signs, and valve and piping identification required by the
Contract Documents are provided. Devices and equipment shall be fully functional,
adjusted, and tested.
3. Manufacturer's certifications of proper installation have been accepted.
4. Leakage tests, electrical tests, and adjustments have been completed.
5. The ENGINEER and OWNER have approved the Startup Plan.
6. Individual instrumentation loops (analog, status, alarm, and control) have been
verified functionally.
MWH-4/5/2007 STARTUP
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01660-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
7. Pressure switches, flow switches, timing relays, level switches, vibration switches,
temperature switches, RTD monitors, pressure regulating valves, and other control
devices to the settings determined by the ENGINEER or the equipment
manufacturer have been adjusted for accuracy.
8. Individual interlocks between the field -mounted control devices and the motor
control circuits, control circuits of variable -speed controllers, and packaged system
controls have been verified.
9. The OWNER will be responsible for pre -requisite activities related to SCADA
implementation.
3.3 GENERAL
A. Supplies:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish:
a. All necessary materials not listed for the OWNER to furnish
2. The OWNER will furnish:
a. Water
b. Power
B. Startup Records: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the following during testing and
startup and submit originals to ENGINEER:
1. Lubrication and service records for each mechanical and electrical equipment item
2. Hours of daily operation for each mechanical and electrical equipment item
3. Equipment alignment and vibration measurement records
4. Logs of electrical measurements and tests
5. Instrumentation calibration and testing logs
6. Testing and validation of SCADA inputs, outputs, logic functions, status indications,
and alarms
7. Factory and field equipment settings
B. Log of problems encountered and remedial action taken
9. Other records, logs, and checklists as required by the Contract Documents
3.4 PRE -COMMISSIONING
A. After individual equipment items and subsystems have been tested and certified as
required by the Technical Specifications, tests of systems comprised of single or multiple
equipment items with appurtenant equipment and instruments and controls shall be
MWH-4/5/2007 STARTUP
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01660-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
conducted. Items of equipment shall be tested as part of a system to the maximum
extent possible.
B. Subject to the malfunction criteria above, each system shall be demonstrated for a
continuous, 7 Day, 24 hour/day period. If any system malfunctions, the item or
equipment shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero with no credit given for
the elapsed time before the malfunction.
C. The CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall demonstrate the manual and automatic modes
of operation to verify proper control sequences, software interlocks, proper operation of
software logic and controllers, etc. System testing shall include the use of water or other
process media, as applicable, to simulate the actual conditions of operation.
D. Systems testing activities shall follow the detailed procedures and checklists in the
Testing and Startup Plan. Completion of systems shall be documented by a report.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate utility, chemical feed, safety equipment, and
other support systems before whole process systems.
F. The OWNER will be responsible for pre -commissioning activities related to SCADA
implementation.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall start up the plant and operate it without malfunction for a
continuous 8 Day, 24 hour/day period. The ENGINEER will determine the operational
parameters.
B. Defects that appear shall be promptly corrected. Time lost for wiring corrections, control
point settings, or other reasons that interrupt the test may, at the judgment of the
ENGINEER, be cause for extending the demonstration an equal amount of time.
C. Commissioning shall not begin until leakage tests, instrumentation tests and
adjustments, electrical tests and adjustments, equipment field tests, disinfection, and
system tests have been completed to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER.
D. The OWNER will furnish certified treatment plant operators during the startup period to
comply with CDPHE requirements, as needed. Certified operators will be under the
direct supervision of and be responsible to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR
shall furnish continuous, 24 hour staffing at the facility, as needed.
E. The OWNER will be responsible for commissioning activities related to SCADA
implementation.
F. During commissioning, the CONTRACTOR shall:
1. Lubricate and maintain equipment in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations.
2. Clean or replace strainers, screens, and filter elements.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 STARTUP
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01660-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-415/2007 STARTUP
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01660-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 FINAL CLEANUP
A. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed WORK, all
rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary
structures and facilities used during construction. Final acceptance of the WORK by the
OWNER will be withheld until the CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily performed the final
cleanup of the Site.
1.2 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods,
and on -site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such dates shall be
established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the foregoing items, to
allow the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and their authorized representatives sufficient time
to schedule attendance at such activities.
1.3 FINAL SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR, prior to requesting final payment, shall obtain and submit the
following items to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the OWNER:
1. Written guarantees, where required.
2. Technical Manuals and instructions.
3. New permanent cylinders and key blanks for all locks.
4. Maintenance stock items; spare parts; special tools.
5. Completed record drawings.,
6. Bonds for roofing, maintenance, etc., as required.
7. Certificates of inspection and acceptance by local governing agencies having
jurisdiction.
8. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project,
property, or improvement pursuant to the provisions of law.
1.4 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements
contained in the General Conditions.
B. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish
elevations, shall be considered as a part of such required repair work, and any repair or
resurfacing constructed by the CONTRACTOR which becomes necessary by reason of
such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part of such required repair work
unless the CONTRACTOR shall have obtained a statement in writing from the affected
MWH-4/5/2007 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01700-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
private owner or public agency releasing the OWNER from further responsibility in
connection with such repair or resurfacing.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of
written order from the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or
replacements promptly, the OWNER reserves the right to do the WORK and the
CONTRACTOR and its surety shall be liable to the OWNER for the cost thereof.
1.5 BOND
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a bond to guarantee performance of the provisions
contained in Paragraph "Maintenance and Guarantee" above, and Article 13 of the
General Conditions.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 01700-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
DIVISION 02 — SITEWORK
Pages
02200
Earthwork..........................................................................................02200-1
- 02200-12
02460
A.C. Pavement and Base..................................................................02460-1
- 02460- 6
02490
Precast Concrete Manholes and Vaults.............................................02490-1
- 02490- 4
02591
Polyethylene Large Diameter Profile Wall Nonpressure Pipe
(ASTM F 894, Modified)....................................................................02591-1
- 02591- 4
02595
Small PVC Non -Pressure Pipe..........................................................02595-1
- 02595- 4
DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE
03310 Cast -in -Place Concrete..................................................................... 03310-1 - 03310-24
03315 Grout.................................................................................................03315-1 - 03315-10
DIVISION 04 — MASONRY
04255 Masonry Veneer................................................................................ 04255-1 - 04255-16
DIVISION 05 METALS
05500 Miscellaneous Metalwork.................................................................. 05500-1 - 05500- 6
05525 Aluminum Stop Logs......................................................................... 05525-1 - 05525- 4
05530 Aluminum Flat Covers....................................................................... 05530-1 - 05530- 6
MWH-4/5/2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ISSUED FOR BIDDING PAGE 00020-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06610 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Covers................................................06610-1 - 06610- 6
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07190 Surface Applied Water Repellants.....................................................07190-1 - 07190- 4
07920 Sealants and Caulking...................................................................... 07920-1 - 07920- 6
DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 09 — FINISHES (NOT USED)
DIVISION 10 —SPECIALTIES (NOT USED)
DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13550 Biofilter Media...................................................................................13550-1 - 13550- 4
13811 Biofilter Irrigation System...................................................................13811-1 - 13811- 2
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL
15000
Piping, General.................................................................................15000-1 - 15000-12
15006
Pipe Supports....................................................................................15006-1
- 15006-
6
15037
Copper Water Tube (ASTM B 88, Modified) ......................................
15037-1- 15037-
4
15060
PVC Pressure Pipe...........................................................................15060-1
- 15060-
4
15145
Pipe and Equipment Insulation..........................................................
15145-1- 15145-
4
15183
Gauges.............................................................................................15183-1
- 15183-
2
15200
Valves General..................................................................................15200-1
- 15200-
6
15201
Valve and Gate Actuators..................................................................15201-1
- 15201-
4
15204
Ball Valves........................................................................................15204-1
- 15204-
4
15206
Gate Valves.......................................................................................15206-1
- 15206-
4
15215
Pressure Reducing Valves................................................................15215-1
- 15215-
4
15430
Plumbing Piping and Specialities.......................................................15430-1
- 15430-12
15721
Biofilter Aeration Floor.......................................................................15721-1
- 15721-
4
15802
Testing and Balancing.......................................................................15802-1
- 15802-
8
15811
Humidification System.......................................................................15811-1
- 15811-
4
15812
FRP Ductwork...................................................................................15812-1
- 15812-14
15850
Fan, Blower, Ventilators....................................................................15850-1
- 15850-10
MWH-4/5/2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ISSUED FOR BIDDING PAGE 00020-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL (NOT INCLUDED)
16050
General Requirements for Electrical Work .........................................
16050-1- 16050-22
16060
Grounding and Bonding ............ .........................................................
16060-1 - 16060- 8
16123
600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables...................................................16123-1
- 16123-12
16130
Conduits .......................................... ..................................................
16130-1 - 16130-20
16133
Duct Banks........................................................................................16133-1
- 16133- 6
16134
Boxes ....... ..... ............ ............... ........... ...... ..............
.... .................. .... 16134-1 - 16134-10
16140
Wiring Devices..................................................................................16140-1
- 16140- 8
16150
Wiring Connections...........................................................................16150-1
- 16150- 6
16222
Low Voltage Motors up to 500hp.......................................................16222-1
- 16222-10
16282
600 Volt Power Factor Correction Capacitors....................................16282-1
- 16282- 4
16422
Motor Starters...................................................................................16422-1
- 16422- 8
16950
Field Electrical Acceptance Tests......................................................16950-1
- 16950-12
DIVISION 17 — INSTRUMENTATION (NOT INCLUDED)
17403 Pressure Switches data Sheet...........................................................17403-1 - 17403- 2
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ISSUED FOR BIDDING PAGE 00020-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT B LANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ISSUED FOR BIDDING PAGE 00020-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 11
DWRF Odor Control 3/22(2007 9:10 AM
... _
Locations Assembly
Dieerlptloii`<
r q + ..` ,.Cht� ..,,. S 'S4ei`A.; F�•i• +H. fin'
Laiior°Xthbutd" I�iliiUUlCmoni}`,�� '
f{^
'.
�'`
,M.,,
0312-
Grout @ Pipe Entry
Strip 6 Oil Mud Slab Form
. .
Grout
_ 122 _
_
122
Truck Place Mud Slab
_
.
Finish- Rough
0314-
54" Pipe Supports
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0 0 308
- -
308
0314•
Air Chase Slab
Met Foundation Edge Form
0
- 0
Strip f Oil Mat Found. Form
_
-
SOG Reber
1,550 _
1,550
Mesh Support - bricks
38 -
- -
38
4000 pal Concrete
- 1,953 -
-
1,953
Pump Place Mat Foundation -
- -
- 217
217
Flnlsh- Rough
Uquld Curing Compounds
- _
0314-
Thickened Wall Footer(exterior)
Mat Foundadon Edge Form
0
- 0
Strip 6 Oil Mat found. Form
_
SOG Reber
6.336 -
- -
6.336
Mesh Support - bricks
97 _
_ _
97
4000 psi Concrete
- 7,987
- -
7,987
Pump Place Mat Foundation
_
887
887
Finish- Rough
Uquid Cudng Compounds
- _
0314-
Thickened Wall Footer (interior)
Mat Foundation Edge Forth
0 -
- 0
Strip 6 ON Mat Found. Form
SOG Reber
2.310 -
-
2.310
Mesh Support - bricks
34 _
_ _
34
4000 psi Concrete
2,912 -
- -
2,912
Pump Place Mat Foundation
- -
324
324
Finish. Rough
_ -
Uquld Curing Compounds
-
0314-
54" Pipe Supports
Mat Foundation Edge Form
0 -
- 0.
Strip 6 00 Mat Found Form
Asphalt Exp Joint -6' x tr2-
56 _
56
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0 0 308
_
308
SOG Reber
1,519 -
-
1.519
Mesh Support - bricks
21 -
-
21
4000 psi Concrete
1,915
-
1,915
Pump Place Mat Foundation
- -
- 213
213
Finish- Rough
-
Uquld Curing Compounds
0314-
42" Pipe Supports
Mat Foundation Edge Form
0
0
Sbip 6 00 Not Found Form
SOG Reber
269 -
_
289
Mesh Support - bricks
5 -
-
5
3000 psi Concrete
- 332 -
- -
332
Pump Place Mat Foundation
- -
- 38
38
Finish -Rough
_
uquld Curing Compounds
0314•
30" Pipe Supports
Mat Foundation Edge Form
0
_ 0
Strip 6 Og Mat Found. Form
_
SOG Reber
224 -
- -
224
Mesh Support - bricks
5 -
- -
5
3000 psi Concrete
- 277 -
277
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all earthwork indicated and required for construction
of the WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be selected or processed clean,
fine earth, rock, gravel, or sand, free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation, and
organic matter.
B. Fill and backfill materials to be placed within 6 inches of any structure or pipe shall be
free of rocks or unbroken masses of earth materials having a maximum dimension larger
than 3 inches.
C. Suitable Materials: Materials not defined as unsuitable below are defined as suitable
materials and may be used in fills, backfilling, and embankment construction subject to
the indicated requirements. In addition, when acceptable to the ENGINEER, some of the
material listed as unsuitable may be used when thoroughly mixed with suitable material
to form a stable composite. Such mixing or blending of materials to obtain a suitable
composite is the CONTRACTOR's option but is subject to the approval of the
ENGINEER.
D. Suitable materials may be obtained from on -site excavations, may be processed on -site
materials, or may be imported.
E. Types of suitable materials are defined as follows:
1. Type A (three-quarters inch minus granular backfill): Crushed rock or gravel, and
sand with the gradation requirements below. The material shall have a minimum
sand equivalent value of 28 and a minimum R-value of 78. If the sand equivalent
value exceeds 35 the R-value requirement is waived.
Sieve Size
Percentage Passing
%-inch
100
No. 4
30 - 50
No. 200
0 -12
2. Type B (Class I crushed stone): Manufactured angular, crushed stone, crushed
rock, or crushed slag with the following gradation requirements. The material shall
have a minimum sand equivalent value of 75.
Sieve Size
Percentage Passing
%-inch
100
No. 4
30 - 50
No. 200
0-5
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3. Type C (sand backfill): Sand with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, at least 90
percent passing a Number 4 sieve, and a sand equivalent value not less than 30.
4. Type D: Not used.
5. Type E (pea gravel backfill): Crushed rock or gravel the size gradation for Size
Number 8 in ASTM C 33 — Concrete Aggregates.
6. Type F (coarse drainrock): Crushed rock or gravel with the size gradation for Size
Number 4 in ASTM C 33
7. Type G (aggregate base): Crushed rock aggregate base material of such nature that
it can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base for
pavements. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the grading for either the 1Y2-inch
maximum size or %-inch maximum size gradation shall be used. The sand
equivalent value shall be not less than 22, and the material shall meet the following
gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Percentag
a Passing
1%-inch Maximum
Gradation
%-inch Maximum
Gradation
2-inch
100
-
1 YZ-inch
90 -100
-
1-inch
-
100
%-inch
50 - 85
90 - 100
No. 4
25 - 45
35 - 55
No. 30
10 - 25
10 - 30
No.200
2-9
2-9
8. Type H (graded drainrock): Drainrock shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and
free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting or drying.
The material shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the gradation requirements
for Size Number 57 in ASTM C 33:
a. The drainrock shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 75. The finish
graded surface of the drainrock immediately beneath hydraulic structures shall
be stabilized to provide a firm, smooth surface upon which to construct
reinforced concrete floor slabs. The CONTRACTOR shall use, at its option, one
of the asphalt types listed below:
Type I
Type 2
Type 3
Designation
SC-800
SC-250
RS-1
Spray Temperature °F
175-255
165-200
70-120
Coverage al/s d
0.50
0.50
0.50
If the surface remains tacky, sufficient sand shall be applied to absorb the
excess asphalt.
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
9. Type I: Any other suitable material as defined herein.
10. Type J (cement -treated backfill): Material which consists of Type H material, or any
mixture of Types B, C, G, and H materials which has been cement -treated so that
the cement content of the material is not LESS THAN 5 PERCENT BY WEIGHT
WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D 2901 - STANDARD TEST
Method for Cement Content of Freshly Mixed Soil Cement. The ultimate
compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 400 psi when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Molded Soil - Cement Cylinders.
11. Type K (topsoil): Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by
removing soil to a depth not exceeding 1 foot. Removal of the topsoil shall be done
after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris.
12. Type L (controlled low strength material): Controlled low strength material shall be in
accordance with Section 02210 - Controlled Low Strength Material.
13. Type M (aggregate subbase): Crushed rock aggregate subbase material that can be
compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm stable base. The sand
equivalent value shall be not less than 18 and the material shall meet the following
gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Percentage Passing
3-inch
100
2'/2 inch
87 —100
No. 4
35 — 95
No. 200
0 — 29
14. Type N (trench plug): Low permeable fill material, a non -dispersible clay material
having a minimum plasticity index of 10.
2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
A. Unsuitable materials include the materials listed below.
1. Soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils
for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System), fall in the
classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, or OL.
2. Soils which cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the density specified for the
intended use.
3. Materials that contain hazardous or designated waste materials including petroleum
hydrocarbons, pesticides, heavy metals, and any material which may be classified
as hazardous or toxic according to applicable regulations.
4. Soils that contain greater concentrations of chloride or sulfate ions, or have a soil
resistively or pH less than the existing on -site soils.
5. Topsoil, except as allowed below.
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.3 USE OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL TYPES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall use the types of materials as designated herein for all
required fill, backfill, and embankment construction hereunder.
B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having
jurisdiction or with the requirements of a pipe material manufacturer, the ENGINEER
shall be immediately notified. In case of conflict between types of pipe embedment
backfills, the CONTRACTOR shall use the agency -specified backfill material if that
material provides a greater degree of structural support to the pipe, as determined by the
ENGINEER. In case of conflict between types of trench or final backfill types, the
CONTRACTOR shall use the agency -specified backfill material if that material provides
the greater in -place density after compaction.
C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with the following provisions:
1. Embankment fills shall be constructed of Type I material, as defined herein, or any
mixture of Type l and Type A through Type H materials.
2. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" below, shall
consist of the following materials for each pipe material listed below.
D. Mortar coated pipe, concrete pipe, and un-coated ductile iron pipe shall be provided with
Type A or B material in the pipe zone.
E. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape wrapped pipe, and other
non -mortar -coated pipe shall be provided with Type C material in the pipe zone.
F. Plastic pipe and vitrified clay pipe shall be provided with Type B material in the pipe
zone.
G. Where pipelines are installed on grades exceeding 4 percent, and where backfill
materials are graded such that there is less than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve,
trench plugs of Type J, L, or N material shall be provided at maximum intervals of 200
feet unless indicated otherwise.
H. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall
be Type I backfill material or any of Types A through H backfill materials or any mixture
thereof, except:
I. Type K material may be used for trench zone backfill in agricultural areas unless
otherwise shown or specified.
J. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and Utility
Trench Backfill" shall be Type G backfill material. Final backfill under areas not paved
shall be the same material as that used for trench backfill, except that Type K material
shall be used for final backfill in agricultural areas unless otherwise indicated.
K. Trench backfill and final backfill for pipelines under structures shall be the same material
as used in the pipe zone, except where concrete encasement is required by the Contract
Documents.
L. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Type G material constructed to the
thicknesses indicated. Aggregate subbase shall be Type M material.
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
M. Backfill around structures shall be Type I material, or Types A through Type H materials,
or any mixture thereof, except as shown.
N. Backfill materials beneath structures shall be as follows:
1. Drainrock materials under hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures
with underdrain systems shall be Type H material.
2. Under concrete hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures without
underdrain systems, Types G or H materials shall be used.
3. Under structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of
concrete, Type F material shall be used. Before the Type F material is placed, filter
fabric shall be placed over the exposed foundation.
4. Under all other structures, Type G or H material shall be used.
O. Backfill used to replace pipeline trench over -excavation shall be a layer of Type F
material with a 6-inch top filter layer of Type E material or filter fabric to prevent
migration of fines for wet trench conditions or the same material as used for the pipe
zone backfill if the trench conditions are not wet.
P. The top 6 inches of fill on reservoir roofs, embankment fills around hydraulic structures,
and all other embankment fills shall consist of Type K material, topsoil.
Q. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi 140 N, Mirafi 700X, or equal.
2.4 MATERIALS TESTING
A. All soils testing of samples submitted by the CONTRACTOR will be done by a testing
laboratory of the OWNER'S choice and at the OWNER'S expense. At its discretion, the
ENGINEER may request that the CONTRACTOR supply samples for testing of any
material used in the work.
B. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422 -
Standard Test Method for Particle -Size Analysis of Soils.
C. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D 2419 -
Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.
D. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification
types and standards shall have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D 2487.
The CONTRACTOR shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in
the interpretation of soil classifications.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION TAPE
A. Unless indicated otherwise, identification tape shall be placed 12-inches above all buried
pipelines which are not comprised at least in part of magnetic components. Identification
tape shall be 6-inches wide, yellow in color, polyethylene, with integral metallic wire.
Tape shall be labeled with [CAUTION — BURIED UTILITIES].
MWH-415/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION - GENERAL
A. General: Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall include the
removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered, including all obstructions of any
nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completion of the WORK. The
removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades indicated or ordered.
Unless otherwise indicated, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation
and debris, and such material shall be removed from the site prior to performing any
excavation or placing any fill. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, place, and maintain all
supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavations. Excavations
shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable
State safety requirements and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards
for Construction (29CFR1926).
B. Removal and Exclusion of Water: The CONTRACTOR shall remove and exclude
water, including storm water, groundwater, irrigation water, and wastewater, from all
excavations. Dewatering wells, wellpoints, sump pumps, or other means shall be used to
remove water and continuously maintain groundwater at a level at least two feet below
the bottom of excavations before the excavation work begins at each location. Water
shall be removed and excluded until backfilling is complete and all field soils testing has
been completed.
3.2 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION
A. Excavation beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise
indicated for a particular structure or ordered by the ENGINEER, excavation shall be
carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where indicated or ordered,
areas beneath structures or fills shall be over -excavated. The subgrade areas beneath
embankments shall be excavated to remove not less than the top 6 inches of native
material and where such subgrade is sloped, the native material shall be benched.
When such over -excavation is indicated, both over -excavation and subsequent backfill
to the required grade shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. When such over -
excavation is not indicated but is ordered by the ENGINEER, such over -excavation and
any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item
has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated
price. After the required excavation or over -excavation has been completed, the
exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture
content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum
density.
B. Excavation beneath Concrete Reservoirs: Excavation under reservoirs shall extend to
the bottom of the drainrock layer. After such excavation has been completed, the
exposed surface shall be rolled with heavy compaction equipment to 95 percent of
maximum density and then graded to provide a reasonably smooth surface for
placement of the drainrock. Areas under the reservoir upon which fill is to be placed shall
be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and compacted
to obtain 95 percent of maximum density.
C. Excavation beneath Paved Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to
the bottom of the aggregate base or subbase, if such base is called for; otherwise it shall
extend to the paving thickness. After the required excavation has been completed, the
top 12 inches of exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture
MWH-415/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum
density. The finished subgrade shall be even, self -draining, and in conformance with the
slope of the finished pavement. Areas that could accumulate standing water shall be
regraded to provide a self -draining subgrade.
D. Notification of ENGINEER: The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least 3
days in advance of completion of any structure excavation and shall allow the
ENGINEER a review period of at least one day before the exposed foundation is
scarified and compacted or is covered with backfill or with any construction materials.
3.3 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities
shall be open -cut trenches with widths as indicated.
B. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be
excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. Excavations for pipe
bells and welding shall be made as required.
C. Open Trench: The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall
be 500 feet, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a
single day, whichever is greater. All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each
day or, in lieu thereof, shall be covered by heavy steel plates adequately braced and
capable of supporting vehicular traffic in those locations where it is impractical to backfill
at the end of each day. The above requirements for backfilling or use of steel plate will
be waived in cases where the trench is located further than 100 feet from any traveled
roadway or occupied structure. In such cases, however, barricades and warning lights
meeting safety requirements shall be provided and maintained.
D. Indicated Trench Over -Excavation: Where trenches are indicated to be over -
excavated, excavation shall be to the depth indicated, and backfill shall be installed to
the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding.
E. Over -Excavation (Not Indicated):
1. When ordered by the OWNER to over -excavate trenches deeper and/or wider than
required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall over -excavate to the
dimensions ordered and backfill to the indicated grade of the bottom of the pipe
bedding.
2. Payment:
a. Over -excavation less than 6-inches more than the indicated trench depth and/or
width shall be done at no increase in cost. Additional payment will be made for
over -excavation 6 inches or more than the indicated depth and/or width.
b. Additional payment will be based on unit price bid items for over -excavation if
such bid items were established; otherwise payment will be based on a
negotiated price. Volumes of material will be based on survey measurements of
the over -excavated area.
F. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankments, fills, or structure backfills, the fill
shall be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the
trench is excavated.
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
G. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation operations, the trench width shall
be wider than the shield so that the shield is free to be lifted and then moved horizontally
without binding against the trench sidewalls. If the trench walls cave in or slough, the
trench shall be excavated as an open excavation with sloped sidewalls or with trench
shoring, as indicated and as required by the pipe structural design.
3.4 OVER -EXCAVATION NOT ORDERED OR INDICATED
A. Any over -excavation carried below the grade ordered or indicated, shall be backfilled
and compacted to the required grade with the indicated material.
3.5 EXCAVATION IN LAWN AREAS
A. Where excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed, dampened,
and stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material may be placed on the
lawn; provided, that a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the
lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours.
Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be
replaced and lightly rolled in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to
its original condition. CONTRACTOR shall provide new sod if stockpiled sod has not
been replaced within 72 hours.
3.6 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES
A. Except where trees are indicated to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury
during construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be cut
without express permission of the ENGINEER. Trees shall be supported during
excavation by any means previously reviewed by the ENGINEER.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated material at a site
selected by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed by the ENGINEER.
3.8 BACKFILL - GENERAL
A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be
placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to
withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures shall not be
placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water
while backfill is being placed.
B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in over -excavated areas or trenches, backfill
shall be placed after all water is removed from the excavation, and the trench sidewalls
and bottom have been dried to a moisture content suitable for compaction.
C. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation, and backfill
operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or
backfill and then moving the shield horizontally, The CONTRACTOR shall not drag
trench shields along the trench causing damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls,
the pipe, or the bedding and backfill.
D. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of
trenches and structure excavations shall have all loose sloughing, or caving soil and
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
rock materials removed. Trench sidewalls shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in
a relatively undisturbed condition before placement of backfill materials.
3.9 PLACING AND SPREADING OF BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is
achieved using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread so that when
compacted each layer shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness.
B. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote
uniformity of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread
around the pipe so that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform
bearing and side support.
C. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content,
water shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content is
achieved.
D. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the specified degree of
compaction the material shall be dried until the moisture content is satisfactory.
3.10 COMPACTION OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS
A. Each layer of Types A, B, C, G, H, I, and K backfill materials as defined herein, where
the material is graded such that 10 percent or more passes a No. 4 sieve, shall be
mechanically compacted to the indicated percentage of density. Equipment that is
consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used and
each layer shall be compacted over its entire area while the material is at the required
moisture content.
B. Each layer of Type E, F, and J backfill materials shall be compacted by means of at least
2 passes from a flat plate vibratory compactor. When such materials are used for pipe
zone backfill, vibratory compaction shall be used at vertical intervals of 24-inches,
measured in the uncompacted state. In addition, these materials shall be subjected to
vibratory compaction at the springline of the pipe and the top of the pipe zone backfill,
regardless of whether that dimension is less than 24-inches or not.
C. Fill on reservoir and structure roofs shall be deposited at least 30 days after the concrete
roof slab has been placed. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds when loaded
shall not be used on a roof. A roller weighing not more than 8,000 pounds shall be used
to compact fill on a roof.
D. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used for fill on roofs, backfill around structures,
backfill around reservoir walls, for final backfill materials, or aggregate base materials.
E. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to walls than a
horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power
compaction equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or
restricted due to weight limitations.
F. Backfill around and over pipelines that is mechanically compacted shall be compacted
using light, hand operated, vibratory compactors and rollers. After completion of at least
two feet of compacted backfill over the top of pipeline, compaction equipment weighing
no more than 8,000 pounds may be used to complete the trench backfill.
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-9
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
G. Compaction Requirements: The following compaction test requirements shall be in
accordance with ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soils Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft - Ibf/ft3) (2,700 kN-m/m) for Type A, B, C, G, H,
I, K, M, and N materials and in accordance with ASTM D 4253 - Standard Test Method
for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table, and D
4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density, for Type B, E, F, and J materials. Where agency or utility
company requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply.
Location or Use of Fill
Percentage of
Maximum
Density
Percentage of
Relative
Density
Pipe embedment backfill for flexible pipe
95
70
Pipe bedding and over -excavated zones under bedding
for flexible pipe, including trench plugs
95
70
Pipe embedment backfill for Steel Yard Piping
-
70
Pipe zone backfill portion above embedment for flexible
pipe
95
70
Pipe embedment backfill for rigid pipe
90
55
Pipe zone backfill portion above embedment for rigid
pipe
95
70
Pipe bedding and over -excavated zones under bedding
for rigid pipe
95
70
Final backfill, beneath paved areas or structures
95
70
Final backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures
90
55
Trench zone backfill, beneath paved areas and
structures, including trench plugs
95
70
Trench zone backfill, not beneath paved areas or
structures, including trench lugs
95
70
Embankments and fills
90
55
Embankments and fills beneath paved areas or
structures
95
70
Backfill beneath structures and hydraulic structures
95
70
Backfill and fill around structures on reservoir or
structure roof
90
55
Topsoil (Type K material
80
N.A.
Aggregate base or subbase (Type G or M material
95
N.A
3.11 PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Pipe Zone Backfill:
The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying
between a plane below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point above
the top surface of the pipe as indicated. The bedding is defined as that portion of
pipe zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and the bottom of the pipe.
The embedment is defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill material between
the bedding and a level line as indicated.
2. After compacting the bedding the CONTRACTOR shall perform a final trim using a
stringline for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be
continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe.
Excavation for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required.
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-10
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC.
DWRF Odor Control
1-oCaGa1feRWIXx...._.s-,..,.,.....,.z.,...�a..._...,_.,._M:-...,�e°.n�sR.
AAA'77..
FUMwa;3.1!`!,
0314-
30" Pipe Supports
Pump Place Mat Foundation
- -
31
31
Finish. Rough
-
- -
Uquid Curing Compounds
0320-
Air Chase Walls 1 (same height)
Job Built with PWarm 0-4'
0 -
0
Strip d Oil Wall Forms
-
WaN Bulkhead Forms
0 -
-
Wall Reber
298 -
- -
298
4000 psi Concrete -
- 375 -
- -
375
Pump Place Walls
- -
- 42
42
Finish• Top of Wag 6 Curb
-
- -
GrinavPatch Wags
- -
Uquld Curing Compounds
.
Hydrophilic Wateretop
907
-
907
0320-
Air Chase Walls (varied height)
Job Built with Pyform 0.4'
0
- 638
638
Strip 6 Oil Wall Form
-
Wall Reber
283 -
- - -
283
4000 psi Concrete
- 356 -
- -
366
Truck Place Walla
Finish- Top or Wail 6 Curb
- -
- -
GrindNttch walls
- -
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
Hydrophilic Weteretop
1,512 -
- - -
1,512
0320-
Walls Type B
Panel Form System 0.4-
0
0
Panel Form System "'
0 -
0
Strip a oil Wall Forms
-
- -
Chomlar
0
-
Wag Reber
1.155 -
- -
1,155
4000 psi Concrete
- 1,455 -
- -
1,455
Pump Place Walls
- -
- 162
162
Finish- Top of Wall & Curb
- -
- -
GrkWrPatch Walls
-
-
Uqukd Curing Compounds
- -
-
Waterstop 6'Flat
241 -
- -
241
0320-
Walls Type A
Panel Form Sysem 04'
0
0
Panel Form System "'
0
- 0
Strip 6 ON KWI Forms -
Wail Bulkhead Forms
0
- -
Chamfar
0
.
Wall Reber
5,176 -
- -
5.176
4000 psi Concrete
6.523 -
- -
6,523
Pump Piece Wells
- -
- 726
725
Finish- Top o/Wan d Curb
-
-
Grind4Pstch Wails
- -
Uqukl Curing Compounds
-
Waterstop 6'Flat
1,118 -
- -
1,118
0320-
Walls Type C
Panel Form Systen 8-12'
0
0
Shcp d ON Well Forms
-
- -
Wag Sul~ Forms
0
Wall Reber
1,625 -
- -
1,626
4WD psi Concrete
- 2.048 -
- -
2.048
Pump Place Walk
- 228
228
Finish. Top o/Well 6 Curb
-
Odfn' diPatch Wags
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
Page 12
9:10 AM
The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. The
CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating,
cathodic bonds, and the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations.
4. If a moveable trench shield is used during backfill operations the shield shall be
lifted to a location above each layer of backfill material prior to compaction of the
layer. The CONTRACTOR shall not displace the pipe or backfill while the shield is
being moved.
B. Trench Zone Backfill: After the pipe zone backfills have been placed, backfilling of the
trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical
trench cross-section lying as indicated between a plane above the top surface of the
pipe and a plane at a point 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is
under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade.
C. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross -sectional area within 18
inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within 18 inches
of the roadway subgrade.
D. Identification Tape: Install identification tape as required by OWNER.
3.12 FILL AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
A. The area where a fill or embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all
vegetation, roots and foreign material. Following this, the surface shall be moistened,
scarified to a depth of 6 inches, and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted.
Embankment and fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in approximately
horizontal layers. Each layer shall be moistened or aerated, as necessary. Unless
otherwise approved by the ENGINEER, each layer shall not exceed 6 inches of
compacted thickness. The embankment, fill, and the scarified layer of underlying ground
shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density under structures and paved
areas, and 90 percent of maximum density elsewhere.
B. When an embankment or fill is to be made and compacted against hillsides or fill slopes
steeper than 4:1, the slopes of hillsides or fills shall be horizontally benched to key the
embankment or fill to the underlying ground. A minimum of 12 inches normal to the slope
of the hillside or fill shall be removed and re -compacted as the embankment or fill is
brought up in layers. Material thus cut shall be re -compacted along with the new
material. Hillside or fill slopes 4:1 or flatter shall be prepared in accordance with
Paragraph A, above.
C. Where embankment or structure fills are constructed over pipelines, the first 4 feet of fill
over the pipe shall be constructed using light placement and compaction equipment that
does not damage the pipe. Heavy construction equipment shall maintain a minimum
distance from the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the trench until at least 4 feet
of fill over the pipe has been completed.
3.13 FIELD TESTING
A. General: All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the OWNER's
choice at the OWNER's expense except as indicated below.
B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density,
the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-11
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Method C of ASTM D 1557. Where cohesionless, free draining soil material is required
to be compacted to a percentage of relative density, the calculation of relative density
will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and D 4254. Field density in -place
tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for
Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method, ASTM D 2922 -
Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place By Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth), or by such other means acceptable to the ENGINEER.
C. In case the test of the fill or backfill show non-compliance with the required density, the
CONTRACTOR shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to ensure
compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory
selected by the OWNER and paid by the CONTRACTOR.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide test trenches and excavations including excavation,
trench support, and groundwater removal for the OWNER'S field soils testing operations.
The trenches and excavations shall be provided at the locations and to the depths
required by the OWNER. Lawn areas destroyed by test trenching and excavation shall
be regraded and relandscaped with sod.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 EARTHWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02200-12
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 02460 - A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
PART1--GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide A.C. pavement and base, complete and in place, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards:
AASHTO M 82 Cut -Back Asphalt (Medium Curing Type)
AASHTO M 140 Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M 208 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M 226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
ASTM D 242 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 692 Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 977 Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 1073 Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 1188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures Using Paraffin -Coated Specimens
ASTM D 1557 Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil - Aggregate Mixtures
Using 10-lb (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in (45-mm) Drop7
ASTM D 2027 Cutback Asphalt (Medium Curing Type)
ASTM D 2397 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures using Saturated Surface -Dry Specimens.
ASTM D 3381 Viscosity -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement
Construction
ASTM D 3515 Hot -Mixed, Hot -Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Include
materials testing reports, job -mix formulas, and other pertinent information satisfactory to
the ENGINEER.
MWH-4/5/2007 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02460-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Suitability Tests of Proposed Materials: Tests for conformance with the Specifications
shall be performed prior to start of the WORK. The samples shall be identified to show
the name of the material, aggregate source, name of the supplier, contract number, and
the segment of the WORK where the material represented by the sample is to be used.
Results of all tests shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Materials to be
tested shall include aggregate base, coarse and fine aggregate for paving mixtures,
mineral filler, and asphalt cement.
C. Trial Batch: Before placing any paving material, a testing laboratory acceptable to the
ENGINEER shall prepare a trial batch of asphalt concrete for each job -mix formula to be
used by the CONTRACTOR for the work. The trial batch shall be prepared using the
aggregates and asphalt cement proposed by the CONTRACTOR, and approved by the
ENGINEER. The compacted trial batch shall provide a basis for computing the voids
ratio, provide an indication of the optimum asphalt content, and establish a basis for
controlling compaction during construction. The cost of not more than two laboratory trial
batch tests will be paid by the OWNER but the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
the materials. Performing and paying for any additional trial batch testing shall be the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE
A. Materials for aggregate base shall be Type G material in accordance with Section 02200
-Earthwork.
2.2 PRIME COAT
A. Prime coat shall be Grade SC-250 liquid asphalt complying with the requirements of
AASHTO M 82 (ASTM D 2027). Grade SC-70 liquid asphalt may be used when
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2.3 TACK COAT
A. Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt Grade SS-1 or SS-1 h, CSS-1 or CSS-1 h diluted
with one part water to one part emulsified asphalt, undiluted asphalt Grade RS-1 or
CRS-1, or paving asphalt Grade AR-1000. Emulsified asphalt shall comply with the
requirements of AASHTO M 140 (ASTM D 977) or M 208 (ASTM D 2397); paving
asphalt shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 226 (ASTM D 3381).
2.4 ASPHALT CEMENT
A. Asphalt Cement shall be Grade AR-2000 or AR-4000 complying with the requirements of
AASHTO M226 (ASTM D 3381).
2.5 ASPHALT -AGGREGATE MIXTURE
A. Base Course Mixture: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a job -mix formula
for each mixture. The job -mix formula for the asphalt -aggregate base course mixture
shall be within the following limits:
MWH-4/5/2007 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02460-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Sieve Size
Total Percent Passing by Weight
3/4-inch
100
1/2-inch
70 — 95
3/8-inch
60 — 88
No. 4
44 — 72
No. 8
30 — 58
No. 30
12 — 34
No. 200
3-9
1. Asphalt Content: 5.75 percent by weight of total mix
B. Base Course Mixture Test Criteria: The asphalt -aggregate base course mixture shall
meet the following test criteria:
Stability Marshall, AASHTO T-245
2000 lb., minimum
Flow, 0.01-inch Marshall, AASHTO T-245
8 min. — 18 max.
Stability Hveem, AASHTO T-246
37, minimum
Swell, Hveem, AASHTO T-246
0.030 in. max.
Air Voids, total mix
3 to 6 percent
Index of Retained Strength AASHTO T-165, T167
80% minimum
Voids in Mineral Aggregate
14 percent, minimum
Minimum Asphalt Content
5.75 percent by wei ht of mixture
C. Surface Course Mixture: The job -mix formula for the asphalt -aggregate surface course
mixture shall be within the following limits:
Sieve Size
Total Percent Passing by Weight
3/4-inch
—
1/2-inch
100
3/8-inch
74 — 95
No. 4
50 — 78
No. 8
32 — 60
No. 30
12 — 34
No. 200
3-9
1. Asphalt Content: 5-6'/2 percent, ±0.5% by weight of total mix
D. Surface Course Mixture Test Criteria: The asphalt -aggregate surface course mixture
shall meet the following test criteria:
Stability Marshall, AASHTO T-245
2000 lb., minimum
Flow, 0.01-inch Marshall, AASHTO T-245
8 min. —18 max.
Stability Hveem, AASHTO T-246
37, minimum
Swell, Hveem, AASHTO T-246
0.030 in. max.
Air Voids, total mix
3 to 6 percent
Index of Retained Strength AASHTO T-165, T167
80% minimum
Voids in Mineral Aggregate
15 percent, minimum
Minimum Asphalt Content
5.75 percent by weight of mixture
Stability Marshall
1800 lb., minimum
Flow Marshall Method
0.08 to 0.16 inch
Air Voids
3 to 5 percent
Voids in Mineral Aggregate
14 percent
MWH-4/5/2007 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02460-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
E. Asphalt -Aggregate Mixture Tolerances: The following tolerances for the job -mix
formula will be allowed per single test:
Passing Sieve
Maximum Size
Passing No. 8 and larger sieves
No. 8 to 200
Passing No. 200
Asphalt Content
Discharge Mix Temperature
Percent
plus and minus 0
plus and minus 8
plus and minus 6
plus and minus 3
plus and minus 0.5
plus and minus 20.5 degrees F
F. Results of single extraction and sieve tests shall not be used as the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection of the mixture. Any variation from the job -mix formula greater
than the tolerances shown above shall be investigated and the conditions causing the
variations corrected.
2.6 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
A. Pavement marking paint shall be a product specifically formulated for use on asphalt
concrete pavement and shall have a proven record of performance and durability.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 02200 - Earthwork as
applicable to roadways and embankments. The surface of the subgrade after
compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth and true to grade and cross-section.
Subgrade for pavement shall not vary more than 0.02-foot from the indicated grade and
cross section. Subgrade for base material shall not vary more than 0.04-foot from the
indicated grade and cross section.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE
A. Aggregate base shall be provided where indicated to the thickness indicated. Imported
aggregate bases shall be delivered to the Site as uniform mixtures and each layer shall
be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided and the base shall be free of
pockets of coarse or fine material. Where the required thickness is 6 inches or less, the
base materials may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required
thickness is more than 6 inches; the base material shall be spread and compacted in two
or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted
thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6 inches. The relative compaction of each
layer of aggregate base shall be not less than 95 percent of maximum density when
measured in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The compacted surface of the finished
aggregate shall be hard, uniform, smooth and at any point shall not vary more than 0.02
foot from the indicated grade or cross-section.
3.3 PRIME COAT
A. Prior to placing of pavement a prime coat of cutback asphalt shall be applied to the
compacted base or subgrade at a rate between 0.10 and 0.25 gal/sq yd.
MWH-4/5/2007 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02460-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3.4 TACK COAT
A. A tack coat shall be applied to existing paved surfaces where new asphalt concrete is to
be placed on existing pavement. It shall also be applied to the contact surfaces of all
cold pavement joints, curbs, gutters, manholes and the like immediately before the
adjoining asphalt pavement is placed. Care shall be taken to prevent the application of
tack coat material to surfaces that will not be in contact with the new asphalt concrete
pavement. Diluted emulsified asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal/sq
yd. Undiluted emulsified asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.025 to 0.075 gal/sq yd.
Paving asphalt shall be applied at the rate of approximately 0.05 gal/sq yd.
3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. At the time of delivery to the Site, the temperature of mixture shall not be lower than 260
degrees F or higher than 320 degrees F, the lower limit to be approached in warm
weather and the higher in cold weather.
B. Asphalt concrete shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 40
degrees F or during unsuitable weather.
C. The asphalt concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base to such a depth
that, after rolling, it will be of the required cross section and grade of the course being
constructed.
D. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be
accomplished in a single, continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical
spreading and finishing machine designed specially for that purpose. The machine shall
be equipped with a screed or strike -off assembly capable of being accurately regulated
and adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite pre -determined thickness.
When paving is of a size or in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is
impractical, the ENGINEER may waive the self-propelled requirement.
E. Spreading, once commenced, shall be continued without interruption.
F. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a steel -wheeled
tandem roller, steel three -wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic -tired roller shall
follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic -
tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall eliminate
marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for the roller, a vibrating plate compactor
or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction.
G. Upon completion the pavement shall be true to grade and cross-section. When a 10-ft
straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the center of the roadway, the
surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8-in except at
intersections or changes of grade. In the transverse direction, the surface shall not vary
from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/4-in.
H. The relative density after compaction shall be 95 percent of the density obtained by
using ASTM D 1188 or D 2726. A properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device shall
be used for determining the field density of compacted asphalt concrete, or slabs or
cores may be laboratory tested in accordance with ASTM D 1188.
MWH-4/5/2007 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02460-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3.6 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Pavement marking paint shall be applied where indicated only when the pavement
surface is dry and clean, and when the air temperature is above 40 degrees F. All
equipment used in the application of pavement marking shall produce stripes and
markings of uniform quality with clean and well-defined edges that conform to the details
and dimensions indicated. Drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material
tracked by traffic shall be immediately removed from the pavement surface by methods
previously reviewed by the ENGINEER.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02460-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 02490 - PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide precast concrete manholes and vaults, complete and
in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 443
ASTM C 478
ASTM C 923
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Portland Cement
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe,
Using Rubber Gaskets
Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals
A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 -Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
Show dimensions, locations, lifting inserts, reinforcement, and joints.
2. Structural design calculations for vaults, signed by a registered engineer.
C. Manufacturer's Certification for Vaults: Written certification that the vault complies
with the requirements of this Section.
D. Manufacturer's Test Results: Pull out force for manhole steps.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: After installation, the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that manholes and
vaults have been properly installed, level, with tight joints, at the correct elevations and
orientations, and that the backfilling has been carried out in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANHOLES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide precast manhole sections and conical sections
conforming to ASTM C 478 and the requirements of this Section. Adjusting rings shall be
standard items from the manufacturer of the manhole sections. Minimum wall thickness
of rings shall be 4-inches if steel reinforced and 6-inches if not reinforced.
MWH-4/5/2007 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02490-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Axial length of sections shall be selected to provide the correct total height with the
fewest joints.
C. Conical sections shall be designed to support cast iron frames and covers under an H-
20 loading, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Where the manhole barrel diameter is greater than 48-inches, a flat slab -transition,
either concentric or eccentric, shall be used to transition to 48-inch diameter riser
sections. Underside of the transition shall be at least 7-feet above the top of the bench.
E. Design Criteria: Manhole walls, transitions, conical sections, and base shall be
designed per ASTM C 478 for the depths indicated and the following:
1. AASHTO H-20 loading applied to the cover.
2. Unit weight of soil of 125 pcf located above all portions of the manhole.
3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil producing 100 pcf acting on an empty
manhole.
4. Internal fluid pressure based on unit weight of 63 pcf with manhole filled from invert
to cover with no balancing external soil pressure.
5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by the base and transition.
6. Additional reinforcing steel in walls to transfer stresses at openings.
7. The minimum clear distance between the edges of any 2 wall penetrations shall be
12-inches or one-half the diameter of the smaller penetration, whichever is greater.
F. Joints shall be sealed with o-ring gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443.
G. Concrete for base and channel formation shall be 4000 psi concrete conforming to
Section 03310 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
H. Barrel section to sewer pipe connections shall be sealed with resilient connectors
complying with ASTM C 923. Mechanical devices shall be stainless steel.
Manhole steps where shown on drawings shall be comprised of '/z-inch grade 60 steel
reinforcement rod encased in polypropylene copolymer plastic. Steps shall have tread
width of 14-inches. Furnish test results demonstrating step capability to resist a pull out
force of 2200 pounds. Provide PS2-PF Manhole Step by M.A. Industries, or equal.
J. Manhole Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. AMCOR, Inc.
2. Colorado Precast Concrete, Inc.
3. SEMA Precast, Inc.
MWH-4/5/2007 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02490-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 00525
WORK ORDER & NOTICE OF AWARD
TO: Hydro Construction Co., Inc.
WORK ORDER NUMBER:H-WTF-2007-10 PURCHASE ORDER: 770a5/(o
WORK TITLE: DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control
ENGINEER: MWH
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Link Mueller, Project Manager
NOTICE OF AWARD DATE: March 30,2007
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as OWNER)
WORK. You are hereby notified that your proposal dated March 22. 2007 for the Work
Order has been considered. Pursuant to your AGREEMENT with OWNER dated March 28,
2007 you have been awarded a Work Order for this Work Order description:
General Description of the Work: Construction of Preliminary and Solids Biofilters and
associated systems in accordance with drawings titled DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION
FACILITY ODOR CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS prepared by MWH, Inc. dated March 2007.
Work will include the installation of Owner provided aluminum covers for the primary
clarifiers and centrate tank. Construction of covers for' Headworks screw wells, Collection
Manhole, Distribution Box, Meter Pit, and NPT Screw Pumps. Installation of FRP ductwork
from the areas served to the biofilters including two fans per biofilter area is also included.
2. CONTRACT PRICE, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATES. The Price of your Work Order is not -
to -exceed FOUR MILLION, FOUR HUNDRED -ONE THOUSAND, THREE DOLLARS
($4.401.003.00). Pursuant to the AGREEMENT and the Contract Documents, Performance,
Payment Bonds and Insurance are required.
3. CONTRACT TIMES. Pursuant to the AGREEMENT and the Contract Documents, the
number of days or the date for Substantial completion of this Work Order is March 30,2008,
and, after Substantial Completion, the number of days or the date for Final Payment and
Acceptance is April 30, 2008.
4. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Pursuant to the AGREEMENT and the Contract Documents:
A. Substantial Completion: Five Hundred dollars ($500.00) for each calendar day or fraction
thereof that expires after March 30, 2008 until the Work is Substantially Complete.
B. Final Acceptance: After Substantial Completion, Three Hundred and fifty dollars
($350.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after April 30, 2008, until
the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance.
5/98 Section 00525 Page 1
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 13
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
Location Assemblyx
DiDerlptlod
-�• «
u�_ 1 � 1111 . f, �, ue..,�r
Li�w/9tiduYtt Nl 'Hit q' A'F� i0sJ11n0fYbf
0320-
Walls Type C
Waterstop 6" Flat
574
-
-
-
574
0326-
Pilaster
Form Rectangle Columns 8- 12'
0
-
0
Strip & Oil Column Fors
_
Column Reber
170
-
-
_
170
4000 psi Concrete
-
190
-
_
190
Pump Place Piers & Columns
_
_
21
21
GrindiPatch Columns
_
-
LlquidCuringCompounds
0330 2-
Slab
Fire Grade Pads
591
-
-
-
591
Fill Gravel Process
333
5,967
-
113
-
6,414
Caulking Slab
0
0
648
-
-
648
0330 2-
Filet Slab
Caulking
0
0
192
-
-
192
0330 2-
SOG @ Equip Area
Fill Gravel Process
64
1,143
-
22
-
1,229
Bldg Excavation to stockpile
44
-
-
230
274
Bldg FYI Gravel
64
1,143
-
243
-
1,450
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0
0
460
-
-
460
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0
0
480
-
-
480
Trench Drain
408
911
-
17
-
1,336
0330 2-
SOG Blower Equipment
Fill Gravel Process
55
976
-
19
-
1,049
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
37
-
-
197
234
Bldg Foil Gravel
54
976
-
208
-
1,238
0330 2-
Hot Box Slab
Sleeves & Caulking
486
1,298
-
90
18
1.892
0330 2-
Sidewalk
Gravel Base - Sidewalk;
5
26
-
28
-
59
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0
0
40
-
-
40
0330 2-
Driveway
FYI Gravel Process
52
930
-
18
1.000
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
35
-
-
187
223
Bldg Fill Gravel
52
930
-
198
03302.
Slab
Fig Gravel Process
333
5,967
-
113
-
6,414
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
227
-
-
12M
-
1,427
Bldg FYI Gravel
- 332
5,967
-
7,2�
-
7,569
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
_
_
0
S-O-G ConsrJoMts < 1'
0
0
Ship & 08 SOG Form
_
BOG Reber
8,917
-
-
-
8,917
Mash Support - bricks
229
-
-
229
-
4000 psi Concrete
-
11,832
_
_
11,832
Pump Place Slab on Grade
-
-
-
1,315
1,315
Finish. Broom
Liquid Curing Compounds
_
_
Hydrophilic Waterstop
1,021
-
-
1.021
Caulking Slab
0
0
60
-
-
648
03102.
Filet Slab
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
_
0
S-O-G Canal hints < 1'
0
0
Strip & oil BOG Form
BOG Reber
2,763
-
-
-
2,763
Mesh Support - bricks
117
_
_
117
3000 psi Concrete
-
3.594
-
-
3,684
Pump Piece Slab on Grade
-
_
407
407
2.2 FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Castings: Castings for manhole frames and covers shall be non -rocking and shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30. Unless otherwise indicated, cast
iron covers and frames shall be heavy traffic type, 24 or 30 inches in diameter as shown
on drawings, with embossed lettering to meet the requirements of the City or the local
utility company. Frame and cover shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading.
B. Castings Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Alhambra Foundry Co., Ltd.
2. Neenah Foundry Co.
3. Vulcan Foundry, Inc
2.3 VAULTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide precast vaults designed for the indicated applications
and of the sizes indicated.
B. The minimum structural member thickness for vaults shall be 5-inches. Cement shall be
Type V portland cement as specified in ASTM C 150. The minimum 28-day concrete
compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. All reinforcing steel shall be embedded in the
concrete with a minimum clear cover as recommended by ACI 318.
C. Design Loading: Vaults in areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be designed for H-20
traffic loading. Vaults in other areas shall be designed for a vertical live load of 300 psf.
Lateral loads on vaults in all areas shall be calculated from:
L = 90 h, plus surcharge of 240 psf in areas of vehicular traffic
Where L = loading in psf
h = depth of fill in feet
D. Where joints are designed in pre -cast concrete vaults, such joints shall be interlocking to
secure proper alignment between members and prevent migration of soil through the
joint. Structural sections at joints shall be sized sufficiently to reinforce the section
against localized distress during transportation and handling and against excess contact
bearing pressures through the joint.
E. Where openings for access to the vault are required, the full clear space opening
indicated shall be provided, without obstructions from brackets or supports. For large
openings where brackets or supports are designed to protrude into the opening for
support of required covers, such brackets or supports shall be designed to be easily
removed and replaced with a minimum of effort and without cutting or welding.
F. Covers for access openings shall be provided. Frames for covers shall be fabricated
from steel, galvanized after fabrication, and shall be integrally cast into the vault
concrete sections. All covers shall be tight fitting to prevent the entrance of dirt and
debris. Where edge seams are permitted, no gaps greater than 1/16-inch between
edges will be accepted. All covers, except round, heavy -weight, cast iron manhole
MWH-4/5/2007 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02490-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
covers, shall have securing mechanisms to hold the covers firmly in place against the
effects of repetitious live loads such as pedestrian or vehicle traffic.
G. Where penetration of the pre -cast concrete vault are required for piping, conduit, or
ducts, such penetrations shall be accommodated through pre -cast openings or thin -wall
knock -out sections. All openings for penetrations shall be smooth and free of surface
irregularities and without exposed steel reinforcing. Vaults need not be designed to resist
thrust from piping passing through the vault.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Pre -cast concrete sections shall be transported and handled with care in accordance
with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Where lifting devices are provided in
pre -cast sections, such lifting devices shall be used as intended. Where no lifting
devices are provided, the CONTRACTOR shall follow the manufacturer's
recommendations for lifting procedures to provide proper support during lifting.
B. Buried pre -cast concrete vaults shall be assembled and placed in excavations on
properly compacted soil foundations as indicated. Pre -cast concrete vaults shall be set
to grade and oriented to provide the required dimensions and clearances from pipes and
other structures.
C. Prior to backfilling, all cracks and voids in pre -cast concrete vaults shall be filled with
non -shrink grout or polyurethane sealant, or both. Around pipe and conduit penetrations,
openings shall be sealed with polyurethane sealant. With the authorization of the
ENGINEER, grout or a closed -cell flexible insulation may be used as filler material prior
to placing a final bed of polyurethane sealant.
D. Steps where shown on drawings shall be driven into tapered holes formed in the
concrete by inserts from the step manufacturer or 1-inch holes drilled 3-3/4 inches deep
into the manhole wall in the field. No more than 6-1/8 inches of plastic arm, measured on
the inside of the step, shall be exposed outside the concrete.
E. Steps shall be installed 12-inches on centers vertically, not more than '/2 inch out of
plumb. The top step shall be no more then 12-inches below the manhole cover.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02490-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 02591 - POLYETHYLENE LARGE DIAMETER PROFILE WALL NONPRESSURE
PIPE (ASTM F 894, MODIFIED)
PART1--GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all 18- to 120-inch inside diameter polyethylene (PE)
pipe of profile wall construction and with integral bell joints for use in low pressure (up to
25-ft hydrostatic head) and gravity flow applications and all appurtenant work, complete
in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards:
ASTM D 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and
Cable
ASTM D 1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/fe)
ASTM D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow
Applications
ASTM F 477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 894 Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and
Drain Pipe
ASTM F 1417 Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines
Using Low -Pressure Air
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Certified dimensional drawings of pipe and fittings.
2. Layout drawings for pipe, joints, bends, special fittings, and appurtenances.
3. Material testing reports.
4. Report of testing required by ASTM F 894.
C. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificates for all materials indicating conformance to the
Contract Documents.
MWH-4/5/2007 POLYETHYLENE LARGE DIAMETER PROFILE WALL NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02591-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing: All materials testing shall be based upon applicable ASTM test methods `
referenced herein. A report of the test results shall be furnished.
B. Costs of such tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR as part of the WORK.
C. The pipe shall be tested for dimensions, ring stiffness constant (RSC), flattening, and
joint tightness, in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F 894. A report of the test
results shall be furnished.
D. Mandrel Test: A mandrel test shall be performed on all pipe smaller than 36-inch
diameter after backfilling and compacting but prior to final paving and prior to leakage
testing. A rigid mandrel with a circular cross section having a diameter of at least 95
percent of the average inside diameter shall be pulled through the pipe by hand. The
minimum length of the circular portion of the mandrel shall be equal to the nominal
diameter of the pipe. If the mandrel sticks in the pipe at any point the pipe shall be
repaired and retested.
E. Deflection Test: Pipe 36-inches and larger shall be checked for deflection after
backfilling and compacting but prior to final paving and prior to leakage testing. At every
point within the pipe, the measured vertical inside diameter shall not be less than 95
percent of the average inside diameter.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pipe furnished under this section shall be marked in accordance with the requirements
of ASTM F 894.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish certification that the pipe was manufactured, sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with ASTM F 894 and has met the requirements of
that standard.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All pipe and fittings shall be made of high density, high molecular weight polyethylene
pipe material meeting the requirements of Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34, as
defined in ASTM D 1248. Clean rework material generated by the manufacturer's own
production may be used so long as the pipe or fittings produced meet all of the
requirements of ASTM F 894. To ensure joint quality and compatibility, pipe and fittings
to be produced by the same manufacturer.
B. All pipe classifications shall be rated for a minimum Ring Stiffness Class (RSC) of 63. All
fittings classifications shall be rated for a minimum Ring Stiffness Class (RSC) of 160.
C. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by the use of integral bell joints with a gasket
compressed between the spigot and belled ends of the pipe or by thermal welding of the
bell and spigot pipe ends. Elastomeric gaskets shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM F 477. Material used for thermal welding shall meet the requirements established
for the pipe base material.
MWH-4/5/2007 POLYETHYLENE LARGE DIAMETER PROFILE WALL NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02591-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
D. Flanged Connections:
1. HDPE Plate Flange to be drilled in field to match mating hole pattern.
2. Wound Flange with back-up ring meeting an ANSI B16.1, 125-lb. Drilling pattern.
3. Flange gaskets shall be full faced, 3/8-in thick rubber or elastomer of 60 durometer
hardness.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All laying, jointing, testing for defects and for leakage, shall be performed in the
presence of the ENGINEER, and shall be subject to its approval before acceptance. All
material found to have defects will be rejected and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly
remove such defective material from the Site.
3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Handling: Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be carefully inspected before and after
installation and those found defective shall be rejected. Pipe and fittings shall be free
from fins and burrs. Before being placed in position, pipe, fittings, and accessories shall
be cleaned and shall be maintained in a clean condition. Proper facilities shall be
provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under no circumstances shall pipe,
fittings, or any other material be dropped or dumped into trenches.
B. After unloading and before installation, pipe shall be stored on flat, level ground with no
rocks, timbers or other objects under the pipe. The maximum stacking height for various
diameters of pipe is:
18- to 21-inch diameter 4 rows
24- to 30-inch diameter 3 rows
33- to 48-inch diameter 2 rows
54-inch and larger 1 row
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2321 and the applicable
requirements of Section 02200 - Earthwork, instructions furnished by the pipe
manufacturer, and to the requirements herein. Wherever the requirements are in conflict,
the more stringent shall apply.
B. The minimum backfill compaction in the pipe zone shall be 90% of maximum density per
ASTM D 1557. Where pipe is located beneath roads, compact backfill to a minimum of
95% of maximum density per ASTM D 1557. HDPE profile pipe shall not be subject to
roller or wheel loads until a minimum of one diameter or 36" (whichever is larger) of
backfill has been placed over the top of the pipe.
C. Bell -and -spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Pipe
shall be graded in straight lines, taking care to avoid the formation of any dips or low
points. Pipe shall not be laid when the conditions of trench or weather are unsuitable. At
the end of each day's work, open ends of pipe shall be closed temporarily with watertight
plugs or bulkheads.
MWH-4/5/2007 POLYETHYLENE LARGE DIAMETER PROFILE WALL NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02591-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
D. Pipe shall be supported at its proper elevation and grade, care being taken to secure
firm and uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. The full length of
each section of pipe and fittings shall rest solidly on the pipe bed, with recessed
excavation to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Anchors and supports shall be
provided where necessary and where indicated.
E. Where unstable trench walls or trench bottom is encountered, such as may be found by
excavation below ground water, this condition shall be stabilized before laying the pipe.
Depending on the severity of the condition, the CONTRACTOR may elect to use tight
sheeting, stay bracing, a trench box, well points, an underdrain, removal of the unstable
soil and replacement with a suitable foundation material, or a combination of methods.
3.4 FIELD JOINTING
A. With the gasket properly placed in the spigot groove, the gasket shall be stress -relieved
by passing a screwdriver under the gasket and then around the circumference of the
spigot.
B. The pipe ends shall be wiped clean and a thin coat of lubricant applied to both the
outside surface of the spigot end with the gasket in place, and the inside surface of the
bell end. Lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall not be used. The end of
the pipe shall then be forced into the bell end of the adjoining pipe. A backhoe bucket or
a cable winch may be used, but the force shall be steady, not an impact force, and shall
be evenly distributed so as not to damage the pipe end.
C. The pipe shall not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
D. If thermal welding is used to joint bell and spigot ends, the joint shall be assembled in
accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedure.
3.5 TESTING
A. Ductwork shall be leak tested after installation in accordance with the National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems,
a publication offered by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
B. The maximum allowable leakage criteria shall be in accordance with ASHRAE
standards.
3.6 CLEANING
A. At the conclusion of the Work, the pipeline shall be cleaned to remove all dirt, stones,
pieces of wood, and other material that may have entered during the construction period.
All debris and obstructions shall be removed.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4(5/2007 POLYETHYLENE LARGE DIAMETER PROFILE WALL NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02591-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 02595 - SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS
(ASTM D 3034, MODIFIED)
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide PVC solid wall nonpressure pipe and appurtenant
work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. This Section covers pipe from 4- to 15-inches diameter nominal size.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings and laying diagrams
of pipe, joints, bends, special fittings, and piping appurtenances.
C. Samples: The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of the pipe and flexible coupling
proposed. The samples shall be clearly marked to show the manufacturer's name and
product identification and shall be submitted with the manufacturer's technical data and
application instructions.
D. Certificates: The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's certificate that pipe
conforms to these specifications.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, pipe
size, and minimum pipe stiffness in psi.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall also require the manufacturer to mark the date of extrusion on
the pipe. This dating shall be done in conjunction with records to be held by the
manufacturer for 2 years, covering quality control tests, raw material batch number, and
other information deemed necessary by the manufacturer.
2.2 PIPE
A. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings, SDR 35. Material for PVC pipe shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM D 1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds, for cell classification 12454-
E or 12454-C as defined therein.
B. Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212 - Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals. Elastomeric seals for compression type joints shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM F 477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic
Pipe or ASTM F 913 - Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic
Pipe.
MWH-4/5/2007 SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02595-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.3 FITTINGS
A. All fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034. The ring groove and
gasket ring shall be compatible with PVC pipe ends. The flanged fittings shall be
compatible with cast-iron or ductile iron pipe fittings.
B. The stiffness of the fittings shall be not less than the stiffness of adjoining pipe.
2.4 BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, material used for pipe bedding shall conform to Section
02200 - Earthwork.
2.5 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A. Flexible couplings shall be neoprene, full -circle, clamp -on type conforming to ASTM C
425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings and provided with two
stainless steel band screw -clamps to secure the coupling tightly to entering and exiting
pipes. All screw -clamp hardware shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
Neoprene material shall be suitable for sewage service.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200 -
Earthwork and the Drawings.
3.2 LAYING PIPE
A. The pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 -
Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and
Other Gravity -Flow Applications and as indicated. Pipe sections shall be closely jointed
to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final
position for jointings, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and
uniformity of slope.
B. Handling:
1. Handling of the PVC pipe shall be done with implements, tools, and facilities as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer to ensure that the pipe is not damaged in
any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading, and installation.
2. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the ditch and all
defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area.
3. Fittings shall be lowered into trench by means of rope, cable, chain, or other means
without damage. Cable, rope, or other devices used for lowering fitting into trench,
shall be attached around exterior of fitting for handling. Under no circumstances
shall the cable, rope, or other device be attached through the fitting interior for
handling or shall pipe or fittings be dropped or dumped into the trench.
C. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's standard procedures. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard
MWH-4/5/2007 SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02595-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
iron pipe cutter, or any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged,
uneven edges.
D. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering
into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings
in the pipeline shall be closed with watertight expandable type sewer plugs or PVC test
plugs at the end of each day's operation or whenever the pipe openings are left
unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be
permitted.
E. Adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures,
drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the WORK shall
be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
F. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such
as conduits, ducts, pipes, branch connections to main sewers, or main drains, the
obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the
CONTRACTOR in cooperation with owners of such utility structures. Unless otherwise
indicated, protection of existing utility structures shall be the CONTRACTOR's
responsibility.
3.3 FIELD JOINTING
A. Each pipe compression type joint shall be joined with a lock -in rubber ring and a ring
groove that is designed to resist displacement during pipe insertion.
B. The ring and the ring seat inside the bell shall be wiped clean before the gasket is
inserted. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the exposed surface of the ring and to
the outside of the clean pipe end. Lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall
not be used. The end of the pipe shall be then forced into the ring to complete the joint.
C. The pipe shall not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of the printed
recommendations of the manufacturer of the coupling.
D. Fittings shall be carefully connected to pipe, and joint shall be checked to insure a sound
and proper joint.
E. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent
trench water from entering pipe. Adequate backfill shall be deposited on pipe to prevent
floating of pipe. Any pipe that has floated shall be removed from the trench, cleaned, and
relaid in an acceptable manner. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the
ENGINEER, the trench conditions or weather are unsuitable.
3.4 TESTING
A. Field testing of gravity sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 01655 -
Gravity Pipeline Testing.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02595-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE
PAGE 02595-4
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 14
DWRF Odor Control 3/22(2007 9:10 AM
x �
^R�Om ir.::�9.1?,.i
,5 kd�'}lArw�w.t�r •.1�iw'«'J.a.�'�i .e u,.
i�.A��.. -�
.
0330 2-
Filet Slab
Finish -Broom
-
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
Hydrophilic Waterstop
302
-
302
Caulking
0
0
192
-
-
192
0330 2-
SOG @ Equip Area
Fig Gravel Process
64
1,143
-
22
-
1,229
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
44
-
-
230
-
274
Bldg Fill Gravel
64
1,143
-
243
-
1,450
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1
0
-
0
Strip 6 ON SOG Form
-
-
-
Asphalt Exp Joint 6" x 10
87
-
-
-
87
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0
0
460
-
460
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0
0
480
-
-
480
BOG Reber
1,357
-
-
-
1.357
Mesh Support - bricks
53
-
-
-
53
3000 psi Concrete
-
1,911
-
-
-
1.911
Truck Place Slab on Grade
Finish- Broom
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
-
-
Trench Drain
408
525
-
17
-
950
0330 2-
SOG Blower Equipment
Fig Gravel Process
55
976
-
19
-
1,049
-
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
37
-
-
197
-
234
Bldg Fit Gravel
54
976
-
208
-
1,238
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
-
-
0
Strip d ON SOG Form
-
-
-
SOG Reber
1,552
-
-
-
1.552,
Mesh Support - bricks
42
-
-
-
42
3000 psi Concrete
-
2,186
-
-
-
2,186
Truck piece With on Grade
-
-
-
Rnlsh- Brown
Liquid Curing Compounds
0330 2-
Hot Box Slab
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
-
-
0
Ship 6 ON SOG Form
Mesh Support - bricks
5
-
-
-
5
3000 psi Concrete
-
39
-
-
-
39
Truck Pine Slab on Grade
Finish -Brown
-
-
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
Sleeves3Coulft
486
1.298
-
90
18
1,892
03302.
Sidewalk
Gravel Base - Skk wahm
5
26
-
28
-
59
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
-
0
Strip 6 ON SOG Form
-
Asphalt Exp Joint 4' x 1l2"
4
-
-
-
4
Soak" At Expansion Joint
0
0
40
-
40
Mesh Support - bricks
5
-
-
-
5
3000 psi Concrete
-
122
122
Truck Ph" Slab on Grade
-
-
Rrdsh• Brown
-
-
-
Liquid Curing Compounds
0330 2•
Driveway
FBI Gravel Process
52
930
-
16
-
1,000
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
35
-
-
187
-
223
Bldg FRI Gravel
52
930
-
198
-
1.180
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
0
Strip 6 ON SOG Form
-
-
-
SOG Reber
5,046
-
-
-
5,046
SECTION 03310 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cast -in -place concrete, joints in concrete,
reinforcement steel and appurtenant work, formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, and
shall design and construct falsework, complete and in place, in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 -Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop bending diagrams, placing lists, and drawings of reinforcing steel prior to
fabrication.
2. Details of the concrete reinforcing steel and concrete inserts shall be submitted at
the earliest possible date after receipt by the CONTRACTOR of the Notice to
Proceed. Details of reinforcing steel for fabrication and erection shall conform to ACI
315-99 and the requirements herein. The shop bending diagrams shall show the
actual lengths of bars, to the nearest inch measured to the intersection of the
extensions (tangents for bars of circular cross section) of the outside surface.
Include bar placement diagrams which clearly indicate the dimensions of each bar
splice.
3. Where mechanical couplers are required or permitted to be used to splice
reinforcing steel, submit manufacturer's literature containing instructions and
recommendations for installation for each type of coupler used; certified test reports
which verify the load capacity of each type and size of coupler used; and Shop
Drawings that show the location of each coupler with details of how they are to be
installed in the formwork.
4. If reinforcement steel is spliced by welding at any location, submit mill test reports
that contain the information necessary for the determination of the carbon equivalent
per AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code — Reinforcing Steel. The CONTRACTOR
shall submit a written welding procedure for each type of weld for each size of bar
which is to be spliced by welding; merely a statement that AWS procedures will be
followed is not acceptable. The CONTRACTOR shall submit certifications of
procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used and welder qualifications,
for each welding procedure, and for each welder performing the WORK. Such
qualifications shall be as specified in AWS D1.4.
5. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance with requirements of the
following:
a. Waterstop
b. Neoprene sponge
c. Preformed joint filler
MWH-4/5/2007 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 03310-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
d. Backing rod
e. Bond breaker
f. Slip dowels
g. PVC tubing
h. Form ties and related accessories
Form gaskets
j. Form release agent
k. List of form materials and locations of use
I. Mill tests for cement
m. Admixture certification. Chloride ion content shall be included.
n. Aggregate gradation test results and certification
o. Materials and methods for curing
6. Placement drawings showing the location and type of joints for each structure.
C. Mix Designs: Prior to beginning the WORK, submit preliminary concrete mix designs
which shall show the proportions and gradations of materials proposed for each class
and type of concrete. The mix designs shall be checked by an independent testing
laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER. Costs related to such checking shall be the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility. When a water reducing admixture is to be used, the
CONTRACTOR shall furnish mix designs for concrete both with and without the
admixture.
D. Delivery Tickets: Where ready -mix concrete is used, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish
certified delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete. Each ticket shall
show the state certified equipment used for measuring, and the total quantities, by
weight, of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures, the amounts of water in
the aggregate, added at the batching plant, and the amount allowed to be added at the
Site for the specific design mix. In addition, each certificate shall state the mix number,
total yield in cubic yards, and the time of day to the nearest minute, corresponding to the
time when the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when it arrived at the Site,
when unloading began, and when unloading was finished.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing of Reinforcing Steel:
1. If requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples from
each heat of reinforcing steel in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests
will be paid by the OWNER. Costs of additional tests, if material fails initial tests,
shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
2. If requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples of each
type of welded splice used in the WORK in a quantity and of dimensions adequate
MWH-4/5/2007 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 03310-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
for testing. At the discretion of the ENGINEER, radiographic testing of direct butt
welded splices will be performed. The CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance
necessary to facilitate testing. The CONTRACTOR shall repair any weld that fails to
meet the requirements of AWS D1.4. The costs of testing will be paid by the
OWNER; but the costs of tests that fail to meet requirements shall be the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
B. Testing of Materials:
1. Tests on component materials and for compressive strength of concrete will be
performed as indicated herein. Tests for determining slump will be in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
2. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities,
abrasion resistance, and soundness in accordance with ASTM C 33 - Concrete
Aggregates.
3. The cost of laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete, will be paid by
the OWNER. However, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the cost of any additional tests
and investigations on WORK that does not meet the Specifications. The laboratory
will meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for
Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction
and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
4. Concrete for testing shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the
OWNER, and the CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining samples
and disposal and cleanup of excess material.
C. Field Compression Tests:
Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first
placement of each class of concrete herein and at intervals thereafter as selected by
the ENGINEER to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. Each set
of test specimens will be a minimum of 4 cylinders.
2. Compression test specimens for concrete will be made in accordance with Section
9.2 of ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field. Specimens will be 6-inches diameter by 12-inches high
cylinders.
3. Compression tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39 - Standard
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. One test
cylinder will be tested at 7 Days and 2 at 28 Days. The remaining cylinder will be
held to verify test results, if needed.
D. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete:
1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete will be
according to the requirements of ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete, Chapter 5 "Concrete Quality", and as indicated herein.
2. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall
be taken to increase the compressive strength for subsequent batches of the type of
concrete affected.
MWH-4/5/2007 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 03310-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject
to removal and replacement as part of the WORK.
E. Construction Tolerances: The CONTRACTOR shall set and maintain concrete forms
and perform finishing operations so that the concrete is within the tolerances herein.
Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished
from tolerances. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions
indicated. Where tolerances are not indicated, permissible deviations will be in
accordance with ACI 117 - Standard Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials.
1. The variation from required lines or grades shall not exceed '/.-inch in 10-feet and
there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface.
F. Waterstop Inspection: Waterstop field joints shall be subject to inspection, and no such
WORK shall be scheduled or started without having made prior arrangements with the
ENGINEER for the required inspections. Not less than 24 hours notice shall be given for
scheduling such inspections.
1. Field joints in waterstops shall be subject to inspection for misalignment, bubbles,
inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets, and other defects that would reduce the
potential resistance of the material to water at any point. Defective joints shall be
replaced with material that passes inspection; faulty material shall be removed from
the Site and destroyed.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS
A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the ENGINEER, lumber for use as forms,
shoring, or bracing shall be new material.
B. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following
requirements:
Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better,
in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber
Standard.
2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded,
exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially
for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS 1 - Construction
and Industrial Plywood for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed.
3. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not
adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape,
form, line, and grade required. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will
accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium
Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with
3/-inch chamfers or be tooled to a '/cinch radius. Re-entrant corners in concrete
members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated.
MWH-4/5/2007 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 03310-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 DIVISION 12
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 13550 - BIOFILTER MEDIA
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section specifies the materials and placement of biofilter media and
associated cover materials.
B. Type: The biofilter media shall be a blend of wood chips and yard waste compost as
specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Contractor Submittals.
B. For the biofilter media, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with
the provisions of the general conditions, the following items:
1. Samples of wood chips and yard waste compost to be used for the biofilter media.
Each sample shall be submitted in a full five (5) gallon bucket.
2. Sieve analysis of the wood chips to show compliance with the requirements of
paragraph 2.1
3. Analysis of the yard waste compost showing the following:
a. Total solids content;
b. Stability by both the CO2 respiration and Solvita test methods;
c. Volatile solids content;
d. pH;
e. Conductivity; and
f. Sieve size analysis.
4. Identification of the source(s) where the materials will be obtained
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood Chips:
1. Wood chips shall consist of the large fraction of ground wood that has been
screened through a %-inch screen to remove the fine material. The wood chips shall
be clean and free of non -wood material, such as plastic, glass, rock and metal, and
shall contain less than four -percent bark by weight.
2. The wood chips shall meet the following gradation requirements:
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER MEDIA
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 13550-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
4"
90% to 100%
3"
60% to 90%
2"
20% to 60%
<1"
10%
B. Yard Waste Compost:
The leaf or yard waste compost shall be produced through thermophilic forced
aeration or turned windrow composting process. The compost feedstock shall
consist of leaves, grass, ground brush and tree trimmings. The compost shall not
contain manure, biosolids, or industrial sludges. All compost shall be cured to the
point that it is no longer self -heating. The compost shall be free of subjective odor
caused by contaminants or ongoing decomposition.
2. The compost shall meet the following specifications:
Total Solids
35 to 55 percent
Volatile Solids
>25 percent
H
6.0 to 8.5
Soluble Salts
<5.0 mS/cm
Stability CO2 respiration test
<5.0 mg CO2-C1compost C/da
Stability Solvita test
aturity index 6 or higher
Man -Made Inert or Foreign Material
<1 percent by weight
Particle Size
100 percent passing 'Y2-inch sieve
C. Blended Media:
1. The biofilter media shall consist of a blend of three (3) parts wood chips and one (1)
part yard waste compost blended by volume. The material shall be thoroughly
wetted and completely blended before placement.
2. The Contractor is cautioned that after blending and wetting, the volume of the yard
waste compost will be significantly reduced such that the volume of the blended
media will essentially be the same as the original volume of wood chips. Hence,
Contractor shall ensure that there are sufficient amounts of wood chips and yard
waste compost to prepare the volume of blended media required to fill the biofilter
as shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 MEDIA BLENDING
A. The Contractor shall notify of the Engineer not less than five (5) days prior to the
blending of the medial is performed and the blending shall be performed in the
Engineer's presence. The wood chips and yard waste compost shall be thoroughly
mixed by means of a front-end loader and water shall be added to thoroughly wet the
mixture.
B. The following blending procedures shall be employed:
Place a bed of wood chips, (2/3 of the wood chips to be blended in the batch)
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER MEDIA
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 13550-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2. Add the compost to be blended in this batch to the wood chip bed.
3. Add the remaining wood chips over the compost.
4. With the front-end loader lift the material to the full reach of the loader and allow the
material to fall slowly by "feathering" the bucket.
5. While the material is falling, spray a high volume of water through it. A minimum 1-
'/s' hose is recommended.
C. The blending shall be done until the mixture has the appearance of a mud coated wood
chip with no clean wood visible.
3.2 MEDIA AND WOOD CHIP LAYER PLACEMENT
A. Media must be placed within one week of blending.
B. Placement of the biofilter media shall be done in the Engineer's presence. The media to
be placed shall consist of an initial six (6) inch layer of wood chips over the biofilter air
distribution floor, six (6) feet of blended media over the wood chips and then another six
(6) inch layer of wood chips over the blended media as shown on the Drawings.
C. Material must be placed by working in a small area at a time and placing all layers in that
small area before moving on. The layers may be placed by machine, but must be
dressed manually. At no time is any equipment allowed on any layer. No compacting of
material to dress or level the surface is allowed.
D. Media shall not be placed until after the surface irrigation system is installed and
functioning.
3.3 SMOKE TEST
A. Contractor shall perform smoke test in the presence of the Engineer at the following
occasions. Contractor to notify local fire department prior to testing, to ensure that no
action is taken with respect to a fire.
1. After completion of the placement of the aeration plenum, but before wood chip or
media placement.
2. After media and wood chip layers have been placed.
B. Prior to initial smoke test, the biofilter air distribution channel and floor beneath the
plenum shall be flushed clean and all of the plenum shall be inspected to ensure clear
openings. The smoke test cannot be performed until the ventilation fan and ductwork is
completely operable. The facility ventilation system must be used for the test. The use of
temporary fans for the test is not permitted. The Contractor shall supply enough smoke
bombs or other smoke generation equipment to smoke test the air distribution system for
a minimum of five (5) minutes to demonstrate the system's capability of even air
distribution. If the test should fail to show even air distribution, the Contractor, Engineer,
and Owner will work together to determine the required adjustment. The Contractor shall
then make the necessary adjustment or repair to the system and re -test the system until
satisfactory results are obtained.
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER MEDIA
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 13550-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Smoke test to be performed after media placement shall also be for a duration of at least
five (5) minutes. If uneven air distribution through the media should be observed, the
Contractor shall re -distribute the media material and re -test the system until satisfactory
test results are obtained.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER MEDIA
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 13550-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 13811 - BIOFILTER IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section specifies the irrigation system for the biofilter.
B. Type: The biofilter irrigation system shall include piping, valves, sprinkler heads and
controller. The irrigation system components shall be capable of handling chlorinated
non potable water.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The biofilter irrigation system will be used to periodically apply non -potable water to the
biofilter to maintain the moisture content of the biofilter media. Arrangement of the
irrigation and location of the system components shall be in accordance with the
Contract Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Contractor Submittals.
B. In accordance with the provisions of the general conditions, Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for review manufacture's descriptive literature and technical specifications
for the sprinkler heads, valves, controller and other components of the system.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Each sprinkler head shall be capable of delivering approximately 1.5 gallons per minute
of irrigation water to a radius of 24 feet. The sprinkler shall have an adjustable arc
coverage of 40 to 360 degrees. The arc adjustment shall be performed with or without
the sprinkler in operation. The rotor pop-up sprinkler nozzle shall have a pressure
activated multi -function wiper seal that positively seals against the pop-up stem.
Sprinkler heads shall be Rain Bird 3500-PC-SAM-N Series or approved equal:
2.2 VALVES AND PIPING
A. Piping and valves shall be as specified in Division 15. All solenoid valves shall have a
pressure regulating module and an accompanying manual valve as shown on the
drawings and shall be Rain Bird Model 100-PESBR — PRS —D or approved equal.
B. The irrigation system shall be equipped with air purge fittings for seasonal blowout of the
system.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. The irrigation system shall be controlled through the plant SCADA system. See
Instrumentation drawings and specifications. Each solenoid valve of the system will be
controlled independently in the system.
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER IRRIGATION SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 13811-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 15
DWRF Odor Control 3=12007 9:10 AM
Looatbn Assembly DoscAPtim -
I.�bOrAmbunt
u AihWit
0330 2-
Driveway
1r.hlduilt€
Mesh Support - bricks
79
4000 psi Concrete
-
8,360
-
_
79
Truck Place Slab on Grade
_
6,380
Flnisb- Broom
_
-
Uqu/d Curing Compounds
_
0334-
Air Chase Pipe Entry Slab
_-
Form Suspended Slab 0.15-
0
Slab Edge Form < 1'
- 0
-
-
0
Strip d OH Suspended Slab Firm
_
-
0
Suspended Slab Reber
-
60
4000 psi Concrete
-
101
-
_
60
Cane Place Suspended Slab
-
-
-
101
Finish. Broom
-
UgWd Curing Compounds
_
_
-
0354•
Fan Equipment Pad
Equipment Pad Form 6'
29
0
4
10
42
Set Anchor Brits 2 Set
29
72
-
4
0
104
0354-
Fan Equipment Pad
Equipment Pad Form 6"
29
0
-
4
Strip 8 00 Equipment Pad Form
10
42
Chamfer
0
'
Set Anchor Bolts 2 Set
29
72
-
4
Misc. Pad Reber
9
42
_
t04
4000 psi Concrete
_
53
-
-
-
51
Truck Place Equipment Pads
5
_
-
53
Finnish- Float
_
-
-
-
6
Uquld Curing Compounds
150-55 80
Fan Drains
Paint Pipe - Standard Paint
0
0
PVC Hanger Band 1
57
36
_
_
_
C Clamp Blk WAk Nut 3/8
9
25
-
-
-
93
Rod All Thread Blk 3/8
15
32
-
_
_
34
Weather Round Blk 318
9
3
-
_
47
Nut Heavy Hex 81k 3/8
9
4
-
-
-
12
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
35
0
-
-
-
15
-
4
13
54
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
6
0
PVC 80 Coupling SxS 1
2
0
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
4
0
-
2
.
_
_
4
unassigned
Material Testing
200
Material Testing
200
-
_
2,000
_
Z00
2,200
Material Testing -Pipe
400
-
6,220
100
60
6,770
Site Exc Earth-Badkhoe/Truck
267
-
-
1.968
134
2,368
Site Fill EarB.Backhce/hudc
312
694
785
1,792
Landscape Gravel
144
531
-
140
-
815
Augered Hobs
175
-
-
121
-
296
Other Misc. Pipe Quote
'Remove
5,905
_
-
5,905
Hydrants 8 Reset (ADD)-
360
1,800
-
200
s0
2.410
HOPE Pipe Owls
81,001
-
_
81,001
conc Curb
o
o
5,805
o
-
s,eos
Warning Sign -
25
35
0
6o
Weed Barrier - Polyethylene
200
300
0
Steel Edging Strips
64
160
-
-
35
-
-
500
249
Anchor Bolts
12
100
-
5
117
Non Shrink Grout
6o
180
-
240
Sub - Concrete
0
128,184
0
0
128,184
Flowlill Q Utility Crossings
-
1,950
-
1,950
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the biofilter irrigation system shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers' instructions and as shown on the Drawings. All control circuitry passing
through walls or beneath pavement shall be installed in a suitable sleeve; in all other
locations install in a pipe trench and protect the pipe whenever possible. Provide positive
electrical motoring grounding.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test the entire system at the normal working pressure. Promptly repair any leaks and
retest the system. The Contractor shall adjust the sprinkler heads for complete coverage
as shown on the drawings.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER IRRIGATION SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 13811-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
DIVISION 14 -
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
(NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 DIVISION 14
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 DIVISION 14
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15000 - PIPING, GENERAL
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the piping systems indicated, complete and operable,
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to piping sections in Divisions 2 and 15.
C. The mechanical Drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of
support, pipe size, and pipe type. The mechanical Drawings are not pipe construction or
fabrication drawings. Where pipe supports and spacing are indicated on the Drawings
and are referenced to a Standard Detail, the CONTRACTOR shall use that Detail.
Where pipe supports are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the CONTRACTOR's
responsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct mechanical piping
systems to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide spacers,
adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:
1. Drawings: Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints,
fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides,
and material lists. Fabrication drawings shall indicate spacers, adapters, connectors,
fittings, and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete
and functional system.
2. Thermoplastic Pipe Joints: Submit solvent cement manufacturer's catalog indicating
that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application.
3. Gasket Material: Submit gasket manufacturer's catalog indicating that the
recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application.
4. Modular Seals for Pipe: Manufacturer's catalog sheet showing materials and
installation procedures.
C. Samples: Performing and paying for sampling and testing as necessary for certifications
are the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
D. Certifications
1. Necessary certificates, test reports, and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained
by the CONTRACTOR.
2. A certification from the pipe fabricator that each pipe will be manufactured subject to
the fabricator's or a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program
shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the manufacture of any pipe.
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Extent of Work: Pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with
the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15 and as indicated.
Materials in contact with potable water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard
61.
B. Pipe Supports: Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored in
accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports, and as indicated.
C. Lining: Application, thickness, and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the
applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Coating: Application, thickness, and curing of coating on buried pipe shall be in
accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes
above ground or in structures shall be coated in accordance with OWNER's
requirements.
E. Pressure Rating: Piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected
pressure as defined in Section 01656 - Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection, or as
indicated on the Piping Schedule, whichever is greater.
F. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the
manufacture, the ENGINEER shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in
progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance
with requirements.
G. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe
shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds
shall be tested as indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing
material tests.
H. Welding Requirements: Qualification of welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall
be in accordance with the provisions of AWS 01.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding
procedures shall be submitted for the ENGINEER's review.
I. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by skilled welders and welding operators
who have adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall
be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section 9, by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6
months prior to commencing WORK on the piping. Machines and electrodes similar to
those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. Qualification testing of
welders and materials used during testing is part of the.WORK.
2.2 PIPE FLANGES
A. General: Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling
the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the
pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C207. Flange faces shall be
perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe. Flanges for miscellaneous small diameter
pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes.
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Pressure Ratings:
1. 150 psi or less: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges
for Waterworks Service --Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ASME B16.5 -
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150 lb class.
2. 150 psi to 275 psi: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 Class E or Class F,
or ASME B16.5 150 lb class.
3. 275 psi to 700 psi: Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.5, 300 lb class.
4. Selection based on test pressure: AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test
pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the
next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI -rated flange shall be selected.
C. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with AWWA C207, or as indicated
for miscellaneous small pipes. Blind flanges for pipe sizes 12-inches and greater shall be
provided with lifting eyes in the form of welded or screwed eye bolts.
D. Flange Coating: Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated
with a temporary rust -inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is
completed.
E. Flange Bolts: Bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05500 - Miscellaneous
Metalwork. All -thread studs shall be used on valve flange connections where space
restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts.
F. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4-inch diameter greater
than the bolt diameter.
G. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated. Each
insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and
washers, and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when
flange bolt diameter is 1-1/2 inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt
diameters larger than 1-1/2 inches, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2 piece and
shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material. Steel washers shall be in
accordance with ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength. Insulating gaskets shall be full -face.
H. Insulating flange manufacturers, or equal:
1. JM Red Devil, Type E
2. Maloney Pipeline Products Co., Houston
3. PSf Products, Inc., (Frost Engineering Service Co., Costa Mesa, California.)
I. Flange Gaskets:
1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water and wastewater service shall be
full-faced type, with material and thickness in accordance with AWWA C207,
suitable for temperatures to 700 degrees F, a pH of one to 11, and pressures to
1000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the
blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
permitted unless otherwise indicated. Flange gaskets shall be as manufactured by
John Crane, Style 2160, Garlock, Style 3000, or equal.
2. Gaskets for flanged joints used in water with chloramines shall be Gylon, Style
3500 as manufactured by Garlock, Crane, or equal.
3. Gaskets for flanges for PVC and CPVC piping used in general water and
wastewater service shall be full faced, 1/8-inch thick, made of ethylene propylene
rubber (EPR) having a Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2240. When the mating flange has a raised face, provide
a flat ring gasket filler between the PVC flange and gasket and the adjacent flange.
4. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, air, solvents, hydrocarbons, steam,
chiori a and other fluids shall be made of materials compatible with the service,
pressre, and temperature.
2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS
A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be
used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where
corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved.
B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate,
polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to
suit the service and loading conditions.
2.4 MECHANICAL -TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE)
A. General: Cast mechanical -type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The
couplings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered
Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500. Gaskets for
mechanical -type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized,
in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of
grooved piping shall conform to the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the
highest expected pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, equipment connections with
mechanical -type couplings shall have rigid grooved couplings or flexible type coupling
with harness in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is
provided by other means. Mechanical type couplings shall be bonded. The
CONTRACTOR shall have the coupling manufacturer's service representative verify the
correct choice and application of couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure
a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, grooved
fittings, couplings, and valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the
coupling. Grooving tools shall be from the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
B. Manufacturers of couplings for steel pipe, or equal:
1. Gustin-Bacon (Aeroquip Corp.) (banded or grooved)
2. Victaulic Style 41 or 44 (banded, flexible)
3. Victaulic Style 77 (grooved, flexible)
4. Victaulic Style 07 or HP-70 (grooved, rigid)
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Manufacturers of ductile iron pipe couplings, or equal:
Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp.)
2. Victaulic Style 31 (flexible or rigid grooving)
Note: Ductile iron pipe couplings shall be furnished with flush seal gaskets.
D. Manufacturers of couplings for PVC pipe, or equal:
Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp)
2. Victaulic Style 775
Note: Couplings for PVC pipe shall be furnished with radius cut or standard roll
grooved pipe ends.
2.5 SLEEVE —SPLIT TYPE COUPLINGS (Depend-O-Lok)
A. General: Where indicated sleeve -split type couplings shall be furnished.
B. Construction: Couplings shall be split -type, consisting of one or 2 piece housing,
gasket assembly, bolts and nuts, and end rings. The double arch cross section that
closes around the pipe ends shall be smooth to allow for expansion or contraction
requirements. The pipe ends with steel end rings affixed shall provide restraint
requirements. As the coupling closes, it shall confine the elastomeric gasket beneath the
arches of the sleeve to create a radial seal. The axial seal shall squeeze the closure
plates as the bolts pull the coupling snug around the pipe. The coupling shall permit
angular pipe deflection, flexibility, contraction and expansion as designed by the
manufacturer. The coupling housing shall be designed for internal pressure and external
loads as determined by the design procedures of AWWA M-11. The coupling shell
thickness of the steel coupling shall be calculated using the formula:
T=PwDy/2Fs
Where:
T = steel coupling thickness, in.
Dy = pipe outside diameter, in.
Pw = Design working pressure, psi
Fs = 50 percent of minimum yield point of steel, psi
Coupling design calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered engineer
and shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal for couplings.
2. The sealing members shall comprise of two "O"-ring gaskets and an elastomer
sealing pad bonded to sealing plate. Internal pressure shall not be required to make
the seal.
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Materials:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, coupling housing material shall be the same material as
the piping. Carbon steel couplings shall be fabricated from ASTM A 36. Stainless
steel couplings shall be fabricated from ASTM A 240, T-304, 304L, 316, or 316L.
2. Carbon steel end rings shall conform to ASTM A 108 Grade 1018. Stainless steel
end rings shall conform to ASTM A 276 T-316L.
3. Bolts and nuts shall be in conformance with Section 05500.
4. Gaskets shall be EPDM conforming to ASTM D 2000 for air service up to 240
degrees F. Gaskets for general water or sewerage service within the temperature
range of —20 to 180 degrees F shall be isoprene or EPDM conforming to ASTM D
2000.
5. Carbon steel couplings shall be fusion bond epoxy coated inside and outside of the
coupling in accordance with OWNER"S requirements. Couplings installed
underground shall be provided with Depend-O-Wrap tape or equal. Application of
wrapping material shall be in conformance with AWWA C209.
D. Pipe Preparation:
1. Ends of pipes shall be prepared for the flexible split sleeve type couplings inspected
and approved by the coupling manufacturer. The pipe outside diameter and
roundness tolerances shall comply with tolerances listed in AWWA C219.
2. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12-
inches from end of the pipe.
3. End rings shall be furnished with couplings when restraint is required. Carbon steel
end rings shall be ASTM A 108 Grade 1018. Stainless steel end rings shall conform
to ASTM A 276 T-316L.
4. Where the split -type coupling is used to take up thermal expansion or contraction
(Depend-O-Lok F X E) at the pipe joint, one end ring shall be fixed to one end of
the pipe to keep the coupling in the proper location.
5. Where the split -type coupling is used for a fully restrained pipe joint (Depend-O-Lok
F X F) at the pipe joint, one end ring shall be welded to each of the pipe ends to fit
beneath the coupling and shall be protected by the coating. Welding design and
specification shall be in conformance with the coupling manufacturer's
recommendation.
E. Manufacturer
1. Depend-O-Lok
2.6 SLEEVE -TYPE COUPLINGS
A. General: Sleeve -type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The CONTRACTOR
will not be allowed to substitute a sleeve -split coupling for the sleeve coupling unless
approved by the ENGINEER.
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Construction: Sleeve couplings shall be in accordance with AWWA C219 - Standard for
Bolted Sleeve -Type Couplings for Plain -End Pipe. Couplings shall be steel with steel
bolts, without pipe stop. Couplings shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated.
The middle ring shall be not less than 1/4-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness
as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the strength of the middle ring material
is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be
increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The coupling shall be either 5- or 7-
inches long for sizes up to and including 30-inches and 10-inches long for sizes greater
than 30-inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16-inches long for long -sleeve
couplings. The followers shall be single -piece contoured mill sections welded and cold -
expanded as required for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the
number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive
rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive
confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section
05500. Buried sleeve -type couplings shall be epoxy -coated at the factory as indicated.
C. Pipe Preparation: Where indicated, the ends of the pipe shall be prepared for flexible
steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a
distance of 12-inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than
1/64-inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be
tested by cold -expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof -test
the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be
subjected to air test for porosity.
D. Gaskets:
1. Gaskets for sleeve -type couplings shall be rubber -compound material that will not
deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions.
Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60, or
equivalent suitable elastomer. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following
specifications:
a. Color - Jet Black
b. Surface - Non -blooming
c. Durometer Hardness - 74 plus and minus 5
d. Tensile Strength -1000 psi Minimum
e. Elongation -175 percent Minimum
2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or
wastewater. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification
System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix
B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. Where sleeve couplings are used in water
containing chloramine or other fluids which attack rubber materials, gasket material
shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized.
3. Gasket materials used in water with chloramines shall be Gylon Style 3500 by
Garlock, or equal.
E. Piping Connection to Equipment: Where piping connects to mechanical equipment
such as pumps, compressors, and blowers, the piping shall be brought to the equipment
connection aligned and perpendicular to the axis of the flange or fitting for which the
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 16
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
LOC✓Akl0� As" b�r.__ ,�.� .._< �. .:. ....,•. ... ss- ,uc.....,IMIWI�s,. ,�^:ss My{.w'i, IR.A: M ST.�_sY.rn s�vTtZ i�'-�5e'
unassigned
Sample Wag Panels
0
0
480
-
-
480
Sub - Masonry Subcontr
-
-
29.329
-
317
29.646
Dovetag Slots
0
1,545
-
-
-
1.545
Field Welding
-
-
1,000
-
-
1,000
Install Channel
408
155
-
30
-
593
Metal Stairs Grating Type
864
0
-
250
50
1,164
Misc Metals Purchase
0
20,994
0
0
20,994
Fixed Ladder
432
0
-
200
50
682
Step Ladder
108
0
-
50
15
173
Bollards
176
613
-
105
-
893
Rigid Insulation 1.5 " o Wall
278
618
-
-
-
896
Caulking Construction Joints
0
0
504
-
-
504
Caulking Expansion Joints
0
0
100
-
-
100
Paint Site Miscellaneous
150
52
-
5
207
Sub -Special Coatings
-
-
4,726
-
-
4,726
'Stop Log Gales (V.E.)'
1,619
30,900
-
300
45
32.864
Hot Boxes
2D0
3,013
-
45
15
3.272
Filter Media - Wood Chips
496
2,141
-
180
23
2,840
Filler Media -Blended
2,480
39,515
-
1,895
126
44,015
Filter Media- Wood Chips Top Layer
652
2,141
-
540
- 32
3.365
Floor Installation
1,248
-
384
77
1.709
Bactee Purchase
74,995
-
-
74,995
Sprinkler Heads
120
0
0
-
-
120
Pipe Support
260
670
-
50
12
982
Pipe Support in Box
72
464
-
30
7
573
Pipe Support in Basal
1,800
7,725
-
750
180
10,455
Pipe Support Fixed 64"
511
8,101
300
210
11
9,132
Pipe Support Fixed 42"
85
1,350
50
35
2
1,522
Pipe Support Fixed 30"
85
905
50
35
2
1,077
Pipe Support Slip 42'
170
2.700
100
70
4
3,044
Pipe Support Slip 54"
255
4,050
150
106
5
4,566
Pipe Support Slip 30"
170
1,809
100
70
4
2,153
Pipe Support Fixed 36"
130
2,700
100
70
4
3,0D4
Pipe Insulation 1'
0
0
440
-
-
440
Pipe Insulation
0
0
132
-
-
132
Pipe Insulation
0
0
132
-
-
132
Pipe Irsulaton 2'
0
270
-
-
270
Billy Lever Damper 30"
170
0
-
50
14
234
Diaphram Fig 1Will 12' wl pressure gouge
32
-
-
-
32
Bag 12"
31
-
-
-
31
Ball SW 1500 1"
45
0
-
-
-
45
Solenoid Valves
81
0
-
-
-
W
Bag Valve 1"
5
-
-
5
Bak SW 150R 1"
5
0
-
-
-
5
Bak SW 15(al 1"
5
0
-
-
-
5
Pressure Reducing Valve 1"
22
-
-
22
Sleeves Q Csukdng
594
5,562
-
135
27
6,318
Flex Cam Flange 30'
390
0
80
17
467
Flex Cam Flange 54'
195
0
30
8
233
Flex Conn Flange 42'
65
0
-
10
3
78
'Exp Join Quote (V.E.)'
16,871
-
-
-
16,871
Strainer
25
391
-
-
-
416
Copper Tube Hard "K' 1
81
99
-
15
15
210
Copper Tube Hard "K' 2
35
B4
-
5
5
129
W rot 90 Ell CxC 1
44
29
•-
-
74
W rot 90 Ell CxC 2
26
55
-
-
80
W rot Tee CxCxC 1
58
78
-
-
-
137
W rot Union CxC 1
28
36
-
-
64
piping is to be connected. The piping shall not impose excessive stress to the equipment
connection to cause misalignment of the equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall assign
the responsibility to the equipment manufacturer to review the piping connection to the
equipment and submit any modifications to the ENGINEER for review.
F. Insulating Sleeve Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of
the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a sleeve of an
insulating compound material compatible with the fluid service in order to obtain
insulation of coupling metal parts from the pipe.
G. Restrained Joints: Sleeve -type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless
thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be designed by the pipe
manufacturer in accordance with Manual M11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be
designed for the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed. Where
harness sets are installed near the suction and discharge of the pump, harness bolts
shall have zero elongation to prevent misalignment of the pump imparted by the thrust
within the piping system.
H. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Dresser, Style 38
2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Style FC1 or FC3
3. Smith -Blair, Style 411
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Low Temperatures: Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping connections to
engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where indicated.
Flexible connectors for service temperatures up to 180 degrees F shall be flanged
reinforced neoprene or butyl spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, or
reinforced flanged duck and rubber, as best suited for the application. Flexible
connectors for service temperatures above 180 degrees F shall be flanged, braided
stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated stainless steel hose, rated for
minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. The connectors shall be
a minimum of 9-inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise indicated. The final
material selection shall be approved by the manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall
submit manufacturer's Shop Drawings and calculations.
B. High Temperature: Flexible connectors shall be installed in engine exhaust piping and
where indicated. Connectors shall be sufficient to compensate for thermal expansion
and contraction and also to isolate vibration between the engine and the exhaust piping
system. Connectors shall be stainless steel bellows type, flanged, and rated for
minimum 150 psi, 2000 degrees F.
2.8 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to
compensate for such movement without exertion of undue forces to equipment or
structures. This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow -type expansion
joints, or sliding -type expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be flanged end, stainless
steel, Monel, rubber, or other materials best suited for each individual service. The
CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed calculations and manufacturer's Shop Drawings of
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
proposed expansion joints, piping layouts, and anchors and guides, including information
on materials, temperature, and pressure ratings.
2.9 PIPE THREADS
A. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General
Purpose (inch), and be made up with Teflon tape unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 PIPE INSULATION
A. Hot and cold liquid piping, flues, and engine exhaust piping shall be insulated as
indicated, in accordance with the requirements of Section 15145 - Pipe and Equipment
Insulation. No unprotected hot piping shall be within reach of operating personnel or
other persons.
B. Preinsulated pipe for underground service shall be in accordance with Section 02550 -
Preinsulated Pipe.
2.11 MODULAR MECHANICAL SEALS FOR PIPING PENETRATIONS
A. Where indicated and where required to prevent flow of water or air, the passages of
piping through wall sleeves and cored openings shall be sealed with modular
interlocking link mechanical closures. Individual links shall be constructed of EPDM
rubber, be suitable for temperatures between minus 40 and plus 250 degrees F, and be
shaped to fill the annular space between the outside of the pipe and the inside of the
wall sleeve or cored opening. Links shall be assembled with type 316 stainless steel
bolts and nuts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe. Pressure plates under
each bolt and nut shall be fabricated of a corrosion -resistant composite material. After
the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tighten the bolts against the pressure
plates to expand the rubber links and form the watertight seal. Sizing and installation of
sleeves and assemblies shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Thunderline Corporation, Link -Seal
2.12 HEAT TRACING
A. Where indicated, pipes subject to freezing shall be protected by heat tracing in
accordance with Section 16850 - Electric Heat Tracing.
2.13 AIR AND GAS TRAPS
A. Air and gas pipes shall slope to low points and be provided with drip legs, shut-off
valves, strainers, and traps. The traps shall be piped to the nearest drain. Air and gas
traps shall be not less than 150 lb iron body float type with copper or stainless steel float.
Bracket, lever, and pins shall be of stainless steel. Drain traps shall have threaded
connections.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
MWH-41512007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-9
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.14 STEAM TRAPS
A. Steam traps shall be installed in low points of steam piping, at minimum 300-foot
intervals in mains, at steam appliances, heat exchangers, heaters, and control valves,
and where indicated. Steam traps shall be preceded by drip legs, gate valves, and
strainers, and shall be connected to the condensate system. Steam traps shall be of the
float and thermostatic type, the bucket type, or the disc type, as best suited for the
service, with cast iron or steel body, stainless steel or monel trim, and screwed
connections, with minimum rating of 150 prig.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Dunham -Bush
3. ITT Fluid Handling
4. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
2.15 GLASS LINING
A. General: Ductile iron or steel pipe and fittings shall be glass -lined where indicated. The
glass lining shall be suitable for handling sewage, primary sludge, digested sludge, and
scum. It shall be smooth, continuous, and suitable for prevention of grease and foam
build-up. The glass lining shall be capable of withstanding thermal shock of 350 degrees
F (430 degrees to 80 degrees) without crazing, blistering, or spalling.
B. Criteria: The glass lining shall consist of a vitreous material to meet or exceed the
following criteria:
1. Unaffected by scraping with a sharp knife, simulating the effects of rodding.
2. Unaffected by the continuous application of live steam from a steam generator,
immediately followed by a cold water quench.
3. Unaffected by an 8 percent sulfuric acid solution at 148 degrees F for a 10 minute
period.
4. Minimum thickness: 10 mils by micro test.
5. Spark tested: Must be free of pinholes.
6. Hardness: 5-6 Mohs.
7. Density: 2.5-3.0 g/cu cm, measured by ASTM D 792 - Test Method for Specific
Gravity (Relative Density) and Density of Plastics by Displacement.
C. Application: Cast or ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be bored or machined smooth to
remove voids or protrusions. Steel pipe shall be seamless pipe, with internal fitting welds
ground smooth, slag holes ground out, re -welded, and ground smooth. Interior surfaces
shall be grit -blasted to white metal, and lining shall be fused onto chemically clean metal
at above 1400 degrees F. Welded flanges shall be factory -installed before lining.
Screwed flanges or cast and ductile iron pipes shall be installed after lining. Pieces shall
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-10
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
be sealed and tested prior to shipment. Finish shall be subject to the ENGINEER's
approval.
D. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. The Pfaudler Co, Inc.
2. A.O. Smith Corp.
3. Waterworks, Mfg. Co.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and
undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused
by ground contact. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 and Division 15. Proprietary
manufactured couplings shall be installed in accordance with the coupling
manufacturer's recommendation.
B. Care shall be taken to ensure that piping flanges, mechanical -type couplings, sleeve -
type couplings, flexible connectors, and expansion joints are properly installed as
follows:
1. Gasket surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and inspected prior to making up the
connection. Each gasket shall be centered properly on the contact surfaces.
2. Connections shall be installed to prevent inducing stress to the piping system or the
equipment to which the piping is connected. Contact surfaces for flanges, couplings,
and piping ends shall be aligned parallel, concentric, and square to each axis at the
piping connections.
3. Bolts shall be initially hand -tightened with the piping connections properly aligned.
Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in a staggered sequence to the AISC
recommended torque for the bolt material.
4. Groove ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in
the area from the pipe end to the groove.
5. After installation, joints shall meet the indicated leakage rate. Flanges shall not be
deformed nor cracked.
C. Lined Piping Systems: The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the
complete, final product and its application. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed
flanges shall be epoxy -coated to assure continuous protection.
D. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing
concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by old construction photos or
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPING, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15000-11
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and
reinforcing bars.
E. Cleanup: After completion of the WORK, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and
other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be
handed over in a clean and functional condition.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PIPING, GENERAL
1700635 PAGE 15000-12
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
4. Dimensions and weight including operator.
5. AMCA leakage test results (isolation dampers only).
H. Expansion Joints:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Type, model, materials of construction force required for expansion and contraction.
I. Supports:
1. Type, details, materials.
2. Stamped and signed design calculations by a registered engineer licensed in the
State of Colorado if the supports are custom designed.
J. Samples:
1. Duct: 10-inch diameter, 12-inches long, finishing color to be white as specified in
2.3.C.4 of this Specification.
2. Duct joint and flange.
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
AMCA 500 Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters
ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D 2310 Standard Classification for Machine -Made "Fiberglass"
(Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
ASTM D 2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass -
Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
ASTM D 2992 Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design
Basis for "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Thermosetting
Resin) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2996 Filament -Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15812 - FRP DUCTWORK
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide FRP ductwork systems including duct and
appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The WORK includes design calculations to determine duct wall thickness and
reinforcements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 -Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Detailed layout drawings including details keyed to the layout, showing
main and branch runs, fittings, offsets, takeoffs, accessories, supports, anchorage, point
loads and seismic restraints, and dimensions of sub -assemblies to be shipped.
C. Specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature with physical
and mechanical properties, including hanging weight for each size duct.
D. Engineering calculations, material selection, wall thickness, pressure, vacuum, and
temperature ratings.
E. Laminate Component Information:
1. Construction type.
2. Laminate thickness.
3. Ply sequence.
4. Glass content range.
5. Resin identification.
6. Types and amounts of fillers.
7. Corrosion liner description.
8. Thickness, ply sequence, and width of interior and exterior secondary overlays.
F. Manufacturer's certification of compliance with smoke -developed and flame spread
criteria.
G. Dampers:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Type, model, materials of construction.
-' 3. Pressure rating.
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
FRP DUCTWORK
PAGE 15812-1
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
BIOFILTER HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
PAGE 15811-4
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.4 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the Pressure Regulating Valves in
accordance with Section 15215.
B. The Pressure Regulating Valves shall regulate the water pressure to 60 psi, and shall
have a pressure gauge installed directly downstream as verification of operating
pressures. Gauge shall conform to Specification 15183- Gauges.
2.5 BALL VALVES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the Ball Valves in accordance with Section
15204.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with fog nozzle manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 STARTUP AND TESTING
A. Functional Testing:
1. Prior to startup, the equipment shall be inspected for proper alignment, proper
connection, and satisfactory performance of all components by means of a
functional test conducted by the Contractor and as approved by the Engineer.
2. Measure operating pressures. Report measure values to the Engineer.
3. During the performance testing, the Contractor shall startup and operate the
humidification spray equipment for 4 continuous hours. The performance test must
be run after the facility ventilation fans and ductwork are installed and operational.
The performance test shall be run to determine the actual system operating
conditions and verify that the system meets the Design Criteria.
4. Proposed test procedures shall be developed by the Contractor and approved by
the Engineer. The Engineer shall be present during the test.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15811-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Nozzle Manufacturer's Qualifications: Nozzle Manufacturer must have a minimum of
five (5) years experience with application of high pressure fogging systems in high
volume HVAC applications.
B. Provide documented test results of evaporative efficiency as per section 1.3.13.2.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Two (2) year warranty for replacement of defective parts and installation of replacement
parts to commence from time of start up testing by nozzle Manufacturer's representative.
1.7 CLEANUP
A. After completion and testing the CONTRACTOR shall remove all debris from the Site
and render it ready for startup.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 FOG NOZZLE MANUFACTURER
A. Impingement misting nozzles. The nozzle shall be a high energy efficiency, one-piece,
atomizing Type PJ40 manufactured by BETE Nozzles Inc., or equal. The nozzle shall
be made of material Type 316 stainless steel with a'/4" quick connect male connection.
2.2 INLINE WATER FILTER
A. The Humidification System shall include an inline water filter located on the main non -
potable water feedline, upstream of nozzle manifolds. Inline filter shall be type automatic
backwash filter, model Honeywell F76S, or equal. Material of filter shall be brass. Filter
shall be equipped with a minimum of 70-mesh screen, and shall be rated for 150 psi
rating. Material type for the mesh screen shall be stainless steel.
B. Automatic Backwash Filter shall have pressure gauges directly upstream and
downstream to measure differential pressure. Integral gauge to the filter is acceptable in
lieu of the upstream gauge, as supplied by some manufactures.
C. The Inline Filter shall have union directly upstream and downstream for maintenance
purposes.
2.3 FOG NOZZLE MANIFOLDS AND MAIN FEEDLINES
A. All nozzle manifolds and risers shall be Schedule 80 PVC. At the locations of the nozzles
a Schedule 80 PVC'/2" x'/i' X'/:" tee shall be installed.
B. Supply pipe from existing non -potable water line to the Humidification system shall be
Schedule 80 PVC.
C. Provide insulation and heat -taped for all lines where freezing conditions could occur.
MWH-415/2007 BIOFILTER HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15811-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 17
DWRF Odor Control 3/22(2007 9: !0 AM
Location Assembly, f>'0
eAptlea LsoYAmouM MabAalAtilettf salt?..
Xiildnrnt 'k�yllp`AA
unassigned
Wrot Bush 1xl2
20
38 _
_
_
56
W rot Adapter Female
17
29 -
-
-
46
W rot Adapter Male
30
139 -
-
169
W rot Adapter CxM 2
5
20 -
-
-
25
PVC Pipe Sch 60 12
25
0 -
15
4
44
Misc Pipe Quote
0
5,921 -
1
0
5,922
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
975
0 -
423
118
1,516
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
3
0 -
2
0
5
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
3
0 -
2
0
5
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
48
0 -
-
-
48
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
1
0 -
_
_
1
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
2
0 _
_
2
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 12
14
0 _
_
14
PVC 8o Tee SxSxS 1
27
0
-
27
Stainless Quids Coupling & Nozzles
50
2.163 -
-
2,213
PVC 80 Union SxS 1
18
0 -
-
-
18
PVC 80 Bushing FtgxS 12xim
35
0 -
-
-
35
PVC 80 Drain Nozzle
108
0 -
-
-
108
PVC 80 Bushing FgxS 3x1
6
0 -
-
-
6
PVC 80 Cap
10
0
-
10
PVC 80 Adapter S)M 12
10
0 -
-
-
10
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1 -
71
0 -
-
-
71
Centering Rings
25
32 -
-
-
57
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
2
0 -
-
_
2
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
2
0 -
-
2
PVC 80 Flange 1500 Blind 4
35
0 -
-
35
PVC 80 Flange 150N Thd 4
50
0 -
-
-
50
-Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Pipe (V.E.)•
114,294 -
-
-
114,294
Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Flange Pks
0
148.493 -
-
-
148,493
Fiberglass Pipe 30"
2,651
-
570
43
3263
Fiberglass Pipe 54"
1.953
-
420-
32
2.405
Fiberglass Pipe 42"
1,442
-
310
23
1,775
Fiberglass Pipe 11-12 Ells 54"
65
-
10
1
76
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Eta 54"
130
-
20
2
152
Fiberglass Pipe Wye 54"
130
-
20
2
152
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 54" x 30"
65
-
10
1
76
Fiberglass Pipe ECC Rec. 54' x 42'
65
-
10
1
76
Fiberglass Pipe ECC Ree. 42" x 30"
65
-
10
1
76
Flberglass Pipe Tees 42" x 30"
65
-
10
1
76
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 30"
65
-
10
1
76
Trench Drains
186 -
464 -
15
-
685
Hose Rack
36
67 -
-
-
103
'Fans (ADD)•
832
45.013
200
50
46,095
'Electrical Sub (ADD)'
-
- 149,830
-
-
149,830
SECTION 15811 — BIOFILTER HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide complete humidification system including (but not limited to):
1. High Pressure Spray Nozzles
2. Water Treatment Equipment
3. Nozzle Manifolds and Piping
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1-12.53a, Motors and
Generators.
1^ 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Subcontractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:
1. Descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, descriptive literature which shall include the
make, model, dimensions, material type, capacities, and flow characteristics.
2. Provide test results of spray system operating at project conditions.
3. Nozzle manufacturer's assembly and installation information.
4. Nozzle manufacturers recommended Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts:
1. Nozzles - (Qty. 28)
2. Nozzle O-ring seals - (Qty. 28)
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
BIOFILTER HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
PAGE 15811-1
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
8. Pitot Tube Traverses:
a. Exhaust ducts, main supply ducts, and outside air ducts shall have air velocity
and volume measured and recorded by the Pitot tube traverse method shown in
the AABC Standard.
b. Locations of these traverse test stations shall be described on the sheet
containing the data.
9. Reports:
a. General:
1) The TAB activities described shall culminate in a report neatly typed and
arranged.
2) Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, records of test
instruments used, and a list of measurements taken.
3) The intent of the final report is to provide a reference of actual operating
conditions for the OWNER's operations personnel.
b. The measurements and recorded readings of air, water, electricity, etc. that
appear in the reports shall be certified by the TAB Subcontractor's Test and
Balance Engineer.
c. Submittals:
1) Submit the reports on forms approved by the ENGINEER.
2) Submit 6 copies of the final report to the ENGINEER and 2 copies to the
OWNER.
3) Indicate a summary of actual operating data and any abnormal operating
conditions.
4) The report shall contain all required information as indicated, including the
information formatted and shown in the AABC Standard.
- END OF SECTION —
MWH-4/5/2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
E. During the balancing process, as abnormalities and malfunctions of equipment or
components are discovered by the TAB Subcontractor, the OWNER and ENGINEER
shall be advised in writing such that the conditions can be corrected by the Contractor.
F. Final Air Balance:
1. When systems are complete and ready for operation, the TAB Subcontractor shall
perform a final air balance for the air systems, and shall record the results.
2. The volume of air for the supply, exhaust, and outside air equipment and terminals
shall be tested and balanced within the tolerances of the AABC Standard.
3. Air handling unit and fan volumes shall be adjusted by changing fan speed.
4. Air distribution device volume shall be adjusted using the damper for duct connected
devices.
5. Adjust the duct volume dampers to provide air volumes to branch ducts where such
dampers are indicated.
G. Balancing:
Check air filters and filter media and balance only systems with essentially clean
filters and filter media.
2. Fan Speed: Measure and record RPM at each fan speed.
3. Voltage and Amperage Readings: Measure and record the final operating
amperages and voltage for each motor.
4. Static Pressure Profile:
a. Static pressure profiles shall be measured and recorded across each supply
fan, air handling unit filter, and exhaust fan, and at the furthest air device or
terminal unit from the air handler supplying that device.
b. Static pressure profiles shall also be provided for systems that do not perform
as designed.
5. Equipment Air Flow: Adjust and record exhaust, outside, and supply air CFM and
temperatures, as applicable, at each fan.
6. Zone Air Flow: Adjust each air handling unit for design CFM.
7. Outlet Air Flow:
a. Adjust each exhaust inlet and supply register and grille to within the tolerances
shown in the AABC Standard.
b. Include all terminal points of air supply and all points of exhaust.
MWH-4/5/2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
f. Fans:
1 } Supply and exhaust fans shall be operating and inspected for freedom
from vibration, proper fan rotation, and belt tension.
2) Heater elements in the motor starters shall be of proper size and rating, in
accordance with the starter manufacturer's requirements.
3) Record the motor amperage and voltage on each phase at start-up, and
verify that they do not exceed the nameplate ratings.
2. Start -Up Report:
a. Provide a start-up report, which shall include
1) the submitted RPM;
2) the actual RPM;
3) the nameplate voltage and amperage; and,
4) the actual voltage and amperage.
b. The report shall include the above information for each piece of electrically
driven air conditioning equipment in the system, including supply and exhaust
fans, other fans of fractional horsepower, and the like.
c. The Controls Subcontractor shall provide the addresses and initial set points of
the controlled devices.
3.3 NOTIFICATION OF SYSTEM READINESS
A. After completion of the above Work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER and
the TAB Subcontractor in writing, certifying that the Work has been accomplished and
that the building and the air conditioning systems are in operational readiness for testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
B. Include in the notification the tabulated voltages, currents, and RPM as indicated above.
3.4 TAB SUBCONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review the approved foul air and HVAC submittals such as control diagrams, air
handling devices, and the like, that pertain to the TAB Work and balanceability.
B. Perform construction observations and submit a written report on the following:
1. the ductwork prior to insulation or ceiling cover-up.
C. Witness or perform a duct pressure test as indicated and submit a written report.
D. Perform a prebalance site review and submit a written report.
MWH-4/5/2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2. Complete the work by systems or floors, whichever is the most efficient for testing
the systems.
D. CONTRACTOR shall change or replace sheaves, belts, dampers, and the like, as
required for correct balancing, as advised by the TAB Subcontractor and at no additional
cost to the Owner.
E. Provide and coordinate the services of subcontractors, suppliers, and personnel as
required to correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the
course of the Project.
F. Operate the systems for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion
and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.2 OPERATIONAL READINESS
A. Complete operational readiness of the building shall require that the construction status
of the building shall permit the closing of doors, windows, and the like, to obtain
simulated or projected operating conditions.
B. Complete operational readiness of the foul air and HVAC systems also requires that the
following be accomplished:
1. Air Distribution Systems:
a. Verify installation for conformity to design.
b. Terminate supply and exhaust ducts, and pressure test for leakage as
indicated.
c. Dampers:
1) Volume, smoke, and fire dampers shall be properly located and
functional.
2) Dampers shall have tight closure and open fully with smooth and free
operation.
d. Supply and exhaust grilles and registers shall be installed and secured in a full
open position.
e. Air Handling Systems:
1) Air handling systems, units, and associated apparatus, such as heating
coils, filter sections, access doors, and the like, shall be sealed to
eliminate uncontrolled bypass or leakage of air.
2) The final clean filters shall be .in place, coils shall be clean with fins
straightened, bearings shall be properly greased, belts shall be aligned
and tightened, and the system shall be completely operational.
3) Verify that the systems are operating within the design pressure limits of
the ductwork.
MWH-4/5/2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
E. Submit 1 electronic copies of each complete test report to the ENGINEER for review.
1.6 TAB SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. The TAB Subcontractor shall submit an agenda describing procedures for:
Field observation reports.
2. An overview of system TAB procedures.
3. System testing, including what traverses will be made, instrumentation to be used,
how correction factors for grille will be obtained, how measurements will be verified
at maximum and minimum, and how control components will be verified.
4. Report forms with each system's components identified and numbered.
B. Pe:rsonnel
Personnel used on the project will be employees of the TAB Subcontractor.
2. The Work shall be performed under the direct supervision of the AABC Certified
Test and Balance Engineer.
3. Submit resumes for approval, including education, experience, and certification of
each person on the Project.
C. Warranty:
1. The TAB Subcontractor shall submit a National Project Performance Guaranty.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall have the foul air and HVAC systems in complete operational
readiness for the TAB Work to begin.
B. Accessibility:
1. The Contractor shall install the system devices in a manner that will leave them
accessible and readily adjustable.
2. Should a device not be readily accessible, the Contractor shall provide access as
requested by the TAB Subcontractor.
3. Malfunctions encountered by the TAB Subcontractor and reported to the
CONTRACTOR shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR immediately such that the
balancing work can proceed with minimum delay.
C. Schedule:
1. Allow sufficient time for the
construction schedule.
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
TAB Subcontractor to perform their Work within the
TESTING AND BALANCING
PAGE 15802-3
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1.3 TAB FINAL ACCEPTANCE CHECKLIST
A. At the time of TAB final acceptance inspection, the TAB Subcontractor shall recheck, in
the presence of the OWNER, specific and random selections of data recorded in the
certified test and balance report.
B. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the OWNER and ENGINEER.
C. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the submitted and approved
test and balance agenda.
D. Selections for verification, specific plus random, shall not exceed 10% of the total
number tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a complete
recheck for safety reasons.
E. Flow Deviations:
1. If 10 percent of the random verification tests demonstrate a measured flow deviation
of 10 percent or more from that recorded in the certified test and balance report, the
report will be automatically rejected.
2. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new
data recorded, a new certified test and balance report submitted, and a new
inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the OWNER.
F. Final Acceptance will occur after successful completion of the TAB verification process.
1.4 SCHEDULING THE WORK
A. After the CONTRACTOR has developed the construction schedule in accordance with
Division 1, a TAB coordination meeting shall be held with the TAB Subcontractor, the
Contractor, the OWNER, and the ENGINEER, to develop a testing schedule for the
project.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit copies of the proposed schedule to the TAB
Subcontractor 2 weeks prior to this meeting.
C. TAB services shall occur as early as possible since these facilities will be occupied
throughout construction.
1.5 TESTING, GENERAL
A. During the progress of the Work, tests shall be performed as indicated and as required
by OWNER or ENGINEER.
B. Tests shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR as part of the Work, and shall include
personnel, equipment apparatus, and services as required to perform the tests.
C. Provide equipment and instruments as required for the tests, as well as additional
thermometer wells, gauge and instrument connections.
D. Leaks, damage, or defects discovered or resulting from the tests shall be repaired, or
replaced to a like new condition.
MWH-4/5/2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15802 — TESTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 PREPARATION FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Prepare the foul air and HVAC systems for testing, adjusting, and balancing as
indicated.
B. The preparation for and corrections necessary for the testing, adjusting, and balancing of
the indicated systems shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Preparation shall include the following items:
1. preparation for balancing of air systems;
2. notification of systems readiness.
1.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB)
A. The Work included in this Section consists of the furnishing of labor, instruments, tools
and services required in connection with the Total System Balancing of the foul air and
HVAC systems as indicated.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. The TAB Subcontractor shall check, adjust, and balance the components of the
HVAC system which will result in the optimal performance of the equipment.
2. This is intended to be accomplished after the system components are installed and
operating as indicated.
3. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to place the equipment into service.
C. The TAB Subcontractor shall act as liaison between the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and
the CONTRACTOR.
D. The following components of the HVAC systems shall be tested, adjusted, and
balanced:
1. air moving equipment
2. air distribution systems
E. Instrumentation:
1. The instruments to be used shall be currently calibrated and listed in the TAB report
showing instrument description, serial number, and date of calibration.
2. The accuracy of the instruments to be used shall be as shown in the current AABC
National Standards.
l
MWH-4/512007 TESTING AND BALANCING
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15802-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER AERATION FLOOR
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15721-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 18
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
... "�'T T.••'�•I „E ..- .i. a...
Anlpttn;
F` atLtaX-+i.".Sn:
Primary Clr
_.....11/1 .. ...... .,-
.F.Lltber
...a
...lwit_IiAtnMSC.'�dc�^"d&'i%SuFy'
020•
Site Demolition @ 54" Crossing
Crushed Gravel -Temp Roads
120
T72
- 663
-
1,554
020-
Misc Site Demolition
Demo Handrail @ FA Pipe Loc.
200
-
40
-
240
Demo Handrail @ Basins
360
-
- 150
- 50
560
Demo Concrete Sidewalks
432
-
- 420
137
989
Remove Stairs
144
-
140
284
Demo Handrail @ Scum PS
72
-
- 70
142
0225•
Excav @ Pipe Crossing
Site Exc Eadh-Baddgerl"ruck
348
-
- 1,603
1,961
Site Fill Ear h-Baddroe/Truck
317
1,564
-
1,881
0255-
Bituminous Roads
Rough Grading Roads
309
-
- 618
-
927
AsphaB Paving
-
-
10,248 -
-
10,248
0260-
Electrical Duct Bank Installation
Trench Excov 3 Lay Pipe 0- 4'
503
-
- 425
-
928
Reuse Trench Spoils @ Bedding
3
-
_
-
3
Reuse Trench Spoils @ Cover
30
_
_
30
Trench Rebar
800
1,785
- 200
100
2,865
Truck Place Trench Conc
509
2.400
- -
150
3,059
02606-
Plant Drain
Demo DI Pipe 6'
25
-
- 4
-
29
Trench Excav 6 Lay Pipe 14-16'
2,100
-
- 1,774
9
3,884
_
Trench Box 16'Deep
-
-
- 158
-
158
Ulillty, Bad Peastone
11
111
14
-
136
U01ily cover Peastone
11
111
14
-
136
Spoils to Waste
-
-
2
-
2
PVC SDR 35 4
280
0
- 35
9
324
PVC SDR 35 45 bend 4
57
0
- _
57
'
PVC SDR 35 90 eY 4
114
0
- -
-
114
PVC SDR 35 Wye 6
53
0
- -
-
53
PVC SDR 35 Pipe Cap 4
38
0
- -
-
38
Floor Drain 4'
70
- 10
4
84
02616-
FA Pipe A
Shore Exisbng Structures
2,500
15,000 1,600
250
19.250
Trench Excov 6 Lay Pipe 10.12'
3,353
-
- 2,833
35
6,220
Trench Box 12'Daep
-
_
_ 484
_
484
UBAIy Bed Peastone
33
342
- 44
-
419
Utility Cover Send
33
342
- 44
-
419
Spoils to Waste
_
_
_ 6
-
6
HD PE Pipe 30
640
0
- 192
16
848
HD PE Pipe 54
975
0
- 325
16
1,316
HD PE 90 all 30
150
0
- 15
-
165
HD PE Tee 54
65
0
- 5
-
70
HO PE Tee 54
65
0
- 5
-
70
HD PE Reducer 54 x 30
75
0
- 5
-
80
Flow FYI
450
2,340
_
-
2.790
HDPE Fillings 30' Flange
150
150
02643-
Plant Drain - Pipe G
Trench Excov d Lay Pipe 12-14'
1,064
-
899
10
1,974
Trench Box 14'Deep
-
-
- 171
171
Willy Bed Peastone
39
405
- 52
-
496
Utility Cover Pessione
39
405
52
-
496
Spoils to Waste
-
-
7
-
7
PVC SDR 35
73
0
- 36
-
111
Gab Valves 4'
27
0
- -
-
27
Saddle Tap Tap 6' x 6'
35
0
-
35
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
310
6
- -
80
396
B. After installation of the aeration floor system and again after the installation of the
wood chip base layer, the biofilter media layer, and the wood chip cover, smoke tests
shall be performed in accordance with Section 13550- Biofilter Media of these
Specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER AERATION FLOOR
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15721-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
covers if necessary, based on field measurements and in accordance with the
requirements of the Manufacturer's Representative.
B. The trench covers shall be made of a fiber -reinforced co -polymer of polyethylene
and polypropylene.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 RECEIVING AND STORAGE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, equipment, and tools required for
unloading and storage of the equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for following all procedures recommended by the Manufacturer and shall be
responsible for all damage to the equipment resulting from unloading, loading, and
transportation activities. The equipment will be protected by UV -resistant wrap
provided by the Manufacturer. Any damage incurred to the equipment or the UV -
resistant wrap during shipment shall be repaired or replacement by the
CONTRACTOR.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall leave the equipment in the UV -resistant plastic wrap,
except as otherwise required to conduct the product inventory, until the biofilter
structure is ready for installation of the equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for protection of the equipment against ultraviolet radiation, dirt,
moisture, and any damage or losses during storage, handling, transportation,
installation, and check-out. All pallets shall be placed to allow at least one foot of
separation on all sides of the baseplates of adjacent pallets. All preservation and
maintenance procedures shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure construction of the biofilter structure is in
accordance with the Manufacturer's requirements and obtain the approval of the
construction methodology from the Manufacturer's Representative prior to
construction of the structure. Prior to installation of the equipment, the
CONTRACTOR shall schedule an installation training program to be provided by the
Manufacturer's Representative.
B. The equipment shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's
requirements. Labor provided by the CONTRACTOR shall be experienced in the
installation of mechanical equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all
materials and appurtenances as necessary to obtain a complete and fully functional
installation. In no case shall the CONTRACTOR work in any manner that could void
the Manufacturer's warranty for the equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for repair or replacement of any components that may be damaged as a
result of improper installation of the equipment.
3.3 CHECK-OUT AND START-UP
A. After installation, the aeration floor in each biofilter cell shall be visually inspected by
the Manufacturer's Representative and the Engineer for any defects in materials or
workmanship. The CONTRACTOR shall make any necessary modifications and
shall retest the equipment at no additional cost to the Client.
MWH-4/512007 BIOFILTER AERATION FLOOR
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15721-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15721 - BIOFILTER AERATION FLOOR
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, check-out, and start-up of the aeration
floor system consisting of aeration baseplates, trench covers, and services as
described herein.
B. All equipment is to be installed by the CONTRACTOR as shown on the Contract
Drawings and as specified by the Manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish
and install all materials, specialty items and appurtenances as necessary to obtain a
complete and fully functional installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Contractor Submittals.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The aeration floor system shall be comprised of aeration baseplates and trench
covers that are placed on a sub -floor designed and constructed to accommodate the
baseplates and trench covers in accordance with the Manufacturer's specifications.
B. Manufacturers and Products:
BacTee Systems, Inc. — Grand Forks, ND,
2. Or Equal.
2.2 BASEPLATES
A. The aeration system baseplates shall, when installed, create a plenum area for
horizontal air movement under the base of the biofilter media bed and shall contain
openings in their upper surface to create vertical air movement through the media
bed. These baseplates shall be installed as per Contract Drawings.
B. The baseplates shall be installed in a manner that allows the baseplates and trench
covers to be removed and reset to enable a water flush of particulate material from
the Inner passageways and over the entire subfloor, as shown on the Contract
Drawings,
C. The aeration baseplates shall be made of a co -polymer of polyethylene and
polypropylene.
2.3 TRENCH COVERS
A. The aeration trench covers shall, when installed, cover the air distribution trenches
that are located under the biofilter media bed and run the length of the biofilter cells
as shown on the Contract Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall field trim trench
MWH-4/5/2007 BIOFILTER AERATION FLOOR
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15721-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-10
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3.5 TESTING
A. CONTRACTOR shall make such tests as are required by local ordinances and Codes in
the presence of a local governing authority inspector to show that piping is tight, leak
free, and satisfactory, and shall also perform such tests as the ENGINEER may direct to
insure that fixtures and equipment operate properly. The CONTRACTOR shall pay costs
in making such tests and the costs of making changes or repairs until the WORK is
acceptable to the governing authorities.
B. Gas Piping Testing and Purging:
1. Before the gas piping system is accepted, a test for tightness shall be made and be
witnessed by the ENGINEER. The system shall be subject to a test pressure of at
least 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure, but never less than 3 psig.
2. Air or an inert gas such as carbon dioxide, nitrogen, or combustion products shall be
used as the pressurizing medium. Under no circumstances shall oxygen or natural
gas be used to test for tightness or to locate leaks.
3. The system shall hold pressure after disconnecting the pressure source for a period
of at least 30 minutes without showing any drop in pressure after the test gas in the
pipe has been given time to come to equilibrium at the ambient temperature.
4. Leaks shall be located by approved leak detectors or by soap and water solution
while the system is under pressure.
5. After pressure testing, piping shall be fully purged with inert gas inserted from the
location most distant from the point of entry of the natural gas. Each major branch
line shall be similarly purged from its far end. Purging shall be performed only by
personnel experienced in this particular operation.
6. Repair or replace defective piping, and retest.
3.6 DISINFECTION
A. After potable water supply lines are successfully tested, they shall be disinfected by
introducing HTH solution, liquid chlorine, or chlorine solution of sufficient strength. Then
the line shall be filled with water and maintained under not less than 10 psi pressure, for
not less than 48 hours, during which period each valve on the line shall be opened and
closed several times, after which it shall be flushed clean and then tested by the
OWNER. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the line is
pronounced safe for use by the OWNER. No cross connection between the water main
and any pipe not yet disinfected will be permitted.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-9
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide openings required in existing walls, floors, and
roofs for the passage of piping and plumbing equipment. Openings shall be as
indicated or required for passage.
2. Openings shall be cut in a neat and orderly manner, minimizing damage to existing
structures. Patching of openings shall match existing construction.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for hangers and supporting members
installed in existing masonry or structural steel as required for the proper completion
of the WORK.
3.3 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide plumbing specialties in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Pipe shall be arranged in a neat and orderly manner to occupy the minimum amount of
space and so that the pipe will not obstruct passageways and movement of building
occupants or interfere with normal operation and maintenance of any equipment.
C. Pipe shall be carefully placed and properly sloped and shall be neatly and firmly
supported by hangers or supports.
D. Piping in buildings shall be as close to the ceilings or walls as possible unless indicated
otherwise.
E. Screwed joints shall be made with joint compound and be tight and leakproof. A
sufficient number of brass to ferrous metal seat unions shall be placed in lines so that
any pipe, valve, or piece of equipment may be easily disconnected.
F. Drainage and sanitary lines shall be properly run, trapped, and vented to conform to
Code requirements. Changes in direction shall be made with "Y" branch fittings and shall
be of the same size as the pipe. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing
fittings. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3-feet.
G. Horizontal soil, drain, and waste pipes shall be given a slope of at least'/. -inch per foot
unless indicated otherwise.
H. Floor drains and cleanouts shall be installed so the tops of the drains are flush with the
finished floor.
I. Plug each natural gas outlet including valves with a threaded plug or cap immediately
after installation and retain the plugs until continuing piping or equipment connections
are completed.
J. Joints in PE pipe shall be installed so that the longitudinal pull out resistance of each
joint is at least equal to the tensile strength of the pipe
3.4 EQUIPMENT - DAMAGE AND REMOVAL
A. The CONTRACTOR's operations shall be carried out in such a manner as to guard
against damage to those portions of the structure and equipment that are to remain in
the finished WORK. Any damage caused by the CONTRACTOR or Subcontractor
through their operations shall be repaired.
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
shafts, and bolts. The units shall have tight seating check valve and relief assemblies,
and bronze bodies with non rising stem ball valve test cocks. The units shall be No. 909
r
series as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., Febco, or equal. Installation shall
meet local code requirements. Backflow preventers for automatic sprinkler systems shall
be in accordance with Section 15230 - Miscellaneous Valves.
2.16 GAS SERVICE AND INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the natural gas system and valving as indicated.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall pay any fees or charges levied by the Gas Company for
installation or inspection.
B. Gas Piping:
1. Gas piping shall be installed in strict conformance with applicable local or state
regulations and the following.
2. Gas piping shall be black steel, schedule 40, in accordance with Section 15025 -
Steel Pipe. Joints for exposed piping shall be of the screwed type, with an adequate
number of unions to facilitate removing of equipment and dismantling of piping for
cleaning and inspection. Screw fittings shall be malleable iron and shall conform to
ANSI.
C. Joint Compounds: Joint compounds on steel pipe shall be rated for natural gas
service, be resistant to the action of gas, be non -hardening, and be used sparingly on
the male threads only.
D. Valves: Valves shall be used in accordance with the rating and service recommendation
of the manufacturer. Valves shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B 31.8. Full
opening non -lubricated plug valves shall be used in sizes larger than 2-inches or for
pressure greater than 0.5 psig. No unions or valves shall be installed on pipe lines that
will be concealed in partitions, ceilings, etc. Every union or valve shall be readily
accessible for inspection and repair. A plug valve shall be provided at each piece of
equipment the gas system serves.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate roughing -in with provisions for wall and floor
sleeves, pipe inserts, and cutting of roof and floor penetrations so that drain lines will
have the required invert elevations and slopes.
3.2 OPENINGS
A. New Construction: The CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary openings in walls,
floors, and roofs for the passage of piping and plumbing equipment within and into the
building. Openings shall be as indicated or as required to provide passage for the
plumbing WORK.
B. Existing Construction:
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HB-3
Hose valves
Heavy duty bronze hydrant, with composition
disc, handwheel, cap and chain.
Sizes 1'/2 inch NPT and 2'/2 inch NPT:
1. Fire -End and Croker Corp, Model 180
Size 1-inch NPT, without cap and chain:
1. Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.)
2. Model70-805
3. Fire -End and Croker Corp, Model 180
Size %-inch NPT, without cap and chain:
1. Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.) Model
70-804, or 78-104
2. Chicago Faucet No.7T
3. Ford Meter Box Co., Model B8H-233HB2
4. Woodford Manufacturing Co., Model Y24
or 24P
HB-4
Wall box type
Recessed, with nickel -bronze box, hinged
cover, and key.
1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71020
2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Series 5710
3. Zum Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1345
2.13 SHOCK ABSORBERS
A. Cold and hot water piping in buildings connecting to self -closing faucets, quick -action
valves, water closets, emergency showers, washers, and dishwashers shall be protected
by shock absorbers located at each fixture or battery of fixtures. Shock absorbers shall
be corrosion -resistant, permanently sealed, and shall be sized and installed to the
manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Josam "SHOKTROLS"
2. Jay R. Smith "HYDROTROL"
3. Zurn, Model Z-1022
2.14 WALL -MOUNTED HOSE RACKS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wall -mounted hose racks at locations indicated. Racks
shall be welded steel construction, of minimum 8 gauge sheet steel, hot -dip galvanized
after fabrication, and shall have a capacity to hold 100-feet of the hose indicated below.
Racks located in the open shall be supported from two 2 by 2 by'/. -inch galvanized steel
angle posts set in a concrete base or as indicated.
2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Provide reduced pressure backfow prevention units where indicated. The units shall be
bronze body construction, with celcon check seats and stainless steel relief valve seats,
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
Josam Series
J.R. Smith No.
Zurn No.
Exposed Locations
58500-20
4405
Z-1440-A
Underground finished floors
56010/30
4143
ZN-1400-2
Walls, Concealed
58790-20
4535
ZN-1445-1 A
Traffic Areas
56070
4240
Z-1420-27
C. Clean outs shall have a minimum diameter of 3-inches.
D. Stack cleanouts shall be installed at the base of each. stack. Cleanouts shall be
galvanized cast iron with ABS plastic cleanout plugs.
2.12 HOSE BIBBS AND HYDRANTS
A. General: Hose bibbs and hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the
non -freeze type. Hose bibbs connected to a non -potable water supply shall be provided
With plastic or stainless -steel warning signs reading "DO NOT DRINK" in clearly legible
letters, permanently attached at the hose bibb. Hose bibbs shall be provided with
vacuum breakers as furnished by Crane Co., American Standard, or equal.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
Drawing Callout
Fixture Type
Description
HB-1
Non -freeze Post -type
Exposed bronze hydrant, post -type, depth of
bury to suit local conditions; minimum 4-feet.
1. Woodford Manufacturing Co., Model
U150 with manual lever for HB's 1.5"
NPT and larger
HB-2
Non -freeze wall -type
Heavy duty bronze hydrant with nickel -bronze
face, hinged cover, recessed box, and key.
Length to suit wall.
1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71000
2. Jay 5. Smith Mfg. Co., Fig. 5510/5511
3. Zurn Industries Inc., Fig. Z-1300
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PAGE 15430-5
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Foundry Co., No.R-6687, or equal. In traffic or chemical areas, access covers shall be
as manufactured by Alhambra Foundry Company, Model A-1240; Neenah Foundry
Co., Model R-1977, or equal, with clear opening of not less than 10-inches in diameter.
2.8 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof drains shall have galvanized cast iron drain bodies, threaded outlet, removable
locking mushroom aluminum or brass stone strainers, clamping collars with integral
gravel guards, receiver, deck clamp, and extension sleeves where required.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 21500
2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Fig. 1010
3. Zurn Industries, Inc., Series Z-100
2.9 FLOOR DRAINS IN CONCRETE FLOORS OR CONCRETE PADS
A. General: Floor drains in concrete floors shall be adjustable type with sediment buckets,
size as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Each floor drain located on an upper floor
shall have a clamping collar, with 4 lb sheet lead flashing, 12-inches minimum all
around. Where lead flashing does not comply with Code, use epoxy water proofing
material and submit a Shop Drawing for review. Floor drain bodies shall be cast iron or
PVC as indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall have steel0threaded inserts. Drain
shall be complete with leveling fram and heavy-duty grate.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Zurn Industries, Inc,. Series Z-520 (for cast iron pipe)
2. Zurn Industries, Inc., Series FD-2330 (for PVC pipe)
2.10 TRAP SEALS AND PRIMERS
A. Where required by Code, floor drains and floor sinks connected to the sanitary sewer
shall be protected by trap primers connected to the water supply at the nearest plumbing
fixture. One half -inch copper tubes shall run from the primers to the traps. Trap primers
shall be mounted in accessible locations.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Josam Mfg. Co., Model 88250
2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Model 2699
3. Zurn Industries, Inc., Model Z-1022
2.11 CLEANOUTS
A. General: Cleanouts shall be heavy plugs with tapered shoulders against caulked lead or
heavy brass plugs. Where underground or concealed, cleanouts shall be brought to floor
level and to accessible locations with access covers and frames.
MWH4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 154304
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
a
' Leastb11 Assent ly ', ONalptlbn`'
02643-
Plant Drain - Pipe G
Truck Place Slab on Grade
Finish- Broom
Unk Seal - 6"
02643-
NPW & PW Line Relocation
Demo DI Pipe 6'
Trench Excav 8 Ley Pipe 12-14'
Trench Box 14' Deep
Utility Bed Peastone
Utility Cover Peastone
Spoils to Waste
SDR 35 6
DI RJ Bid W gt 45 6
DI RJ Std Wgt Tee 6
02645-
ARV Line
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8-10'
Trench Box 10' Deep
Reuse Trench Spoils @ Bedding
Reuse Trench Spoils @ Cover
Copper Pipe Type K 1
Copper 90 ell 1
Water Tap Saddle 6 x V
Precast Box 8 Cover
Erect Steel Pipe 6'
1' Air Release Valve
0302-
Pipe Supports 30"
Continuum Footing Forms < 12'
Continuous Footing Forms > 12"
SWP 6 Oil Footing Forms
Footing Reber
3000 psi Concrete
Buggy Place Waft Footings
03024
Pipe Supports 24"
Continuous Footing Forms < 12'
Continuous Footing Forms > 12'
Strip 6 Oil Footing Fors
Footing Reber
3000 psi Concrete
Buggy Piave Waft Footings
0302-
Pipe Supports 28"
Continuous Footing Fors < 12'
Continuous Footing Forms > 12'
Strip A Oft Footing Fors
Footing Reber
3000 psi Concrete
Buggy Place Wag Footings
0330 to-
Concrete Walk
Fill Gravel Process
Bldg Excavation to Slockp%e
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0330 1d-
Concrete Walk
Fill Gravel Process
Bldg Excavation to Stockpile
Bldg F81 Gravel
S.O.O. Edge Form < 1'
SfdP 6 Oft SOO Form
Asphalt Exp Joint 4' x 1/2'
Sealant At Expansion Joint
WWM 6X6-W 2.9 Rolls
Mesh Support - bricks
339
13
68
0
162
250
-
1,400
16
164
16
164
96
0
152
0
43
0
3,240
51
51
411
720
0
43
0
756
0
88
552
288
2,060
248
618
0
0
1,738
2,282
34
23
0
34
23
34
0
0
0
318
521
0
0
159
281
602
0
W2
602
0
113
0
340
43
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 19
DWRF Odor Control 3/22(2007 9:10 AM
20
40
1,183
225
21
21
3
50
2,737
540
69
69
40
80
- 11
121
1,200
- 11
121
128
4
14
13
36
0
0
352
68
186
290
2,597
225
200
2D0
3
158
152
43
6,013
540
120
631
720
43
796
720
2,348
866
1,738
2,282
0
0
318
521
0
0
159
261
647
143
1,200
647
143
764
0
113
1.200
340
43
I. Concrete inserts shall be as indicated in Section 15006. Inserts shall be galvanized.
2.5 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, one size larger than the pipe
passing through, or where pipe is insulated, one size larger than the pipe plus insulation.
2.6 VALVES
A. General: Water shutoff valves shall be the gate type, except on fixture supply piping
where globe valves shall be used.
B. Interior hose valves shall be provided as indicated. The hose nipple shall be a female
iron pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. Hose bibbs shall be %-inch.
C. Gate, globe, check, plug, and angle valves shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Section 15206 - Gate Valves
2. Section 15204- Ball Valves
3. Section 15201 —Valve and gate Actuators
4. Section 15200- Valves, General
D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide shutoff valves on cold water piping at entrances to
pipe chases and other inaccessible areas and wherever indicated or required to obtain
the maximum efficiency for shut-off control on the water system. Shut off valves shall be
placed on hot and cold water connections to equipment and fixtures. Lavatory and sink
stops with wheel handle shall be brass with chrome plating. Extra long barrel stops shall
be used where supply piping is concealed behind partitions. Show locations on the Shop
Drawings.
E. Valves shall open by turning counterclockwise and shall have suitable handwheels or
nuts as required.
F. Provide a temperature and pressure relief valve of bronze for each water heater. Provide
pressure relief valves at other locations where indicated. Relief valves shall be equipped
with manual test levers. The CONTRACTOR shall provide piping to convey relief valve
discharge to the nearest floor drain, the building exterior, or elsewhere if approved by the
ENGINEER.
2.7 ACCESS DOORS AND COVERS
A. Access doors, where required in ceilings for access to valves, controls, and other
equipment, shall be Karp Assoc., Style DSC-210, Inryco-Milcor, Style AT, or equal.
Doors shall be of sufficient size to allow access but shall be not less than 12-inches by
12-inches. Ceilings with lay -in acoustical tile will not require access panels. Valves and
equipment located above ceiling tile shall have a %-inch diameter blue plastic button
with a letter "V" set in tile.
B. Floor access covers in unfinished concrete floors not exposed to chemicals shall be
galvanized cast iron with a clear opening of not less than 8-inches by 8-inches and shall
be as manufactured by Alhambra Foundry Company, Model A-2015; Neenah
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Hub -less cast iron soil pipe and fittings with Clamp -All type pipe couplings, or equal,
shall be used for above ground sanitary, storm, and vent piping where approved for use
by local authorities. Hub -less cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall meet CISPI Standard
301. Pipe couplings shall have high torque capacity and meet FM standard 1680.
C. Copper tubing and fittings for potable and service water 3-inches and smaller shall be
Type K copper tube with soldered fittings.
D. Vent piping passing through the roof shall be flashed. Flashing shall extend a minimum
12-inches from the outer surface of the pipe in all directions. Flashing shall be fabricated
from 4-pound lead sheet. If lead flashing is not allowed by local Plumbing codes, then
EPDM rubber flashing shall be used.
2.3 INSULATION
A. Hot and cold water piping, valves, fittings, and exposed horizontal sanitary, storm, and
vent piping shall be provided with one -inch thick insulation in accordance with Section
15145 - Pipe and Equipment Insulation.
2.4 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK
A. General: For utility piping such as hot water, cold water, compressed and vacuum air
and sanitary drain lines inside the building, the CONTRACTOR shall provide hangers
and supports for vertical, axial, and seismic loads in accordance with Code. No
perforated strap hangers and no wire supports will be permitted. The CONTRACTOR
shall obtain the services of a registered mechanical or structural professional engineer
for design of the supports, and the Shop Drawings showing installation shall be stamped
by the engineer. Pipe supports shall be as indicated in Section 15006 - Pipe Supports.
B. Hangers supporting insulated piping shall be sized to fit the pipe plus the insulation.
Insulation at support points shall be provided with metal shields to prevent damage to
the insulation.
C. Spacing:
Pipe support spacing for steel and cast iron pipe is given in Section 15006.
2. Copper tube support spacing shall be not more than 6-feet between supports.
D. Rod sizes for pipe hangers shall be as recommended by the hanger manufacturer.
E. Pipe hangers used to support uninsulated copper tube shall be copper or copper plated.
F. Vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for this purpose or be
supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor with a riser extension pipe clamp.
G. Anchors that are installed into existing concrete shall conform to Miscellaneous Metal-
5500.
H. Continuous slotted concrete inserts, if used, shall be Crawford Figure 148, Fee &
Mason Figure 9000, or equal. The CONTRACTOR shall provide secondary angle
supports between main inserts to handle the loads which can be property supported by
such arrangement.
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide plumbing piping and specialties, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
General arrangement drawings of system components
2. Catalog cuts and other manufacturer information for products
C. Samples: electrically -fused test joint for drainage and vent piping
1.3 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
A. WORK shall in strict accordance with the Plumbing Code and codes of the State of
Colorado, City of Fort Collins, UBC 1997 and any other authorities having jurisdiction.
The CONTRACTOR shall have required certifications and be thoroughly familiar with the
local codes. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for necessary permits.
B. Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up
and installation of piping and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall remove stains and
repair damage before final acceptance of the WORK.
C. If the ENGINEER finds materials that have identifying marks removed or lack such
marks completely, such items will be rejected until the CONTRACTOR has furnished
proof that said items conform to the Specifications. Adequacy and extent of such proof
will be determined by the ENGINEER.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties, and equipment shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the intended usage.
B. Floor drains or floor sinks shall be provided for equipment drains. No equipment drains
shall discharge to floor slabs.
2.2 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Cast iron sanitary, storm, and vent pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance
with and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
Dimensions of cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be as given in Table 2 of ASTM A 74.
MWH-4/5/2007 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15430-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. For the purpose of this paragraph, a Day is defined as an 8 hour period, excluding travel
time.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
PAGE 15215-4
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
D. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Cla-Val Company
2. Fisher Controls
3. GA Industries
4. Watts, ACV
5. Wilkins Regulator Div. (Zurn Industries)
2.4 PLASTIC VALVES, SIZES 1/4 TO 3 INCHES
A. Plastic pressure reducing valves shall be designed for not less than 150 psi water
working pressure and shall be suitable for the fluid service. For chemicals and corrosive
fluids, solenoid valves shall be PVC, CPVC, polypropylene (PP), polyvinylidene fluoride
(PVDF), or teflon materials of construction as recommended by the manufacturer for the
specific application.
B. Characteristics: Valves shall open when the outlet pressure drops below a set
minimum value, and maintain the pressure and open wide as flow requirements dictate.
Valves shall be spring- or hydraulically -operated, direct acting, adjustable, diaphragm or
piston type as indicated.
C. Operating Conditions: The valve shall be designed to operate under the following
conditions:
D. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Corrosive Fluids
2. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.
3. George Fisher
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200.
3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: If requested by the OWNER, the service
representative of the valve manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1 Days, to assist
the CONTRACTOR in the installation and adjustment of the valve(s).
B. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel: If requested by the OWNER, the training
representative of the valve manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1 Days to
instruct the personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the valve(s).
MWH-4/5/2007 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15215-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
delivery of the valve. The valve shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date
of shipment to be free of defects in materials and workmanship.
E. Manufacturers, or Equal:
Cla-Val Company
2. GA Industries
3. OCV Control Valves
4. Ross Valve Mfg. Co., Inc.
5. Singer Valve, Inc.
6. Watts, ACV
2.3 THREADED VALVES, SIZES 1/2 TO 2-1/2 INCHES
A. Valve Body: The valve body shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 or cast steel, with a
minimum pressure rating of 300 psi, and with threaded ends. The valve shall be
provided with an integral or an attached strainer with access cap or plug and a flanged
or threaded valve cover. The valve shall be actuated by a diaphragm or piston.
B. Valve Trim: The valve stems, springs, body seats, and washers shall be of Series 300
stainless steel. The strainers shall be of stainless steel or monel and the diaphragms
shall be of reinforced neoprene. The valve pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to
ASTM B 62.
C. Operating Conditions: The valve shall be designed to operate under the following
conditions:
1. Headworks Humidification System PRV:
Maximum inlet pressure, psi
110 psi
Minimum inlet pressure, psi
60 psi
Minimum outlet pressure, psi
60 psi
Maximum flow, gpm
4.76 gpm
Minimum flow, gpm
3.2 gpm
Valve size, inches
1-inch
Diameter of pipeline, in
1-inch
2. Solids Humidification System PRV:
Maximum inlet pressure, psi
110 psi
Minimum inlet pressure, psi
60 psi
Minimum outlet pressure, psi
60 psi
Maximum flow, gpm
1.7 gpm
Minimum flow, gpm
2.55 gpm
Valve size, inches
14nch
Diameter of pipeline, in
1-inch
MWH-4/5/2007 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15215-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15215 - PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure reducing valves and appurtenances,
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200, including a cavitation study from
the valve manufacturer.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Function: Pressure reducing valves shall reduce an upstream pressure to a pre-set
constant lower pressure, regardless of fluctuations in the upstream pressure.
B. Operation: The valves shall be hydraulically -operated, with diaphragm or piston direct
action, pilot -controlled, per paragraph 2.2, and shall be of the globe or angle pattern as
indicated. Necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valves from the
pipeline. The smaller direct -acting valves with threaded ends per paragraph 2.3, shall be
suitable for water or air service and shall be of the globe pattern.
2.2 FLANGED VALVES, SIZES 1-1/2 INCHES THROUGH 42-INCHES
A. Valve Body: The valve body shall be of cast iron to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, or
ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 125 lb or
250 lb flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or the body shall be of ductile iron to ASTM A 536
- Ductile Iron Castings, with 150 lb or 300 lb flanged ends to ASME B16.42 - Ductile Iron
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. The valve cover shall be flanged and be the same
material as the body.
B. Valve Trim: The valve stems with position indication, springs, body seat rings, and bolts,
nuts, and washers shall be of Type 302, 303, or 316 stainless steel. The valve stems
shall have top and bottom guides. Rubber parts shall be Buna-N. The diaphragms shall
be of Nylon -reinforced Buna-N, supported firmly between body and valve cover. The
valve pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or
Ounce Metal Castings.
C. Valve Controls: The valve shall be provided with a complete, externally mounted
control system, including speed control needle valves, strainers, check valve, isolation
valves, and necessary copper or stainless steel connecting tubing and fittings. The
controls shall be capable of achieving the flow and speed adjustment indicated.
D. Factory Tests and Warranty: Valves shall be factory tested with a hydrostatic test and
a functional test and a test certificate shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to
MWH-4/5/2007 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15215-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.7 PLASTIC GATE VALVES (1'/2 TO 14-INCHES)
A. Construction: Plastic gate valves shall have PVC bodies with ANSI 150 lb. flanged
ends, and polypropylene or CPVC-SBR-lined wedges for tight shut-off. The non -rising
stem shall be of PVC or Type 304 stainless steel construction, with O-ring seal. The
valves shall have a coldwater pressure rating of 150 psig for sizes 1'/2 through 8-inches,
110 psig for size 10-inches, and 70 psig for sizes 12- and 14-inches.
B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, PVC gate valves shall have manual handwheel
actuators with position indicators, in accordance with Section 15201.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. ASAHI/America
2. Spears Mfg. Co.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Gate valves shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Section 15200. Care
shall be taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 GATE VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15206-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2. M&H
3. Clow
2.5 GATE VALVES (SMALLER THAN 3-INCHES)
A. Construction: Gate valves smaller than 3-inches, for general purpose use, shall be
non -rising stem, heavy-duty type for industrial service, with screwed or soldered ends to
match the piping. The bodies shall have union bonnets of bronze conforming to ASTM B
62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. The stems shall be of bronze
conforming to ASTM B 62, or ASTM B 371 - Copper -Zinc -Silicon Alloy Rod. The solid
wedges shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62. The valves shall have malleable
iron handwheels unless otherwise indicated, and stem seals shall be of Teflon -
impregnated or other acceptable non -asbestos packing. Valves shall have a pressure
rating of minimum 125 psi steam and 200 psi coldwater, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Crane Company
2. Milwaukee Valve Company
3. Wm. Powell Company
4. Stockham Valves and Fittings
5. Walworth Company
2.6 HIGH-PRESSURE GATE VALVES (2- TO 12-INCHES)
A. Construction: High-pressure gate valves, except for buried valves, shall have cast iron
bodies and flanged bonnets with outside screw & yoke rising stems conforming to ASTM
A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 250 psi flanged
ends. The valves shall be rated for 250 psig steam and 500 psig cold water working
pressure. The solid wedges shall be of bronze or cast iron, bronze -fitted, and the stem
shall be of bronze with non -asbestos fiber packing.
B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, high-pressure gate valves shall have cast iron or
ductile iron handwheels with 2-inch square operating nuts, in accordance with Section
15201.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Crane Company
2. Milwaukee Valve Company
3. Wm. Powell Company
4. Stockham Valves and Fittings
5. Walworth Company
MWH-4/5/2007 GATE VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15206-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3. M & H Valve Company
4. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
2.3 KNIFE -GATE VALVES (2- to 96-inch)
A. Construction: Knife -gate valves shall be of the flanged or wafer design, with raised face
and resilient seats for positive seating. Wetted parts shall be constructed of Type 316
stainless steel, and the gates shall be finish -ground on both sides to prevent packing or
seat damage. Valves 2- to 12-inches in size shall be furnished with cast stainless steel
bodies; valves 14-inches and larger shall have semi -steel bodies with stainless steel
linings. The valve stem shall be of stainless steel with a long life packing. The valves
shall be rated for tight shut-off at the following pressures:
Valve sizes 4- to 12-inches 150 psi (bi-directional)
2. Valve sizes larger than 12-inches 50 psi
B. Actuators: Knife -gates shall have outside -screw and yoke -rising stems with manual
handwheel actuators, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with Section 15201.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. DeZURIK Water Controls Corporation
2. Fabri-Valves
3. Rovang, Inc.
2.4 RESILIENT -SEATED GATE VALVES
A. General: Resilient -seated gate valves may be provided in lieu of metal -seated double -
disc or solid -disc gate valves, at the discretion of the ENGINEER.
B. Construction: Resilient -seated gate valves shall conform to AWWA C509 - Resilient -
Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. The valves shall be suitable for a
design working water pressure of 200 psig, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical
joint ends. The valve body, bonnet, and disc shall be of cast iron or ductile iron and the
disc or body shall be rubber -coated. Body and bonnet wall thickness shall be equal to or
greater than the minimum wall thickness as listed in Table 1 of AWWA C509. The stem,
stem nuts, glands, and bushings shall be bronze, with the stem seal per AWWA C509.
C. Protective Coating: Valves shall be factory coated in accordance with Section 09800 -
Protective Coating. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a test report from a coating
inspector that the coating is holiday -free. The CONTRACTOR shall be aware that it may
retain the services of a third party coating applicator to achieve the holiday -free
requirement.
D. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, resilient -seated gate valves shall have manual
actuators in accordance with Section 15201.
E. Manufacturers, or Equal:
Mueller Company
MWH-4/5/2007 GATE VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15206-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
0330 ld. Concrete Walk
3000 psi Concrete
Truck Place Stab on tirade
Finish- Hard Trowel
Liquid Cudng• Compounds
unassigned
Material Testing -Pipe
Drill Anchor Hole&Seams
Drill Anchor Hoes/Panels
Site Exc Earth-BackhoeRruck
Site Exc Earth-Backhoarrruck
Site Exc Earth-BeckFga?nigc
'Electrical Vault Excavation (ADD)'
Site Fig Eanh4ilackhoelTruck
Site FIN Ear h-Baddioe/rruck
Site Fig Earth-BackhosiTruck
'Efechical Vault Backfill (ADD)'
O6rer Misc. Pipe Quote
HDPE Pipe Quote
Sub - Concrete
Erect Steel Beams
Pipe Strap
Pipe Strap
Pipe Strap
Modify/Reinstall Stairs
Modify Handraal C Scum PS
Modify Handrail a FA Pipe
Misc. Modifications
Anchor Bolt
Anchor Boll
Anchor Bolt
Beam Anchor Points
Install Panels
Install Hatches
'Walkway Support Braces (ADD)'
Sub - Special Coatings
Bird Screens
Pipe Support
Pipe Support Q 10" Fixed
Teflon Wrap
Teflon Wrap
Teflon Wrap
Neoprene
Neoprene
Neoprene
Stainless Steel Hardware
Pipe Insulation
Pipe Insulation
Btfy Lever Dampnerfir"
Btfy Lever Dempner 10".
Stfy Laver Hdl Fig Dampner 12"
Stfy Lever Dampner 30"
Bag SW 150k 1"
Bag SW 150R 1"
Exp Joint 10"
Flax Cam 30"
Flex Conn 28"
Flex Cam 24"
-1 )
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 20
OWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
2,013 - - - 2,013
400
6,220
100
50
6,770
3.840
-
-
1.200
120
5,160
4,000
-
-
1,250
125
5,375
175
-
-
1,290
-
1,465
50
-
-
369
419
25
-
184
_
209
59
-
-
122
68
249
205
-
1,014
-
1,219
59
290
-
348
29
-
145
-
174
32
-
134
56
223
5,299
_
5,299
48,978
-
-
-
48.978
•
0
12,644
0
0
12,644
4,284
-
1.080
72
5A%
-
646
846
•
1,131
-
-
-
1,131
•
323
-
323
1.100
134
-
90
40
1,364
175
206
-
50
15
446
800
206
-
120
40
1,166
1,667
1,030
-
50
-
2,747
288
330
-
-
-
818
378
433
-
811
306
350
-
656
7,110
8,137
-
790
-
16,037
13,500
0
-
1,000
260
14,750
3.190
896
-
870
58
5,014
3,456
32,960
-
640
192
37,248
'
-
285.640
-
285,640
80
1,351
-
32
1,463
883
3,349
200
48
4,480
481
7.370
-
80
19
7,930
15
520
-
535
26
910
-
-
936
7
260
258
15
210
225
26
366
394
7
105
-
-
-
113
240
742
-
32
-
1,014
0
0
132
-
-
132
0
0
132
-
-
132
336
-
120
34
490
112
-
40
11
183
224
80
22
326
34
10
3
47
5
26
31
5
26
31
837
-
160
45
1,041
325
-
50
14
389
130
20
6
166
260
40
11
311
SECTION 15206 - GATE VALVES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide gate valves and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section.
C. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Buried valves shall be of the inside screw, non -rising stem type. The valve actuators
shall be as indicated, with counter -clockwise opening stems, in accordance with Section
15201.
B. Gate valves 18-inches and larger shall be provided with a bypass line and isolation
valve.
2.2 METAL -SEATED GATE VALVES (3-INCHES AND LARGER)
A. Construction: Metal -seated gate valves for water and sewage service shall conform to
AWWA C 500 - Metal -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. The valve bodies
shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings, or ductile iron conforming either to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron
Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures, or to ASTM A 536 -
Ductile Iron Castings, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint -ends as
indicated. Body and bonnet wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum
wall thickness as listed in Table 2 of AWWA C500. The design working water pressure
shall be 200 psig for valves 12-inches and smaller and 150 psig for larger valves. The
valves may be of the double -disc type for tighter shut-off, or of the solid -wedge type, with
rising or non -rising stem. For sewage or fluids containing solids, an outside thread shall
be used. Valves 14-inches and larger installed in vertical pipes shall be fitted with bronze
slides, tracks, rollers, and scrapers to assist the travel of the gate assembly. Gate valves
14-inches and larger shall be furnished with bypass assemblies.
B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, gate valves shall have manual actuators in
accordance with Section 15201.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Clow Valve Co.
2. Kennedy Valve
MWH-4/5/2007 GATE VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15206-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 BALL VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15204-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1.
ASAHI-America
2.
George Fischer, Inc.
3.
NIBCO Inc., (Chemtrol)
4.
Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.
5.
Spears Mfg. Co.
6.
Watts Regulator
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 15200. Care shall be taken that
valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 BALL VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15204-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.2 METAL BALL VALVES (4-INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, general purpose metal ball valves in sizes up to 4-
inches shall have actuators in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate
Actuators.
B. Body: Ball valves up to and including 1-1/2 inches in size shall have bronze or carbon
steel 2 or 3 piece bodies with screwed ends for a pressure rating of not less than 600 psi
WOG. Valves 2-inches to 4-inches in size shall have bronze or carbon steel 2 or 3 piece
bodies with flanged ends for a pressure rating of ANSI 125 psi or 150 psi unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Balls: The balls shall be solid chrome -plated brass or bronze, or stainless steel, with
standard port (single reduction) or full port openings.
D. Stems: The valve stems shall be of the blow-out proof design, of bronze, stainless steel,
or other acceptable construction, with reinforced teflon seal.
E. Seats: The valve seats shall be of teflon or Buna-N, for bi-directional service and easy
replacement.
F. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Conbraco Industries, Inc. (Apollo)
2. ITT Engineered Valves
3. Neles-Jamesbury, Inc.
4. Watts Regulator
5. Worcester Controls
2.3 PLASTIC BALL VALVES
A. General: Plastic ball valves for corrosive fluids shall be made of polyvinyl chloride
(PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), polypropylene (PP), or polyvinylidene
fluoride (PVDF), as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application.
Valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate
Actuators, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction: Plastic ball valves shall have union ends or flanged ends to mate with
ANSI B 16.5, class 150 flanges for easy removal. The balls shall have full size ports and
teflon seats. Body seals, union O-ring seals, and stem seals shall be in accordance with
the corrosion resistance requirements of Section 11258. External (without entering into
the wetted area) seat packing adjustment is preferred. Metal reinforced stems to prevent
accidental breakage are preferred. Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite solution service
shall be drilled through the ball or body per valve manufacturer recommendation to
relieve offgas and equalize pressure across the valve. The valves shall be suitable for a
maximum working non -shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for PVC and CPVC,
with decreasing ratings for higher temperatures and other plastics.
MWH-4/5/2007 BALL VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15204-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15204 - BALL VALVES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section.
C. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section.
D. The requirements of Section 11258 - Chemical Feeding Equipment, General apply to
this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 BALL VALVES (6-INCHES AND LARGER)
A. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, ball valves shall be in accordance with
AWWA C507 - Standard for Ball Valves 6-in. through 48-in (resilient seated), API 6D -
Specification for Pipeline Valves (resilient seated), or API 607 - Fire Test for Soft -Seated
Valves (resilient seated), with cast iron, ductile iron, or cast steel bodies, flanged ends,
suitable for velocities up to 35 fps, temperatures up to 125 degrees F, and design
pressures to 150 psi. The balls shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or cast steel, shaft- or
trunnion -mounted, with tight shut-off, single or double seat, and full bore. The valves
shall be rubber-, soft- (nylon, teflon, polymer, or similar), or metal -seated, with stainless
steel, forged steel, or monel shafts or trunnions, and not less than one thrust bearing.
The valves shall see a minimum differential pressure of 150 psi.
B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, ball valves shall have manual actuators with
handwheel, position indicator, and 2-inch square operating nut. Operators for buried
valves and for power -actuated valves shall be in accordance with provisions of Section
15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Apco/Willamette
2. GA Industries, Inc.
3. Grove Valve and Regulator Company
4. Neles-Jamesbury, Inc.
5. NIBCO, Inc.
6. Henry Pratt Company
MWH-4/5/2007 BALL VALVES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15204-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15201-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
D. Floor Boxes: Hot -dip galvanized cast iron or steel floor boxes and covers to fit the slab
thickness shall be provided for operating nuts in or below concrete slabs. For operating
nuts in the concrete slab, the cover shall be bronze -bushed.
E. Tee Wrenches: Buried valves with floor boxes shall be furnished with 2 operating keys
or 1 key per 10 valves, whichever is greater. Tee wrenches sized so that the tee handle
will be 2 to 4 feet above ground, shall fit the operating nuts.
F. Manual Worm Gear Actuator: The actuator shall consist of a single or double reduction
gear unit contained in a weather-proof cast iron or steel body with cover and minimum
12-inch diameter handwheel. The actuator shall be capable of 90-degree rotation and
shall be equipped with travel stops capable of limiting the valve opening and closing.
The actuator shall consist of spur or helical gears or worm gearing. The gear ratio shall
be self-locking to prevent "back -driving." The spur or helical gears shall be of hardened
alloy steel and the worm gear shall be alloy bronze. The worm gear shaft and the
handwheel shaft shall be of 17-4 PH or similar stainless steel. Gearing shall be
accurately cut with hobbing machines. Ball or roller bearings shall be used throughout.
Output shaft end shall be provided with spline to allow adjustable alignment. Actuator
output gear changes shall be mechanically possible by simply changing the exposed or
helical gearset ratio without further disassembly of the actuator. Gearing shall be
designed for a 100 percent overload. The entire gear assembly shall be sealed
weatherproof.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valve and gate actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance with Section
15200 - Valves, General. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for
operation and maintenance without obstructing walkways. Actuators shall not be
mounted where shock or vibrations will impair their operation, nor shall the support
systems be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15201-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Materials: Actuators shall be current models of the best commercial quality materials
and be liberally -sized for the required torque. Materials shall be suitable for the
environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed.
D. Actuator Mounting and Position Indicators: Actuators shall be securely mounted by
means of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and be of
ample strength. The word 'open" shall be cast on each valve or actuator with an arrow
indicating the direction to open in the counter -clockwise direction. Gear and power
actuators shall be equipped with position indicators. Where possible, manual actuators
shall be located between 48- and 60-inches above the floor or the permanent working
platform.
E. Standard: Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, actuators shall be in
accordance with AWWA C 540 - Power -Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates.
F. Functionality: Electric, pneumatic, and hydraulic actuators shall be coordinated with the
power requirements of Division 16 and instrumentation equipment indicated in Section
17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.
G. Fasteners shall be in accordance with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork.
H. Protective coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coatings.
2.2 MANUAL ACTUATORS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, valves and gates shall be furnished with manual
actuators. Valves in sizes up to and including 4-inches shall have direct acting lever or
handwheel actuators of the manufacturer's best standard design. Larger valves and
gates shall have gear -assisted manual actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60
pounds on the rim of the handwheel. Buried and submerged gear -assisted valves, gates,
gear -assisted valves for pressures higher than 250 psi, valves 30-inches in diameter and
larger, and where so indicated, shall have worm gear actuators, hermetically -sealed
water -tight and grease -packed. Other valves 6-inches to 24-inches in diameter may
have traveling -nut actuators, worm gear actuators, spur or bevel gear actuators, as
appropriate for each valve.
B. Buried Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, buried valves shall have extension stems to
grade, with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and cast-iron or steel pipe
extensions with valve boxes, covers, and operating keys. Where so indicated, buried
valves shall be in cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size to
allow operation of the valve actuators. Covers of valve boxes shall be permanently
labeled as required by the local Utility Company or the ENGINEER. Wrench -nuts shall
comply with AWWA C 500 - Metal - Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
C. Chain Actuator: Manually -activated valves with the stem located more than 7-feet
above the floor or operating level shall be provided with chain drives consisting of
sprocket -rim chain wheels, chain guides, and operating chains provided by the valve
manufacturer. The wheel and guide shall be of ductile iron, cast iron, or steel, and the
chain shall be hot -dip galvanized steel or stainless steel, extending to 5-feet 6-inches
above the operating floor level. The valve stem of chain -actuated valves shall be extra
strong to allow for the extra weight and chain pull. Hooks shall be provided for chain
storage where chains interfere with pedestrian traffic.
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15201-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15201 - VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide valve and gate actuators and appurtenances,
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to valves and gates except where otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. Unit Responsibility: The valve or gate manufacturer shall be made responsible for
coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of actuators on the valves and
gates; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance
of the valves, gates, and actuators with the Contract Documents.
D. Single Manufacturer: Where 2 or more valve or gate actuators of the same type or size
are required, the actuators shall be produced by the same manufacturer.
E. The requirements of Section 16485 - Local Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical
Devices apply to the WORK of this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and
Section 15200 - Valves, General.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawing information for actuators shall be submitted together
with the valve and gate submittals as a complete package.
C. Calculations: Selection calculations showing dynamic seating and unseating torques
versus output torque of actuator.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, shut-off and throttling valves and externally actuated valves
and gates shall be provided with manual or power actuators. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish actuators complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears,
controls, wiring, solenoids, handwheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable.
Actuators shall have the torque ratings equal to or greater than required for valve seating
and dynamic torques, whichever is greater, and shall be capable of holding the valve in
any intermediate position between fully -open and fully -closed without creeping or
fluttering. Actuator torque ratings for butterfly valves shall be determined in accordance
with AWWA C504 - Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves. Wires of motor -driven actuators
shall be identified by unique numbers.
B. Manufacturers: Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with
actuators manufactured by the valve or gate manufacturer. Where actuators are
furnished by different manufacturers, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate selection to
have the fewest number of manufacturers possible.
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15201-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVES, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15200-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 21
DWRF Odor Control 3/22(2007 9:10 AM
Location . AaiaritblyOaYollptlon �tia6drXhtolinE :1lfairlal ";""�NEI J'
unassigned
Flex Conn 10"
209
'Exp Joint Quote (V.E.)"
- 40
11
260
Fernco Coupling 10"
232
27,316
-
27,316
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
3
0
-
232
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1
3
0
- 2
0
5
PVC Pipe Sch 80 8
187
0
0
- 2
0
5
PVC Pipe Sch 80 10
2.080
0
- 126
13
326
PVC Pipe& Fittings Quote
- 1,400
140
3,620
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
1
25,576
-
25,575
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
1
0
-
1
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 10
64
0
0
-
1
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 10x10x8
288
0
-
84
PVC 80 Cap Slip 10"
96
0
-
-
26
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
2
-
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
2
0
-
-
2
PVC 80 Flange 150R S 10
200
0
0
-
-
2
PVC 80 Flange 1500 S 8
800
0
-
200
Fiberglass Pipe 30, Reducer
191
800
Fiberglass Pipe 28' Reducer
191
_ 10
1
202
Fiberglass Pipe /0"
1,448
- 10
1
202
Fiberglass Gooseneck 12"
,�
1
56
1,664
Fiberglass Pipe Spool Piece 17
560
11
603erglass
Fiberglass Pipe 24'
2,208
- 32
11
603
Fiberglass Pipe 28'
1,088
- 690
72
2.970
Fiberglass Pipe 30'
3,552
- 340
36
1,464
'Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Pipe (V.E.)•
- 1,110
117
4,779
Fibergass Pipe Vendor Quote Flange Pike
0
68,678
-
68,576
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 10"
248
62,240
-
82, 240
240
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 30"
326
- 60
11
339
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 24"
260
- 50
5
381
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 28'
130
- 40
4
305
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 30"
130
- 20
2
152
Fobs In Pipe for Drains
353
- 20
2
152
Relocate Yard Hydrant
Z
_
-
33
Relocate cate Hose Rack
36
- 20
20
10
23
_ _
_
36
Gates shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended
use. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.
B. Access: Valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and
maintenance and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members,
handrails, or other equipment.
C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are
indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall properly assemble and install such items so that
systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated
items shall be clearly noted on Shop Drawing submittals.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVES, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15200-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or
welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall
be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without
casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. Welds on welded
bodies shall be done by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall
be as indicated, and be rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the
valve will be subjected.
B. Valve End Connections: Unless otherwise indicated, valves 2-1/2 inches diameter and
smaller may be provided with threaded end connections. Valves 3-inches and larger
shall have flanged end connections.
C. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be
of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall
have provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes.
D. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best
commercial material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O-rings,
Chevron V-type packing, or other suitable seal. Where subject to dezincification, bronze
valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 62, containing not more than 5 percent of zinc or
more than 2 percent of aluminum, with a minimum tensile strength of 30,000 psi,
minimum yield strength of 14,000 psi, and an elongation of at least 10 percent in 2
inches. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 may
be used, except that zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent.
E. Stem Guides: Stem guides shall be provided, spaced 10-feet on centers unless the
manufacturer can demonstrate by calculation that a different spacing is acceptable.
Submerged stem guides shall be 304 stainless steel.
F. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual
valve. Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best
suited material.
G. Nuts and Bolts: Nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance
with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork.
2.4 VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional
system.
2.5 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of
not less than 5 years in the manufacture of the valves indicated.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General: Valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVES, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15200-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes. Leakage past the closed valve shall not
exceed 1 fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves. Resilient -
seated valves shall be drop -tight.
3. Performance Testing: Valves shall be shop -operated from fully closed to fully open
position and reverse under no -flow conditions in order to demonstrate the valve
assembly operates properly.
F. Certification: Prior to shipment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for valves over 12-
inches in size, certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing
compliance with the applicable standards of AWWA, ANSI, or ASTM.
G. Valve Marking: Valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS
SP25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials in contact
with potable water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. Materials not
indicated shall be high-grade standard commercial quality, free from defects and
imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which
it is intended. Unless otherwise indicated, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the
following requirements:
1. Cast Iron: Close -grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron
Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile
Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
3. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High -
Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher -Temperature Service.
4. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve
stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy
Sand Castings for General Applications.
5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to
ASTM A 351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High -Temperature Service, Grade
CF8M, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
6. PVC: Poly vinyl chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform
to Cell Classification 12454.
7. CPVC: Chlorinated poly vinyl chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover
shall conform to Cell Classification 23447.
8. NSF Standard 14: Materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water.
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVES, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15200-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
7. Valve Labeling: A schedule of valves to be provided with stainless steel tags,
indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the tag.
C. Technical Manual: The Technical Manual shall contain the required information for
each valve.
D. Factory Test Data: Where indicated, signed, dated, and certified factory test data for
each valve requiring certification shall be submitted before shipment of the valve. The
data shall also include certification of quality and test results for factory -applied coatings.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. General: Valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. Shut-off valves 6-
inches and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Gate valves 18-inches
and larger or where chain wheel is required, shall be furnished with spur gear and hand
wheel. Buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position
indicators and valve extensions. Manual shut-off valves mounted higher than 7-feet
above working level shall be provided with chain actuators.
B. Valve Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, actuators shall be in accordance with
Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators.
C. Protective Coating: The exterior surfaces of valves and the wet interior surfaces of
ferrous valves of sizes 4-inches and larger shall be coated in accordance with Section
09800 - Protective Coating. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the
required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to
shipment, in accordance with these Specifications. Flange faces of valves shall not be
epoxy coated.
D. Valve Labeling: Except when such requirement is waived by the ENGINEER in writing,
a label shall be provided on shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibbs.
The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or stainless steel, minimum 2-inches by 4-inches
in size, as indicated in Section 15005 - Piping Identification Systems, and shall be
permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the
ENGINEER.
E. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the
reference standards, valves 3-inches in diameter and smaller shall be tested in
accordance with manufacturer's standard and 4-inches in diameter and larger shall be
factory tested as follows:
Hydrostatic Testing: Valve bodies shall be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure
equivalent to twice the water rated pressure of the valve. Metallic valve rating
pressures shall be at 100 degrees F and plastic valves shall be 73 degrees, or at
higher temperature according to type of material. During the hydrostatic test, there
shall be no leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall any
part of the valve be permanently deformed. The duration shall be sufficient time to
allow visual examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes.
2. Seat Testing: Valves shall be tested for leaks in the closed position with the
pressure differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve.
The duration of test shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage.
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVES, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15200-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15200 -VALVES, GENERAL
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 11000 -Equipment General Provisions, apply to the WORK
of this Section.
C. The provisions of this Section shall apply to valves and valve actuators except where
otherwise indicated. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a
combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of
the Specifications.
D. Where a valve is to be supported by means other than the piping to which it is attached,
the CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the valve manufacturer a design for support and
foundation that satisfies the criteria in Section 11000. The design, including drawings
and calculations sealed by an engineer, shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings.
When the design is approved, the support shall be provided.
E. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination
of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing each valve; however, the CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with the requirements of each valve
section. Unless indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the
manufacturer of the valve.
F. Single Manufacturer: Where 2 or more valves of the same type and size are required,
the valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:
1. Valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and
specification section number.
2. Complete information on valve actuator, including size, manufacturer, model
number, limit switches, and mounting.
3. Cavitation limits for control valves.
4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and
relationships of valve handles, handwheels, position indicators, limit switches,
integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems.
5. Data in accordance with Section 16460 - Electric Motors for electric motor -actuated
valves.
r--. 6. Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics.
MWH-4/5/2007 VALVES, GENERAL
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15200-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
to minimize the effect of water hammer or vibrations on the gauges. In extreme cases,
the gauges may have to be mounted independently, with flexible connectors.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 GAUGES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15183-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15183 - GAUGES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure and vacuum gauges and appurtenances,
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES
A. General: Pressure gauges shall be provided on suction and discharge connections to
pumps as indicated in the pump specifications; on discharge connections from fans,
blowers and compressors; each side of pressure reducing valves, unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings; and wherever indicated. Vacuum gauges shall be provided
for vacuum pumps and wherever indicated. In all locations (such as certain pump
suction connections) where pressures may vary from below to above atmospheric head,
compound gauges shall be installed.
B. Gauge Construction: Gauges shall be industrial quality type with Type 316 stainless
steel movement and stainless steel or alloy case. Unless otherwise indicated, gauges
shall have a 3'/.-inch dial, '/.-inch threaded connection, a Type 316 stainless steel
snubber adapter, and a shut-off valve. Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable
units, with an accuracy of plus and minus 1 percent, to 150 percent of the working
pressure or vacuum of the pipe or vessel to which they are connected. All gauges shall
be vibration and shock resistant.
C. Gauge Manufacturers, or Equal:
Marsh Instrument Company;
2. Ashcroft Industrial Instruments (Dresser);
3. Foxboro/Jordan, Inc.;
4. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.;
5. U.S. Gauge Div. of Ametek.
D. Snubber Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Cajon Company;
2. Weksler Instruments, Corp.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Gauges shall be installed with the face in the vertical position, at the locations indicated
and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Care shall be taken
MWH-4/5/2007 GAUGES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15183-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/512007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PAGE 15145-4
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3. Manville
4. Owens-Corning Fiber Glass Corp.
5. P.P.G. Industries, Inc.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation shall be installed by a qualified insulation contractor in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
- END OF SECTION -
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PAGE 15145-3
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
shall be molded -type pipe covering, made of fibrous glass with a minimum k-factor of
0.23 at 75 degrees F mean temperature.
Unless otherwise indicated, the insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Pie
Minimum Thickness
of Insulation inches
Hot and cold potable water
6-in and smaller
1
Hot and chilled process water
6-in and smaller
1'/z
8-in and smaller
2
Low pressure steam 50 psi and less
8-in and smaller
2
Condensate, boiler blowdown, and boiler feed
8-in and smaller
1'/2
Heated sludge and process piping
6-in and smaller
1
8-in and larger
1'/2
Duct Drain Piping
3-in and smaller
1
4-in and larger
1'/2
E ui ment and Tanks
Minimum Thickness of Insulation
inches
Boilers, heaters, and manufactured equipment
As recommended by manufacturer
Heat exchangers, tanks, and vessels
3
The insulation shall include the following:
1. A factory -applied white fire -retardant vapor -barrier jacket of kraft paper and
aluminum foil laminated together and reinforced with fiberglass yarn. Insulation shall
be oversized for installation over electric heating cable.
2. Fittings and valves shall be covered with the same material as the pipe, cut in
segments to fit snugly without open spaces, held in place with copper wire or
cement, and then be covered with the same jacketing material as the pipe.
3. Insulated fittings adjacent to vapor -barrier insulation shall be sealed with acceptable
vapor -barrier cement before installation of the finish jacket.
4. Pipe insulation and vapor -barrier shall be continuous through hangers and supports.
Insulation shall be coordinated with the pipe hangers and supports and where
insulation protection shields are provided the top half section of pipe insulation at
support locations shall be of the same density, and the bottom half insulation
segments provided between the pipe and the insulation protection shields shall have
a density of not less than 6 Ib/cu ft.
Insulation shall be covered with smooth weatherproof aluminum preformed jacketing
with built-in isolation felt. Jackets for fittings shall consist of precision -formed
smooth -sided sections and shall be sized to cover and protect the insulated fitting.
Lap jacket at least three inches on all joints and seal joints with silicone mastic to
provide a continuous air and weathertight joint. Secure jacketing with straps on
twelve inches (12") centers. Strapping shall be Y.—inch wide stainless steel.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal:
Armstrong Contracting and Supply Corp.
2. Certain -Teed Corporation
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PAGE 15145-2
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 22
DWRF Odor Control 3/2212007 9:10 AM
Lecatlo,_ ..MM�.bIY
$OlIdS BIO
020•
Misc Site Demolition
Demo Concrete Sidewalks
162
- 158
02513.
Curb
-
320
Conc Curb
0
0
1.620 0
1,620
Curb Handicap Cut
0
0
1.001) 0
1,000
026.1-
Manhole
Excavation & Backrrll
250
-
- 1,842
-
2,092
Gravel Base
50
283
- 277
-
590
Manhole 4'
178
1.720
- 127
-
2,025
Grout invert
_
630
830
Manhole Steps
243
0
External Wrap
65
57
- -
-
243
0260•
Electrical Duct Bank Installation
-
-
122
Saw Cut Electrical Vault
108
-
750 90
45
993
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 0. 4'
1,578
-
- 1,333
200
3,111
Reuse Trench Spoils @ Bedding
357
-
Reuse Trench Spoils @ Cover
2,029
-
-
-
-
357
Footing Reber # 4
1,000
294
-
-
2,029
Truck Place Wall Footings
400
_ -
1,294
02606-
PD Pipe A
_
_ -
400
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8-10,
252
-
- 213
3
Trench Box 10' Deep
-
-
42
467
Laity Bed Peasione
4
44
- 6
42
Utility Cover Peastons
4
44
-
54
Spoils to Waste
- 6
-
54
PVC SDR 35 4
84
-
0
_ 1
- 14
_
-
1
98
PVC SDR 35 90 ell 4
19
0
Concrete Encasement
600
880
- -
- -
-
2D0
19
1,680
02606-
PD Pipe B
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8.10'
432
-
- 365
5
802
Trench Box 10' Deep
72
-
72
Laity Bed Peastone
7
78
- 10
-
93
Laity Cover Peasione
7
76
- 10
-
93
Spoils to Waste
-
-
1
PVC SDR 35 4
144
0
24
-
6
1
174
Concrete Encasement
760
1,100
-
250
2,100
02606-
PD Pipe C
Core Drill 7.U' Hole
15
- 45
5
65
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8.10'
1,656
- 1,399
19
3,073
Trench Box 10' Deep
-
-
- 276
-
276
Lkiky Bed Passions
29
301
- 39
-
369
Laity Cover Peastone
29
301
- 39
-
369
Spoils to Waste
-
-
- 5
PVC SDR 35 6
552
0
- 92
-
23
5
667
Concrete Encasement
3,150
4,620
-
1.050
8,820
Link Seal
84
_ -
-
64
02606-
PD Pipe D
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 4. V
960
-
- 811
16
1,787
Trench Box V Deep
-
- 270
-
270
Laity Bed Peaslone
37
380
- 49
-
466
Utility Cover Peasione
37
360
- 49
-
466
Spoils to Waste
-
_
- 7
PVC SDR 35 4
720
0
_ 120
-
-
7
840
PVC SDR 35 45 bend 4
76
0
PVC SDR 35 90 ell 4
114
0
- -
_
-
76
114
PVC SDR 35 Wye
93
0
_ -
_
93
Tap Saddle 12 x'
219
0
_ 25
_
244
Fig Plug Valve 4'
236
- IS
-
251
SECTION 15145 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe and equipment insulation, complete and in place,
in accordance with the Contract Documents. In addition to the insulation indicated, the
CONTRACTOR shall insulate any cold or hot piping and exhausts that could be
hazardous to the OWNER's personnel upon contact.
B. The work shall be installed by workers thoroughly experienced in such work, and the
workmanship shall be first class in every respect. The CONTRACTOR's attention is
called to the fact that neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished work will be
required.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Federal Specifications:
HH-1-558B
B. Commercial Standards:
ASTM C 547
ASTM E 84
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Insulation Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving
(Pipe and Tube Covering), and Pipe Fitting Covering,
Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type)
Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
A. The CONTRACTOR shall_ submit complete Shop Drawings of all thermal insulation, with
manufacturer's data on materials, covering, jackets, and finish, in accordance with
Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Components of the insulation, including covering, mastics, and adhesives, shall have a
flame -spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke development rating of not over 50.
Ratings shall be as established by tests in accordance with ASTM E 84 and Federal
Specification standards. The integrated insulation assemblies shall also conform to the
above specifications. Insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Standard Temperature Insulation: This type of insulation shall be employed for
process, cold and hot water, steam, and condensate piping and equipment with surface
temperatures up to 850 degrees F. Pipe insulation and jacketing shall be applied to
piping where indicated, including associated fittings, flanges, and valves. Pipe insulation
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15145-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-415/2007 PVC PRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15060-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
tolerances listed in the Piping Schedule. Caution - Do not use air or gas for testing
PVC pipe. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1-1/2
times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish test
equipment, labor, materials, and devices.
2. Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure. Fixtures, devices, or other
accessories that would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be
disconnected and ends of the branch lines shall be plugged or capped as
appropriate during the testing procedures.
3. Leaks shall be repaired, and the pipng shall be re -tested until no leaks are found.
D. For Use In Air Flow Applications:
1. Ductwork shall be leak tested after installation in accordance with the National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems, a publication offered by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
2. The maximum allowable leakage criteria shall be in accordance with ASHRAE
standards
3. Leaks shall be repaired, and the pipng shall be re -tested until no leaks are found.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PVC PRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15060-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping shall
be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to
low points. It is recommended that the CONTRACTOR obtain the assistance of the pipe
manufacturer's field representative to instruct the pipefitters in the correct installation and
support of PVC piping.
B. Supports and Anchors: Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial
hangers or supports in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. Where
necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be
anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe
expansion due to temperature changes.
C. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of
fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the
valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and
other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. Valves and flanges
attached to PVC pipe shall be provided with adequate supports.
3.2 PIPE PREPARATION
A. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any
debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed
and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly.
3.3 PIPE JOINTS
A. Threaded Joints: Pipe threads shall conform to ASTM F 1498 - Taper Pipe Threads 60
Degrees for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings, and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp
dies or molded. Joints shall be made with Teflon tape or thread sealant.
B. Solvent -Welded Joints: Solvent -welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and
solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept
closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient
temperatures, to the pipe or cement manufacturer's written recommendations. Pipe ends
shall be inserted to the full depth of the socket.
C. Flange Joints: Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel
bolts and nuts. Care shall be taken not to over -torque the bolts, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
A. Inspection: Finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and
sufficient supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating.
Defective WORK shall be repaired.
B. Field Testing: The CONTRACTOR shall allow adequate time for the solvent cement
joints to cure. Curing time shall be per the solvent cement manufacturer's
recommendation.
C. For Use In Hydraulic Flow Applications:
Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required in
the Piping Schedule, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the
MWH-4/5/2007 PVC PRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15060-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15060 - PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D 1785, MODIFIED)
r . PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, complete and
in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General, apply to the WORK of this
Section.
C. This Section includes PVC pressure pipe with solvent -welded, flanged, or screwed
joints.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIAL
A. PVC pipe shall be made from new rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall be
normal impact Type 1, Grade 1, class 12454, Schedule 80, listed as compliant with NSF
Standard 61, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with ASTM D 1785-Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
2.2 PIPE JOINTS
A. Pipe joints shall be solvent -welded type with solvent cement and primer as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the chemical in the pipe.
B. Screwed joints that are necessary to match up to threaded valves or fittings shall be
made up with appropriate thread sealant, either paste or tape.
C. Flanged joints shall be made with solvent -welded PVC flanges, drilled to ASME B 16.5 -
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Gaskets shall
be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene for water or wastewater service.
Gasket material for chemicals shall be suitable for the chemical service.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Solvent Welded and Threaded Fittings: Solvent -welded and threaded fittings shall be
Schedule 80 PVC fittings in accordance with ASTM D 2467 - Socket -Type Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
B. Flanged Fittings: Flanged fittings shall be Schedule 80 fabricated PVC fittings with 150
lb. flanges to ASME B 16.5.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: PVC pipe shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly
aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with
structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall
MWH-4/5/2007 PVC PRESSURE PIPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15060-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 COPPER WATER TUBE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15037-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator,
or other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories which
are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the
test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines be plugged or
capped as required during the testing procedures.
2. Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re -tested until no leaks are found.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 COPPER WATER TUBE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15037-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Copper tubes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly
aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with
structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed tubing
shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, tubing
shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate
to low points. Installations shall be without defects.
B. Supports and Anchors: Tubing shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial
hangers, brackets, or supports in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports.
Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the tubes shall be
anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for expansion
due to temperature differences.
C. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, tubing to fixtures, groups of fixtures,
and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has
flanged ends. Low points in water systems and driplegs in steam, gas, and air systems
shall have drainage valves. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and
other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection.
D. Branch Connections: Branch connections in horizontal runs of air and gas tubing shall
be made from the top of the main to avoid drainage of condensate into the equipment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prior to installation, each tube length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any
debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of tubes shall be reamed and filed
smooth. Fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Brazed and Soldered Joints: Brazed and soldered joints shall conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations and to the specifications and recommendations of
ASME B 31.1 - Power Piping. Brazing shall be done by skilled and qualified welders per
Section 15000 - Piping, General. Prior to the application of flux, the ends of tubes shall
be thoroughly dried and cleaned.
3.4 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
A. Inspection: Finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and
supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to tubing, fittings, and coating. Defective
WORK shall be repaired.
B. Field Testing: Prior to enclosure or burying, tubing systems shall be pressure tested as
required in the Piping Schedule, for a period of not less than one hour without exceeding
the tolerances listed in the Piping Schedule. Where no pressures are indicated, the
tubes shall be subject to 1 Y2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR
shall furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices as part of the WORK. For
additional testing requirements refer to Section 01656 - Pressure Pipe Testing and
Disinfection.
MWH-4/5/2007 COPPER WATER TUBE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15037-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
.1�
SECTION 15037 - COPPER WATER TUBE (ASTM B 88, MODIFIED)
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copper tube for water, gas, and vacuum service,
complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents
B. The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General apply to the WORK of this Section.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIAL
A. Copper water tube shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper
Water Tube, and shall be soft temper tube in rolls for buried locations, or hard drawn
lengths for other applications. Unless otherwise indicated, copper water tube shall be of
Type K wall thickness.
2.2 JOINTS
A. Copper water tube shall have either soldered joints, flared ends and fittings, or
compression type joints. Soldered joints shall be made with 95 - 5 percent tin -antimony
solder or with silver solder. Buried piping shall have flared or compression type joints. No
soft -soldered joints will be allowed on buried piping. No solders containing more than 0.2
percent of lead shall be used.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Soldered Fittings: Soldered fittings shall conform to ANSI B 16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Pressure Fittings, or to ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. The soldering flux shall be the manufacturer's approved
type for the fitting and solder used.
B. Flared Fittings: Flared fittings shall conform to ASME B 16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy
Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
C. Compression Fittings: Compression type fittings shall be brass fittings as
manufactured by Crawford Company - SWAGELOK, Parker -Hannifin - CPI, or equal.
D. Flanged Fittings: Cast copper alloy flanges and flanged fittings shall be in accordance
with ASME B 16.24 - Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, and ASTM B
62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, with 150 lb. ratings, or as indicated.
MWH-415/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
COPPER WATER TUBE
PAGE 15037-1
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS
A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs that are generally accepted as
exemplifying good engineering practice and using stock or production parts shall be
utilized wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial
quality, designed and be rated for the intended purpose.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Basic Engineers Inc.
2. Bergen -Paterson Pipesupport Corp.
3. Grinnell Corp. (Anvil International)
4. NPS Products, Inc.
5. Power Piping Company
6. Tolco Incorporated
2.4 COATING
A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated pipe supports other than stainless
steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast -cleaned after fabrication and hot -dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, supports shall
receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09800 -
Protective Coating.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be
fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be
coordinated with the formwork.
B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat
piping system. Hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted
to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to
ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other WORK.
3.2 FABRICATION
A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by
experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated
supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPE SUPPORTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15006-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
5. SHARED SAVINGS CLAUSE. Should a new way of constructing any portion of the
Project be discovered that involves a substantial savings, Shared Savings may be
applied. The shared savings proposal must involve modifying the means, methods
and/or the materials used without impacting the quality of the project. After receiving
approval from the Design Engineer, the construction team shall submit their proposal to
the review Committee. This committee will be comprised of the Senior Utilities Engineer,
the Utility Senior Buyer, and the contractor's General Manager. If the change is
approved, a Change Order will be processed documenting the change(s) to the Contract.
As per the Contractor's Proposal, Seventy-five (75) percent of the savings shall belong
to the City while twenty-five (25) percent of the savings shall belong to the Contractor.
6. EXECUTION. Four(4) copies of this proposed Work Order & Notice of Award, and
accompanying amendments or supplements to the Contract Documents (except any
applicable drawings) incorporated herein, are provided. Four (4) sets of any applicable
drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the
date of this Work Order & Notice of Award, that is, by April 16, 2007.
A. You must deliver to the OWNER four (4) fully executed counterparts of this Work
Order, including all amendments or supplements to the Contract Documents
incorporated herein. Each Work Order must bear your signature as provided.
B. You must deliver with the executed Work Omer the Contract Security (Bonds) and
insurance, as specified in the AGREEMENT, this Work Order, the General
Conditions (Article 5.1) and the Supplementary Conditions.
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your
Bid abandoned and to annul this Work Order and Notice of Award. Within ten (10) days after you
comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1) fully signed counterpart of this Work
Order with any amendments or supplements to the Contract Documents attached.
CONTRACTOR'S WORK ORDER REPRESENTATION & EXECUTION:
CONTRACTOR agrees to perform the services identified above in accordance with the terms and
conditions contained herein and in the AGREEMENT dated March 28, 2006 between the parties. In
the event of a conflict between or ambiguity in the terms of the AGREEMENT and this Work Order
(included the attached Contract Documents), the AGREEMENT shall control.
CONT ACTOR: HYDRO CO STRUCTION COMPANY INC.
y: t Date
JIM EURICH, VICE-PRESIDENT
OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE & EXECUTION:
This Work Order and the attached Contract Documents are hereby accepted and incorporated herein by
this reference, and Notice to Proceed is hereby given.
5/98 Section 00525 Page 2
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 23
DWRP Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
Location -. AiagMbfi.¢
I
My�y.*T 9 Sjj. YCST' 9'a'
UboV AmotkttINetirlfl n"nW1n �1iPA
02606-
PD Pipe D
'111�u�
CI Gate 4"
76
Hub Drains
174
78
02610•
NP 3" Line
- 25
10 209
Trench Excav & lay Pipe 4. 6-
1,247
Trench Box 8' Deep
-
- 1,054
21 2,323
Utility Bed Passions-
47
-
- 351
351
Utility Cover Peastone
47
494
64
605
Spoils to Waste
494
�.
- 606
PVC Soh 80 Pipe 3
_
0
9
- 9
PVC Sch 80 90 ell 3
1140
0
- 15
- 466
PVC Sch 80 Tee 3
t46
0
7
- 7
- 147
PVC Sch 80 Reducer 6 x 3
173
5
- 150
PVC Sch 80 Caps 3
13
0
- 4
- 177
Gate Valves 3"
27
0
0
- 1
_
- 14
Warning Sign
25
35
40
- 27
W all Hydrant
14
57
100
02616-
FA Pipe 1
- 71
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 4- 6'
224
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 8-10'
845
-
- 189
4 417
Trench Box 8' Deep
-
- 714
10 1,589
Trench Bons 10' Deep
_
63
- 63
Utility Bed Passions
-
- 141
- 141
Utility
1ty Cover Passions
79
200
26
. 245
Spoils to Waste
200
_-
26
_ 245
HD PE Pipe 12
72
0
-
HD PE Pipe 30
160
0
12
88
HD PE Pipe 36
564
0
48
4 212
HD PE 45 bend 38
45
0
141
12 717
HD PE 90 all 12
- 5
- 50
HD PE 90 all 36
65
0
15
60
HD PE Tee 36 x 30
275
275
p
5
-
HD PE Reducer 36 x 15
ISO35
0
_ 370
300
HD PE Pipe Cap 36
0
- 10
02641-
6" NP Relocate
- 5
- 40
Demo DI Pipe 6"
375
Trench Excav & Lay Pipe 6- 8'
480
_ 60
435
Trench Box 8' Deep
405
8 893
Utility Bed Passions
-
19
197
135
-_ 135
KY Cover Peastone
19
197
25241
SP to West*
_ 5
2db
- 241
DI Pipe Push - Gass 52 6
_
22
0
- 3
- 3
DI MJ Bid Wgt 45 6
76
0
_
-
76
Tap Saddle 6 x 3"
219
0
78
0312•
Grout @ Pipe Entry
- 25
- 2"
Mud Slab Edge Form
SNP & Of/ Mud Slab Form
0
0
Mesh Support - bricks
2
"
4000 psi Concrete
2
ftek Pima Mud Slab
-
27
-
- 27
Finish- Rough
0314•
Fan Slab
Mat Foundedon Edge Form
SUIP d ON Met Found. Form
0
-
0
SOG Reber
1'145
.
Mesh Support - bricks
- 1,158
4000 psi Concrete
45
-
45-
Pump Place Mat Foundation
1.457
- -
1,457
Pump Place Mat Foundation
-
- -
118 118
Finish- Rough
-
-
43 43
5.
I
Support Spacing for Schedule 80 PVC Pipe:
Nominal Pipe Diameter,
in
Maximum Span at 100
degrees F, ft
'/2
4
%
4.5
1
5
1'/4
5.5
1'/2
5.75
2
6.25
3
7.5
4
8.25
6
10
8
11
10
12.25
12
13.25
Support Spacing for Schedule 80 Polypropylene Pipe
Nominal Pipe Diameter,
in
Maximum Span at 100
degrees F, ft
'/2
3
%
3.5
1
3.75
1 Y,
4
1'/2
4.25
2
4.5
3
5.5
4
6
6
7.25
8
8
10
8.75
12
9.5
Support Spacing for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe
Nominal Pipe Diameter,
in
Maximum Span at 100
degrees F ft
2
8.8
3
10
4
11
6
12.7
8
13.4
10
14
12
15.4
14
16.2
16
17.3
18 and greater
18
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPE SUPPORTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15006-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
Maximum S ans for Pipe Supported in Minimum 90 degree Contact Saddles, feet
Nominal Pipe
Diameter, in
Pipe Wall Thickness,
in
3/16
'/.
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
%
7/8
1
36
35
39
43
46
49
51
55
38
35
39
43
46
49
51
55
40
35
40
43
47
49
52
56
42
35
40
44
47
50
52
56
45
-
40
44
47
50
53
57
48
-
40
44
47
50
53
58
61
51
-
40
44
48
51
53
58
62
54
-
40
44
48
51
54
58
62
57
-
41
45
48
51
54
59
63
60
-
41
45
48
52
54
59
63
67
70
63
-
41
45
49
52
55
60
64
67
71
66
-
41
45
49
52
55
60
64
68
71
72
-
41
45
49
52
55
61
65
69
72
78
-
41
46
49
53
56
61
66
69
73
84
-
41
46
50
53
56
62
66
70
74
90
-
41
46
50
53
56
62
67
71
74
96
-
42
46
50
54
57
62
67
71
75
For steel pipe sizes not presented in this table, the support spacing shall be designed so that
the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi. Maximum deflection of pipe shall be limited to
1/360th of the span and shall be calculated by using the formula:
2.
3.
L = (7500tD/(32t+D))y'
where: t = Thickness, inches
D = Diameter, inches
L = Maximum span, feet
Support Spacing for Ductile -Iron Pipe:
Nominal Pipe Diameter, in
Maximum Span, ft
All Diameters
Two supports per pipe length or
10-feet (one of the 2 supports
located at joint
Support Spacing for Copper Tubing:
Nominal Pipe Diameter,
in
Maximum Span, ft
%to 1%
6
2to4
10
6 and greater
12
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
PIPE SUPPORTS
PAGE 15006-4
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
r^.
point loads, supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra
wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields.
L. Concrete Anchors: Unless otherwise indicated, concrete anchors for pipe supports shall
be according to the following table. Consult the ENGINEER for any anchor applications
not on the table. Anchor embedment shall comply with Section 05500 — Miscellaneous
Metalwork.
Pipe Support Application
Type of Concrete Anchor
New Concrete
Use embedded concrete insert anchors on a grid
pattern. Use Grinnell (Anvil International), Tolco, or
equal.
Existing Concrete
Use non -shrink grouted anchors, metallic type
expansion anchors, or epoxy anchors.
Exceptions:
Metallic type expansion anchors and epoxy anchors
are not permitted for pipe supports subject to
vibrating loads. Epoxy anchors are not permitted
where the concrete temperature is in excess of 100
degrees F or higher than the limiting temperature
recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxy anchors
are not accepted where anchors are subject to
vibration or fire.
Vibratory Loads and High
Use non -shrink grouted anchors
Temperature Conditions
2.2 SUPPORT SPACING
A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall
be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with
special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose
concentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the
tables below. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures or those listed, and for
other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in
accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be
provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of loading
effects.
B. Where support spacing is not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall use
the spacing below.
1. Support Spacing for Welded Fabricated Steel Pipe:
Maximum S ans for Pipe Supported in Minimum 90 degree Contact Saddles feet
Nominal Pipe
Diameter, in
Pi Wall Thickness,
in
3/16
'/4
5116
318
7/16
%
5/8
%
7/8
1
24
33
37
41
43
45
47
26
34
38
41
44
46
48
28
34
38
41
44
47
49
30
34
38
42
45
48
49
32
34
39
42
45
48
50
34
35
39
43
46
48
50
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
PIPE SUPPORTS
PAGE 15006-3
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial
movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement.
Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than Yz-inch, or where the hanger rod
deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of
the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that
the rod is vertical in the hot position.
E. Spring -Type Hangers: Spring -type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to
vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar
piping. Spring -type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed
recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports
shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to
prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate the compression of the
spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel
due to thermal expansion.
F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a
sufficient number of expansion loops or expansion joints shall be provided, together with
the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints
permitting the piping to expand and contract freely away from the anchored points.
Components shall be structurally suitable to withstand loads imposed.
G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and
insulated that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other
equipment.
H. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser
clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping.
I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical
feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles,
channels, or I -beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping
shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to
concrete footings, or with horizontal, welded steel angles, and U-bolts or clamps
securing the pipes.
J. Materials of Construction:
1. General: Pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall
be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Submerged Supports: Submerged supports, as well as piping, conduits, and
equipment in hydraulic structures within 24-inches of the water level, shall be
supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors
constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Corrosive: Piping in chemical and corrosive areas shall be supported with support
assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors constructed of Type 316
stainless steel or FRP, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC,
FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to
manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPE SUPPORTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15006-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15006 - PIPE SUPPORTS
PART1--GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors,
complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Where pipe support systems are not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR
shall design and provide the supports in accordance with this Section.
C. Pipe support details in the Contract Drawings are not designed to resist seismic and
wind forces. CONTRACTOR shall design and provide additional supports as needed to
resist such forces.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 -Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall include the following information:
1. Drawings of pipe supports, hangers, anchors, and guides
2. Calculations for special supports and anchors.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Compliance: Piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly
anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, and dislocation due to
seismic events, line pressures, pipe weight, fluid weight, liquid movement, thermal
changes, vibration, probable forces applied during construction, and stresses on piping,
equipment, and structures. Supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements
of ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified below. Supports for
plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing
code or local administration requirements.
B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural
members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing
members, such supplementary members shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
Supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building
code and the American Institute of Steel Construction and shall be as acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in operation,
allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping and preventing excessive stress on
equipment. Hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers
shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported
pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation
of safety valves shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. Hanger rods shall be subject
to tensile loading only.
MWH-4/5/2007 PIPE SUPPORTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15006-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1.4 FACTORY TESTING
A. Inspection by ENGINEER:
1. The ENGINEER shall be given the right to inspect the ductwork at the factory at any
stage of fabrication, without prior notice.
2. The ENGINEER shall be provided 72 hours prior notice of the start of fabrication.
B. The ENGINEER may select from the following test methods:
1. Magnification.
2. Ultrasonic, magnetic, or other non-destructive technique.
3. Photography.
4. Barcol hardness testing.
5. Acetone sensitivity testing.
6. Acoustic emission testing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed by experienced workers who
have experience with lay up, fabrication, and installation of ductwork.
B. Resin:
1. The resin manufacturer shall approve the resin for the intended application.
2. The resin shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Service Conditions:
1. Intemally, duct systems will be exposed to air saturated with water vapor containing
foul odors (primarily hydrogen sulfide).
2. Externally, duct systems will be exposed to odorous air from inside the building and
sunlight.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
B. Seismic Restraints:
1. Duct supports and restraints shall be designed for static, dynamic, and seismic
loads in Zone 1 in accordance with the 1997 Uniform Building Code.
2. Seismic restraints shall not introduce stresses in the ductwork from thermal
expansion and contraction.
C. Service Life: Materials and details shall be selected for a failure -free service life of 15
years minimum.
2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards:
1. The ductwork system shall be in accordance with the latest editions of the ASHRAE
Handbook, the SMACNA Manual, and the International Mechanical Code.
2. Where conflicts between these standards arise, the most stringent criteria shall be
used.
B. Duct, Adapters, Transitions, and Expansion Joints:
Internal positive pressure, inches we
20
Internal vacuum inches we
20
Temperature, degrees F
0 to 180
C. Dampers:
Differential pressure, inches we
11
Temperature, degrees F
0 to 180
D. Dimensions: Indicated dimensions are net inside, i.e., the clear space inside the duct.
E. Physical Properties: Laminates shall have the following minimum properties:
Property
Standard
3/16-inch
thick
1/4-inch
thick
Ultimate Tensile Strength, psi
ASTM D 638
9,000
12,000
Flexural Strength, psi
ASTM D 790
16,000
19,000
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity, psi (tangentL (tangent
ASTM D 790
700,000
800,000
F. Reinforcement:
1. Bends, fittings, and special sections shall be reinforced or shall have its thickness
increased at those locations where the combined stresses due to internal pressure
and bending will exceed the maximum stress recommended by the manufacturer.
2. The duct manufacturer shall determine and provide reinforcements or additional
thicknesses as required to keep the combined stresses within the recommended
maximum.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
G. Structural Criteria:
1. Round duct shall have a safety factor of 10 to one for pressure and 4 to one for
vacuum service, but minimum wall thickness shall be 0.139 inch.
2. After installation, the maximum sag of horizontal round duct shall not exceed 2
percent of its diameter.
H. Chemical Resistance: The duct shall provide chemical resistance to acids, caustic,
water, hydrogen sulfide and other sulfide and disulfide compounds, mercaptans, and
other materials commonly encountered in odorous air_ streams from wastewater
treatment plants.
I. Flame Spread: Ducting and fabrications shall not exceed a flame spread index of 25
and smoke development rating of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
J. FRP Defects: Ductwork shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2563 and the following
requirements:
Defect
Inside Surface
Outside Surface
Blister
None
Maximum dimension: 1/4-inch
diameter x 1/8-inch high
Maximum density: one blister per
square foot
Minimum separation: 2 inches
Chips
None
Maximum dimension of break:
1/4 inch
Thickness: less than 10 percent
of wall thickness
Maximum density: one chip per
square foot
Crazing
None
Maximum length: 2 inches
Maximum density: 5 crazings per
square foot
Minimum separation: 2 inches
Cracks
None
None
Ex osed Glass
None
None
Scratches
None
Level III
Burned Areas4kindNone
None
None
Surface PorosiNone
None
Foreign Matter of an
None
Sharp Discontinuity
None
None
Pits
Level 11
Level III
Maximum: 10 pits per
Maximum: 10 pits per square foot
square foot
D Sot
None
onesquare inch per square foot
Entrapped Air
None at the surface;
4 defects per square inch (1/8-
maximum 1/16-inch
inch diameter) or 10 defects per
diameter and maximum
square inch (1/16-inch diameter)
10 defects per square inch
within laminate
K. Ductwork and fittings shall have the manufacturer's name printed on the exterior surface.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
2.3 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A. Resins:
1. Fabricate the ductwork using a single corrosion -resistant resin throughout the
laminates.
2. Type and amount of catalyst, promoter, and resin shall be in accordance with the
resin manufacturer's recommendation.
3. Fillers, additions, and pigments will not be accepted.
4. A thixotropic agent for resin viscosity control shall be used, but not on the corrosion
liner or surfaces in contact with a corrosive environment.
5. Resin putty shall be the same resin as above, but including not less than 15 percent
milled glass fiber; no silica flour, grinding dust, or other filler will be accepted.
6. Fire Retardant:
a. Antimony trioxide shall be added in the range of 3 to 5 percent for fire retardant.
b. No other fire retardant will be accepted.
c. Do not use antimony trioxide in the corrosion -resistant layer.
7. Manufacturer, or Equal:
a. Relchold Chemical Company, Reichold 9300
b. Ashland Chemical Company, Hetron FR 992
B. Duct:
1. Corrosion -Resistant Layer:
a. The internal corrosion barrier shall consist of one layer of C veil and one layer
of synthetic veil, such as Burlington Industries Type 1012 Nexus, or equal.
b. The overall thickness of this barrier shall be a minimum of 0.0204nch and shall
contain a minimum of 90 percent resin.
c. The balance of the corrosion resistant layer shall consist of 2 layers of 1-1/2-
ounce per square foot Type E glass, with a ratio of approximately 75 percent
resin to 25 percent glass.
d. The overall thickness, including the corrosion barrier, shall be a minimum of
0.090-inch.
2. Intermediate Structural Layer:
a. Use a hand layup method to form the required thickness utilizing Type E, 1-1/2-
ounce per square foot mats, and 24-ounce per square yard Type E woven
rovings.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
b. Lamination sequence shall conform to Tables 5-1 and 5-2 in SMACNA.
c. Wall thicknesses less than 0.182 inch shall be Type I laminates, and wall
thicknesses greater than 0.182 inch shall be Type II.
d. The intermediate structural layer shall be approximately 65 percent resin and
35 percent glass.
3. External Layer of Indoor Ductwork: Apply minimum 15 mils of intumescent paint for
fire protection.
4. External Layer of Outdoor Ductwork: Apply a white resin -based gel paint for
ultraviolet protection.
5. Manufacturer, or Equal:
a. Fiber -Tech Engineering
b. Ershigs
C. Fittings and Flanges:
1. Provide manufacturer's standard, shop -fabricated fitting and flanges.
2. Fittings and flanges shall be compatible with the duct, shall be as chemical resistant
as the duct, and shall comply with SMACNA.
3. Flanges shall have thicknesses in accordance with SMACNA, and shall be complete
with Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers.
D. Flange Gaskets:
1. Full face.
2. Viton.
3. 3/16-inch minimum thickness.
4. Hardness of Durometer 50 to 70 when tested according to ASTM D 2240.
E. Dampers:
1. Isolation Type:
a. Isolation type dampers shall be manufactured from the same material as the
ductwork, including a 0.090-inch corrosion -resistant layer.
b. Isolation type damper to be supplied with a 316 stainless steel screen.
c. Maximum leakage shall be 0.094 percent of maximum flow at a pressure
differential of one inch (1") w.c.
d. Isolation type dampers shall have a flanged connection. Flanges shall have
thicknesses in accordance with SMACNA, and shall be complete with Type 316
stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC.
Page 24
DWRF Odor Control
3/22/2007 9:10 AM
an �IaeatWA ; ��mi, c..u.�'� �.cc;r.'uA'e� �s',i�u':y,e��".rt.:'��� �� �a.�''€�'-•ilii`eAy..g,
,a„�' F,�`� Y ^k�4�'w ;_ red' VJ�dee '��,x� a�t••
[i1, f
0314-
Fan Slab
Uquld Curing Compounds
_
0314.
Air Chase Slab
Mat Foundation Edge Form
0
Mat Foundation Bulkhead Form
- 0
Strip & Oil Mat Fwurrd. Form
0
0
SOG Reber
1'19
'
Mesh Support - bricks
30
-
1,1
4000 psi Concrete -
1,507
- -
-
30
Pump Place Mat Foundation
- -
1,507
Finish. Rough
-
- 167
167
Uquki Curing Compounds
Flydrophllic Waterstop
1,521
-
0320-
Walls
-
'
1,521
Sealant At Expansion Joint 0
0
320
0320-
Interior Walls
-
320
Sealant At Expansion Joint 0
0
0320.
Air Chase Walls
73
73
panel Form System 04,
0
Sh* 6 OS Wall Fomw
- 0
Wall Reber -
670
-
4000 pet Concrete -
845
670
Pump Place Weis
- - -
645
845
Firrhh- Top o/Wa8 ti Curb
_
94
94
GrbWNatch Walls
Uqukl Curing Compounds
_
- -
HydmphiNc Wateralop
768
0320•
Walls
- - -
788
PanelForm System 04'
0
panel Form System "1
0
' 0
So* 6 O8 Will Foam
0
Wall Bulkhead Forms
0
Chemiler
Sealant At Expansion Joint 0
0
320 -
Wall Rebar
-
4,063
- '
-
320
4000 psi Concrete -
5.120
_ -
4,063
Pump Place Wails
- - -
5.120
Flnlah- Top o/ Wig 8 Curb
'
- - 569
569
Gdnd43*tch Walls
-
Uquid Curing Compounds
.
Hydrophilic Watewtop
1,307
-
0320-
Interior Walls
- -
1.307
panel Form System 8.12'
0
Strip & Oil Wall Fours
0
Wall Bulkhead Forms
0
Chamfer
0
-
Sealant At E xpansion Joint 0
0
'
73
Wall Reber
856
- -
73
4000 psi Concrete -
1,079
- -
856
Pump Place Wass
- -
1,079
Finish. Top of Well6 Curb
_
120
120
GdndrPatch Wags
Uqukl Curing Compounds
-
Hydrophilic Waterstop
443
0326-
Pilasters
- -
443
Form ReohngH Columns 0. 8'
0
Strip 8: Oti Column Am"
0
Chamfor
0
Column Reber
150
4000 psi Concrete -
190
-
150
- -
190
e. The damper blade shall be constructed of fiber glass, and shall be center
pivoted with a composite or balsa core.
f. The blade seat shall be a full -circumference, double -tadpole wiper seal with an
angle pin stop.
g. The axle shall be constructed of vinyl ester resin, and manufactured by the
pultrusion process.
h. The bearings shall be constructed of molded PTFE containing 10 percent
graphite.
i. The shaft seal shall be a lip -type compression seal, housed in a vinyl ester
retainer with a stainless steel top plate.
j. Provide manual actuators in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate
Actuators.
k. Manufacturer, or Equal:
1) Swartout, Model 914
2. Volume Control Type:
a. Volume control type dampers shall be manufactured from same material as the
ductwork, including a 0.090-inch corrosion resistant layer.
b. Volume control type damper to be supplied with a 316 stainless steel screen.
c. Maximum leakage shall be 0.094 percent of maximum flow at a pressure
differential of one inch (1") w.g.
d. Volume control type dampers shall have a flanged connection. Flanges shall
have thicknesses in accordance with SMACNA, and shall be complete with
Type 316 stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers.
e. The damper blade shall be constructed of fiber glass, and shall be center -
pivoted.
f. The shaft shall be pultruded fiber glass vinyl ester rod, fully encapsulated at the
non -actuated end for zero leakage.
g. Bearings:
1) Bearings shall be FRP at both ends of the shaft.
2) Provide a neoprene gasket between the bearing and the actuator.
h. Provide a manual actuator.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
i. Manufacturer, or Equal:
1) For Circular Ductwork:
a) Swartout, Model 914
b) Fiber -Tech Engineering, Model STD
2) For Rectangular Ductwork:
a) Swartout, Model 1108
3. Manual Actuator for Duct less than 24 inches in Diameter: Rigid FRP locking
quadrant type hand level allowing 90-degree movement in either direction.
4. Manual Actuator with Gear Drive:
a. Hand actuators for dampers 24 inches in diameter and larger shall be worm -
gear -driven, totally enclosed, weather-proof, and permanently lubricated in a
die-cast aluminum housing.
b. The housing shall be epoxy coated at the factory, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 16 mils.
c. Worms shall be heat -treated carbon steel and worm wheels shall be ductile
iron.
d. Shafts shall be stainless steel.
e. Shaft and worm wheel seals shall be Buna-N rubber.
The actuator shall be bolted to the duct with stainless steel bolts.
g. Hand Wheels:
1) Hand wheels shall be sized to require a maximum rim effort of 40 lbs.
2) The number of turns of the hand wheel in order to rotate the blade 90
degrees shall be a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 12.
h. Indicating Arrows:
1) Actuators shall be provided with indicating arrows to clearly identify the
direction of rotation for opening and closing of the dampers.
2) The arrows shall be clearly legible and of durable quality.
5. Elevated Actuators:
a. Dampers with shaft centerlines more than 7-feet above the operating floor shall
be provided with chain wheels and operating chains.
b. Each chain wheel shall be equipped with a chain guide that will permit rapid
handling of the operating chain without "gagging" of the wheel, and will also
permit a reasonable side pull effort on the chain.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-9
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
C. Actuator extensions shall be provided, if necessary to prevent interference of
chain and, adjacent piping or equipment below.
d. Operating chains shall be constructed of hot -dip galvanized carbon steel and
shall be looped to extend within 4 feet of the operating floor below the damper.
e. Galvanized tie -back hooks shall be provided on adjacent pipe supports to hold
the operating chains away from walkways or maintenance access areas when
the damper is not being operated.
F. Expansion Joints:
1. Expansion joints shall be provided where indicated on Drawings.
2. Type: W-design configuration with integral flanges suitable for service with FRP duct
under the conditions specified.
3. Material: EPDM
4. Backing Rings: 3/8-inch thick, 2 inches wide, Type 316 stainless steel where flanged
expansion joints or flex connections are noted.
5. Extension: 3 inches
6. Compression: 2.5 inches
7. Lateral Offset: 2.5 inches
8. Thickness,'/ -inch minimum.
9. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Type 316 stainless steel
10. Expansion joints shall be manufactured by RM-Hotz, The Metraflex Company,
Garlock, Mercer, Proco Products, Inc., Mercer, or equal.
11. Expansion joints shall be flanged where connecting ductwork to equipment,
otherwise slip -type will be acceptable.
12. The expansion joint material shall be stiff enough to prevent sagging or contraction
due to an internal vacuum.
G. Drains:
1. Provide drains with ball valves in the bottom of main and branch, and at locations
indicated.
2. Locate drains at every rise in the ductwork, every 50 feet along a continuous run,
and at the heel of each drop.
H. Bolts, Studs, Washers, and Nuts: Comply with Section 05500 — Miscellaneous
Metalwork, except for flanges.
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-10
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Field Measurements:
1. Duct lengths shall be determined from measurements taken at the Project Site.
2. Indicated dimensions are approximate, and shall not be used for fabrication.
B. Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
1. Duct, fittings, and dampers shall be protected from damage and shall be supported
by 4-inch wide, or wider, strapping to avoid damage due to flex strains and point
loading during shipping and installation.
2. Debris or other extraneous material shall not be allowed to enter the duct.
3. Duct, fittings, and dampers shall not be thrown or dropped.
C. Installation:
1. Ducts shall be installed as indicated.
2. Necessary provisions shall be taken into consideration during fabrication and
installation of ductwork to provide for expansion and contraction.
3. Vibration isolation devices shall be provided such that ductwork shall be free from
vibration when in operation.
4. An antiseize compound shall be applied to bolt threads.
5. Smooth bends or internal turning vanes shall be installed at elbows, tees, and other
points where the air flow changes direction.
6. The ductwork shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as indicated.
7. The inside of duct, specials, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from
blisters, sand, and dirt when installed.
8. The ductwork shall be airtight.
D. Joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the requirements indicated
and as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Flanges:
1. Tighten flange bolts sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and make a good
seal, but not so tightly as to distort the flanges.
2. Provide a flat washer under each nut and bolt head.
F. Dampers:
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-11
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
1. Dampers shall be positioned to fit into the connecting ductwork at the locations
indicated.
2. Unless necessary to provide for proper operation of the damper, axles shall be
installed in the horizontal position.
G. Supports and Hangers:
1. Supports for the FRP duct shall be in accordance with the SMACNA Standards and
appropriate code requirements regarding duct installation.
2. Supports and hangers shall transmit loads into the building structural frame through
a system of intermediate beams and struts.
3. Supports or hangers employing clip angles or similar devices for attachment to the
duct will not be accepted.
4. Supports shall be designed to resist 1997 UBC Zone 1 seismic forces.
5. Supports shall be in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports.
H. Alignment and Elevation:
1. Ductwork shall be provided to the lines and elevations indicated and shall be sloped
to facilitate water drainage where indicated.
2. Laser beam equipment or surveying instruments shall be used to maintain
alignment and elevation. M`
3. Accuracy Verification:
a. If laser beam equipment is used, periodic elevation measurements shall be
made with surveying instruments to verify accuracy.
b. If such measurements indicate thermal deflection of the laser beam due to
differences between the ground temperature and the air temperature within the
duct:
1) precautions shall be taken to prevent or minimize further thermal
deflections; and,
2) previous alignments and elevations measured with the laser beam
equipment shall be re -measured with properly calibrated equipment.
3.2 DUCT CLEANING
A. Ducts shall be blown clean of dust and debris using compressed air during installation.
B. The system fans shall not be used for duct cleaning.
MWH-415/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-12
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Ductwork shall be leak tested after installation in accordance with the National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems,
a publication offered by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
B. The maximum allowable leakage criteria shall be in accordance with ASHRAE
standards.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-13
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007 FRP DUCTWORK
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15812-14
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 15850 - FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA):
a. Bulletin 300, Setup No. 1.
b. Standard 99, Standards Handbook, Reverberant Room Method for Sound
Testing of Fans.
c. Standard 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE):
a. HVAC Applications chapter in "Seismic Restraint Design."
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 112, Standard Test
Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1-12.53a, Motors and
Generators.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electric Code (NEC).
b. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Product Directories.
1.2 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide fans, blowers, ventilators, and appurtenances,
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Where 2 or more fans, blowers, ventilators or appurtenances of the same type or size
are required, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 —Contractor Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings: Complete specifications, fan curves, descriptive drawings, catalog
cuts for and all components, including, but not limited to, bearings, belts and
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-1
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
vibration isolators, and descriptive literature, which shall include make, model,
dimensions, weight of equipment, and electrical schematics. Include AMCA sound
data for inlet values, Type B test configuration.
2. Manufacturer's Test Reports for the Following:
a. Performance testing procedure & results.
b. Vibration testing procedure.
3. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of products prior to
installation.
C. O&M Data:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01300, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA for equipment specified. Submittals shall include operation,
maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and
service depot location and telephone number.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.1 FRP CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Provide FRP centrifugal fans as indicated.
B. FRP Centrifugal Fans shall be explosion proof, and manufactured to exhaust moist,
corrosive, and explosive gases at a maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and
elevation 5000 ft above sea level. Fan shall be selected at 100 degrees F inlet
temperature at 5000 ft elevation.
1. Equipment Identification Plates shall be provided for each fan. Tags shall be 16-
gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die -stamped equipment tag numbers securely
mounted in a readily visible location.
Max
Min
Volts
Fan
Static
Equipment
Fan
Motor
Drive
and
Location
Flow Rate
Pressure
Tag
RPM
HP
Type
Phase
Headworks/
17,600 acfm
10.5" w.c.
OCF-141
1800
50
Belt
460/3
Primaries
Headworks/
17,600 acfm
10.5" w.c.
OCF-142
1800
50
Belt
46013
Primaries
Solids
8384 acfm
6.75" w.c.
OCF-741
2000
ILL
Belt
460/3
Solids
8384 acfm
6.75" w.c.
OCF-743
2000
15
1 Belt
460/3
C. Fans shall be single width and single inlet.
D. Fan wheels shall be backward curved, airfoil type.
E. Fiberglass reinforced plastic centrifugal exhaust fans shall be constructed and inspected
according to the following standards:
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-2
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
NBS PS15-69
ASTM E 84
ASTM C 582
ASTM D 2563
ASTM D 4167
AMCA -99
AMCA 210
AMCA 211
AMCA 300
AMCA 311
AFMBA
F. Design Criteria:
Contact -Molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical Resistant Process
Equipment
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
Contact -Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic Laminates for
Corrosion Resistant Equipment
Classifying Visual Defects in Glass -Reinforced Plastic Laminate
Parts
Fiber -Reinforced Plastic Fans and Blowers
Standards Handbook
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Performance
Certified Ratings Procedure - Air Performance
Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices
Certified Sound Ratings Program for Air Moving Devices
Method of Evaluating Load Ratings of Bearings (ASA - B3.1 1)
Equipment shall be suitable for continuous, stable, and reliable operation at the
indicated performance conditions.
2. Performance Curves:
a. Fan power characteristics shall be non -overloading.
3. Centrifugal fans shall be capable of operating within the static pressure and outlet
velocity limits established by the Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA)
Standard 99-2408-69.
4. All components in contact with the air stream including, but not limited to, wheel and
housing, to be constructed of a fiber -reinforced plastic laminate capable of resisting
continuous airstream temperatures of 200T.
5. Relationships of fan impeller diameter to maximum inlet and outlet areas shall not
exceed those outlined by AMCA 2401 or 2402, as appropriate.
6. Fan and component selection shall be based on single -width construction with
rotation, inlet and outlet configurations as required to match connecting equipment.
7. Equipment shall be designed to permit rapid and economical maintenance.
8. Fans shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Standards 210 and 300, and be
licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Sound and Air Performance, in
accordance with AMCA publications 211 and 311. Acceptable manufacturers
whose equipment is not licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-3
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 25
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
Location - .Wbmbly ;, bweilpllon -
�" .'L.itlforl niouttl.i�`'r� :.,
i�;?k•y f. �» e 0
AAUmN�lY4 '10
0326-
Pilasters
.. ...
_. ....a_ . .,.;w:..... .:«m ,�•. . ..«z ,..,v...,. si.. w.. asr;v�«
Pump Piece Plers 6 Columns
GrindPatch Columns
-
- 21 21
Liquid Curing Compounds
_
-
0330 2-
Valley Pan
- - -
S.O.G. Edge Form < P
0
Strip 6 Oil SOG Form
- O
-
W W M 6X6- W 1.4 Rails
73
- -
Mash Support - bricks
- 73
3000 psi Concrete
11
14
Truck Piece Slab on Grade
- 564
- 584
Finish- Broom
-
- -
Liquid Curing Compounds
_•
.
0330 2d-
Slab
_-
-
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0 0
0330 2d-
Fillet Slab
-
230 - 230
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0 0
0330 2d-
Slab
128 128
,.
&O.G.Edge Form <1'
0
S.O.G. Edge Form > 1'
- 0
S-o.G Const Joints < 1'
0
a
0
S-o•G Const Joints > 1'
0
- o
Strip 6 00 SOG Form
- - 0
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0 0
SOG Reber
- -
230 230
4000 psi Concrete
9145
- - 9,145
Pump Place Slab on Grade
- 11,528
- - - 11,628
Finish. Hard Trowel
"
- - 1,261 1281
Liquid Curing Compounds
.
Hydrophilic Waterstop
361
0330 2d-
Fillet Slab
- - 381
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1
0
S-O-G Const Joints < 1'
0
0
Strip d OS SOG Form
-0
Sealant At Expansion Joint
0 0
128 -
SOG Reber
2.595
128
4000 psi Concrete
3,258
2,585
_
Pump Piece Slab on Grade
- - 3.258
Flnisl► Broom
362 302
Liquid Curing Compounds
- •_ -
0330 2d-
Stair Slab
&O,G. Edge Form < 1'
0
Strip d Oil SOG Form
0
SOG Reber
226
-
4000 Psi Concrete
- 254
- - 226
Buggy Place Slab on Grade
- - 284
Finish- Broom
-
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
0330 2d-
Driveway
-
S.O.G. C-dge Form < 1'
0
Strip 6 ON SOG Form
-q
SOG Reber
3000 psi Concrete
- 749
Truck Piece Slab on Grade
- 749
Finish- Broom
Liquid Curing Compounds
._ .
0330 2d-
Sidewalk
-
S.O.G. Edge Form < 1'
0
Strip & Off SOG Form
- 0
-
Certified Sound and Air Performance must submit air and sound performance tests,
in accordance with AMCA Standards 210 and 300, conducted by an independent
third party, and stamped by a registered professional engineer.
9. Fans shall have spark resistant construction conforming to AMCA 99.
G. Construction Materials:
1. Fan Housing:
a. Each fan housing shall be fabricated in one piece.
b. Resin:
1) Fan shall be fabricated of a premium quality, industrial grade vinylester
resin such as Dow Derakane 510A, or equal.
2) The appropriate resin shall be selected based upon meeting structural
and mechanical requirements, as well as chemical resistance
requirements of the Project including resistance to water, hydrogen
sulfide and other sulfide and disulfide compounds, mercaptans, and other
materials commonly encountered in odorous airstreams from wastewater
treatment plants.
3) The resin shall contain no fillers, except as required for fire retardance.
4) Antimony trioxide will be permitted up to a 5 percent limit, as
recommended by the resin manufacturer, to establish a product with a
Class I Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84.
c. Exterior Gel Coat:
1) Fan housing exterior shall be coated with an industrial grade gel.
2) Gel shall be pigmented and shall contain UV inhibitors.
3) Gel shall be manufactured by Ram Chemical Co., or equal.
d. Glass reinforcement fibers shall be of an industrial grade as manufactured by
Owens-Corning, or equal.
e. Interior Surface:
1) The interior surface of the fan housing shall be smooth, resin rich and
shall contain no more than 20 percent of C grade glass veil.
2) The resin shall be the same resin as used throughout the housing.
MWH-4/512007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-4
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
H. Centrifugal Wheel:
1. Design:
a. Each fan shall include a backward -inclined wheel with backward curved blades
statically and dynamically balanced for smooth, vibration free operation,
b. The impeller shall be electronically balanced both statically and dynamically
Grade G6.3 per AMCA 204 Standard.
c. Flat blade wheel designs will not be acceptable.
d. Fan wheels shall be constructed entirely of FRP and shall be balanced without
the use of metal weights.
e. No metal parts shall be exposed to the corrosive airstream within the fan
housing.
f. The wheel shall be readily removable without damaging the scroll.
2. Resin:
a. The fan wheel shall be fabricated of a premium quality, industrial grade
vinylester resin such as Dow Derakane 510A, or equal.
b. The appropriate resin shall be selected based upon meeting structural and
mechanical, as well as chemical resistance requirements of the Project
including resistance to water, hydrogen sulfide and other sulfide and disulfide
compounds, mercaptans, and other materials commonly encountered in
odorous airstreams from wastewater treatment plants.
3. Glass reinforcement fibers shall be of an industrial grade as manufactured by
Owens-Corning, or equal.
4. Hub:
a. Fan shaft shall be secured to the wheel by the use of a taperlock bushing in the
hub or by a straight bore on resin embedded aluminum core with set screws.
b. Bolts and nuts used to fasten the hub to the wheel shall be stainless steel.
c. Metal parts in contact with the airstream will be entirely embedded in FRP.
5. Shaft:
a. Shaft material shall be turned, ground, and polished carbon steel.
b. The portion of the shaft exposed to the airstream shall be FRP encapsulated.
c. The neoprene shaft seal in the fan housing shall provide a seal against fumes
migrating in or out of the shaft penetration.
MWH-415/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-5
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
I. Steel Fan Support:
Steel:
a. The fan housing support system shall be manufactured entirely out of mild
steel.
b. The steel base shall be designed and fabricated using plate steel and support
members of adequate gauge to ensure minimal vibration and maximum
longevity.
c. Each fan shall have a common channel base constructed of steel and
connecting the motor, bearing and inlet support members.
d. Base Supports:
1) Steel stands and supports shall be cleaned, primed, and coated with a
premium, corrosion resistant coating. Base shall be equipped with lifting
eyes.
2) Corrosion resistant coating shall be Sherwin Williams Tile Clad dual part
epoxy, or equal.
3) All fasteners to be Stainless Steel.
J. Accessories:
1. Flanged Outlet:
a. The fan housing shall include an integral FRP outlet flange. All flanges shall be
factory drilled. Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 25 diameter
and drilling requirements.
b. Flange shall be fabricated of the same material as the fan housing and shall be
underlined.
2. Discharge Transition Piece:
a. The fan manufacturer shall provide an FRP rectangular to round discharge
transition piece with the fan and the size shall be coordinated with the fan and
discharge piping fumished. The flange on the transition piece shall be factory
drilled to match the fan outlet. Stainless steel bolts and gasket shall be
provided by the fan manufacturer.
b. The discharge transition piece shall be supplied with a minimum 3/16-inch thick
PVC flexible connector including stainless steel drawbands.
3. Plain Inlet:
a. The fan shall include a plain inlet collar manufactured of the same material as
the fan housing, and shall be supplied with a minimum 3/16-inch thick PVC
flexible connector including stainless steel drawbands.
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-6
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
4. Access Door:
a. A raised access door manufactured of the same material as the fan housing
shall be provided to allow inspection of the fan scroll.
b. Access door shall be bolted and gasketed to prevent leakage.
5. Drain:
a. Provide a minimum %" diameter bottom drain at the low point in fan scroll.
b. Drain connection shall be accessible for plumbing attachment.
6. Isolation Butterfly Dampers:
a. Fan Manufacturer shall provide flanged isolation butterfly dampers on the inlet
and discharge of each fan.
b. All flanges shall be factory drilled. Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1,
Class 25 diameter and drilling requirements.
7. A neoprene shaft seal shall be provided in the fan housing to prevent leakage
around the shaft penetration.
8. Fans to be supplied with a graphite liner and grounding strap to remove static
electricity with a flame retardancy of 25 or less.
K. Motor:
1. All motors shall meet the requirements of Section 16222 — Low Voltage Motors up to
500hp.
2. The fan shall be belt -driven and supplied complete with sheaves belts, motor, and
adjustable motor base.
3. The drives shall be aligned to ensure fan and motor shafts are parallel.
4. Belt and Shaft Guards
a. Each fan shall be provided with a powder coated, steel belt and shaft guard.
b. Shaft guards shall include access for lubrication of bearings without requiring
guard removal.
c. Belt guards shall include tachometer holes large enough to accept standard
tachometer drive shafts.
d. Belt and shaft guards shall meet OSHA requirements for safety protection and
be easily removable by one person.
e. Center punch fan shaft to accommodate tachometer readings.
5. Bearings
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-7
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
a. Bearings shall be self -aligning, grease -packed, and heavy-duty, pillow block
type, rated for 100,000 hours service life (L-10).
b. Bearings shall be mounted out of the airstream.
c. Bearings shall be self -aligning, ball bearing type with locking collar and set
screw.
d. Bearings shall be Dodge, Fafnir, or equal.
L. Manufacturer, or Equal:
1. M.K. Plastics Corporation, Model DHK (Basis of Design);
2. Hartzell, Series 41;
3. VIRON, Model VCB 1100.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fans, blowers, ventilators, and hoods shall be installed by a qualified
SUBCONTRACTOR in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Pipe housing drains to nearest utility drain.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Inspection and Testing Prior to Shipment:
1. Inspect FRP components after fabrication and final cure in accordance with ASTM
D 2563.
2. Verify fan dimensional accuracy with respect to accepted Shop Drawings.
3. Repair:
a. Unacceptable nonstructural defects shall be repaired by grinding out the defect
and reapplying the corrosion barrier.
b. Structural integrity shall not be violated during these repairs.
c. Structural defect repair procedures require prior review by the ENGINEER.
d. Prior to repairing structural defects, notify the ENGINEER in writing of the
defect type, location and size, and describe the proposed repair procedure.
4. Factory Testing:
a. Testing shall be performed as described below and as necessary to ensure
safe and reliable operation.
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-8
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
b. Each fan shall be given a mechanical run test at the indicated operating speed
and full design load for one hour.
c. Shaft seals, bearings, and impeller furnished with the equipment shall be used
in the fan for the mechanical run test.
d. The impeller shall be electronically balance both statically and dynamically
Grade GS.3 per AMCA 204 Standard.
e. Each fan shall be tested before shipping. Motors to be tested for amperage
drawn.
If dismantling is required to improve mechanical operation, or if any parts are
replaced for any reason, the initial run test shall be considered void and shall be
rerun.
g. A complete detailed log of all final tests shall be assembled and submitted to
the ENGINEER, including rotor balancing and vibration measurement data
taken over the operating speed range.
h. Notify the OWNER and the ENGINEER at least one week prior to inspection
and testing, such that they may witness the inspections and tests at their own
cost. Test to be performed at the factory.
A certificate to be supplied with each fan as to quality control before shipping
and compliance to specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
MWH-4/5/2007 FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION PAGE 15850-9
1700635 DWRF ODOR CONTROL
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
MWH-4/5/2007
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1700635
FANS, BLOWERS, AND VENTILATORS
PAGE 15850-10
DWRF ODOR CONTROL
SECTION 16050
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements applicable to all Electrical Work.
2. General requirements for electrical submittals.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project:
a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may
be shown on Drawings or referred to in Specifications that do not apply
specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems.
2. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other; what is
called for by one shall be binding as if called for by both. If a conflict between
Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer conflict to the ENGINEER as
soon as possible for resolution.
C. Interfaces to Equipment, Instruments, and Other Components:
1. The Contract Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on non -
certified information furnished by various equipment Manufacturers. This
"equipment" includes, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices,
electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment
provided with mechanical systems.
2. The Electrical Specifications, ladder logic diagrams, and installation details are
based on non -certified vendor information and indicate minimum scope of
supply from Manufacturers.
3. Include all labor, material, and other costs in the bid to add additional
instruments, wiring, control system inputs/outputs, controls, conduit, interlocks,
electrical hardware, etc., into the Work based on the Equipment
Manufacturer's final certified drawings.
4. Revise or produce new loop diagrams to meet the Equipment Manufacturer's
wiring requirements.
5. Incorporate such changes to the Instrumentation and Electrical Work at no
additional cost to the OWNER in light of the CONTRACTOR's knowledge that
non -certified vendor information has been used in the design, and due to the
fact that the final selection of the vendor may have been by the
CONTRACTOR.
6. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all material and labor needed
to install the actual equipment furnished, as such the CONTRACTOR's bid
includes all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other
electrical hardware to the design, which may be necessary to make a
complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished:
April 5, 2007 16050-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the Manufacturer's wiring
requirements.
b. Incorporate such changes to the electrical installation into the final "As -
Built" Drawings.
7. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are
completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on Drawings or
in Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work and any costs for
these items.
8. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance
before starting field installation Work.
D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire project must comply with the
requirements of Division 16, whether referenced in the individual equipment
specifications or not:
1. The requirements of Division 16 apply to all Electrical Work specified in other
Divisions and Sections, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical
systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
2. Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the
requirements of Division 16.
3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of
the CONTRACTOR to notify all Subcontractors and suppliers of the
Division 16 requirements.
E. Specifications:
1. The General and Special Conditions of the Contract Documents govern the
Work.
2. These requirements are in addition to all general requirements of the project.
The CONTRACTOR must comply with all requirements. The more stringent
requirements apply to all construction.
F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used together in
order to fully describe the Work. In the case of a conflict between the Drawings and
Specifications, the ENGINEER will make all interpretations, and the ENGINEER's
decision is final.
G. Contract Drawings:
1. The Electrical Drawings show in a diagrammatic manner, the desired
locations, and arrangements of the components of the electrical work. Follow
the Drawings as closely as possible, use professional judgment and
coordinate with the other trades to secure the best possible installation. Use
the entire Drawing set for construction purposes.
2. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are
approximate only, exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to
ensure the best possible installation:
a. The equipment locations and dimensions shown on plans and elevations
are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout,
foundation and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate
with all Subcontractors to ensure all electrical equipment will be
compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes
required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. The CONTRACTOR has the freedom to select any of the named
Manufacturers as identified in the individual specification sections;
however, the ENGINEER has designed the spatial equipment layout
based upon a single Manufacturer and has not confirmed that every
named Manufacturer's equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that the equipment being
furnished fits within the defined space.
3. Installation Details:
a. The Contract Drawings include typical installation details, which show the
means and methods the CONTRACTOR is to use to install electrical
equipment. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop
installation details that may be necessary for completing the Work, and
submit these details for review by the ENGINEER.
b. The typical installation details apply to all aspects of the Work, whether
specifically referenced or not.
4. Schematic Diagrams:
a. All controls are shown de -energized.
b. Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system.
c. Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts for the
control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for
control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system
voltage drop considerations.
d. Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the
controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or indicated.
e. Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences found in the Drawings or Specifications.
Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional
control system.
H. Alternates/Alternatives:
1. The CONTRACTOR may make written application to the ENGINEER to
substitute for specified items. Make request for substitution in writing to the
ENGINEER within the period specified in General Conditions, Supplemental
Conditions, and/or Division 1:
a. Requests must contain model, type, or style number, catalog sheets,
standards, and all pertinent data for each substitution requested.
2. Requests for substitutions will not be considered unless all information
furnished to the ENGINEER is complete.
3. The ENGINEER's decision of acceptability of substitutions or modifications is
final.
Changes and Change Orders:
1. Base all change orders upon the items and units as reflected in the schedule
of values and the submitted per unit material and labor costs. Include itemized
material and labor costs with each request for change.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code Compliance:
1. All Work specified herein is to conform to or exceed the applicable
requirements of the code and standard documents listed to the extent that the
April 5, 2007 16050-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
I A
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 26
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
�i6t+'s4yf>'^
0330 2d- Sidewalk
3000 psi Concrete
-
361
Fibermesh
-
29
-
-
361
Truck Place Slab on Grade
_
-
-
-
29
Rnbh- Broom
-
-
-
Liquid Curing Compounds
0354- Equipment Pad Concrete
Set Anchor Bolts 2 Set
29
72
-
4
0354- Equipment Pad Concrete
-
104
Equipment Pad Form 6'
29
0
-
4
Ship 6 Oil Equipment Pod Form
-
33
Chamhr
0
_
Set Anchor Bobs 2 Set
29
72
-
4
Misc. Pad Reber
9
42
-
104
4000 psi Concrete
-
53
-
-
51
Buggy Place Equipment Pads
7
-
-
-
53
Fbdsll- Rost
-
-
-
-
7
Liquid Curing Compounds
unassigned
Material Testing
200
_
2D0
400
Material Testing -
200
-
2,000
-
200
2A00
Material Testing -Pipe
400
-
4,685
100
50
5,215
"Gravel Area (ADD)•
288
11062
-
1.593
-
2,943
Other Misc. Pipe Owe
4,230
-
-
4.230
'HDPE Pipe Quote (V.E.)'
39,559
-
-
-
39,559
Asphalt Paving
-
8,656
-
-
8,056
'Weed Barrier- Polyethylene (ADD)*
560
840
196
-
-
1,596
Steel Edging Strips
26
54
-
13
-
93
Anchor Bops
12
200
-
5
-
217
Non Shrink Grout
110
330
-
-
_
440
Sub - Concrete
0
65,618
0
0
65.618
Flowlili C Utility Crossings
-
1,170
-
-
-
1.170
Sub - Masonry Subcontr
-
-
18,668
-
-
18,668
Dovetail Slots
773
-
-
-
773
Field Welding
-
-
1,000
-
-
1,000
Install Channel
272
103
-
20
-
395
Metal Stairs Grating Type
864
0
-
125
5o
1,039
Misc Metals Purchase
0
17.177
-
0
0
17,177
Step ladder
216
0
-
50
30
296
Rigid Insulation 1.5' Q Wag
161
359
-
-
-
520
Caulking Expansion Joints
600
600
Paint Pipe -Standard Point
0
0
Sub - Special Coatings
-
-
-
3,008
-
-
-
0
3,008
*Stop Log Gales (V.E.)'
1,080
20,600
-
200
30
21J110
Hot Bow
133
2.009
-
30
10
2.182
Filter Media - Wood Chips
198
557
-
72
9
1,136
Filter Media - Blended
943
12,515
-
600
40
14,097
Filter Media - Wood Chips Top Layer
261
857
216
13
1,346
Floor Installation
455
-
166
33
653
8adee Purchase
32.127
-
-
32,127
Sprinkler Heeds
80
185
-
265
PVC Hanger Bend 1
57
36
-
-
-
93
Pipe Support
187
536
-
40
10
772
Pipe Support in Box
48
309
-
20
5
382
Pipe Support in Basins
1,248
5,356
-
520
125
7,249
Pipe Support Slip 30'
80
1,809
-
70
4
1,963
Pipe Support Fixed 30'
397
5,428
-
210
11
6,046
Pipe Support Slip 30'
397
5,428
-
210
11
6.046
requirements in them are not in conflict with the provisions of the Contract
Documents and this Section:
a. Where such documents have been adopted as a code or ordinance by the
public agency having jurisdiction, such code or ordinance takes
precedence.
2. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The
latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
publications in effect at the time of the bid governs.
3. Provide all equipment, materials, installation, and other Work to conform to the
following codes and standards:
a. National Electrical Code (NFPA No 70).
b. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
e. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
f. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
h. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
i. National Bureau of Standards.
j. Uniform Building Code.
k. Institute of Power Cable Engineers Association National Board of Fire
Underwriters (NBFU).
I. Safety Orders of Industrial Accident Commission.
m. Rules of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
n. Local Ordinances of the State.
o. Local Ordinances of the County or City.
p. Requirements of the serving Utilities.
q. Apply the versions of the above documents that have been accepted by
the Authority Having Jurisdiction as of the Project bid opening date.
4. Where the requirements set forth in these Specifications or on the Drawings
are greater or more rigid than the codes or standards referenced above, the
applicable Specifications or Drawings govern.
5. In the case of conflict between any above -referenced codes or standards and
the Specifications or Drawings, promptly notify ENGINEER in writing and
request a clarification.
B. Compliance with Laws and Regulations:
1. Nothing contained in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings is to be
construed as to conflict with any national, state, municipal, or local laws or
regulations governing the installation of Work specified herein, and all such
acts, ordinances, and regulations are hereby incorporated and made a part of
these Specifications.
2. Should a conflict exist between the Contract Documents and an applicable
law, ordinance, or regulation, it is assumed that the more expensive method
has been bid.
3. If a conflict between the Contract Documents and an applicable law or
regulation is discovered, promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing.
C. Standards:
1. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into these Specifications.
Perform all Work specified in Division 16 to conform to, or exceed, the
applicable requirements of the referenced documents to the extent that the
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.03
requirements in the listed standards are not in direct conflict with provisions of
Division 16.
DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set
forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code:
a. All references to the National Electrical Code are made to the latest
version of the Code that has been adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. National Electrical Testing Association.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. Unequipped Space: That portion of a switchgear motor control center,
panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a
device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment.
2. Space: That portion of a switchgear motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is
capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e.
provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space.
3. Spare: That portion of a switchgear motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard, or control panel that physically contains a device with no load
connections to be made.
4. Furnish: Supply to the project site ready for installation.
5. Install: To place in position complete and ready for intended use.
6. Provide: Furnish and install.
7. PCIS: Process Control and Instrumentation System.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements:
1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the general requirements for the Electrical Work described in the
Contract Drawings and Specifications and reasonably inferable there from.
2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
final utilization equipment, including all: connections, testing, calibration of all
equipment furnished by others as well as equipment furnished by the
CONTRACTOR, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are
necessary for successful operation.
3. Provide all electrical Work, including conduit, field wiring, and connections by
the Electrical Contractor under the provisions of Division 16 for all aspects of
the Work, including heating, ventilation, and air conditioning.
4. The Electrical Contactor must coordinate all aspects of the Work with the
CONTRACTOR and other Sub -Contractors before bidding in order to ensure
that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The
OWNER is not be responsible for any change orders or additional costs due to
April 5, 2007 16050-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
lack of coordination between the CONTRACTOR, the Electrical Contractor, the
other Sub -Contractor or suppliers.
5. Where demolition is shown on any Drawing, the Electrical Contractor is
responsible for disconnecting equipment electrical connections and rendering
the equipment safe. Remove all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls,
etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished. Remove all
equipment to be demolished and return it either to the OWNER or dispose of it
as directed by the OWNER's Representative.
6. Portions of this project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to
existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. Perform
comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions (circuits,
power systems, controls, equipment, etc). Determine all information needed to
document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power
systems, controls, and equipment.
7. Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface
removal and replacement, for all items associated with the Electrical Work and
installation.
8. Packaged Equipment:
a. Conduit and wire installation as shown on the Drawings reflects design
based on non -certified vendor information. It is expected that additional
conduits and wires may be required by Equipment Manufacturers to
complete the installation. It is incumbent upon the CONTRACTOR to
coordinate these requirements with its Sub -Contractors to make sure that
the equipment supplier provides all necessary electrical information to the
Electrical Contractor for inclusion of costs in the bid package.
b. Provide all necessary materials and labor to complete electrical
installation whether shown or not shown on the Drawings.
c. Coordinate all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances,
utility connections, signals, and outputs with all Subcontractors to avoid
later changes.
d. Changes due to failure to perform such coordination are at no additional
cost to the OWNER.
9. Replace or re -install conduits or other electrical equipment that the
ENGINEER determines to be unacceptable as a result of a lack of
CONTRACTOR coordination between plan sheets and/or shop drawings, in a
manner as directed by the ENGINEER.
B. Existing System:
1. Cubicles in existing MCC1203, MCC1205, MCC1206, and MCC1227 will be
utilized to support the new and future odor control fans. Existing conduits in
ductbank L13 will be utilized to feed new and future primary biofilter loads.
Existing conduits in ductbank L47 will be utilized to feed new solids biofilter
loads.
C. New System:
1. New systems include the addition of three new organic biofilters for primary
odor treatment located at the Northwest corner of the plant near the Storage
Building. Biofilters will require three additional odor control fans OCF041,
OCF042 and OCF043. Two of these fans will be continuous loads and one a
standby, electrical and instrumentation provisions for the standby fan will be
supplied under this contract, however the fan will not be supplied under this
contract. Provision for electrical connection to an additional three biofilters for
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
biotower odor treatment along with three fans, OCF741, OCF742 and OCF743
will be included. New ductbank will be added from existing low voltage
manhole 21 L to primary odor biofilters and fans.
2. Two new organic biofilters for solids located to the west of the NPT
Intermediate Lift building will require three additional odor control fans
OCF741, OCF742, OCF743. Two of these fans will be continuous loads and
one a standby electrical and instrumentation provisions for the standby fan will
be supplied under this contract, however the fan will not be supplied under this
contract. New ductbank will be added from existing low voltage manhole 12L
to solids biofilters and fans.
3. Exterior lighting as necessary to provide a safe working condition at the new
odor control facilities.
4. HOA control will be provided for each Odor Control Fan.
5. Provide instrumentation and control required for the biofilter processes
including fan control, humidifier control, sprinkler control and pressure sensing
as shown in the contract documents.
D. Operating Facility:
1. The existing water reclamation facility is an operating facility. This facility must
remain fully functional throughout the entire construction period. In
consideration of this requirement, comply with the following guidelines:
a. All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed
to by the OWNER. Adjust the construction schedule to meet the
requirements of the OWNER.
b. As weather and water demand conditions dictate, re -adjust the
construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon OWNER by its
users.
c. Where portions of the work are in existing facilities and require interface to
existing circuits, power systems, controls and equipment, perform
comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions.
Determine all information necessary to document, interface with, modify,
upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power systems, controls, and
equipment.
d. Coordinate the construction and power renovation, bear all costs, so that
all existing facilities can continue operation throughout construction.
e. This is an operating facility that must be kept fully operational throughout
the construction period, all changes in schedule and any needs to
reschedule are included in the CONTRACTOR's bid.
2. According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings,
extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations.
3. The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor
ferruling, terminal identification and labeling which apply to the new installation
apply equally to the existing installation which forms part of the modified
system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Requirements:
1. Submit copies of shop drawings, product data, operating manuals and all other
required submittals in accordance with Section 01300 and other Division 1
requirements in addition to the requirements of this Section:
April 5, 2007 16050-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls,
Manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details.
2. Where submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each
Specification section. In order to expedite construction, the CONTRACTOR
may make more than one submittal per Specification section, but a single
submittal may not cover more than one Specification section:
a. The only exception to this requirement is when one specification section
covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in
another section. (For example, circuit breakers are a component of
switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also contain data for the
associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different
Specification section.)
3. Submittals are to be fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component.
Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals that are not
fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise
unacceptable, will be returned without review.
4. Edit all submittals including Operation and Maintenance manuals so that the
submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out
all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment
being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the
equipment being furnished.
5. Exceptions to Specifications:
a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings
along with a detailed explanation of each. Any exceptions to the
specification must be noted and the reason for the exception explained. If
there is insufficient explanation for the deviation, the submittal will be
returned requiring Revision and Re -submittal.
b. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the ENGINEER.
Furnish all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) that
are not listed as exceptions strictly in accordance with the Specifications
and Drawings.
c. Replace all items that do not strictly meet the requirements of the
specifications, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if
the submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the
requirements.
6. Submittal Organization:
a. First page:
1) Specification Section reference.
2) Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal
before delivery to ENGINEER.
3) Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily
responsible for the development of the submittal.
4) Place for CONTRACTOR's review stamp and comments.
b. Next pages:
1) Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form
that individually lists each Specification section, paragraph, and sub-
paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said
requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the
reason for said exception and offers alternative means for
compliance.
2) Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER's comments
or questions for submittal packages which are re -submitted:
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a) In the order that the comments or questions were presented
throughout the submittal.
b) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared.
c) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER's comments are either:
(1) ENGINEER's comment or change is accepted and
appropriate changes are made or
(2) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change
is not made.
(3) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment
or change requested by ENGINEER.
d) Any re -submittal, which does not contain responses to the
ENGINEER's previous comments shall be returned for Revision
and Resubmittal.
e) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a
response for previous comments has been received.
c. Remaining pages:
1) Actual submittal data:
a) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section.
b) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the
individual devices must list the area where the device is
intended to be used.
7. Specific Submittal Requirements:
a. Furnish the submittals required by each Section in Division 16 in
accordance with the following requirements.
b. Shop drawings:
1) Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other
Sections.
2) Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the
proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for
compliance with these Specifications.
3) Shop drawings requirements:
a) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views,
showing all dimensions.
b) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates.
c) Component layout and identification.
d) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal
identification.
e) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring
diagrams, conductor size, etc.
f) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including Manufacturer's
recommendations for the seismic conditions.
9) Weight.
h) Finish.
i) Nameplates.
j) Temperature limitations, as applicable.
C. Product Data:
1) Submitted for non -custom manufactured material listed in this and
other sections and shown on shop drawings.
2) Include:
April 5, 2007 16050-9
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 7654A.10
a) Catalog cuts.
b) Bulletins.
c) Brochures.
d) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents.
e) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable
specification section, and paragraph.
f) Clearly identify model number and options for the actual
equipment being furnished.
g) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not
intended to be supplied.
h) Manufacturer's original electronic file on CD-ROM time -current
characteristic curves for all fuses, circuit breakers, and
protective relays.
d. Instruction and Operating Manuals:
1) Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written operating and
instruction manuals 8 weeks before energization start-up and/or
commissioning.
2) Furnish manuals in conformance with requirements outlined in
Section 01782 of these Specifications, and the following additional
requirements:
a) Completely indexed manuals with a tab for each section:
(1) Each section containing applicable data for each piece of
equipment, system, or topic covered.
b) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings, and
include, the following types of data:
(1) Complete set of 11 inch by 17 inch drawings of equipment.
(2) Complete set of 11 inch by 17 inch drawings of the control
system.
(3) Complete set of control schematics.
(4) Control system 1/0 listings.
(5) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided.
(6) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished.
e. Detailed sequence of operation narrative for all equipment or systems.
f. Completely fill out a Motor Data Sheet, in Section 16222, for every motor
furnished:
1) Submit one copy of the Motor Data Sheet to the ENGINEER for
review as part of the associated equipment submittal.
g. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme outlined in Section 16075
throughout the Project. Uniquely number each wire per the Specifications:
1) Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings.
h. Use equipment and instrument tags, as depicted on the P&IDs, for all
submittals.
8. Advise all equipment suppliers of submittal requirements outlined in
Section 16050. These requirements must be strictly adhered to.
B. Material and Equipment Schedules:
1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaires that are proposed to be used:
a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other
information required to identify the items.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-10 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. Roof Penetrations:
1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the
roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the
sealing means to be utilized.
D. Installation Recommendations:
1. Submit the Manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of
electrical equipment.
E. Record Drawings:
1. Two sets of Electrical Drawings will be provided for the express purpose of
being used for the Record Drawings. Maintain two sets of shop drawings for
use as Record Drawings:
a. Update Record Drawings weekly.
b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the project for final review.
2. Clearly and neatly show all changes:
a. Additions or changes marked in red.
b. Deletions marked in green.
c. Comments marked in blue.
d. Installed systems in yellow.
e. Invert elevations of conduit and depth below grade or floor line.
f. Dimensions of equipment.
g. Exact locations of equipment, underground and concealed conduit, and
ductbanks:
1) Dimensioned with reference to the structures.
h. All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures
encountered or uncovered during construction.
3. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final
As -Built configuration of the systems:
a. Provide As -Built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11 inch by
17 inch using Bond paper.
4. Furnish manuals, or portions thereof, written specifically for this project using
Microsoft Word 2000 or later version and printed on 8.5 inch by 11 inch plain
bond paper:
a. Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in
Microsoft Word.doc format.
F. Test Reports
1. To include:
a. A description of the test.
b. List of equipment used.
c. Name of the person conducting the test.
d. Date and time the test was conducted.
e. All raw data collected.
f. Calculated results.
2. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test.
3. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are listed in
Section 16950.
April 5, 2007 16050-11 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
G. Calculations:
1. All required calculations to be stamped and sealed by a Professional Engineer
registered in the State where the project is being constructed and specializing
in the specific area required by the calculation.
2. By virtue of the fact that these calculations are being provided by a Registered
Professional Engineer they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but
will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Perform all Work to meet the requirements of all legally constituted authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Perform all Electrical Work, whether needed for the power, control system,
process, HVAC, telephone, security, etc. in accordance with all codes and
standards required by Division 16.
3. Perform all Work so as to comply with the accepted editions, amendments,
practices, and rulings of the applicable codes and standards, except where the
Drawings and Specifications are more stringent.
4. Notify the ENGINEER of any material and/or construction techniques that
violate of any of the applicable codes and standards, and ensure that any
conflicts are resolved to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Shipping Precautions:
1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory test, pack all
equipment, in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene
envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage,
dust, and moisture.
2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
3. Skid -mount the equipment for final transport.
4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Provide for the safe storage and delivery of materials, whether furnished by
the CONTRACTOR or by others.
2. Replace all equipment or material, damaged before final acceptance by the
ENGINEER in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3. Meet all storage requirements of the Manufacturer and provide for the safe
storage of all materials and equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Protect electrical Work at all times from damage, defacement or deterioration
from any cause whatever:
a. Provide proper storage facilities and conduct operations to this effect.
b. Perform electrical Work in such a manner as to protect the Work of other
trades.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-12 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Conditions:
1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all
equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete
installation that meets the Environmental conditions for the Site as specified in
the General Requirements and below.
2. Seismic Classification:
a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for
the seismic requirements for the Site.
3. Wind:
a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for
the Site wind loading criteria.
4. Altitude:
a. The site is located at approximately 6,500 feet above mean sea level.
Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous
operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied.
5. Site Security:
a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site.
6. Humidity:
a. The facility is located in an area where the relative humidity is
0-90 percent. Furnish all components and equipment fully rated for
continuous operation at this relative humidity level.
7. Temperature:
a. The facility is located in an area where the temperature will vary from a
minimum of -30 degrees Fahrenheit to a maximum of 110 degrees
Fahrenheit.
b. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment in non -conditioned spaces subject to these ambient
temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating
temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating
temperature as determined by the equipment Manufacturer's guidelines.
8. Outdoor installations:
a. Provide all electrical, instrumentation and control equipment installed
outdoors that are suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where
the equipment is located.
b. Provide heating, cooling, and de -humidifying devices incorporated into
and included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels
located outdoors in order to maintain the enclosures within the rated
environmental operating ranges as specified in Paragraphs 1.08-A-6 and
1.08-A-7 of this Section for the equipment:
1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices.
B. Furnish enclosures for all electrical, instrumentation and controls equipment,
regardless of Supplier or Subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the
requirements outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment.
2. NEMA 4 Enclosures: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect
equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose
directed water, ice formation and freezing.
April 5, 2007 16050-13 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. page 27
DWRF Odor Control 3/224007 9:10 AM
Lodatbni ` ` A.itmuy `oelibrllfN6n.;:'.
unassigned
C Clamp Blk W 4k Nut 318
9
25
Rod At Thread Bik 8/8
15
32
-
34
Washer Round Blk 3M
9
-
47
Nut Heavy Hex Blk 3/8
9
3
-
_
12
Pipe Insulation 1"
4
-
-
13
Pipe Insulation
0
396
396
Btfy Lever Damper 30"
68
0
0
-
-
264
Btfy Lever Damper 30'
1
0
- 20
6
94
Diaphrem Fig 150k 1/2" w/ pressure gauge
50
50
40
11
190
112"
62
so
Bag SW 15081"
30
74
-
62
Solenoid Valves
54
185
_ _
_
104
Bag Valve V
10
- _
239
Pressure Reducing Valve 1"
44
-
-
10
Sleeves a Caulking
396
3,7066
_ _
90
44
Flex Conn Flange 30"
1
1
4.212
Flex Conn Flange 30"
265
0
_ 20
8
'Exp Joint Quote (V.E.)"
_ 40
11
316
Strainer
50
9,841
783
9,641
Copper Tube Hard "K" 1
114
138
_
833
W rot 90 Ell CxC 1
69
59
- 21
21
294
W rot 90 Ell CxC 2
40
109
-
-
128
Wrot Tee CxCxC1
777
157
149
149
W rot Union CxC 1
56
72
_
Wrot Bush 1x1/2
40
78
-
128
W rot Adapter Female
35
58
-
116
W rot Adapter Male
61
278
_
93
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1/2
35
0
-
338
PVC Pipe Sch 80 1 -
599
0
- 21
8
62
PVC Pipe Sch 801
17
0
- 280
73
932
PVC Pipe Sch 80 2
17
0
- 8
2
27
PVC Pipe 6 Fittings Quote
0
6,639
- 12
4
33
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
30
0
6,639
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 1
6
0
30
PVC 80 90 Ell SxS 2
12
0
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 1/2
18
0
-
12
PVC 80 Tee SxSxS 1
12
0
18
Stelrgess Quick Coupling 6 Nozzles
39
2,183
-
- -
72
PVC 80 Coupling SxS /
2
0
222
PVC 80 Union SxS 1
14
0
-
2
PVC 80 Bushing FtgxS 1/20/4
39
0
12
PVC 80 Drain Nozda
72
0
39
PVC 80 Bushing FtgxS 3x1
12
0
-
72
PVC 80 Cap
20
0
12
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1n
20
0
-
20
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
47
0
20
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 1
4
0
- -
-
47
Centering Rugs
30
38
4
PVC 80 Adapter SxM 2
4
0
-
-
88
PVC 80 Flange 150N Blind 4
42
0
4
PVC 80 Flange 150# Thd 4
80
0
-
42
'Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Pipe (V.E.)"
45,717
- _
-
80
Fiberglass Piper Vendor Quote Flange Pks
0
84,823
-
_
45,717
Fiberglass Pipe 30"
279
84,923923
Fiberglass Pipe 30"
2,272
- 60
5
344
Fiberglass Pipe g0 Ess 30"
130
_ 40
24
2,
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ella 30"
133
22,776
20
2
1 52
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 30,
199
- -
13333
- 30
3
232
3. NEMA 4X Enclosure: Made from corrosion resistant materials (Fiberglass
reinforced plastic, 316 Stainless Steel or equal) and are intended for indoor or
outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust
and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and
corrosion.
4. NEMA 12 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non -corrosive liquids.
5. NEMA 7 Enclosures: Intended for installation in locations where explosive or
combustible gas or vapors may be present (Class I Division 1 or Class I
Division 2) meeting the requirements outlined in Section 16052.
C. Plant area Electrical Work requirements:
1. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit
Schedule, enclosures, conduit and Electrical Work in accordance with the
following table:
NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPE
CONDUIT TYPE
NOTES
PLANT AREA
1
4
4X
7
9 1
12
PVC
GRC
PCS
Outdoor
X
X
Non -Corrosive
Outdoor
X
X
Corrosive
Underground
X
X
X
Dry Areas
X
X
-4
Electrical Rooms
X
X
X
D. Splash locations:
1. Includes those areas that may occasionally be exposed to water or non-
corrosive liquids due to unintended spills or splashing from liquid transfer.
2. Provide instruments and control panels installed in splash locations in NEMA
Type 4 enclosures.
E. Damp locations:
1. Includes those locations that are not corrosive and are indoors and 2 feet or
more below grade elevation or which are otherwise classified as damp
locations.
2. Provide electrical equipment and construction for damp locations with NEMA
Type 4 enclosures.
a. Damp locations include:
1) Pipe galleries and tunnels.
2) Basements.
3) All rooms housing liquid handling equipment regardless of elevation.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. General:
1. Testing requirements are specified in Section 16950 and other Sections.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-14 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Pre -submittal Conferences:
1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a Pre -submittal Conference for the
purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy,
schedules, and submittal requirements.
2. The CONTRACTOR, Instrumentation and Control System Contractor,
Electrical Contractor, all suppliers furnishing major pieces of equipment must
attend, including but not limited to:
a. Vendor Control Panels
b. Chemical Feed Suppliers
c. Motor Control Centers.
d. Switchgear.
e. Variable Frequency Drives.
f. Lighting.
g. Engine Generators.
C. Factory Acceptance Testing:
1. Where Factory Acceptance Testing is required for equipment covered by these
Specifications, notify the ENGINEER in writing when the equipment is
completed and ready for factory inspection and testing:
a. Indicate the desired dates for inspection and testing.
b. Furnish notice at least 10 working days before the date of the test to allow
the ENGINEER and OWNER to arrange to attend.
D. Final Review and Notice of Completion:
1. Notify the ENGINEER in writing that the Work is completed and ready for final
review and test:
a. State the desired dates for the review and testing.
b. Furnish notice at least 10 working days before the date of the test to allow
the ENGINEER to arrange to attend.
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the performance and the hardware of the complete electrical system
including all lamps, lighting, switchgear, circuit breakers, transformers, MCCs,
VFDs, etc. for a period of 2 years following the date of substantial completion and
formal acceptance of the work:
1. To fulfill this obligation, provide technical service personnel designated by the
Electrical Contractor and/or Manufacturer.
2. Perform services to correct any defect within 3 calendar days after notification
by the OWNER of a defect.
B. Warrant the satisfactory performance of the software, equipment, and materials
under the specified operating conditions':
1. In the event that operations, tests, or inspections disclose latent defects or
failure to meet the specified requirements, upon notification by the OWNER,
promptly correct or repair any such defects or non-conformance, or furnish
such new equipment or parts as may be necessary for conformity to the
specified requirements.
C. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
April 5, 2007 16050-15 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
requirements. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform
additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain
compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
D. Provide all parts, material, labor, travel, subsistence, or other expenses incurred in
providing services and service visits during the warranty period:
1. Furnish spare parts and tools on site at inventory levels sufficient to meet the
response and repair times specified.
a. All spare parts and tools stored on -site become the property of the
OWNER upon completion of the warranty period.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Before substantial completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any
sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments,
component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment
or systems in service.
B. Furnish all spare parts as required by other sections of the Specifications.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide similar items of same Manufacturer throughout the electrical and
instrumentation portion of the project.
B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual electrical and equipment
specifications in other sections of Division 16.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard, except where
these specifications are more stringent:
1. The applicable standards are those accepted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction in effect at the time of bidding the work.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-16 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the electrical
Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion -resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin
finish.
2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys.
3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges.
4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas
that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals (sulfur dioxide, caustic,
fluorides, or others).
5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas
designated Corrosive and Wet Areas Requiring NEMA 4X Construction.
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products
that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.
B. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods requiring redesign of
any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the
ENGINEER through the "or equal" process as defined in the Specifications.
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange with all Manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the OWNER and
ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of
fabrication:
1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and
other pertinent systems and devices.
2. Make no shipments without the ENGINEER'S release.
B. Factory Testing is specified in Section 16950 and other sections of Divisions 16
and 17.
C. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of Underwriters' Laboratories,
Incorporated (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the
ENGINEER and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
April 5, 2007 16050-17 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Review all Drawings and Specifications and to report to the ENGINEER before
bidding:
1. Any errors.
2. Any omissions.
3. Any Electrical Code problems.
4. Any Local Building Code problems.
5. Or any points of conflict with other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor is required to visit the site and examine the premises
completely before providing pricing. It is the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to
be fully familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations.
Difficulties that arise after the Contract has been awarded which could have been
avoided by a more complete initial site visit are the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor to correct.
C. Review the existing site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various
items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all
wiring and cables.
D. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the complete electrical and instrumentation
work:
1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical, and PCIS system. —�
3.02 PREPARATION
A. The construction and installation of all electrical equipment and materials must
comply with ail applicable provisions of the:
1. OSHA -Safety and Health Standards.
2. State building standards.
3. Applicable local codes and regulations.
B. Provide and maintain guards, night -lights, protective screens, warning signs, etc. as
required to prevent accidents or injuries to all personnel.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment locations shown on Electrical Drawings may change due to variations in
equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2. Review all information shown on the Contract Drawings, including
architectural, structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted
electrical and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as necessary
to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-18 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Cutting and patching:
1. Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for
the Electrical Work, except as otherwise directed:
a. Secure the permission of the ENGINEER before performing any operation
likely to affect the strength of a structural member:
1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that
no penetration of any other systems will be made:
a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping,
ductwork, post -tensioning cables etc.
b) Use tone -locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of
obstructions.
b. Review the complete Drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or
coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any
surface.
2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original Work.
Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all
conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all
locations with a fire stop material, typically:
a. 3M CP25 Caulk
b. 3M 303 Putty
c. T&B S-100 Caulk
d. T&B FS-500 Putty
e. T&B FST-601 Putty
3. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, non -
shrink, non-metallic grout:
a. Use the Installation Details provided in the Contract Drawings as a guide
for acceptable sealing methods.
C. Install all conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and
to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear:
1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space
requirements as outlined in Article 110, Requirements for Electrical
Installations of the National Electrical Code.
2. Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install
equipment in approximate locations shown on the Drawings. Adjust locations
shown on the Drawings as necessary to avoid any obstruction or
interferences.
3. Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access,
relocate the equipment.
4. Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting
method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details
shown in contract drawings.
D. Earthwork and Concrete:
1. Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing
associated with the electrical work.
2. Notify the ENGINEER before encasing or backfilling any electrical work, and
arrange for inspection.
April 5, 2007 16050-19 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
E. Roof Penetrations:
1. Make all roof penetrations, and seal around all conduits. Use pitch pockets
and flashings.
2. Roofing Contractor to make actual seals around roof penetrations.
F. Terminations:
1. Terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls, instruments,
panels, and other equipment otherwise specifically identified.
G. Miscellaneous Installation Requirements:
1. In case of interference between electrical equipment shown on the Drawings
and the other equipment, notify the ENGINEER in writing of the proposed
change:
a. Obtain ENGINEER's acceptance of the proposed changes before they are
made.
2. Location of manholes and pullboxes shown on Drawings are approximate.
Coordinate exact location of manholes and pullboxes with mechanical and civil
Work.
3. Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are
required to make a workable installation.
4. Circuits of different service voltage:
a. Install in separate raceways, hand holes, pullboxes, and junction boxes.
b. In manholes, install all cables operating at less than 50 VDC in PVC
coated flexible metallic conduit.
c. The voltage and service levels are:
1) Medium voltage: 13.2KV.
2) Low voltage: 120V, 208V, 240V, and 480V.
3) Control: less than 50VDC.
H. Labeling:
1. Provide all nameplates and labels as required by the ICE team.
Equipment Tie -Downs:
1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the site.
2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently
mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with Section 16070.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. Conduct inspection of electrical, instrumentation and control system
installation in accordance with provisions outlined in Section 01450 of the
General Requirements.
2. Allow OWNER, ENGINEER, or other OWNER's Representative access to site
for inspection of materials, equipment, or installation at any time.
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-20 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3. Provide any technical data or other assistance necessary to support inspection
activities.
4. Electrical inspections include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage.
b. Inspect installation for compliance with plans and specifications.
c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate
support.
g. Inspect cable terminations.
5. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection
requirements outlined in Section 16950.
Testing:
1. When the electrical work is substantially completed, notify the ENGINEER that
the project is ready for Field Acceptance Testing.
2. Perform the acceptance tests in conformance with Section 16950.
3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test:
1) Use conduit schedule identification numbers to indicate portion of
circuit tested.
C. Workmanship:
1. Use only competent and skilled personnel, experienced in their trade, working
under continuous competent supervision, to perform all Work, including
installation, connection, calibration, testing, and adjustment:
a. Perform all Work, including aesthetic as well as electrical and mechanical
aspects, to standards consistent with the best practices of the trade.
2. All Work is subject to review by the ENGINEER or OWNER at any time.
3. Provide all work to the complete satisfaction of the ENGINEER or OWNER.
4. Repair or replace any Work, which, in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER,
does not conform to these Specifications, or trade practices.
5. Make all changes of any installed items to meet the intent of the Drawings and
Specifications.
6. Install all material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's
printed installation instructions:
a. Where CONTRACTOR asks to deviate from the Manufacturer's
recommendations, such changes shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER
and Manufacturer before installation.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING
A. General Requirements:
1. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition.
2. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER.
3. Remove all debris, rubbish, and scraps, etc. each night.
April 5, 2007 16050-21 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
4. Leave all areas swept clean each night.
5. Wipe clean all exposed threads of conduit of the ALUMA-SHIELD compound
after installation.
B. Vacuum clean all electrical enclosures of any debris before any wire or cable is
installed.
C. Clean and re -lamp all new and existing luminaires that were used in the areas
affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to the OWNER.
D. As specified in other Sections of the Contract Documents.
E. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and
organized:
1. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths.
2. Shorten, re -terminate, and re -label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as
determined by the ENGINEER.
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 - DRAFT 16050-22 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16051
HAZARDOUS CLASSIFIED AREA CONSTRUCTION
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. Executing and completing work in hazardous and/or classified areas as
defined by the NEC, NFPA 820 and indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 16050 for a list of references.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. For the purposes of these specifications, the terms "Hazardous" and
"Classified" will be considered synonymous.
1.04 (NOT USED)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. All wiring in Hazardous and/or Classified Locations shall comply with all
applicable Articles of the National Electrical Code, in particular Articles 500
through 516 of the National Electrical Code.
2. Except as modified in Articles 500 through 516, all other applicable rules
contained in the National Electrical Code shall apply to electric equipment and
wiring installed in Hazardous and/or Classified Locations.
April 2007 16051-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
unassigned
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION Co., INC. Page 28
DWRF Odor Control 3/22/2007 9:10 AM
14
ipQ
Fiberglass Pipe 45 30"
133
20
2 155
Fiberglass Blind Flange 30'
66
10
Trench Drains
186 464 -
15
1 77
*Fans (ADD)*
658 38,345
200
665
50 39,253
*Electrical Sub (ADD)*
84,650
-
- 64,650
3. All devices used in a Class I Division 1 or Division 2 Areas must have visible ^
Manufacturer installed nameplates specifically stating the Class, Division, and
Group for which the device is approved.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. The following areas are classified Class 1, Division 2:
1. Areas physically separated from wet well that house systems handling wet well
gases including areas within 3 feet of leakage sources such as fans, dampers,
flexible connections, flanges, pressurized unwelded ductwork and odor control
vessels.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 (NOT USED)
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01
(NOT USED)
2.02
(NOT USED)
2.03
(NOT USED)
2.04
(NOT USED)
2.05
(NOT USED)
2.06
COMPONENTS
A. Conduit and Sealing fittings:
1. Refer to Section 16130.
B. Conduit Boxes and Bodies:
1. Refer to Section 16134.
C. Wiring Devices:
1. Refer to Section 16140.
April 2007 16051-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Corrosion Protection:
1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, which may come
into contact:
a. Use neoprene washers, 9 mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets.
2. Restore factory finishes that are damaged or rusted to their original new
condition in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
C. Conduit Installation:
1. Wrench tight all conduits to minimize sparking when fault current flows through
the conduit system.
2. All conduit connections shall be made up so that there are a minimum of 5 full
threads fully engaged in the connection.
D. Boxes and Fittings:
1. Utilize threaded connections for all metallic boxes, fittings, and joints to the
conduit system.
2. Wrench tight, with at least five threads fully engaged, all threaded joints.
3. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 shall utilize
approved grounding bushings to bond the conduits together.
E. Outlet Boxes and Bodies:
1. Class I, Division 2 Areas:
a. Boxes not containing arcing parts shall be:
1) NEMA 4X for corrosive applications.
2) No pressed metal boxes are allowed.
b. Provide heavy duty cast construction type conduit fittings and joints:
1) Explosion proof rated fittings and joints are not necessary.
c. Any enclosure containing arcing parts, etc. shall have all construction
associated with the enclosure, conduit system, etc. conforming to Class I
Division 1 construction.
April 2007 16051-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
F. Flexible Connections:
1. The following requirements apply where flexible connections are required, as
at motor terminals:
a. In Class 1, Division 2 areas, use liquidtight metal conduit with approved
fittings:
1) Maximum length of liquidtight metal conduit is 18 inches.
G. Sealing Fittings:
1. Seals Class I Division 1 and Division 2:
a. Provide an approved seal, no more than 18 inches away from the
enclosure, for all conduits entering an enclosure containing switches,
circuit breakers, fuses, relays, resistors, or any other apparatus which
may produce arcs, sparks, or high temperatures:
1) Only explosion proof unions, couplings, elbows, capped elbows, and
conduit bodies similar to "L," "T," and "X" may be installed between
the sealing fitting and the enclosure.
b. For self sealing or factory sealed assemblies where the equipment that
may produce arcs, sparks, or high temperatures is located in a
compartment separate from the compartment containing splices or taps,
and an integral seal is provided where conductors pass from one
compartment to the other, the entire assembly shall be approved for
Class I locations:
1) Seals are required in all conduit connections to the compartment
containing splices and must be within 18 inches of the enclosure.
c. Install a conduit seal within 24 inches of the boundary in each conduit run
entering or leaving a classified location. There shall be no union, coupling,
box or fitting in the conduit between the sealing fitting and the point at
which the conduit leaves the classified location.
d. For underground conduits entering or leaving a classified location or
between Class I Division 1 and Division 2 locations:
1) Provide a conduit seal at both points where the conduit emerges
from the ground:
a) Place the conduit seal within 18 inches of finished grade.
b) No union, coupling, box, or fitting is allowed in the conduit
system between the seal fitting and the point at which the
conduit enters the ground.
2. All conductors within the conduit system and seal shall be separated and an
approved packing dam shall be installed to both hold the sealing compound
and to maintain the separation between the wires:
a. The sealing compound shall be approved for the conditions and use, and
shall not be affected by the surrounding atmosphere or liquids. The
melting point for the sealing compound shall be less than
93 degrees Celsius (200 degrees Fahrenheit).
b. Minimum thickness for sealing compound will be 5/8 inch or the trade size
of the conduit, whichever is greater.
3. Seal types shall match the installed conduit system.
H. Install seals with drains in all electrical control stations, low points of conduit or any
place where moisture may condense and accumulate.
April 2007 16051-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
I. Motor Connections:
1. Conduit installation in Class I Division 1, and Class I Division 2 locations for
motors that contain arcing parts, shall proceed as follows from the conduit:
a. First - Conduit.
b. Second - Explosion proof flexible coupling.
c. Third - Sealing fitting.
d. Fourth - Explosion proof union.
e. Fifth - Connection to the motor terminal box.
2. Conduit installations in and Class I Division 2 locations for motors that contain
no arcing parts, shall proceed as follows from the conduit:
a. First - Conduit.
b. Second -Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (18 Inches maximum length.)
c. Third - Connection to the motor terminal box.
J. Wiring connections to motor leads shall be via ring type terminal connection on both
the motor leads and power leads as specified in section 16150.
K. The electrical continuity of non -current -carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways
and other enclosures shall be bonded as required by NEC 250.100.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
3.07 (NOT USED)
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 2007 16051-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
This page left blank intentionally
April 2007 16051-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ground system material requirements:
a. Grounding electrodes.
b. Grounding electrode conductors.
c. Equipment grounding conductors.
d. Main bonding jumper.
e. Ground connections.
2. General requirements for grounding.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Subcontractors to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. See Section 16050 for a list of references.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ground equipment and raceway systems so that the completed installation
conforms to all applicable code requirements.
B. Provide an electrical grounding system as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified.
C. Provide complete grounding system including but not limited to:
1. Grounding electrodes.
2. Bonding jumpers.
3. Ground connections.
D. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances
required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to
equipment grounding conductors.
April 5, 2007 16060-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
E. The ground system resistance (electrode to ground) of the completed installation, 'e
as determined by tests required by Section 16950, shall be:
1. 5 ohms or less for industrial systems.
2. 1 ohm or less for electrical buildings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Catalog Cut Sheets.
C. Testing Resume:
1. Submit a written resume for the individual who will perform the grounding tests
detailing experience and qualifications.
2. Submit detailed information concerning test instrument, and tester's
qualifications to perform the specified tests.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work to meet the requirements of legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with the latest editions, amendments, practices, and rulings of
the following documents and organizations, except where these specifications are
more stringent:
1. American National Standards Institute.
2. National Electrical Code Article 250.
3. Local and State Codes.
4. IEEE 81.
5. ANSI/UL 467.
B. All grounding components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 (NOT USED)
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 (NOT USED)
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16060-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Compression Connectors: One of the following or equal:
1. FCI Burndy.
2. Thomas and Betts.
B. Exothermic Connectors: One of the following or equal:
1. Erica
2. Harger.
3. Burndy Weld
C. Ground Rods: One of the following or equal:
1. Erico.
2. Harger.
3. Conex.
D. Ground Cable: One of the following or equal:
1. Nehring.
2. Harger.
3. Southwire.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Ground Rod:
1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
a. Minimum of: 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet long.
b. Solid copper.
2. Conforms to ANSI/UL 467.
3. Sectional type joined by compression copper alloy couplings.
4. Fit the top of the rod with a coupling and steel driving stud.
5. Where indicated on the Drawings install ground rods in precast ground wells
as specified in Section 02084. '
B. Ground Cable:
1. Requirements:
a. Annealed.
b. Concentric lay stranded.
c. Bare copper.
d. Coarse stranding.
e. 98 percent conductivity.
2. Size is as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than required by the NEC.
April 5, 2007 16060-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. Compression Connectors: -.
1. Made of high copper alloy and manufactured specifically for the particular
grounding application.
2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete.
3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on
compression fitting.
D. Equipment Grounding Circuit Conductors:
1. Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit
conductors.
2. The minimum size shall be as outlined in the National Electrical Code, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or Conduit Schedule.
3. Provide in all raceways. The conduit system is not an allowable equipment
ground.
E. Grounding Electrode Conductors:
1. The minimum size shall be as outlined in National Electrical Code, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
F. Main Bonding Jumpers and Bonding Jumpers:
1. The minimum size shall be as outlined in the National Electrical Code, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
G. All connections to the ground grid system, the duct bank grounding system,
equipment, ground rods, etc., shall be made using compression type grounding
connectors as indicated on the Drawings, UL listed, and labeled for the application:
1. Pre -crimp all ground rods, as recommended by the Manufacturer, before
crimping connector to ground rod.
2. Refer to the grounding details as indicated on the Drawings for specific
connectors to be used at specific locations.
2.04
(NOT USED)
2.05
(NOT USED)
2.06
(NOT USED)
2.07
(NOT USED)
2.08
(NOT USED)
2.09
(NOT USED)
2.10
(NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16060-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway
independent of raceway material:
1. Multi -conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green
insulated grounding conductor.
2. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel
feeders.
B. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor
terminal box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding
connectors:
1. When grounding motors driven by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) comply
with the requirements of the VFD Manufacturer.
C. Provide a grounding type bushing with lug for connection of grounding conductor for
secondary feeder conduits that originate from the secondary section of each MCC
section, switchboard, or panelboard:
1. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the secondary section.
D. Provide grounding type bushings with lugs for connection of grounding conductor at
both ends of metallic conduit runs. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system.
E. Provide a green insulated wire -grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box
grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding
conductor.
F. Interconnect the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard neutral bus to
the ground bus in the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard
compartment, only at service entrance point or after a transformer.
G. Duct bank ground system:
1. Provide a bare copper grounding conductor the entire length of each duct
bank, embedded in the concrete of the duct bank as detailed on the Drawings
and Specifications.
2. Make all splices.
3. Install all ground rods.
4. Make connections to all equipment and structures.
H. Grounding at Service (600V or Less): Provide grounding at service as follows:
1. Connect the neutral to ground only at one point and shall be within the
enclosure of the first disconnecting means on the load side of the service
transformer.
Embedded Ground Connections:
1. All underground and concrete embedded grounding connections shall be UL
listed compression type.
2. Make ground connections in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Do not conceal or cover any ground connections until the ENGINEER or his
authorized representative has established and provided written confirmation
that every grounding connection conforms to the Drawings and Specifications.
J. Grounding Electrode System:
April 5, 2007 16060-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Description Amount
Labor 403.946
Material 2.040.754
Subcontract
964,457
Equipment
189,716
Other 4y9,219
3,648,085
Labor Burden
169,658
Sales Tax
3.396
Performance 8 Pavment Bond 61.49n
224,544
Labor Overhead
20.197
Material Overhead
Subcontract Overhead
19.289
Equipment Overhead
3.794
Other Overhead 984
44,264
Profit 8 Overhead
484,110
Total
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Page 29
DWRF Odor Control 312212007 9:10 AM
Estimate Totals
Cuts/Adds Net Amount
Totals
Rate
Cost B
Percent of Total
403,946
y 18%
2,040,754
46.37%
964,457
21.91%
189.716
4.31%
49,212
1.12%
3,648,085
82.89
82.89%
42.000 %
C
3.85%
6.900 %
C
0.08%
B
1,17%
3,872,629
5.10
87.99%
5.000 %
C
0.46%
C
2.000 %
C
0.44%
2.000 %
C
0.09%
2.000 %
C
0.02%
3,916,893
1.01
89.00%
11.000 %
T
11.00%
4,401,003
1. Ground ring:
a. Provide all trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as
indicated on the Drawings.
b. Ground ring conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth, or where
embedded, concrete, of the size shown on the Drawing.
c. Minimum burial depth 36 inches or as indicated on the Drawings,
whichever is greater.
d. Re -compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch lifts.
2. Ground rods:
a. Locations as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Length of rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length.
c. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors before construction of
concrete slabs and duct banks.
3. Metal Underground Water Pipe:
a. Bond metal underground water pipe to grounding electrode system.
4. Metal Frame of Building or Structure:
a. Bond metal frame of building or structure to grounding electrode system.
5. Concrete -Encased Electrode:
a. Provide concrete -encased electrode per the National Electrical Code.
b. Bond concrete -encased electrode to grounding electrode system.
6. Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for
grounding equipment and electrical enclosures.
7. Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control
centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are
installed.
K. Shield Grounding:
1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only
unless shop drawings indicated otherwise:
a. The grounding point shall be at the control panel.
2. Terminate the shield drain wire on a dedicated terminal block.
3. Use terminal block grounded mechanically to DIN rail to interconnect ground
terminals.
4. Connection to the panel main ground bus shall be via a green No. 12
conductor to the main ground bus for the panel.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test in accordance with Section 16950.
B. Measure ground impedance in accordance with IEEE 81 after installation before
connecting the electrode to the remaining grounding system.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Under the direction of the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall add additional
parallel connected ground rods and/or deeper driven rods until the ground
April 5, 2007 16060-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
resistance measurement meets the resistance requirements of paragraph 1.04.E of
this Specification Section:
1. Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is
not acceptable.
3.09 (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16060-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
This Page Left Blank Intentionally
April 5, 2007 16060-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16123
600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
600 Volt Class wire and cable.
2.
Instrumentation Class wire and cable.
3.
Network cable.
4.
Fire Alarm wire and cable.
5.
Telephone wire and cable.
6.
600 Volt Class Tray cable.
7.
600 Volt Class Armored cable.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. B 8 - Specification for Concentric -Lay —Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium -Hard, or Soft.
B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
1. IPCEA S-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the
transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
C. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 250 - Grounding.
2. Article 310 - Conductors for General Wiring.
3. Article 760 - Fire Alarm Systems.
D. National' Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. Article 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. Article 101 - Life Safety Code.
3. Article 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires
and Cables for Use in Air -Handling Spaces.
E. Federal Specification J-C 30A.
April 5, 2007 16123-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
F. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL):
1. UL 1277 Subject - Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional
Optical -fiber Members.
2. UL 1063 - Machine -Tool Wires and Cables.
3. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible
Cords.
4. UL-2196 - Tests for Fire Resistive Cables.
5. UL-1424 - Cables for Power -Limited Fire -Alarm Circuits.
6. UL-1569 - Metal -Clad Cables.
7. UL-2225 - Metal -Clad Cables and Cable -Sealing Fittings For Use in
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
G. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association
(TIA/EIA):
1. TAI/EIA/TSB95 - Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-pair
100 W Category 5 Cabling.
2. TIA/EIA-568-A - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair
100 W Enhanced Category 5 Cabling.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 16050 and noted herein.
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
3. Insulated Cable Engineering Association (ICEA).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
5. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
B. Product Data:
1.
Manufacturer of Wire and Cable.
2.
Insulation:
a. Type.
b. Voltage class.
3.
American Wire Gauge size.
4.
Conductor material.
5.
Pulling compounds.
C. Shop Drawings:
1.
Show splice locations.
D. Calculations:
1. Submit cable pulling calculations for all cables larger than 2/0 AWG and pulling
lengths longer than 1000 feet.
April 5, 2007 16123-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2. Submit cable pulling calculations for all conductor sizes for pulling lengths
longer than 1000 feet.
3. Submit the calculations to the ENGINEER a minimum of 2 weeks before the
cable pull.
E. Test Reports:
1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 16050 and as noted below.
B. Furnish and install all wire and cable in conformance with the applicable standards.
C. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 16050.
B. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to
the site.
C. Deliver conductors to the site in their original unbroken packages or on their original
cable reels.
D. Store conductors out of the weather and where not subject to physical or chemical
damage.
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 16050 and noted below.
B. Provide a complete material and installation warranty, for all wires and cables, for a
period of 2 years from substantial completion:
1. During the warranty period, replace any wire or cable found to be defective
along with all other wires and cables in the raceway containing the defective
wire or cable.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16123-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable:
a. General Cable.
b. Okonite Company.
c. Rome Cable Corporation.
d. Southwire Company.
2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable:
a. Belden CDT.
3. Network Cables:
a. Belden CDT.
4. Fire Alarm wire and cable:
a. West Penn Wire.
b. Olympic Wire and Cable.
c. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
d. Draka Lifeline.
5. Telephone wire and cable:
a. American Telephone and Telegraph.
b. West Penn Wire.
c. Olympic Wire and Cable.
d. Superior Essex Inc.
e. Draka Comteq.
f. General Cable.
6. Tray cables:
a. General Cable, BICC Brand.
b. Rome Cable Corporation.
c. Southwire Company.
d. Okonite.
7. Armored cables.
a. Okonite Company
b. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation
c. Rome Cable Corporation.
d. Southwire Company.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Conductors:
1. Copper per ASTM B 3.
2. Minimum 97 percent conductivity.
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24 inch intervals:
a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size.
b. Voltage rating.
c. Insulation type.
d. UL symbol.
April 5, 2007 16123-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
e. Month and year of manufacture.
f. Manufacturer's name.
2. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075:
a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire.
b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG.
B. 600 Volt Class wire and cable:
1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the
Drawings or in the Conduit Schedules:
a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:
1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code:
a) Use 75 degree Celsius ampacity ratings.
b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater then
rating of the overcurrent device.
2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors.
3) Provide Number 16 AWG minimum for control conductors.
2. Provide Class B stranding per ASTM B 8:
a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required.
3. Insulation:
a. THWN for 14 AWG through 1 AWG.
b. XHHW-2 for 1/0 AWG and larger.
c. 90 degree Celsius rating in wet or dry locations.
4. Multiconductor Cables:
a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings or in the
Conduit Schedules.
b. Individual conductors with XHHW-2 insulation.
c. Overall PVC jacket.
d. Tray Cable rated.
e. Color coding for control wire per ICEA Method 1, E-2.
f. Ground conductor: insulated, green:
1) Sized per NEC 250-122.
C. Instrumentation class cable:
1. Type TC.
2. Suitable for use in wet locations.
3. Voltage Rating:
a. 600 volts for Motor Control Center.
b. 300 volts located outside Motor Control Center.
4. Temperature Rating: 90 degrees Celsius wet or dry location.
5. Conductors:
a. Insulation:
1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4
mils nominal thickness.
b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned.
c. Type:
1) Pair: Belden 8760.
2) Triad: Belden 8770.
3) Multiple pairs or triads:
a) Color -coded and numbered.
6. Drain wire:
a. 18 AWG.
b. Stranded, tinned.
April 5, 2007 16123-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Jacket:
a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC.
b. Rip -cord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal.
Shielding:
a. Individual pair/triad:
1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape
overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
b. Multiple Pair or Triad Shielding:
1) Group Shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum
foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
2) Completely isolate group shields from each other.
3) Cable Shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic
polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire.
D. Network cables:
1. RS-485 Cable:
a. 2-wire:
1) Shielded twisted pair.
2) Tinned, copper conductors minimum with 7 by 30 stranding.
3) AWG #22.
4) Insulation:
a) FHDPE - foam high density polyethylene.
b) 300-volt insulation level.
5) Outer shield:
a) 100 percent coverage.
b) Tape/Braid.
c) Aluminum foil -polyester tape.
d) Tinned copper braid.
6) Outer shield drain wire:
a) Tinned, copper conductor minimum with 7 by 30 stranding.
b) AWG #22
7) Outer Jacket PVC - polyvinyl chloride:
a) Sunlight resistant.
8) UUCSA flame tested.
9) Minimum bending radius 2.5 inches.
10) Nominal OD 0.284 inch.
E. Tray cable:
1. Provide minimum size Number 1/0 AWG for single wires.
2. Provide multi -conductor cable listed and identified on its surface as suitable for
cable tray use, Type TC cable in accordance with NEC Article 318.
3. If connected to neutral, provided with integral white insulated conductor.
4. Ambient temperature adjustment in accordance with NEC Table 310-16.
F. Use solid -conductor wire, Number 12 AWG and smaller, only for lighting and
receptacle circuits.
April 5, 2007 16123-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.05 (NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire Ties:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. T&B "Ty -Rap" cable ties.
b. Panduit cable ties.
B. Wire Markers:
1. Reference Section 16075.
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirement of ICEA
Publication No. S-68-516.
B. Test type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Color Coding:
1. Color coding shall be consistent throughout the facility.
2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and 208/120
Volt systems:
a. Phase A - Black.
b. Phase B - Red.
c. Phase C - Blue.
d. Single Phase System - Black for one hot leg, red for the other.
e. Neutral - White.
f. High Phase or Wild Leg - Orange.
g. Equipment Ground - Green.
3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 Volt systems:
a. Phase A - Brown.
b. Phase B - Orange.
c. Phase C - Yellow.
d. Neutral - Gray.
e. Equipment Ground - Green.
April 5, 2007 16123-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 00600
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
00610 Performance Bond
00615 Payment Bond
00630 Certificate of Insurance
00635
Certificate of Substantial Completion
00640
Certificate of Final Acceptance
00650
Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR)
00651
Lien Waver Release (Subcontractor)
00660
Consent of Surety
00670
Application for Exemption Certificate
4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring:
a. Power - Black.
b. Discrete Out - Black
c. Discrete In - Red.
d. Neutral - White.
5. Switch legs shall be violet. 3-way switch runners shall be pink.
6. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue.
7. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:
a. Wires manufactured of the desired color.
b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination
point with colored tape:
1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape.
B. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures
have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean
and dry:
1. Install wires only in approved raceways.
2. Do not install wire:
a. In incomplete conduit runs.
b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.
C. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits
and prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation:
1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire -pulling lubricant while
cable is being installed in conduit:
a. Ideal Products.
b. Polywater Products.
c. 3M Products.
d. Greenlee Products.
e. Or equal as recommended by cable Manufacturer.
f. Do not use oil, grease or similar substances.
D. Cable pulling:
1. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand.
2. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if
they have cable tension monitoring equipment.
3. Provide documentation that maximum installed cable tension is no more than
75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable
Manufacturer. If exceeded, the ENGINEER may, at his discretion, require
replacement of the cable.
4. Cable pulling crew shall have "in hand" all calculation and cable pulling
limitations.
5. At the ENGINEERS discretion, make splices where cable pulling tension or
sidewall pressure exceeds Manufacturer recommendation for the specified
cable size:
a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only.
b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.
E. Use smooth -rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep
pulling tension and bending radius within Manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
April 5, 2007 16123-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
G. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes,
and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties:
1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel.
2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:
a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting.
3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.
H. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly
wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head:
1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is
tightened.
2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire.
Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor
strands are confined within the lug:
1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.
J. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible:
1. Except for Number 10 AWG and smaller conductors in lighting and receptacle
circuits.
K. Splices:
1. Keep splices to a minimum for power and control circuits.
2. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths
that exceed standard manufactured lengths, make splices in labeled junction
boxes for power conductors or termination cabinets for control and instrument
conductors.
3. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in
common junction boxes.
4. Install NEMA 4X junction and terminal boxes in wet and outdoor locations.
Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word
"SPLICE."
5. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper
splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.
6. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat -
shrink sleeve:
a. In wet areas, provide heat -shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible
applications.
7. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet
areas shall be made watertight using:
a) A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications.
b) Or an epoxy resin splicing kit.
L. Terminations (600 Volt or Less):
1. Terminate control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes in accordance
with Section 16134.
M. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and
before meg-ohm testing and termination.
April 5, 2007 16123-9 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
N. Instrumentation Class Cable:
1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power
cables:
a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non -dedicated manholes
or pull boxes.
b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices
and instrument enclosures or panels.
2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes
as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Ground cable shields at only 1 location, at panels, not at field instruments.
O. Multiconductor cable:
1. Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use
one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor:
a) Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on
the Drawings, and meets NEC requirements for equipment ground
conductor size.
b) Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in
each cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use
4-conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as
ground.
P. Signal cable:
1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise
and power cables by minimum 12 inches.
Q. Wiring Allowances:
1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance
for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical
outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within 10
linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the
drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related
materials to provide conductors to all pull boxes, manholes and duct banks
within 20 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: As specified in Section 16950.
B. Grounding:
1. As per Section 16060.
April 5, 2007 16123-10 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16123-11 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
This page left blank intentionally
April 5, 2007 16123-12 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16130
CONDUITS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. Metallic Conduits:
1) Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRC).
2) Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Metallic (Steel - PCS, Aluminum - PCA).
3) Flexible Steel or Aluminum. (FLX).
4) Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (SLT).
b. Non-metallic Conduits:
1) Rigid Non-metallic (PVC).
2. Conduit bodies.
3. Conduit fittings and accessories.
4. Conduit installation.
B. Related Sections:
The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Subcontractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated
project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein for a list of references.
B. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 358 - Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
2. Table 300-5 - Minimum Cover Requirements (0 to 600 volts, Nominal).
3. Article 500 - Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
4. Table 10-4(b) - Minimum Cover Requirements (over 600 volts, Nominal).
5. Article 342 - Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC).
6. Article 344 - Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC).
7. Article 348 - Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC).
8. Article 350 - Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC).
9. Article 352 - Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC).
10. Article 356 - Liquid Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC).
11. Article 360 - Flexible Metallic Tubing (FMT).
12. Article 362 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT).
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated.
2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated.
3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit.
4. ANSI C80.6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated.
D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
April 5, 2007 16130-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1. NEMA RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit.
2. NEMA TC2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.
3. NEMA TC3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
4. NEMA TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. UL 1 - Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit.
2. UL 6 - Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit.
3. UL 360 - Standard for Safety for Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
4. UL 651 - Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
5. UL 797 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing.
6. UL 1242 - Standard for Safety for Intermediate Metal Conduit.
7. UL 1660 - Standard for Safety for Liquid -Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit,
8. UL 1653 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
9. UL 94VO - Standard for Vertical Flame Test.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein.
B. Abbreviations:
1. GRC: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.
2. PCS: PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Rigid Non-metallic Conduit.
4. SLT: Sealtight — Liquid -tight Flexible Conduit.
5. FLX: Flexible Metallic Conduit.
C. Conduit Bodies:
A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a
removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more
sections of the system. Includes, but not limited to: shapes, C, E, LB, T, X, etc.
D. Conduit Fitting:
1. An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not
limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all
necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to
install a complete electrical raceway system.
B. The Electrical Plans show equipment locations only. It is the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to route conduits between equipment, and between ductbanks and
equipment.
1. Changes in conduit locations or routing to bypass obstructions which differ
from what is indicated on the Drawings are not considered a deviation.
2. Relocation of electrical equipment that affects the conduit routing or changes
in routing to bypass obstructions are not considered a change or deviation.
3. The ENGINEER shall be the sole source in determining whether the change is
constituted as a deviation.
4. Any deviation requires ENGINEER's approval.
April 5, 2007 16130-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. The CONTRACTOR shall bear the sole responsibility conduit routing and conduit
sizing.
1. Any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from such
deviations performed by the CONTRACTOR.
2. Such deviations made by the CONTRACTOR shall be reflected on the
CONTRACTOR supplied "Record Drawings."
3. OWNER shall have the right to deduct the amount of applicable
reimbursement, equivalent to the cost of the engineering effort required to
show those unauthorized changes on Record Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Furnish complete manufacturer's catalog sheets for every type and size of
conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the project.
2. Furnish complete Manufacturer's recommended special tools to be used for
installation if required.
C. Record Drawings:
1. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines.
2. Furnish hard copy Drawings.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. All conduits and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein.
B. Do not expose type PVC, FRD, NFC and ENT to direct sunlight.
C. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box:
1. Examine the complete set of Contract Drawings and Specifications, and all
applicable shop drawings.
2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor
adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the
building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades.
1.10 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16130-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC):
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Western Tube and Conduit.
b. Allied Tube and Conduit.
c. Wheatland Tube Co.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride -Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS):
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. OCAL, Inc.
c. Perma-Cote.
C. Sealtight Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit (SLT):
1. One of the following or equal:
a. ALFLEX (Southwire).
b. AFC Cable Systems.
c. Electriflex.
d. Anaconda.
D. Rigid Nonmetallic Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC):
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Carlon.
b. Cantex.
c. Triangle Conduit and Cable.
E. Conduit Bodies:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Crouse -Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z / Gedney.
d. Ocal.
e. Robroy.
f. Carlon.
F. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings for Exposed Locations:
1. One of the following or equal:
April 5, 2007 16130-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a. Crouse -Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z / Gedney.
G. Conduit Sleeve:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Crouse -Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z / Gedney.
H. Conduit Seals:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse -Hinds.
c. O-Z / Gedney.
Conduit Mounting Strut:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut.
b. Globe Strut.
c. B-Line Strut.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 (NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Couplings (GRC):
1. All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot:
a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable.
2. Hot -dip galvanized inside and out, including threads, with chromate final
coating:
a. Electro-gaIva n!zing is not acceptable.
B. PVC Coated Steel Conduit and Couplings (PCS):
1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot -dip
galvanized material and shall conform to the requirements for type GRC.
2. Coated conduit conforms to NEMA Standard RN-1, the galvanized coating
may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and
preparatory process.
3. Factory bonded PVC jacket of 0.040-inch minimum thickness:
a. The conduit system to make use of pre -jacketed couplings, elbows etc.
b. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags,
blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and shall be free of holes and
holidays.
April 5, 2007 16130-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
00600 PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No. 34BCSEG7471
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(Firm) Hydro Construction Company, Inc.
(Address) 301 East Lincoln Avenue Fort Collins, CO 80524
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as "the Principal," and
(Firm) Hartford Fire Insurance Company
(Address) Hartford Plaza Hartford, CT 06115
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", a corporation authorized to do business in the State of
Colorado, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 West LaPorte Avenue,
Post Office Box 580, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522, a Municipal Corporation, hereinafter referred
" Four Million Four Hundred One
to as the Owner" , to the penal sum of Thousand Three Dollars and 00/100 ($4,401,003.00 ) in lawful
money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered
into a certain Construction Agreement with the Owner, dated the 30th day of March ,
2007, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of City of
Fort Collins DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control, Fort Collins, CO - Work Order No. H-WTF-2007-10
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties,
all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Construction Agreement
during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner,
Page 1 of 3
4. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the
tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating. Confirm bond by certified test
results.
5. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of
all conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal thickness of
0.002 inch. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable.
6. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall
afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at
temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degrees Celsius).
7. The conduit threads shall be hot -dip galvanized or shall be galvanized after
fabrication and coating of the conduit using a method that ensures complete
coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc
alloys with the steel over the entire surface. All threads shall be coated with
urethane.
8. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC
coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating.
9. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except
where part configuration or application of the piece dictate otherwise.
10. PCS Couplings:
a. The conduit coupling, before plastic coating, shall be new, unused
material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards.
b. The PVC Coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall be 0.040
inches thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating
from tool damage during installation.
c. A PVC sleeve extending 1 pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less,
shall be formed at each female conduit opening of the couplings.
11. The exterior PVC coating and the interior urethane coatings shall be factory
supplied by the same manufacturer.
C. Liquid -tight Flexible Metallic Conduit (SLT):
1. Conforms to the following standards:
a. UL 360.
2. Available in the following configurations:
a. General Purpose:
1) Temperature range: —20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius.
b. Oil Resistant:
1) Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius.
c. Computer Room:
1) Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius.
d. Temperature Rated.
3. Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight.
4. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot dip galvanized on all 4 sides before
conduit fabrication.
5. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for
easy wire pulling.
6. With an overall polyvinyl chloride jacket.
7. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes
1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch.
8. Minimum size 1/2-inch.
D. Rigid Non-metallic Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC):
1. Extruded from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound:
April 5, 2007 16130-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a. Schedule 80 extra heavy wall where specified.
b. Schedule 40 where specified.
2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable.
3. Rated for use in direct sunlight.
E. Conduit Bodies:
1. Material consistent with conduit type:
a. Cast iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit.
b. PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC.
c. PVC coated cast iron bodies and covers when used with type PCS.
d. Cast iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers
when used with EMT conduit.
2. Conduit bodies to conform to Form 8, Mark 9, or Mogul design:
a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for
large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with
conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space.
3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to
threaded holes in conduit body.
4. PVC coated cast iron conduit bodies and covers:
a. Bodies before coating shall meet requirements for cast iron conduit
bodies.
b. 0.040-inch exterior PVC coating and 0.002 inch interior urethane coating
as required for type PCS conduit and fittings.
c. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design.
d. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to
assure corrosion protection.
5. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
F. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fitting for Exposed Locations:
1. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
G. Conduit Sleeve:
1. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
H. Conduit Seals:
1. Installed at locations as indicated the Drawings, in the specifications and as
required by NEC.
2. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors and Fittings:
1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.
B. Insulated Throat Metallic Bushings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit or
aluminum when used with aluminum conduit, with a positive metallic
conduit end stop.
b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
150 degrees Celsius.
April 5, 2007 16130-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
c. Use fully insulated bushings on non-metallic conduit system made of high
impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting
phenolic.
C. Insulated Grounding Bushings:
Construction:
a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop.
b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
150 degrees Celsius.
c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum
conductors.
D. Electrical Unions (Erickson Couplings):
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron hot dip galvanized for use with steel conduit.
b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit.
c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction.
d. Rated for Class 1 Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas.
PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS) Fittings:
1. All hollow conduit fittings, which serve as part of the PCS conduit system must
be coated with an exterior PVC coating and interior urethane coating as
described for the conduit.
2. The conduit fitting, before plastic coating, shall be new, unused material and
shall conform to appropriate UL standards.
3. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less,
shall be formed at every female conduit opening on fittings except unions. The
inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the
conduit to be used.
4. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fitting shall be greater than the
5. Flexible overlapping sleeves on all hubs and couplings shall provide a vapor
and moisture tight seal at every connection.
Sealtight - Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit (SLT) Fittings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron hot dip galvanized.
b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring.
c. Liquid -tight, rain -tight, oil -tight.
d. Insulated throat.
e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows.
f. Designed to prevent sleeving:
1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket
seal.
g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective
of raceway core construction. Grounding device if inserted into raceway
and directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for
sizes under 5 inches.
h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting,
suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be
provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting
shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently
bonded to a metallic retainer.
April 5, 2007 16130-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
G. Corrosion Resistant and Outdoor Sealtight - Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit (SLT)
Fittings:
1. Construction:
a. PVC coated liquid -tight fittings with a bonded 0.040 inch thick PVC
coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit.
b. Connectors shall have an insulated throat and an integral sealing ring.
H. Hubs for Threaded Attachment of Steel Conduit to Sheet Metal Enclosures:
1. Construction:
a. Shall have an insulated throat.
b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated.
c. Bonding locknut.
d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector.
e. 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated.
f. 1-1/2-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated.
g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
2. Usage:
a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded
hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures.
I. Sealing Fittings:
1. Construction:
a. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated.
b. Malleable ductile iron with steel conduit.
c. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
d. Crouse -Hinds Type EYD where drains are required.
e. Crouse -Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required.
f. UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 1,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F,
and G.
J. PVC Fittings:
1. Shall include the following:
a. Couplings.
b. Terminal Adapters.
c. Female Adapters.
d. Caps.
e. Reducer Bushings.
f. Duct Couplings.
g. End Bells.
h. Expansion Couplings.
i. Duct Couplings 5 degree.
j. C — Pull Fittings.
k. E- Pull Fittings.
I. LB -Pull Fittings.
m. LL - Pull Fittings.
n. LR - Pull Fittings.
o. T — Pull Fittings.
p. X - Pull Fittings.
q. Service Entrance Caps.
April 5, 2007 16130-9 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2. Materials:
a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for
Type PVC conduit.
b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel.
K. Through Wall and Floor Seals:
1. Materials:
a. Body - casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot dip galvanized finish.
b. Grommet - neoprene.
c. Pressure rings - PVC coated steel.
d. Disc material - PVC coated steel.
e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC.
L. Expansion/Deflection Couplings:
1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends
that they connect.
2. Shall allow movement of 3/4-inch from the normal in all directions.
3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in
any direction.
4. Materials:
a. End couplings — Bronze.
b. Sleeve - Neoprene.
c. Bands - Stainless Steel.
d. Bonding Jumper - Tinned copper braid.
M. Expansion Couplings:
1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit:
a. Permitting 8 inch movement, 4 inches in either direction.
2. Materials:
a. Head Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Sleeve - Steel.
c. Insulating Bushing - Phenolic.
d. Finish - Hot dip galvanized.
e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC.
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All materials shall conform to applicable standards contained in the documents
listed in 1.02, References. Submitted information for "or Equal' materials shall
include adequate information to assure compliance with the applicable sections of
the referenced documents.
April 5, 2007 16130-10 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Installation General:
1. Every installer of PVC coated Rigid Steel (PCS) conduits shall be certified by
the manufacturer for installation of the conduit.
2. Install conduit runs in accordance with CONTRACTOR'S conduit routing plan
submittal. Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the
ENGINEER.
3. Install complete conduit systems between outlets, boxes, and circuit source
before conductors are installed.
4. Metallic conduits terminating at switchgear, motor control centers, power and
lighting panels, control cabinets, etc. shall be equipped with grounding
bushings and shall be grounded with, a minimum, No. 6 AWG ground wire.
5. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur,
relocate conduit as required, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
6. Adequate clearances from high -temperature surfaces shall be provided for all
conduit runs. Provide clearances as follows:
a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam
pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and
12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines.
d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high -temperature surfaces,
a high -reflectance thermal barrier should be installed between the conduit
and the surface.
7. Support conduit runs on water -bearing walls a minimum of 1 inch away from
wall on an accepted channel. Use hot -dip galvanized steel or stainless steel
channel, consistent with type of conduit being installed. Do not run conduit
within water -bearing walls.
8. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural
members, walls, or lines of the building. Install straight and true conduit runs
with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. Make changes in
direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies. Turn conduits with neat
symmetrical bends.
9. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work
space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems. Install conduit
runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment
and not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal
hatches.
10. Conduit may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the
ENGINEER, provided the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3 the thickness
of the concrete. Locate such conduit in the center of the concrete or where the
minimum concrete cover will be 1 conduit diameter. Space conduits at least 3
April 5, 2007 16130-11 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
diameters apart on centers. As a general rule, conduit may not cross other
conduit or pipe in concrete members or slabs.
11. When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for
locating any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone
signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into
existing conduit, piping, cables, post -tensioning cables etc.
12. Conduit runs between pull boxes orjunction boxes:
a. Total bends equaling not more than 360 degrees.
b. Install NEC required pull boxes at locations acceptable to the ENGINEER.
c. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other
openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture.
d. Cap spare conduits and provide plastic pulling tape below threaded cap.
e. Provide bonding bushing and bond wire.
13. Install conduit thruwall seals where indicated on the Drawings.
14. For existing and new 2 inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with
conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than
85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit. Remove and replace conduits
through which mandrel will not pass. Clean and make certain that new and
existing conduit runs are not crushed or creased.
15. Conduit Sizes shall be in accordance with the NEC or specified as follows:
a. Concealed conduit in partitions or accessible ceilings: Minimum 3/4 inch.
b. Exposed Conduit: Minimum 3/4 inch.
c. Rigid Steel (RGC or PCS) Encased in Concrete: Minimum 1 inch.
d. Rigid PVC Encased In Concrete: Minimum 1 inch.
e. Liquidtite and Flex conduit Minimum 1/2 inch.
16. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all sleeves and
openings required for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when
these openings or sleeves are not specifically indicated on the Drawings.
B. Corrosive Areas:
1. Use conduit system as indicated on the Conduit Schedules.
a. Install PCS in corrosive areas.
b. Use liquid tight flexible conduits (SLT) and corrosion resistant connectors.
C. Hazardous Areas:
1. Refer to Section 16050 and the Drawings for Hazardous Areas and specific
class and Division.
2. Wrench tight all conduit joints to minimize sparking when fault currents flows
through the conduit system.
3. All conduit connections shall be made up so that there is a minimum of 5 full
threads fully engaged in the connections.
4. Seals Class I Division 1 and Division 2:
a. Seal types shall match the installed conduit system.
5. Conduit seals for hazardous and classified areas:
a. Provide an approved seal, no more than 18 inches away from the
enclosure, for all conduits entering an enclosure containing switches,
circuit breakers, fuses, relays, resistors, or any other apparatus which
may produce arcs, sparks, or high temperatures:
1) Only explosion proof unions, couplings, elbows, capped elbows, and
conduit bodies similar to "L," "T," and "X" may be installed between
the sealing fitting and the enclosure.
April 5, 2007 16130-12 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. For self sealing or factory sealed assemblies where the equipment that
may produce arcs, sparks, or high temperatures is located in a
compartment separate from the compartment containing splices or taps,
and an integral seal is provided where conductors pass from one
compartment to the other, the entire assembly shall be approved for
Class I locations:
1) Seals are required in all conduit connections to the compartment
containing splices and must be within 18 inches of the enclosure.
c. Install a conduit seal within 18 inches of the boundary in each conduit run
entering or leaving a classified location. There shall be no union, coupling,
box or fitting in the conduit between the sealing fitting and the point at
which the conduit leaves the classified location.
d. For underground conduits entering or leaving a classified location or
between Class I Division 1 and Division 2 locations:
1) Provide a conduit seal at both points where the conduit emerges
from the ground:
a) Place the conduit seal within 18 inches of finished grade.
b) No union, coupling, box, or fitting is allowed in the conduit
system between the seal fitting and the point at which the
conduit enters the ground.
6. All conductors within the conduit system and seal shall be separated and an
approved packing dam shall be installed to both hold the sealing compound
and to maintain the separation between the wires:
a. The sealing compound shall be approved for the conditions and use, and
shall not be affected by the surrounding atmosphere or liquids. The
melting point for the sealing compound shall be less than
93 degrees Celsius (200 degrees Fahrenheit).
b. Minimum thickness for sealing compound will be 5/8 inch or the trade size
of the conduit whichever is greater.
D. Install seals with drains in all electrical control stations, low points of conduit, or any
place where moisture may condense and accumulate:
1. Where drains are required, they shall be Crouse -Hinds Type EYD or approved
equal.
2. Where drains are not required, they shall be Crouse -Hinds Type EYS or
approved equal.
E. Conduit Usage:
1. General Conditions:
a. Provide the type of conduit legally permitted or required for each location
or condition.
b. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps
or plugs immediately after installation. Keep ends sealed until immediately
before pulling conductors.
c. Conduit sizes not indicated in the schedule or on the Drawings shall be in
accordance with NEC requirements and shall be sized based on
quantities and sizes of wire installed therein, including the insulated
grounding conductor.
d. Conduit types not specified shall be consistent with other conduit systems
in the area, the area classifications, and enclosure requirements.
e. Use insulated metallic bushings for all metallic conduit.
April 5, 2007 16130-13 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Underground and Embedded Conduits:
a. Install minimum 2-inch ductbank conduit, unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
b. Use types and systems as indicated on the Drawings.
1) PVC Schedule 40 in embedded locations and underground in
ductbanks.
c. Encase underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs -on -
grade, in concrete envelopes with a minimum 3-inch cover all around, or
as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Use Type PCS conduit and elbows for underground installations as
follows:
1) Stub -up and risers to grade floor or equipment from non-metallic
conduits.
2) Entering and exiting underground conduit runs a minimum 12 inches
above and below grade or finished floor.
e. Install underground conduits in conformance with Section 16133, and as
shown or required on the Drawings.
f. Make conduit size transitions at pullboxes and manholes for underground
conduits.
g. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of
runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter
underground manholes and pullboxes.
3. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS):
a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to
manufacturer's specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket.
4. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC):
a. Use Type GRC for exposed conduit runs outdoors and indoors in dry 1
(areas not designated as requiring NEMA 4 enclosures) and
non -corrosive locations, unless otherwise noted.
b. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading.
5. Flexible Conduit:
a. Use flexible conduit for short lengths for final connections between rigid
conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment
or where required for equipment servicing.
b. Maximum length of flexible conduit 36 inches.
c. Use Type SILT in wet and damp locations, areas exposed to the weather,
corrosive areas where NEMA 4X construction is required and conduit type
is PCS, or as indicated on the Drawings or conduit schedule, provided the
jacket temperature limitations will not be exceeded:
1) Use UL sunlight resistant outdoors and in the presence of ultraviolet
lights.
d. Use type NFC in all corrosive atmospheres where conduit type is PVC
and where indicated on the plans or conduit schedule.
e. Use explosion proof flexible conduit in Class 1 Division 1 hazardous
areas. In Class I, Division 1 areas, flexible fittings must be approved and
marked suitable for Class I, Division 1 and must also be listed for
compatibility with the Group type atmosphere where used.
f. In Class I, Division 2 areas, use liquidtight metal conduit with approved
fittings:
1) Maximum length of liquidtight metal conduit is 18 inches.
April 5, 2007 16130-14 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
6. Non -Metallic Conduit (PVC):
a. Conduit terminations shall be via threaded adapters into threaded hubs on
the junction boxes or conduit bodies.
b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a
threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box.
Use a locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the box:
1) Flat washers as manufactured by Carlon, type E943 DW, EW, FW,
GW, HW, JW.
c. Install PVC conduit for exposed runs only when indicated on the
Drawings. Route conduit so as to afford it the maximum physical
protection. If necessary, cover conduit to afford additional protection when
it cannot be shielded by the structure or machinery frames:
1) Use schedule 80 where exposed runs may be subject to physical
damage.
d. Use UV resistant conduit where it can be exposed to ultraviolet light and
in exposed outdoor areas.
F. Conduit Joints and Bends:
1. General:
a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the
weather or in wet locations, make joints liquid tight and gas -tight.
b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. For the
serving utilities, make large radius bends to meet their requirements.
Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit.
c. Bend conduit to radius as legally required. For all types of high voltage
conductors, provide bends as required for lead -covered conductors of
equivalent outside diameter.
d. All bends shall be symmetrical.
e. All of the following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows:
1) Underground conduits.
2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables.
3) Conduits containing shielded cables.
4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables.
2. Threaded Conduit:
a. Cut threads on GRC, IMC, and RAC with a standard conduit cutting die
that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare
metal exposed by the threading operation will be completely covered by
the couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread
such that all joints will become secure and wrench tight just preceding the
point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where
conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings.
b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs.
Seal joints with accepted conductive sealant compound and make
watertight. Set up joints tight. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit
terminations.
c. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing
repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabar" or CRC "Zinc It."
d. Threaded conduit joints shall be coated with an approved electrically
conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the
conductor insulation:
1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous
conduit.
April 5, 2007 16130-15 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal
shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Contract Agreement, and shall fully
indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason
of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the
Owner may incur in making good any default, and then this obligation shall be void; otherwise
to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract
Agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same
shall in anyway affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such
change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Agreement or to the
work or to the specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this 30th day of March , 2007.
IN PRESENCE OF:
Attest:
By:
(CORPORATE SEAL)
G.
n
Principal
Hydro onstructioromp n , Inc.
A, zr
(Title)
301 East Lincoln Avenue Fort Collins, CO 80524
(Address)
Page 2 of 3
2) Use AP" ALUMA-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of _
aluminum conduit.
3) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely.
4) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly.
e. Securely tighten all threaded connections.
f. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a
galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized
protective coating before painting.
g. Provide large radius factory -made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger
or field -bend the conduit with power bending equipment specifically
intended for the purpose and made so that the conduit is not damaged
and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced.
h. Bends should be made with a radius of not less than the requirements
found in the NEC:
1) The radius must be greater than the minimum bending radius of the
cable.
2) A field bend shall be made with power bending equipment or manual
benders specifically intended for the purpose and made so that the
conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively
reduced.
3. Non -Metallic (PVC):
a. Use approved solvent -weld cement specifically manufactured for the
purpose. Spray type cement is not allowed.
b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a
spring mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends.
G. Conduit Sealing and Drainage:
1. Conduit drainage and sealing other than required for hazardous and classified
areas:
a. Provisions for sealing and drainage shall be installed in vertical drops of
long (in excess of 20 feet), exterior, above grade conduit runs at the
points at which the conduit enter buildings, switchgear, control panels,
lighting panelboards, and other similar enclosures.
b. Exterior, above grade conduit runs that are extended below grade shall be
provided with seal fittings with drains in the vertical drops directly above
grade.
c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly
changing temperatures:
1) Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings or
floors that separate adjacent areas having widely different
temperatures.
d. Provide conduit seals similar to O/Z Gedney (Type CSB series) on all
conduits between corrosive and non -corrosive areas.
e. Seal 1 end only of all underground conduits at highest point with O/Z
Gedney sealing (non -hazardous) filling, or equal.
H. Conduit Supports:
1. General:
a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints
to suit applications.
b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the National Electrical Code.
April 5, 2007 16130-16 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit
supports.
d. Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members
unless approved by the ENGINEER.
e. Conduit fittings and supports are not shown on the Drawings. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide all fittings and supports required to suit the
conditions.
f. Securely fasten exposed conduits with clamps or straps. Run exposed
conduit on walls and ceilings only, parallel to planes of walls or ceilings.
Do not run conduit diagonally.
2. Above Suspended Ceilings:
a. Support conduit on or from the structure, conduit shall not be supported
from hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid.
3. Concealed Conduit on Wood:
a. Use 2-hole galvanized steel straps screwed or nailed to the wood or
hammer -driven supports of the stamped galvanized type having serrated
or sawtooth edges on the driven portion and designed specifically for the
size and type of conduit being supported. Drive these latter supports so
that the conduit is tightly and rigidly supported. Replace any dented or
damaged conduit.
4. In Steel Stud Construction:
a. Tie conduit at maximum 4-foot intervals with No. 16 gauge double
annealed galvanized wire so that conduit cannot move from vibration or
other causes.
5. Conduit on Concrete or Masonry:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion
anchors and screws or support from preset inserts.
b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible.
c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations.
d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts.
6. Conduit on Metal Decking:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium -plated Type A
panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer -driven screws are
not acceptable.
7. Suspended Conduit:
a. Use malleable iron factory -made split -hinged pipe rings with threaded
suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch
diameter), Kindorf, or equal.
b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered
angle -iron or Unistrut cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to
a cross member. Where rods are more that 2 feet long, provide rigid sway
bracing.
8. Supports at Structural Steel Members:
a. Use beam clamps.
b. Drilling or welding may be used only as indicated or with approval of the
ENGINEER.
9. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS) Systems:
a. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized
to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. All "U" bolts shall
be supplied with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions
of the threads.
April 5, 2007 16130-17 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. Securely fasten exposed PCS conduits with Type 316 stainless steel
clamps or straps or PVC coated clamps or straps manufactured and
supplied by the PCS conduit supplier.
Expansion or Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
1. General:
a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding.
b. Follow manufacturer's instructions to set the piston opening.
c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other
locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical
expansion and contraction as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Shall be of the same material as the conduit system.
2. For metallic conduit (PCS and GRC) use expansion or expansion/deflection
couplings, as appropriate, where:
a. Conduit may be affected by dissimilar movements of the supporting
structures or medium or conduit crosses building or structural expansion
joints.
b. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the
continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway.
c. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit
runs.
For PVC use expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate,
where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches:
a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move.
b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the
conduit to move as the temperature changes.
J. Empty Conduits:
1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty
conduit more than 10 feet in length.
2. Provide conduit marker tags for each spare conduit.
K. Miscellaneous:
1. Provide flashings and counter flashings or pitch pockets for waterproofing of
raceways, outlets, fittings, and other items that penetrate the roof.
2. Electrical unions shall be used at all points of union between ends of rigid
conduit systems that cannot otherwise be coupled. Running threads and
threadless couplings shall not be used.
3. Transition fittings to mate steel conduit to PVC conduit, and PVC access
fittings, shall be furnished by or as recommended by the manufacturer of the
PVC conduit.
4. Where a transition between PVC conduit and rigid conduit systems is required,
such transition shall be accomplished by means of a PCS elbow or a minimum
3 foot length of PCS conduit.
5. Any conduit installed that the ENGINEER determines does not meet with the
best practices of the trade shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR at no cost
to the OWNER.
L. Field Conditions and Related Requirements:
a. Underground water table may be near or above the location of new
ductbanks.
April 5, 2007 16130-18 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. CONTRACTOR shall include cost for necessary dewatering, and cleaning
equipment to perform work in underground ductbanks, pull boxes and
manholes, before installation.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIRMESTORATION
A. Repair all areas where the jacket has been marred with a manufacturer approved
patching compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling conduit
system.
C. Any scarred areas of the protective jacket shall be examined by the ENGINEER and
replaced or repaired with the manufacturer's approved kit, at no cost to the
OWNER, as directed by the ENGINEER before installation of wire. The
ENGINEER's decision shall be final.
3.06
(NOT USED)
3.07
(NOT USED)
3.08
(NOT USED)
3.09
(NOT USED)
3.10
-(NOT USED)
3.11
(NOT USED)
3.12
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16130-19 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
This page left blank intentionally
April 5, 2007 16130-20 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16133
DUCT BANKS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for electrical underground duct banks.
2. Duct spacing and terminations.
3. Steel reinforcing of concrete.
4. Excavation and Patching.
5. Coordination with other underground utilities.
6. Concrete.
B. Related Sections: The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and
as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete
and coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 16050 for a list of references.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide trenching, forming, rebar, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, compaction
necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks.
B. Provide reinforced concrete duct banks for all conduits installed below grade, on the
site, below structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
B. Furnish complete submittals as specified in Section 16050 and specifically defined
herein.
C. Product data:
1. PVC conduit spacers.
2. Detectable underground marking tape.
D. Provide applicable submittal documents as required in:
1. Section 03310.
April 5, 2007 16133-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2. Section 033115.
3. Section 02200.
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit site plan drawings of duct banks including underground profiles
indicating all underground utilities.
1.06 (NOT USED)
1.07 (NOT USED)
1.08 (NOT USED)
A. As specified in Section 16050 and noted herein.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 (NOT USED)
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conduit Spacers:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Carlon Snap-Loc.
b. Cantex.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc.
B. Detectable Underground Marking Tape:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Blackburn Manufacturing Company.
b. Brady - Identoline.
c. Thomas and Betts - Protect -A -Line.
d. Panduit - Underground Hazard Tape.
C. Pull Line:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Arnco.
b. Greenlee.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc.
April 5, 2007 16133-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. For conduit requirements, reference Section 16130:
1. Use duct suitable for use with 90 degree Celsius rated conductors.
B. Use minimum Number 4 reinforcing steel.
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Conduit Spacers:
1. Provide conduit spacers recommended by the conduit Manufacturer or listed
above.
2. Non-metallic, non -corrosive, non-conductive.
3. Interlocking type:
a. Vertical interlocking.
b. Horizontal interlocking.
4. Suitable for concrete encasement.
5. Molded -in rebar holder.
6. Accommodates 2 inch through 6 inch conduit sizes.
7. Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses.
B. Pull Line:
1. Minimum 1/4 inch wide, flat design.
2. Polyester.
3. Minimum pulling strength 1200 pounds.
C. Detectable Marking Tape:
1. Provide a detectable tape, locatable by a cable or metal detector from above
the undisturbed grade.
2. Aluminum core laminated between polyester.
3. 6 inch wide Red tape imprinted with black lettering "CAUTION - BURIED
ELECTRIC UTILITIES."
2.05 (NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 MIXES
A. Refer to Section 03310 for concrete mixes requirements.
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16133-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Duct banks:
1. Install duct banks encased in concrete at least 24 inches below finish grade,
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Damage minimization:
a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is
necessary.
b. Protect all underground duct banks against damage during pouring of
concrete or backfilling.
3. All plastic conduit fittings to be joined should be exposed to the same
temperature conditions for a reasonable length of time before assembly.
4. Provide No. 4/0 AWG bare copper ground wire the entire length of duct bank
and bond to the grounding system in accordance with the Drawings.
5. Install watertight underground ducts:
a. Slope duct banks away from buildings to manholes.
b. Slope duct banks uniformly from pull -boxes to manholes or both ways
from high points between manholes.
c. Slope a minimum of 1/2 inch per 10 feet.
d. Avoid sloping duct banks towards buildings.
6. Where new duct banks join to existing manholes make the proper fittings and
fabricate the concrete envelopes to ensure smooth durable transitions, as
indicated on the Drawings.
7. Install pull line in spare conduits:
a. Provide adequate pull line at both ends of conduits to facilitate conductor
pulling.
b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw -on conduit
caps.
B. Trenching:
1. Refer to Section 02200 for complete trenching requirements.
2. Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom, rock free and covered with
select material.
3. Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete
encasement:
a. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting.
4. Avoid damaging existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities.
C. Duct spacing:
1. Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space
between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 1.5 inches:
a. Separate medium voltage ducts a minimum of 7.5 inches on center.
2. Install spacers to maintain uniform spacing of duct assembly a minimum of
4 inches above the bottom of the trench during concrete pour. Install spacers
on 8 foot maximum intervals:
,-s
April 5, 2007 16133-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be
necessary to install extra spacers with the duct bank:
1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing
to maintain the proper horizontal clearance:
a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to
infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection.
3. Spacers should not be located at the center of a bend:
a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on fabricated bends.
b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center bend on
trench formed sweeps.
D. Terminating:
1. Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults.
2. Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault.
3. Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in
order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank -to -vault
transition.
4. New man -hole or hand -hole applications, provide a single opening or "window"
per duct bank, sized to accommodate the duct bank envelope.
E. Concrete:
1. Refer to Section 03310 for concrete installation requirements.
2. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the conduits during
pouring of concrete:
a. Tie wire shall not act as a substitute for spacers.
3. Install minimum 4-inch cover around conduit and rebar.
4. Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand
pudding, with no mechanical vibration.
5. Conduit is subject to temperature rise. As concrete cures, allow the free end to
expand by pouring the concrete from the center of the run or from one tie in
point.
F. Marking tape:
1. Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire
length of the duct bank.
G. For conduit installations beneath building slabs:
1. Install steel reinforced concrete duct banks under all building slabs as
indicated on the Drawings:
a. Concrete for encasement under building slabs need not be colored red.
b. For duct banks crossing under building footers or foundations, install the
top of the duct bank a minimum of 6 inches below the footer.
c. Where duct banks terminate with conduit risers entering building walls,
install an expansion/deflection fitting or a flat -wise elbow (elbow parallel to
building wall) in order to accommodate differential movement between the
conduits and structure.
H. Restore all surfaces to their original condition , unless otherwise specified.
April 5, 2007 16133-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS
Submitted By:
Proje Ma er
Reviewed By:
W69r Res urces & Treatment Manager
` Approved By:
Utilities General Manager a e /�
Approved By: � (( I 0 �/y�''� `�'
DirgVof Purchasing and Risk Management
Date: t S o
Date: Q" L DZ
Date: 411B 67
Date: �lL
5/98 Section 00525 Page 3
IN PRESENCE OF:
IN PRESENCE OF:
Nicole L. McCollam
(SURETY SEAL)
Other Partners
By:
By:
By:
Surety
Hartf rol
Attorne in -Fact Sheryll S � M � � ..
3 ,
Hartford Plaza Hartford, CT 06115
(Address),
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Construction Agreement. If Contractor
is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
Page 3 of 3
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
3.07 (NOT USED)
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 (NOT USED)
A. Prove that all conduits are free and clear of dirt and debris by use of an
appropriately sized steel mandrel no less than 112 inch smaller than the inside
diameter of the conduit.
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers.
B. Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16133-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16134
BOXES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. Outlet boxes.
b. Terminal boxes.
c. Junction boxes.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein for a list of references.
B. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(ANSI/NEMA):
1. OS1 — Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
2. OS2 — Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
C. National Electrical Code (NEC):
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA FB1 — Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies.
2. NEMA 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Outlet boxes for all devices such as switches, receptacles, telephones, computer
terminals, security systems, etc.
B. Provide boxes and conduit bodies as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to
complete the conduit installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in conformance with Section 01300 and 16050.
April 5, 2007 16134-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Product Data.
C. Catalog cut sheets.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Include identification and sizes of pull boxes for ENGINEER's acceptance and
installation.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Outlet boxes must comply with all applicable standards of:
a. National Electrical Code.
b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
c. Underwriters Laboratories.
d. Joint Industry Conference.
C. Codes & Standards:
1. Cast metal boxes:
a. UL Standard 498 and 514.
b. Federal Specification No. W-C-586B.
2. Malleable irons boxes:
a. ASTM A47-77 Grade 32510.
1.07 (NOT USED)
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 (NOT USED)
1.12 -(NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Pressed Steel Boxes:
a. Steel City.
b. Appleton.
April 5, 2007 16134-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
c. Crouse Hinds.
d. Thomas & Betts.
2. Plastic and/or fiberglass boxes:
a. Hoffman.
b. Carlon.
c. Stahlin.
3. Plastic coated steel boxes:
a. Rob Roy.
b. OCAL.
4. Cast device boxes:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse Hinds.
c. OZ/Gedney.
5. Floor Outlet Boxes with 1 inch conduit knockouts:
a. Steel City, 640 Series.
b. Hubbell.
6. In -Use Weatherproof Non -Metallic GFI Outlet Box and Cover:
a. Carlon.
b. Tay -Mac.
7. Formed Steel Enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Thomas and Betts.
c. Stahlin.
d. Rittal.
8. Stainless Steel Enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Stahlin.
c. Rittal.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pressed Steel Boxes:
1. 1-piece galvanized pressed steel.
2. Knockout type boxes.
3. Minimum size 4-inch square by 2-1/8-inch deep.
B. Concrete Boxes:
1. For outlets in concrete construction.
2. Pressed steel construction, concrete tight.
3. Knockout size range 1/2-inch to 1-inch.
4. Depth as need.
5. Types:
a. 4-inch octagon.
b. 4-inch octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars.
c. Gangable masonry boxes:
1) 3-1/2 inch deep, 3-3/4 inch high, length as required:
a) 2-1/2 inch deep boxes may be used where wall thickness
precludes the use of the deeper boxes.
April 5, 2007 16134-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2) With partitions as needed.
C. Threaded -Hub Boxes:
1. Construction:
a. Internal green ground screw.
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch.
e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing.
2. Aluminum boxes:
a. High strength copper free 4/10 of 1 percent maximum alloy for use with
aluminum rigid conduit.
D. Plastic Coated Threaded -Hub Boxes:
1. Construction:
a. Internal green ground screw.
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 3/4-inch to 1-inch.
e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the
interior and exterior before application of PVC coating.
f. With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior.
g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.
E. Class 1 Division 1 Areas:
1. All outlet boxes and bodies must be designed and listed for use in Class 1
Division 1 locations and must also be listed as being suitable for the Group
type atmosphere in which they will be used. The approval ratings must be
permanently marked on each item.
F. Fiberglass Boxes:
1. NEMA 4X.
2. Constructed of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester.
3. Integral neoprene gasket on cover attached with an oil- resistant adhesive.
4. Enclosures to have internal pads for mounting optional panels and terminal
kits.
5. Covers:
a. Screw cover enclosures:
1) Covers held in place with captive, stainless steel or monel screws.
2) Covers attached to body with internal zinc -plated steel hinges.
b. Quick release latches covers:
1) Corrosion resistant fiberglass hinges.
2) Spring loaded fiberglass latches with a monel or stainless steel bail
attached with monel or stainless steel screws.
3) With a 316 stainless steel padlock hasp.
6. With external mounting feet.
April 5, 2007 16134-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
7. Meeting the following minimum standards and tests:
Physical Property Value ASTM Method
Flexural Strength 12,000 PSI D-790
Heat Distortion 400OF D-648
Water Absorption (24hrs) 0.5 percent D-570
Tensile Strength 5000PSI D-651
Specific Gravity 1.8 D-792
Flammability 94V-0 UL-94
Dielectric Strength 400 V.P.M. D-149
Arc Resistance 180 Sec D-495
G. Formed Steel Enclosures:
1. Usage:
a. Designed to house electrical controls, terminals, and any other devices.
2. Steel:
a. NEMA 12.
b. Fabricated from 14 gauge steel.
c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth.
d. Door shall have a rolled lip around 3 sides:
1) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. All external removable hardware shall be fabricated from heavy gauge
steel and zinc plated which shall clamp the door to the enclosure body.
g. With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
h. Internal panels:
1) With plated steel shoulder studs for mounting an internal panel.
2) Mounting panels shall be steel.
i. Large enclosures shall have door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
j. With no holes or knockouts.
k. Finish:
1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and
out over phosphatized surfaces.
2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate.
I. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted
3. Stainless Steel:
a. NEMA 4X.
b. Fabricated from 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel.
c. All seams continuously welded.
d. Door shall have a rolled lip around three sides.
1) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal.
1) Attached with an adhesive
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
April 5, 2007 16134-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
f. All external removable hardware shall be fabricated from heavy gauge
stainless steel which shall clamp the door to the enclosure body.
g. With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
h. Large enclosures shall have door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
i. With no holes or knockouts.
j. Finish:
1) Brushed.
k. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted
H. Cast Iron Junction Boxes:
1. NEMA 4.
2. Recessed cover boxes.
3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water.
4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors:
a. Can be surface mounted using mounting lugs.
5. Construction:
a. Cast iron box.
b. Covers:
1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic.
2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading.
c. Hot dip galvanized.
d. Neoprene gasket.
e. Stainless steel screw covers.
Floor type outlet boxes shall be watertight cast iron, semi adjustable:
1. Hubbell Type B25 with S2530 coverplate.
2. Telephone outlets shall be fitted with 6 inch bushed nipples.
3. Floor outlets in open areas for service to desks shall be similar except that the
CONTRACTOR shall provide pedestal housing:
a. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-D for power.
b. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-T for telephone.
2.05 (NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16134-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Materials and construction shall be suitable for environmental conditions at the
location of the box:
a. Dry.
b. Wet.
c. Water tight.
d. Corrosive.
e. Hazardous.
2. Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system:
a. EMT - Pressed Metal Boxes.
b. GRC - Cast Ferrous Boxes.
c. ARC - Cast Aluminum Boxes.
d. PCS - PVC Coated Cast Ferrous Boxes.
e. PVC - PVC Boxes.
f. PGA - PVC Coated Aluminum Boxes.
3. In dry heated areas where NEMA 1 enclosures are allowed unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Solid type gang boxes:
a. For more than 2 devices.
b. For barriered outlets.
5. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings. Adjust locations so as not to
conflict with structural requirements or other trades.
6. Use deep threaded -hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes:
a. Where legally required.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical damage:
1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor.
e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system.
f. Accommodate wiring devices.
7. Use deep threaded -hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and
NEMA 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel.
8. Terminate all spare and/or empty conduits in an outlet box:
a. All metallic boxes, fittings, and joints shall utilize threaded connections to
the conduit system.
b. All threaded connections shall be wrench tightened so that at least
5 threads are fully engaged.
c. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 areas
shall utilize approved grounding bushings to bond the conduits together.
d. Provide the following types of conduit bodies and boxes:
1) Malleable iron bodies and boxes with GRC conduit systems.
2) PVC coated conduit bodies and boxes with PCS conduit systems.
9. Use plastic boxes in corrosive areas where the conduit system specified is
PVC:
a. Class I, Division 2 Areas:
1) Boxes not containing arcing parts shall be:
a) NEMA 12 for dry indoor applications.
b) NEMA 4X for corrosive applications.
c) NEMA 4 for wet or outdoor applications.
2) No pressed metal boxes are allowed.
April 5, 2007 16134-7 7654AA0
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3) Provide heavy duty cast construction type conduit fittings and joints:
a) Explosion proof rated fittings and joints are not necessary.
4) Any enclosure containing arcing parts, etc. shall have all construction
associated with the enclosure, conduit system, etc. conforming to
Class 1 Division 1 construction.
10. All boxes mounted on walls of areas classified as wet or corrosive shall be
supported to maintain a minimum of 0.25-inch free air space between the back
of the enclosure and the wall:
a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not
acceptable.
b. Use stainless steel, steel that is completely electro-galvanized, or nylon
materials for spacers.
11. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices.
12. Provide pull boxes as needed to facilitate wire pulling or whenever the total
amount of bends in a conduit run exceeds 360 degrees.
13. Size pull boxes to meet National Electrical Code requirements and to provide
sufficient room for the future conduits and cables indicated on the Drawings.
14. Boxes Serving Fixtures or Devices:
a. Use as pull boxes wherever possible.
15. In Finished Areas:
a. Provide specific pull or junction boxes only as indicated on the Drawings
or as directed.
16. Install additional pull boxes as required to meet cable manufacturer's pulling
tension requirements.
17. Provide boxes and conduit bodies:
a. Bends.
b. As indicated.
c. Pulling tension.
18. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted by obstructions
such as pipes, valves, ladders.
19. Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible.
20. Where separate pullboxes are required, they shall have screw covers.
21. For boxes not indicated:
a. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that
will be consistent with the conduit system used or as directed.
b. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush -mounting in general purpose
locations shall be one-piece, galvanized, pressed steel.
c. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete shall be deep, galvanized,
pressed steel.
d. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed
locations shall be cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium
plating finish.
e. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive
locations shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic
coated steel to match the conduit system, and shall be furnished with
mounting lugs.
f. All cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush -mounting in concrete
shall be fitted with cast, malleable box covers and gaskets.
g. Boxes for installation in plastered areas shall be stainless steel over
plaster rings.
April 5, 2007 16134-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
h. In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings, with a
minimum of 50 percent spare terminals. Furnish wire ways for discrete
and analog wiring. Separate analog wiring from discrete or power wiring.
22. Recessed Boxes:
a. Support recessed boxes in suspended ceilings or stud partitions with
galvanized steel box hangers of types made specifically for the purpose or
attach directly to wood members or blocking.
b. Secure hangers or boxes to wood with 1 inch long cadmium -plated Type
A pan head screws. Fully or partially hammer -driven screws are not
acceptable.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 -(NOT USED)
3.07 (NOT USED)
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING
A. Vacuum all instrument enclosures clean after installation. Refer to Section 16050 for
additional requirements.
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16134-9 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
00601 PAYMENT BOND
Bond No.34BCSEG7471
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(Firm) Hydro Construction Company, Inc.
(Address) 301 East Lincoln Avenue Fort Collins CO 80524
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as "the Principal", and
(Firm) Hartford Fire Insurance Company
(Address) Hartford Plaza Hartford, CT 06115
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", a corporation authorized to do business in the State of
Colorado, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 West LaPorte Avenue,
Post Office Box 580, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522, a Municipal Corporation, hereinafter referred
to as "the Owner," in the penal sum of Four Million Four Hundred One Thousand Three Dollars and001100 ($4,401,003.00 ) in lawful
money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered
into a certain Construction Agreement with the Owner, dated the 30th day of March
2007, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of City of
FortCollins DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control, Fort Collins, CO -Work Order No. H-WTF-2007-10
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms,
subcontractors and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution
of the work provided for in such Construction Agreement, and any authorized extension or
Page 1 of 3
This page left blank intentionally
April 5, 2007 16134-10 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. Switches.
b. Receptacles.
c. Plates.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein for a list of references.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL 20 - General use snap switches.
2. UL 498 - Attachment plugs and receptacles.
3. UL 514D - Cover plates for flush -mounted wiring devices.
4. UL 943 - Ground -fault circuit -interrupters.
5. UL 1474 - Solid state dimming control.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA WD1 - General color requirement for wiring devices.
2. NEMA ICS 5 - Control circuits and pilot devices.
3. NEMA OS1 - Device box, covers, and box supports.
4. NEMA WD6 - Wiring devices dimensional requirements.
D. Federal Specification:
1. W-C 596.
2. W-S 896.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050 and noted herein.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. GFCI: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.
2. P-S: Pass and Seymour.
3. CWD: Cooper Wiring Devices.
4. T&B: Thomas and Bettes.
April 5, 2007 16140-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings wired and
operable to form a complete system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
C. Engraving Schedule:
1. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 (NOT USED)
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switches:
1. General purpose toggle switches, one of the following or equal:
a. Part numbers are for brown switches:
1-Dole
2-pole
3-wav
4-wav
Hubbell HBL 1221
HBL 1222
HBL 1223
HBL 1224
Leviton 1221-2
1222-2
1223-2
1224-2
CWD 4901
4902
4903
4904
April 5, 2007 16140-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2. Switches for NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X locations, one of the following or equal:
1-oole 2-oole 3-way 4-way
Hubbell HBL 1281 HBL 1282 HBL 1283 HBL 1284
Cooper Wiring Devices 2291 2292 2293 2294
3. Switches for office areas, one of the following or equal:
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
Hubbell HBL 21211 HBL 21221 HBL 21231 HBL 21241
CWD 5621-2 5622-2 5623-2 5624-2
4. Switches for photocells, one of the following or equal:
Single -pole, double -throw
Hubbell HBL 1385
CWD 2226
5. Switches for hazardous areas, one of the following or equal:
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
Appleton EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
Crouse -Hinds EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
6. Dimmer switches:
a. Rectangular design with LED light level indicators:
b. Lutron MAESTROT" MA-1000 controller for incandescent light.
c. Lutron MAESTROT"" MALV-1000 controller for magnetic low -voltage
lights.
d. Lutron MAESTROTM MA-R remote for additional control stations.
B. Receptacles:
1. General purpose receptacles, one of the following or equal:
a. Part number are for brown receptacles.
Single Duplex GFCI
Hubbell HBL5361 HBL5362 GF5362A
Leviton 5361 5362 6899
CWD 5361B 5362B HGF20B
2. Receptacles for hazardous areas, the following or equal:
a. Crouse -Hinds: CPS152.
3. 250 VAC receptacles, one of the following or equal:
a. Hubbell: HBL5462.
b. Cooper Wiring Devices: 5462B.
4. 480-volt, 3-phase receptacles:
a. 30 ampere:
1) Crouse-HindsARE3423.
2) Hubbell Hubbellock® 21420.
3) RussellstolTm DF3404FRAB.
b. 60 ampere:
1) Crouse -Hinds AREA6425.
2) Hubbell Hubbellock® 26410 or 26420 with 26401 box and 26404
adapter.
3) RussellstolTm DF6404FRAB.
April 5, 2007 16140-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
C. Plates:
1. General location, one of the following or equal:
a. Provide plates with number of gangs as required.
Standard
Office Duplex GFCI
Switches Switches Receptacles Receptacles
P-S SS1-N SS26 SS8 WPH26
2. Wet or corrosive areas, one of the following or equal
Indoor
Outdoor Duplex Corrosive
Switches
Receptacles Receptacles Locations
Hubbell 1750
T&B CCT
CKMD
P-S CAI-GL
CA8-GH 3780-SC
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Switches:
1. General:
a. 120-277 VAC.
b. 20 ampere.
c. Specification grade.
d. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated.
e. Integral grounding terminal.
f. Totally enclosed:
1) Color -coded body with color corresponding to ampere rating.
g. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as
indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation.
h. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
2. General purpose switches:
a. Toggle Type.
3. Corrosive and wet areas requiring NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosures:
a. Pushbutton switch.
b. Back and side wired.
4. Switches for office areas:
a. Rocker type.
b. Rectangular
5. Switches for use with photocell:
a. Maintained contact.
b. 2 circuit.
c. 3 position:
1) Center off.
6. Switches for hazardous areas:
a. Suitable for use in Class 1 Division 1 and Class 1 Division 2 locations.
b. Factory sealed.
c. Through -feed or dead-end as required.
7. Dimmer switches shall be rectangular design with LED light level indicators:
a. Lutron MAESTROTm MA-1000 controller for incandescent light.
April 5, 2007 16140-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. Lutron MAESTRO MALV-1000 controller for magnetic low -voltage
lights.
c. Lutron MAESTROTM MA-R remote for additional control stations.
B. Receptacles:
1. General Purpose Receptacles:
a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings.
b. 125 VAC.
c. 20 ampere or as indicated on the Drawings.
d. NEMA 5-20R configuration for 20 ampere receptacles.
e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings.
f. Specification grade.
g. Back wired.
h. One-piece mounting strap.
i. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
3) Orange when powered by a UPS.
2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles (GFI):
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 ampere.
c. Trip level 4-6 milliampere.
d. Individual and feed through protection.
e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed.
f. NEMA 5-20R configuration.
3. Receptacles for hazardous areas:
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 ampere.
c. Factory sealed.
d. Single receptacle.
e. 2-wire, 3-pole.
f. Grounded through extra pole and shell.
g. Dead -front construction.
h. Interlocked to prevent plug from being withdrawn until circuit has been
broken.
C. Plates:
1. General location:
a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel.
b. Brushed satin finish.
c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches.
d. Rectangular or square shape.
e. Engraving:
1) Engrave each plate with the following information:
a) Area served.
b) Circuit number.
2) Treat engraving to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel
plates, to prevent corrosion.
3) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a
minimum character height of 1/8-inch.
f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number and type of openings with the
specific location.
April 5, 2007 16140-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2. Outdoor and wet areas requiring NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosures:
a. General:
1) UL listed for wet locations.
2) Gasketed.
3) Die cast metal:
a) Match material to box material.
b. Switches:
1) Lever -operated.
3. Corrosive areas:
a. Neoprene.
b. Gasketed.
c. Weatherproof.
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 (NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Verification of Conditions:
1. Verify compliance of wiring device with area conditions:
a. Wet.
b. Dry.
c. Hazardous.
d. Corrosive.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
April 5, 2007 16140-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Mounting heights:
1. Process and production areas:
a. Switches and receptacles 42 inches from finished floor to center of plate.
2. Offices and finished areas:
a. Switches: 42 inches from finished floor to center of plate.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches from finished floor to center of plate.
C. Switches:
1. Over 300 Volts:
2. Where switches used in systems of more than 300 volts between conductors,
are to be ganged in outlet boxes, provide switches having no exposed live
parts or use barriers between the individual switches.
D. Receptacles:
1. Provide GFCI receptacles in the following locations:
a. Outdoors.
b. Vaults.
c. Pipe galleries.
d. Chemical feed rooms.
e. Reservoirs.
f. Below grade rooms and areas.
g. Restrooms.
h. Other locations as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Mount non -weatherproof receptacles vertically:
a. Ground slot down.
3. Mount weatherproof receptacles horizontally:
a. Neutral slot up.
4. Three phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection
at the receptacle terminals. Correct errors in phasing at the source and not the
receptacle.
E. Ensure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices:
1. Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines.
3.04 (NOT USED)
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.06
RE-INSTALLTION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.07
(NOT USED)
3.08
(NOT USED)
3.09
(NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16140-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Verify in the presence of the ENGINEER that switching is per the plans and all
circuiting is per the panel schedules.
C. Demonstrate in the presence of the ENGINEER that all circuits conform to the panel
schedules.
D. Demonstrate in the presence of the ENGINEER that all ground fault receptacles
operate at levels below or equal to OSHA maximum allowable fault levels.
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16140-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16150
WIRE CONNECTIONS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wire connecting devices.
2. Terminations.
3. Splices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. See Section 16050 for a list of references.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a
complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
B. Product data:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 16050.
B. All materials shall be UL listed.
1.07 (NOT USED)
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16150-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricar:ts, repairs on machinery,
equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such work,
and all insurance premiums on said work, and for all labor, performed in such work whether by
subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and
effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Construction
Agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same
shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such
change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Construction Agreement or
to the work or to the specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between
the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim
may be unsatisfied.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this 30th day of March , 2007.
IN PRESENCE OF:
Attest:
By:
(CORPORATE SEAL)
Principal
Hydro C Vstruction pan c.
,—
(Title)
301 East Lincoln Avenue Fort Collins, CO 80524
(Address)
Other Partners
Page 2 of 3
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 (NOT USED)
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 (NOT USED)
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT
A. Control Connections:
1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals:
a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry.
b. Deep internal serrations.
c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased
insulator -barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in
contact with the barrel.
d. Electroplated -Tin copper conductor.
e. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
2. For process equipment connections work from Manufacturer's drawings.
B. Joints, Splices, Taps, and Connections:
1. For 600-volt conductors use solderless connectors.
2. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs:
a. Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors.
3. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been
allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be
specifically designed for that purpose.
4. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with
insulating caps:
a. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Buchanan 2006S or 2011 S, with 2007 or 2014 insulating caps.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
April 5, 2007 16150-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
5. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression
connectors:
a. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) Burndy.
2) Thomas and Betts.
6. Where waterproof splices are required:
a. Suitable for indoor, outdoors, weather exposed, direct buried, or
submersed applications.
b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re -enterable compounds.
c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber -jacketed, signal,
control, and power cables rated up to 1 kV.
d. 2-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer
webbing.
e. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotchcast 72-N.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
C. Insulating Tape:
1. General purpose insulating tape:
a.
Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b.
Suitable for application in an ambient of -18 degrees Celsius
(0 degrees Fahrenheit).
c.
Operating range up to 105 degrees Celsius (220 degrees Fahrenheit).
d.
Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant.
e.
For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC.
f.
Meeting and complying with:
1) ASTM D-3005 Type I.
2) UL 510.
3) CSA C22.2.
g.
Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number Super 33+.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
2. General-purpose
color -coding tape:
a.
Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b.
Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables.
c.
For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures.
d.
Available with the following colors:
1) Red.
2) Yellow.
3) Blue.
4) Brown.
5) Gray.
6) White.
7) Green.
8) Orange.
9) Violet.
e.
For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing.
f.
Meeting and complying with:
1) UL 510.
2) CSA C22.2.
g.
Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number 35.
April 5, 2007 16150-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
3. Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape:
a. Minimum 30-mil, flexible, elastomer tape that expands in fire to form an
insulating firewall between flame and cable.
b. Bind in place with glass cloth electrical tape.
c. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number 77.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
4. Glass cloth electrical tape:
a. 7.4-mil thermosetting silicone adhesive that performs at Class H
temperatures 180 degrees Celsius (356 degrees Fahrenheit).
b. Use for the following applications:
1) To secure non-PSA insulations such as glass in high -temperature
areas.
2) Splice wire rated at 150 degrees Celsius, 180 degrees Celsius, 200
degrees Celsius.
3) For binding Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape.
c. Meeting and complying with:
1) MIL-1-19166C.
2) UL Recognized Component listing for 200 degrees Celsius (Guide
OANZ2, File E17385).
3) CSA Accepted Component 180 degrees Celsius File LR93411.
d. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number 69.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
5. Self -fusing Silicone Rubber Tape:
a. 12-mil, high -temperature, track resistant, insulating tape.
b. Composed of fully cured inorganic silicone rubber.
c. Use as a protective overwrap for terminating medium voltage cables.
d. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1) 3M - Scotch Number 70.
2) Engineer knows of no equal.
April 5, 2007 16150-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Load connections:
1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated.
B. Zero to 600-volt systems:
1. Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device
manufacturer.
2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer.
3. Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or
pre -molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps.
4. Number all power and control wires before termination.
C. Motor connections (600 Volts and below):
1. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors.
2. Connection at both the motor leads and the machine wires are to have ring
type compression lugs.
3. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross -linked polyolefin
material formed as a single opening boot:
a. In damp and wet locations use a complete kit containing mastic that shall
seal out moisture and contamination.
b. Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation.
5. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
a. Raychem MCK.
b. Engineer knows of no equal.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16150-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.07 (NOT USED)
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16150-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16222
LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500HP
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes low voltage motors up to 500 horsepower:
1. Furnished separately.
2. Part of driven equipment specified in other Sections.
3. Other electric motors required for a complete installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions
and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -
Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
1. IEEE 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating
Machinery.
2. IEEE 112 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
3. IEEE 114 - Standard Test Procedure for Single -Phase Induction Motors.
4. IEEE 303 - Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Motors in Class 1,
Groups A, B, C, and D, Division 2 Locations.
5. IEEE 841 - Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry - Severe Duty Totally
Enclosed Fan -Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including
500hp.
6. IEEE 1349 - Guide for the Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA):
1. MG-1 - Motors and Generators.
2. MG-2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and
Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL 674 - Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
E. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1. API 670 - Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing Temperature Monitoring Systems.
April 5, 2007 16222-1 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install electric motors and accessories in conformance with this Section,
and the Sections specifying driven equipment to provide a complete and operable
installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 16050.
B. Submit complete motor data sheets for each motor supplied:
1. Refer to data sheet in part 3.12 of this Section.
C. General Product Data:
1. Descriptive bulletins.
2. Machine tag and loop number as identified in the P&IDs, and Specification Section
number of the driven machine.
D. Electrical Data:
1. Voltage and Phase.
2. Horsepower:
a. Nameplate Horsepower.
3. Service factor:
a. Nameplate Service Factor,
b. Service Factor available at project altitude.
4. At rated horsepower and voltage:
a. Full load amps.
b. RPM.
5. Efficiency at 1/2 and 3/4 and full load.
6. Power factor at 1/2 and 3/4 and full load.
7. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves at 80 percent and 100 percent
rated voltage.
8. Locked rotor withstand time, with the motor at ambient temperature and at its
maximum rated operating temperature, at 70 percent, 80 percent, 90 percent, and
100 percent of rated voltage.
9. NEMA design.
10. Description of insulation system.
11. Winding insulation class and rated ambient temperature.
12. Temperature code.
E. Mounting Data:
1. Motor weight.
2. Frame size.
3. Conduit box location.
April 5, 2007 16222-2 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
4. Outline drawings with dimensions.
5. Seismic installations details for site conditions defined in Section 01612.
F. Accessories Data:
1. Power factor correction capacitors:
a. Size in KVAR, for all motors 5 Horsepower and above and not connected to
variable frequency drives.
2. Condensation heaters:
a. Voltage
b. Watts
c. Temperature code.
3. Winding temperature detectors:
a. Type.
b. Rating.
4. Moisture Detectors.
G. Mechanical Data:
1. Bearing design and bearing life calculations.
H. Certification:
1. When motors are driven by variable speed drive systems, submit certification that
selected motor:
a. Is capable of satisfactory performance under the intended load.
b. Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
c. Is matched to the type of variable frequency drive specified.
2. When motors are installed in hazardous areas, submit certification that selected
motor:
a. Is approved for installation in the type of hazardous area specified.
Test Reports:
1. Factory test reports with test reference standard identified.
J. Calculations:
1. Where site conditions specified in Section 16050 exceed Manufacturer's ratings,
provide derating calculations for each motor.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All motors shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store motors indoors.
B. Energize motor winding heaters from delivery until start-up.
C. Motors 200HP and larger:
1. Rotate shaft 90 degrees once per month.
1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide motors suitable for the project site conditions specified in Section 16050.
April 5, 2007 16222-3 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. 100 percent warranted for a period of not less than 2 years from the date of substantial
completion.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. US Motors.
2. General Electric.
3. Reliance.
4. Toshiba.
5. Baldor.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT
A. 3 Phase Induction Motors - General:
1. Voltage:
a. All motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be 460V, 3 phase unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
b. Dual voltage motors rated 230/460V, 3 phase are acceptable provided all
leads are brought to the conduit box.
2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical.
3. All motors 1 hp and larger shall be "Premium Efficiency" motors as defined in
NEMA MG-1.
4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Horsepower ratings shown on the drawings are based on Vendor's estimates.
Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished.
5. Service Factor:
a. Provide motors rated at 1.15 Service Factor.
b. Provide motors capable of operating continuously at 1.15 Service Factor at
project altitude: 5000 ft.
April 5, 2007 16222-4 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1) Without exceeding Class B temperature rise limits where motors are
provided with Class F insulation.
2) Without exceeding Class F temperature rise limits where motors are
provided with Class H insulation.
6. Torque:
a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at
voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating.
b. When started using reduced voltage starters:
1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed.
c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than
normal starting torque:
1) In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the
values specified in NEMA MG-1.
7. Enclosures:
a. As indicated in the individual equipment specifications or as specified in this
Section.
b. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled:
1) Cast iron conduit box.
2) Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286T
and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324T
and larger.
c. Explosion -Proof:
1) Tapped drain holes with corrosion resistant plugs for frames 286T and
smaller and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324T and
larger.
d. Lifting Devices: All motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more shall
have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal.
B. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG-1.
9. Nameplates:
a. Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly
stamped or engraved with:
1) NEMA Standard motor data.
2) Bearing description and lubrication instructions.
10. Hardware:
a. Type 316 stainless steel.
11. Conduit Boxes:
a. Cast iron or stamped steel.
b. Split from top to bottom.
c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces:
1) Frames and conduit boxes.
2) Conduit boxes and box covers.
d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90 degree increments.
e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG-1.
f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding.
12. Motor Bearings:
a. Antifriction.
b. Regreasable and initially filled with grease.
c. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and temperature
rise.
d. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of
100,000 hours or more.
e. Fit bearings with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief
fittings using extension tubes where necessary.
April 5, 2007 16222-5 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
IN PRESENCE OF:
IN PRESENCE OF:
Wit
Nicole L. McCollam
(SURETY SEAL)
By:
By:
By:
Surety
Hartfo sura o
By:
Attorn -in-Fact Shery
Hartford Plaza Hartford, CT 06115
(Address)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Construction Agreement. If Contractor
is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
Page 3 of 3
f. Where specified in the equipment specifications, provide split -sleeve type
hydrodynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings
from contaminants.
g. Bearings shall be mounted out of the airstream.
h. Bearings shall be self -aligning, ball bearing type with locking collar and set
screw.
13. Insulation Systems:
a. Motors Installed in Ambient Temperatures 40 degrees Celsius or less:
1) Provide Class F insulation.
2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation.
3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius and at
the altitude where the motor will be installed.
b. Motors Installed in Ambient Temperatures between 40 degrees Celsius and
65 degrees Celsius:
1) Provide Class H insulation.
2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class F insulation.
3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 65 degrees Celsius and at
the altitude where the motors will be installed.
14. Motor Leads:
a. Insulated leads with non -wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F insulation.
15. Noise:
a. Maximum operating noise level of 85dB measured as per IEEE 85.
B. Submersible Motors:
1. Enclosures:
a. Totally Enclosed Non -Ventilated (TENV) watertight casing.
b. Smooth outer surface. Cooling fins may clog with solids and are not
acceptable.
c. Inner and outer shaft seals separated by an oil chamber.
2. Cooling:
a. Suitable for continuous operation in totally, partially or nonsubmerged
condition without overheating.
b. Convection cooling only.
c. Water jackets and oil cooling are not acceptable.
3. Electrical Cables:
a. Wire unit without splices. Coordinate with CONTRACTOR to ensure cables of
adequate length.
b. Epoxy encapsulated cable entry into terminal box.
4. Insulation:
a. Sealed moisture resistant windings.
5. Motor Protection:
a. Provide temperature detection in motor windings.
b. Provide moisture detection in motor housing.
c. Provide associated electronics and relaying in a separate enclosure to be
mounted remotely.
C. Vertical Motors:
1. Enclosures:
a. Weather Protected Type II (WPII) where installed outdoors.
b. Weather Protected Type I (WPI) where installed indoors.
2. Thrust bearings:
a. Selected for combined rotor and driven equipment loads.
April 5, 2007 16222-6 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier for maximum vertical thrust of
driven equipment.
D. Variable Frequency Drive Motors:
1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified.
2. Inverter duty rated and labeled.
3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2.
5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects or
overheating.
6. Service factor of 1.0 when driven by VFD.
E. Motors Installed in Hazardous Locations:
1. Enclosures:
a. Explosion Proof for three phase motors installed in Class I, Division 1 or Class
11, Division 1 areas.
b. TEFC for horizontal motors in all other areas.
c. WP1 for vertical motors installed in all other indoor areas.
d. WP2 for vertical motors installed in all other outdoor areas.
e. Explosion Proof for single phase motors installed in any classified area.
2. Underwriter's Laboratory approval with nameplate and serial number.
3. In conformance with UL-674 Electric Motors and Generators for Use In Division 1
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
4. Hazardous area and temperature code approval stamped on nameplates.
F. Motors Installed in Corrosive Environments:
1. Nameplate indicating conformance to IEEE 841.
2. Stator double dipped in varnish and baked.
3. Stator and rotor coated with corrosion resistant epoxy.
4. Frame, brackets, fan guard and conduit box coated with minimum of two coats of
epoxy paint.
5. Withstand salt spray tests as per ASTM B-117.
6. Suitable for hose down areas.
G. Single Phase Motors:
1. Capacitor start type rated for operation at 115 volts, 60 hertz, unless otherwise
specified or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Totally enclosed, fan cooled motors manufactured in accordance with NEMA
MG 1.
3. Ball Bearings: Sealed.
4. 1/2 Horsepower or Less Fan Motors:
a. Split -phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment.
b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint
accumulation.
5. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific
characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
6. Integral overload protection.
2.06 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16222-7 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Space Heaters:
1. When shown on the P&IDs provide 3 phase motors with belted or cartridge space
heaters mounted within the motor enclosure.
2. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise shown.
3. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box.
4. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron.
B. Winding Temperature Detectors:
1. Provide factory installed winding temperature detector with leads terminating in the
conduit box:
a. When specified for individual equipment.
b. On alternating current motors connected to a solid-state motor controller.
2. Provide detectors that protect motor against damage from overheating caused by
single phasing, overload, high ambient temperature, abnormal voltage, locked
rotor, frequent starts, or ventilation failure.
3. Provide temperature switches with normally closed contacts or resistance
temperature detectors, 2 per each phase, as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Power factor correction capacitors:
1. Provide for all motors 5 Horsepower and above and not connected to variable
frequency drives.
D. Bearing Temperature Detectors:
1. Where required by the driven equipment specification or as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. RTD type and wiring matches the winding RTDs.
E. Vibration Detectors:
1. Where required by the driven equipment specification.
2. In accordance with the driven equipment specification.
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Testing:
1. Perform factory tests in accordance with:
a. IEEE 112 for three phase motors.
b. IEEE 114 for single phase motors.
2. Furnish copies of test reports.
3. Include testing of:
a. No load current.
b. Locked rotor current.
c. Winding resistance.
d. High potential.
4. Tests required on motors 250 hp and larger: -�
a. Manufacturer's routine test (use polarization index voltage = 5000V for
insulation resistance tests).
April 5, 2007 16222-8 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. Efficiency and power factor versus load test performed at rated speed and
50 percent, 75 percent, 90 percent, and 100 percent of rated load. The curves
from the motor tests shall be submitted for information.
c. The maximum allowable residual unbalance in each correction plane Qournal)
shall be calculated using the following equation:
U = 4 WIN
where:
U = residual correction plane unbalance, in ounces -inches
W = static correction plane journal loading, in pounds
N = maximum specified operating speed, in revolutions per minute.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Electrical work involving connections, controls, switches, disconnects, etc., shall be
performed as provided in the applicable Sections of Division 16.
3.04 (NOT USED)
3.05 (NOT USED)
3.06 (NOT USED)
3.07 (NOT USED)
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16222-9 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
COMLLO
snsinssrs
MOTOR DATA SHEET
MOTOR NUMBER MOTOR / EQUIPMENT NAME
SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE
MANUFACTURER
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
MODEL/SERIES
MODEL NO. _
FRAME
ENCLOSURE
NEMA DESIGN
HP
SERVICE FACTOR
RPM
INSULATION CLASS
VOLTS
FULL LOAD AMPS
AMBIENT TEMP
PHASE
NO LOAD AMPS
DESIGN TEMP RISE
HERTZ
LOCK ROTOR AMPS
INRUSH CODE LETTER
100 PERCENT LOAD
75 PERCENT LOAD 50 PERCENT LOAD
GUARANTEED MINIMIMUM EFFICIENCIES:
GUARANTEED MINIMIMUM POWER FACTOR:
MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR:
KVAR
ACCESSORIES
MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS
WATTS
WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION
WINDING TEMP SWITCHES (YES/NO)
RTD: TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE
# OF WIRES
NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP
COEFFICIENT
RECOMMENDED ALARM DEGREES CELSIUS RECOMMENDED TRIP DEGREES CELSIUS
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
INVERTER DUTY- (YES/NO) PART WINDING (YES/NO)
WYE - DELTA (YES/NO)
2 SPEED, 1 WINDING (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 2 WINDING (YES/NO)
AREA CLASSIFICATION:
CLASS DIVISION GROUP
TEMP CODE
Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16222-10 6534A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16282
600 VOLT FIXED POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. 600 volt and below, 60 hertz power factor correction capacitors.
b. Fixed Individual Capacitors.
c. Fixed Bank Capacitors.
d. Capacitors located in Motor Control Centers.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 460 - Capacitors.
B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
1. NEMA CPA.
C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI/IEEE Standard 18 - Shunt Power Capacitors.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Standard
1. UL 810 - Capacitors.
1.03
(NOT USED)
1.04
(NOT USED)
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
B. Shop Drawings.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All capacitors furnished shall be UL listed and labeled.
April 5, 2007 16282-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.07 (NOT USED)
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the product 24 months from the date of final acceptance of project.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Eaton Electrical (Commonwealth Sprague Capacitor, Inc.).
2. General Electric Company.
3. Square D Company.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT
A. Racks
1. Heavy frame, jig welded to assure accurate alignment and proper ventilation of
capacitors and tiers when used in stacked multiple assemblies.
2. Rack spacing to minimize overall dimensions and to provide adequate
ventilation.
3. Individual capacitor shall be dry type self -healing design utilizing a low loss
metalized film dielectric system with a pressure sensitive circuit interrupter:
a. Elements shall be surrounded by a non-flammable vermiculite filler and
encased in a metal enclosure.
b. Liquid filled or impregnated capacitors shall not be acceptable.
April 5, 2007 16282-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Electrical losses, including contribution of discharge resistors, shall average less
than 0.5 Watts per KVAR.
C. Encased with minimum of #16 gauge stainless steel with joints welded. Enclosure
shall be NEMA 12 for indoor installation and NEMA 3R for Outdoor installation.
D. Internal discharge resistors which will reduce the residual voltage to less than
50 volts within 1 minute after removal from the circuit.
E. Operating ambient temperature range: -40 degrees Celsius to +40 degrees Celsius.
F. Overcurrent tolerance: 135 percent continuous of rated current.
G. Overvoltage tolerance: 110 percent continuous of rated voltage.
H. Basic Impulse Level: 3kV RMS.
Indicating type current limiting fuses on fused units.
J. Capable to withstand seismic activity as specified in Section 16050.
K. Nameplates:
1. Manufacturer Nameplate:
a. Year of manufacture rated reactive power
b. Rated rms voltage
c. Number of phases
d. Rated frequency
2. Plant ID Nameplate.
a. Type: Black lamicoid with white letters.
b. Fastener: Round head stainless steel screws.
c. Inscription: Tag number and description.
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard protective primer and gray enamel finish coat.
April 5, 2007 16282-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Wall mount power factor correction capacitors above the respective 600 VAC motor
control centers, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified.
B. Install capacitors at motors only when indicated on the Drawings.
C. Capacitors should be installed ahead of the motor overload heaters.
3.04 (NOT USED)
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.05 (NOT USED)
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.06 (NOT USED)
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.07 (NOT USED)
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect products until acceptance by OWNER.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16282-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16422
MOTOR STARTERS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. Magnetic Starters.
b. Solid State Starters.
c. Contactors.
d. Integral Self -Protected Starters.
B. For installation in motor control centers or in enclosed combination starters,
supplied under Division 16 or other divisions in the Specifications.
C. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC):
1. Article 430 - Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers.
B. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA Standards Publication ICS 2-2000 Industrial Control and Systems
Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
2. National Electrical Code.
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
4. Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society.
5. National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements:
1. Starters shall be incorporated into motor control centers or individual enclosed
starters as indicated on the Drawings and noted in the Specifications:
a. Ratings, components, and features shall be as shown on the one -line
diagrams, control diagrams, details and schedules on the Drawings.
2. All components shall be newly manufactured and of the latest construction
series of the Manufacturer.
April 5, 2007 16422-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Direct Inquiries/Claims to:
POWER OF ATTORNEY THE HAND,T-4 D
BOND, -4
P.O. BOX 2103, 690 ASYLUM AVENUE
HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT 06115
call: 888-266-3488 or fax: 860-757-5835
.)W ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Code: 34-340140
0 Hartford Fire Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut
X� Hartford Casualty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana
X� Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut
Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut
Twin City Fire Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana
Hartford insurance Company of Illinois, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois
Hartford insurance Company of the Midwest, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana
Hartford insurance Company of the Southeast, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida
having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut, (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Companies") do hereby make, constitute and appoint,
up to the amount of unlimited:
Shetyll Shaw, Robert L. Cohen, Sarah Finn, Nicole L. McCollam, Sue Wood,
Robert J. Reiter, Bradley J. Jeffress, Lisa T. Solove, James M. Ka de
of
Denver. CO
their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies) only as
delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the
nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and
executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on July 21, 2003 the Companies
have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant
Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies, the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are
and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney.
:w..neur^l i 19! r �1/EEy✓•n : trp"na�\ :t ;
�O� ��`+m esr�; �b1afN �'. tp79 � l079 rsi �B 79T9
• ' �ttp�;. td �+R i.i'i�4 • gls.'ti.. irrl+r4 ~�'9sw.•t`7"
�-j 0(.
Paul A. Bergenholtz, Assistant Secretary
STATE OF CONNECTICUT
ss. Hartford
COUNTY OF HARTFORD
David T. Akers, Assistant Vice President
On this 4th day of August, 2004, before me personally came David T. Akers, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and
say: that he resides in the County of Hampden, Commonwealth of Massachusetts; that he is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the
corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the
said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that he signed
his name thereto by like authority.
E.p�
• `r
���jy
Scott E. Paseka
Notary Public
CERTIFICATE
My Commission Expires October 31, 2007
I, the undersigned, Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing is a true and correct
copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is still in full force effective as of March 30, 2007
Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford.
�tt I •tnitrs fir• a ery` �`0'rV.
a �AM `:wann.rri: : LYat a� 9 •eanw�,� o
Gary W. Stumper, Assistant Vice President
POA 2005
3. Starter types shall as indicated on the Drawings. Starters shall be available in
the following configurations:
a. FVNR - Full Voltage Non -reversing.
b. FVR - Full Voltage Reversing.
c. TS1 W - 2 Speed 1 Winding (Consequent Pole).
d. TS2W - 2 Speed 2 Windings.
e. PWS - Part Winding Start.
f. RVAT - Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer.
g. RVSS - Reduced Voltage Solid State.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050:
1. Submit motor starter data with associated Motor Control Center or Individual
Enclosed Starter submittal.
B. Certifications:
1. The Manufacturer shall certify that the reduced voltage solid state starter will
reliably control the acceleration and deceleration of the driven load at the
installed conditions:
a. Failure of the Manufacturer to provide said certification shall be
interpreted as to mean that the Manufacturer has agreed that the reduced
voltage solid state starter is matched to the driven load at the installed
conditions and will function without fault. If the reduced voltage solid state
starter fails to perform as desired the Manufacturer shall replace or modify
the reduced voltage solid state starter in order to achieve the desired
operational conditions, as directed by the ENGINEER. --<,
C. Product Data:
1. Technical information.
2. Complete nameplate schedule.
3. Complete Bill of Material.
4. List of recommended spare parts.
5. Full size, 11 inch by 17 inch, translucent, Manufacturer original time current
curves for:
a. Overload relays.
b. Motor circuit protectors.
c. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers.
d. Fuses.
e. Protective relays.
6. Confirmation that the overload relay class meets the requirements of the
equipment and motor suppliers for each starter.
7. Confirmation that any reduced voltage solid-state starters are matched to the
respective driven loads at the installed conditions and will reliably accelerate
and decelerate the driven load.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Elementary and schematic diagrams:
a. One diagram for every starter and/or contactor.
b. Wire numbers for all control wires shall be indicated on the diagrams.
c. Interfaces with other equipment shall be indicated on the diagrams.
April 5, 2007 16422-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
E. Record Drawings:
1. Elementary and schematic diagrams:
a. 1 diagram for every starter and/or contactor.
b. Wire numbers for all control wires shall be indicated on the diagrams.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data.
3. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details
for care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished and/or
installed under this section. Manuals shall include:
a. Electrical ratings:
1) Phase.
2) Wire.
3) Voltage.
4) Ampacity.
b. Complete Bill of Material.
c. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions for the starters
and/or contactors and all component parts, including:
1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater
elements, etc.).
2) Pilot devices.
d. Complete renewal parts list.
e. 11 inch by 17 inch prints of final as -built record Drawings.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. NFPA-70, National Electric Code
2. All portions and components of the starters and/or contactors shall bear UL or
other nationally recognized independent testing laboratory labels:
a. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Protect all equipment from physical and environmental damage during storage.
C. Store all equipment indoors in dry heated areas.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. All equipment must comply with the requirements specified in Section 16050.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 16050.
April 5, 2007 16422-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Without additional charge, the Manufacturer shall replace work or material they
have provided which develops defects within 2 years from date of acceptance.
C. Materials and equipment shall be warranted against defective materials, design,
and workmanship.
D. During the warranty period, the Manufacturer or its authorized dealer will be
required to make the necessary repairs or replacements on site.
E. Warranties, which mention that the part must be returned to.the factory, will not be
acceptable.
F. During the warranty period, the OWNER will not accept charges for:
1. Travel time.
2. Mileage.
3. On -site repair labor.
G. Warranty shall list excluded items.
H. If necessary, as determined by the OWNER, repairs must be made on a premium
time basis.
1.12 (NOT USED)
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts:
1. Provide the following spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the
corresponding equipment number:
a. One spare fuse of each size and type per starter.
b. One of each type of circuit board used in the solid state starters:
1) Control board.
2) Power board.
3) Bridge rectifier.
4) Inverter module.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. NEMA Starters and Contactors:
a. Allen Bradley.
b. Square D.
c. General Electric.
d. Cutler Hammer.
e. Seimens.
April 5, 2007 16422-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Combination type with MCP or thermal -magnetic circuit breakers and control
power transformer as indicated on the Drawings.
2. NEMA size, design, and rated:
a. Minimum NEMA Size 1:
1) With the exception of Integral Self -Protected Starters.
3. Coordinate MCP and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and
current ratings of the installed motor.
4. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or
indicated on the Drawings, provide starters of sufficient size to accommodate
the specific motors furnished.
5. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking
contacts.
6. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without
opening door of enclosure:
B. Full Voltage Starters (FVNR, FVR, TS1W, TS2W):
1. Across -the -line full voltage magnetic starters.
2. Rated for 600 volts.
3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Provide positive, quick -make, quick -break mechanisms, pad lockable
enclosure doors, 3 overload relays, and cover mounted reset button.
5. Furnish starter with Bimettalic overload relays.
2.05 (NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Operating mechanism:
a. Quick -make, quick -break, non -welding silver alloy contacts.
b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi -pole breakers such that all poles
open and close simultaneously.
c. Mechanically trip free from the handle.
d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between
the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker
has tripped.
e. Lockable in the "OFF' position.
2. Arc Extinction:
a. In arc chutes.
3. Voltage and Current Ratings:
a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Minimum frame size 100A.
4. Interrupting Ratings:
a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Not less than the rating of the assembly (Panelboard, Switchboard, Motor
Control Center, etc.)
April 5, 2007 16422-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
5. Motor Circuit Protectors:
a. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor
controller.
b. Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with 'LO' and 'HI'
settings factory calibrated.
6. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Contactors:
1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Electrically held
3. Factory adjusted and chatter free.
4. Auxiliary contacts:
a. Contact ratings as per NEMA A600 rating:
1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amps at 600 volts.
b. Provide all contacts indicated on the Drawings, and any additional
contacts required for proper operation.
c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary
contact with each starter.
C. Overloads:
1. Bimetallic overload relay:
a. Class 20 protection.
b. Ambient compensated.
c. Interchangeable heater pack:
1) 1 heater per phase.
2) Coordinate with installed motor full load amps and service factor.
d. Visible trip indicator.
e. Push -to -trip test.
f. Isolated normally open alarm contact.
g. Normally closed trip contacts.
h. Manual reset.
D. Control Power Transformer:
1. Furnish integral control power transformer capacity to power:
a. All motor controls indicated on the Drawings.
b. Motor winding heaters, through a normally closed auxiliary contact on the
starter.
2. Primary and secondary fusing as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Fusing sized by the Manufacturer for the rating of the transformer
furnished.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Lugs and terminals:
1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG and larger.
2. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors.
3. Shop Drawings must indicate lug sizes, type, and Manufacturer based on the
cable size as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
April 5, 2007 16422-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.05 REPAIRIRESTORATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.06 RE -INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
1. Field testing and checking of motor starter installation shall be performed by
the Contractor.
2. Acceptance tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements set
forth in Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the Manufacturer,
ENGINEER, or testing firm.
B. Set all overloads and motor circuit protectors based on the actual tested load of the
installed motor.
April 5, 2007 16422-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation, and
any visible dirt, dust or other matter before starting the system or energization of
equipment.
B. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the operation of every motor starter to the ENGINEER'S and
OWNER'S satisfaction.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect all equipment from damage or degradation after testing is complete until
such time as the Project is substantially completed and accepted by the ENGINEER
and the OWNER.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16422-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16850
HEAT TRACING CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Heat tracing cable for outdoor water and chemical piping including the
following:
1. Heating Cables.
2. Control Panels.
3. Temperature Sensors.
4. Temperature Controllers.
5. Contactors.
6. Enclosures.
7. All other auxiliary equipment and controls required to complete a heat tracing system.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 15145 - Piping Insulation.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B 193 Section 5 - Resistivity of Electrical Conductor Materials.
2. D 2633 - Standard Test Methods for Thermoplastic Insulations and Jackets for Wire
and Cable.
C. Electrical Power Research Institute (EPRI):
1. EPRI NL 1558.
D. Factory Mutual Research Corp., (FM).
E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
1. IEEE P515 - Testing, Design, Installation, and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance
Heat Tracing for Industrial Applications.
2. IEEE 622 - Design & Installation, of Electric Heat Tracing SY.
F. International Electro-Mechanical Commission (IEC).
G. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA):
1. 1CS1-110.
H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
I. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).
April 5, 2007 16850-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
J. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.(UL):
1. UL 746B - Polymeric Materials - Long Term Property Evaluations.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. General: Heat tracing applications up to a maintain temperature above freezing and
intermittent exposure to 185 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Self-regulating heating cable shall vary its heat output relative to the temperature of
the surface of the pipe allowing cable to be crossed over itself without overheating and
to be cut to length in the field.
3. Design for a useful life of 20 years or more with "power on" continuously. The criteria
for life shall be to retain at least 75 percent of its original power when tested according
to UL 746B.
4. Provide power connecting kits with junction boxes, end seal kits, fittings kits, electric
traced labels, aluminum tapes, and line sensing thermostats. CONTRACTOR shall
determine the quantities for the above components and the sizes of the breakers for
this particular application as required and recommended per manufacturer, subject to
ENGINEER acceptance, for complete operable system at no additional cost to the
OWNER.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Catalog number, wattage output, voltage rating, and product data.
2. Installation Instructions.
3. Warranty.
B. Shop Drawings: Include isometric drawings for each heat traced pipe showing installation
details, and size and type of heat tracing cable.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements and Reference Standards: The electric heat tracing system shall
conform to this Specification and shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance
with the minimum applicable requirements of the latest edition of the following codes and
standards. Additional specific requirements shall be further defined in the testing
requirements for each Section.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Cables: All cables shall be warranted for a period of 10 years for manufacturing defects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAT TRACING CABLE
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Chromalox Type SRL-CT Rapid Trace.
2. Raychem Chemelex Auto -Trace.
3. Eaton Corporation, equivalent product.
4. Dekoron, equivalent product.
April 5, 2007 16850-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Type: Self-regulating and self-limiting, 5 watts per foot, 120 volts, 60 hertz, flexible twin 16
AWG copper bus wires, with tinned copper braid overshield and fluoropolymer corrosion
resistant overjacket.
2.02 CONTROLLER
A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1. Chromalox RTPC Series.
B. Operating Characteristics:
1. Controller shall energize system automatically if the temperature drops below a preset
point.
C. Controller shall be fully compatible with heat trace and provided by same manufacturer as
heat trace.
1. Controller shall be powered from 120 VAC. A configurable dry contact shall be
provided for heat trace fault.
2. Controller shall have double pole solid-state switching, temperature control from -40
deg F to 125 deg F, and a 30-amp rating from -40 deg F to 125 deg F ambient
temperature.
3. Power Supply: Controller power supply shall be either 110-240 VAC with adjustable
ground fault detection.
4. Enclosure: Unit shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X panel.
2.03 CONNECTION KITS, END SEALS, SPLICE AND TEE KITS
A. Heat trace connection, end, splice, and tee kits shall be designed to meet or exceed the life
of the heat trace and shall be given equal consideration and evaluation.
B. Provide wiring, conduits, junction boxes, and any other electrical components as required.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Power connection kits.
B.
Termination kits.
C.
Splice kits.
D.
End seal kits.
E.
Straps.
F.
Thermostat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install heat tracing cable on water piping subject to freezing in the following areas:
1. Exposed primary biofilter NPW humidifier line..
2. Exposed solids biofilter NPW humidifier lines.
April 5, 2007 16850-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
ACORDr„ CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/OD YY)
3/30107
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
IMA of Colorado, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
550 17th Street, Suite 600 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Denver, CO 80202
303 534-4567 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE
INSURED
Hydro Construction Company, Inc.
301 East Lincoln Avenue
Fort Collins, CO 80524
l.0 V CKAULZI
INSURER A: American Guarantee &
INSURER B: National Union Fire Ins
INSURER C: Pinnacol Assurance
INSURER D:
INSURER E:
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE
DATE DDNY)
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE IMII
LIMITS
A
GENERAL LIABILITY
CP0343758102
09/30/06
09/30/07
EACH OCCURRENCE
$1 OOO OOO
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire)
s3000OO
MED EXP (Any one person)
$10000
CLAIMS MADE EXI OCCUR
PERSONAL BADVINJURY
$1000000
X PDDed:5,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$2 000 000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMITAPPLIES PER:
PRODUCTS-COMPIOPAGG
$2 o0O 000
POLICY X PRO -
CT X LOC
A
AUTOMOBILE
X
LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
CP0343758102
09/30/06
09/30/07
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
(Ea accident)
$1,000,000
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
(Per person)
$
X
X
HIRED AUTOS
NON -OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
(Per accident)
$
PROPERTY DAMAGE
(Per accident)
$
GARAGE LIABILITY
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT
$
OTHER THAN EA ACC
$
ANY AUTO
$
AUTO ONLY: AGO
B
EXCESS LIABILITY
X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE
BE0831894
09/30/06
09/30/07
EACH OCCURRENCE
$1,000,000
AGGREGATE
$1,000,000
DEDUCTIBLE
X RETENTION $10000
$
C
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
2091550
04/01/07
04/01/08
X WC STATIT OTH-
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
$1,000,000
E.L. DISEASE -EA EMPLOYEE
$1,000,000
E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT
$1,000,000
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSIVEHICLESIEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS
RE: DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control, Fort Collins Colorado.
City of Fort Collins is included as Additional Insured on the General Liability Policy if required by written contract or
agreement subject to the policy terms and conditions.
City of Fort Collins
700 Wood Street
Fort Collins, CO 80521
SHOULD ANYOF TH E ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL An DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICETOTHE CERTIFICATE HOLDERNAMED TOTHE LEFT, BUTFAILURE TODOSOSHALL
IM POSE NO OB LIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE IN SU RE R,ITS AGENTS OR
REPRESENTATIVE
ACORD 25•S (7/97)1 of 2 #M334092 MLM 0 ACORD CORPORATION 1988
B. Install pipe insulation as specified in Section 15145.
C. Install heat tape and controls in accordance with manufacturers published installation
instructions.
D. Install heat tape to frontline level.
E. One single 120 volt power source will be provided to the heat tracing control system panel
as indicated on the Drawings. Heat tracing units will be controlled by an external thermostat
supplied by owner.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service:
1. Inspect installed systems for proper installation.
2. Instruct OWNER's personnel on operations and maintenance of the systems.
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007
16850-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16950
FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for:
a. Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation.
b. Routine tests during installation.
c. Adjusting and calibration.
d. Acceptance tests.
e. Demonstration of electrical equipment.
f. Commissioning and plant startup.
B. Related Sections
1. The Contract Documents: are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and
coordinated project.
C. Copyright information
1. Some portions of this section are copyrighted by the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for details.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. InterNational Electrical Testing Association Incorporated:
1. 2003 NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. Manufacturer's testing recommendations and instruction manuals.
C. Specification sections for the electrical equipment being tested.
D. Specifications drawings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. Instrument Society of America.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. National Electrical Testing Association.
April 5, 2007 16950-1 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Specific Scope of Work:
1. The following item
a. All Wires and
b. Motors.
of equipment shall be tested:
Cables.
c. Grounding System.
d. Additions control system and all process interfaces.
B. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the ENGINEER or the ENGINEER's
representative. The ENGINEER will participate in all visual and mechanical
inspections.
C. The testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the
tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, the industry and these
specifications. The results of the tests shall determine the suitability for continued
reliable operation.
D. Responsibilities:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall:
a. Be responsible for ensuring that all resources are made available for
testing, and that all testing requirements are met.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall:
a. Perform routine tests during installation.
b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment.
c. Be responsible for commissioning of the electrical installation.
d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services
to the testing laboratory and other contractors, including but not limited to
1) Providing electrical power as required.
2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other
equipment.
3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits.
4) Making and recording electrical measurements.
5) Replacing blown fuses.
6) Installing temporary jumpers.
3. The Electrical Contractor shall provide qualified testing personnel from their
staff or from an independent testing laboratory to perform the acceptance
tests. The organization performing the acceptance tests is herein referred to
as the testing laboratory. The selection of the personnel and/or firm for testing
shall be subject to approval by the ENGINEER. The testing laboratory shall:
a. Perform all acceptance tests as defined herein.
b. Provide all required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support
during acceptance tests.
E. Upon completion of testing or calibration, a label shall be attached to all serviced
devices. The label shall indicate the date serviced and the company that performed
the service.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.
April 5, 2007 16950-2 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
B. Division of responsibilities:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a list identifying who is responsible for
performing each portion of the testing:
a. The submittal shall include a complete resume and statement of
qualifications from the proposed testing laboratory detailing their
experiences in performing the tests specified. This statement will be used
to determine whether the laboratory is acceptable, and shall include:
1) Corporate history and references.
2) Resume of individual performing test.
3) Equipment list and test calibration data.
C. Manufacturer's testing procedures:
1. Manufacturer's recommended testing procedures and acceptable test results
shall be submitted for review by the ENGINEER.
D. Test Report:
1. The test report shall include the following:
a. Summary of project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Description of tests performed.
d. Test results.
e. Conclusions and recommendations.
f. Completed test forms.
g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable
codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein:
a. National Electrical Code --NEC.
b. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association--NEMA.
c. American Society for Testing and Materials--ASTM.
d. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers --IEEE.
e. National Electrical Testing Association--NETA.
f. American National Standards Institute --ANSI.
g. State and Local Codes and Ordinances.
h. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association—IPCEA.
L Association of Edison Illuminating Companies--AEIC.
j. OSHA Part 1910; Subpart S, 1910,308.
k. National Fire Protection Association—NFPA.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
April 5, 2007 16950-3 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Testing shall be performed in the following sequence:
1. Routine tests shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor as the equipment
is installed including:
a. Insulation resistance tests.
b. Continuity tests.
c. Rotational tests.
2. Adjusting and preliminary calibration.
3. Acceptance tests.
4. Demonstration.
5. Commissioning and plant startup.
1.10
(NOT USED)
1.11
WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 16050.
1.12
(NOT USED)
1.13
(NOT USED)
1.14
COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning and plant startup, as described in the General Provisions of these
specifications, shall not begin until acceptance testing is complete, and operation
has been demonstrated to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
B. Commissioning shall only be attempted as a function of normal plant operation in
which plant process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates
automatically in response to flow and level parameters or computer command, as
applicable:
1. Simulation of process parameters will be considered only upon receipt of a
written request by the CONTRACTOR.
C. Motor currents shall be recorded for each motor during normal operation.
1.15 (NOT USED)
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 (NOT USED)
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 (NOT USED)
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 (NOT USED)
April 5, 2007 16950-4 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Test instrument calibration:
a. The testing laboratory shall have a calibration program which maintains all
applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy.
b. The accuracy shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards in an
unbroken chain.
c. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency
schedule:
1) Field instruments--6 months maximum.
2) Laboratory instruments-12 months maximum.
3) Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the
lessor (such as Doble) --12 months maximum.
d. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
e. Up-to-date instrument calibration records shall be maintained for each test
instrument. The records shall show the date and results of each
calibration or test.
f. An up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure shall be
maintained for each test instrument.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Safety and precautions:
1. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to the following requirements.
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970-OSHA.
b. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, Seventh Edition,
National Safety Council, Chapter 4.
c. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures.
d. NETA Safety/Accident Prevention Program.
e. OWNER's safety practices.
f. National Fire Protection Association-NFPA 70E.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for safety during all tests.
April 5, 2007 16950-5 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3. The testing laboratory shall ensure safety during all tests which they are
responsible to perform.
4. In all cases, testing shall not proceed until the Electrical Contractor, testing
laboratory, and CONTRACTOR have determined that it is safe to do so.
5. The testing laboratory shall have available sufficient protective barriers and
warning signs to conduct specified tests safely.
C. Testing shall not commence until the following conditions have been met:
1. All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition.
2. All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags and brushes are
available.
3. All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other
lifting equipment are available or scheduled.
4. All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the
electrical devices are available.
5. Data sheets to record all test results are available.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.06 RE-INSTALLTION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cables, 600 volts and less:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct
connection in accordance with the Drawings.
c. Inspected bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the
following:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
d. Inspect compression -applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
f. Inspect jacket insulation and condition.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low -
resistance ohmmeter as specified above.
April 5, 2007 16950-6 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. Perform insulation -resistance tests on conductors 1/0 and larger with
respect to ground and adjacent conductors:
1) Applied voltage shall be:
a) 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable.
2) Test duration shall be one minute.
c. Perform continuity tests to ensure correct cable connection.
d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
3. Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt -torque level should be in accordance with NETA ATS-2003 or
Manufacturer's published data.
c. Microhm of millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the
normal range as indicated in the Manufacturer's published data:
1) If Manufacturer's data in not available, investigate any values which
deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the
lowest value.
d. Insulation -resistance values should not be less the 50 megohms.
e. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors.
B. Metering Devices:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
d. Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, condition of spiral spring, disk
clearance, contacts, and case shorting contacts as applicable.
e. Verify the unit is clean.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Verify accuracy of meter at all cardinal points.
b. Calibrate meters in accordance with Manufacturer's published data.
c. Verify that all current transformer, voltage transformer, or other input
circuits are intact.
C. Grounding Systems:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect ground system for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform fall of potential test per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section 8.2.1.5 on
the main grounding electrode or system.
b. Perform ground continuity test between main ground system and all major
electrical equipment frames, the system neutral and any derived neutral
points:
1) The test shall be made by passing a minimum of 10 amperes D. C.
current between ground reference system and the ground point to be
tested.
2) Voltage drop shall be measured and resistance calculated by voltage
drop method.
3. Test values:
a. The main ground electrode system resistance to ground should be no
greater than 5 ohms for commercial or industrial systems and 1 ohm or
April 5, 2007 16950-7 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
less for generating or transmission station grounds unless otherwise
specified by the ENGINEER.
b. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
D. Rotating Machinery:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Drawings and
Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect for proper anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, and brush
rigging.
e. Inspected bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the
following:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
f. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication
systems.
g. Verify the absence of unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of
overheating during initial test run.
h. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to the
Drawings.
i. Verify that metering or relaying devices utilizing RTDs have the correct
rating.
j. Special tests as suggested by Manufacturer, such as gap spacing and
pedestal alignment shall be made where applicable.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 43. Test
voltage shall be as specified by the Manufacturer:
1) On motors 200 HP and smaller, test duration shall be 1 minute.
Calculate dielectric absorption ratio using resistance measurements
at 30 seconds and 60 seconds.
c. Verify operation of motor space heater.
d. Perform a rotation test to ensure correct shaft direction.
e. Measure no load and full load running current and compare to nameplate.
f. Perform vibration amplitude test on motors 200 HP and smaller.
g. Check all protective devices in accordance with other sections of these
specifications.
h. After start-up of each motor, the current on each phase shall be
measured:
1) At no load.
2) At defined load:
a) Record the voltage of each phase to ground during this test.
3) Inrush current.
i. Measurements shall be recorded on copies of Form 16 B, contained in
this Section.
3. Test Values:
a. Insulation resistance should be not less than 10 megohms.
April 5, 2007 16950-8 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
b. Dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index readings less than the
Manufacturer's recommended values (not less than 3 for polarization
index or 1.4 for dielectric absorption ratio) shall be investigated.
c. Motor measured full load current shall not exceed nameplate value.
d. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values furnished by Manufacturer.
E. Motor Control:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Verify contactors:
1) Verify mechanical operation.
2) Inspect contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are in
accordance with Manufacturer's published data.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low -resistance ohmmeter in accordance with
Section 7.16.1.1.2.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque -wrench method in accordance with Manufacturer's
published data or Table 100.12.
g. Lubrication requirements:
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current -carrying parts.
2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low -
resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with Section 7.16.1.1.1.
b. Perform insulation -resistance tests on each pole, phase -to -phase and
phase -to -ground with starter closed and across each open pole for
1 minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's
published data or Table 100.1.
c. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit -to -ground.
d. Perform insulation -resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to
ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and
1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be 1 minute. For
units with solid-state components, follow Manufacturer's recommendation.
e. Test motor protection devices in accordance with Manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of Manufacturer's data, use Section 7.9.
f. Test circuit breakers in accordance with Section 7.6.
g. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.
3. Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt -torque levels should be in accordance with Table 100.12 unless
otherwise specified by Manufacturer.
c. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the
normal range as indicated in the Manufacturer's published data. If
Manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values which deviate
from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
d. Insulation -resistance values shall be in accordance with Table 100.1.
April 5, 2007 16950-9 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 00635
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS
(OWNER)
WORK ORDER NUMBER: H-WRF-2007-10
DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
CONTRACTOR: Hydro Construction Co.. Inc.
CONTRACT DATE: May 28, 2006
WORK ORDER TITLE:
DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor
Control
Work Order Date:
The Work performed under this Work Order, pursuant to the Contract Documents has
been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, and CONTRACTOR and
the project is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date.
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not
be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of
the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees
to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated.
CONTRACTOR
By:
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE
The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete
and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01
a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance
under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under 'Remarks" below.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
OWNER
14
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE
5/98 Section 00635 Page 1
e. Insulation -resistance values for control wiring shall be a minimum of 2.0
megohms.
f. Motor protection parameters shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's
published data.
F. Motor Control, Motor Control Centers, Low Voltage:
1. Test the motor control center starters in accordance with the requirements set
forth.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust limit switches and level switches to their operating
points before testing.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall set pressure switches, flow switches, and timing relays to
anticipated values prior to testing:
1. Final settings shall be as dictated by operating results during testing.
3.09 CLEANING
A. After the acceptance tests have been completed, all testing expendables shall be
disposed of, all cabinets shall be vacuumed clean, and all surrounding areas shall
be swept clean.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Proper operation of all alarm and status contacts shall be demonstrated to the
ENGINEER before demonstrating any subsystem.
C. All process and control devices shall have been adjusted and calibrated as
accurately as possible before demonstration of the subsystem.
D. Demonstration of each subsystem:
1. Subsystem, as used in this Section, means individual and groups of pumps,
conveyor systems, chemical feeders, air conditioning units, ventilation fans, air
compressors, blowers, lighting control systems and other electrically operated
or controlled equipment.
2. Each subsystem shall be operated in its manual mode and its operation shall
be demonstrated to meet all contract requirements.
3. After each subsystem has operated successfully in its manual mode,
automatic and remote operation shall be demonstrated to verify that all
features are fully operational and meet all contract requirements. All operating
modes and sequences, including proper start and stop sequence of pumps,
proper operation of valves and proper speed control, shall be demonstrated.
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 SCHEDULES
A. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit the manufacturer's complete field testing procedures
April 5, 2007 16950-10 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
to the ENGINEER and to the testing laboratory, complete with expected test results
and tolerances for all equipment to be tested.
END OF SECTION
April 5, 2007 16950-11 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
This page left blank intentionally
April 5, 2007 16950-12 7654A.10
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
A/E:
Contractor: Hydro Construction/CDM Electric
Project: DWRF Odor Control System
Customer: City of Fort Collins Water Utilities
Plant: Drake WRF
Location: Fort Collins, CO
BOM No.:
File: 17301 -Flow Switches.doc
THERMAL DISPERSION FLOW
SWITCHES
Sheet 1 of 1
Spec. No.
17301
Rev.
No I
By
Date
Revision
Contract
Date
Req.
P.O.
By
Chk
App
MKR
1
Type
Thermal.: 4 Other:
D
2
Setting
Set in Field: 4 Facto Set: Internal: Extemal: Dial:
E
3
Dead Band
Fixed: Adj.: d Min.: Other:
V
4
Mtl : I Body Seat Tube
316L SS I N/A N/A
1
5
Element Type
Diaphragm: Bourdon: Bellows: Other: Thermal Probe
C
6
Material
Bronze: SS: -4 Alloy St.: Other
E
7
Connection
MFR STD: 3/4" F-NPT Other Size Bottom: Back:
8
Mounting
Local: d Surface: Flush:
9
Other
10
Type
Mercury: Snap: Other: 1
11
Quantity
Single: J Dual: Other
S
12
Form
SPST: SPDT: DPDT: Other:
W
13
Rating: Amps I Volts Hertz
6 Amps 120VAC 60Hz
I
14
Power Requirements
120VAC, 6011z, 5 watts maximum. Control 6A relay.
T
15
Load
Inductive: J Non -Inductive:
C
16
Enclosure
Rated for Class I Div 11
H
17
Enclosure Class
NEMA 4X
18
Conduit Connection
MFR STD: 4 3/4" F-NPT
19
Other
Manual Reset
20
Manufacturer
Fluid Components Inc. FCI
21
Model No.
FS2000
Rev
Tag Number
Ad'. Range
SP Process
Si nal SP
O . Tern .
P&ID
Service
Notes
F141A
Mfg Std
0 fps
0 fps
Ambient
PI-ODC-5
Odor control Air/Gas fan
discharge
F142A
Mfg Std
0 fps
0 fps
Ambient
PI-ODC-5
Odor control Air/Gas fan
discharge
F741A
Mfg Std
0 fps
0 fps
Ambient
PI-ODC-2
Odor control Air/Gas fan
discharge
F743A
Mfg Std
0 fps
0 fps
Ambient
PI-ODC-2
Odor control Air/Gas fan
discharge
Notes:
Fluid Components Inc., Model FS2000.
No substitutions or equals allowed.
Enclosure rated for Class I Div II.
Similar to ISA Form S20.42a
This Page Left Blank Intentionally
SECTION 00640
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
, 2008
TO: Hydro Construction Co., Inc.
301 East Lincoln Ave
Fort Collins, CO 80524
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified that on the _ day of 2008, the City of Fort Collins,
Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by Hydro Construction Co, Inc. for the City of
Fort Collins Work Order, titled DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control, Work Order No.
H-W RF-2007-10
A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work
done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents, including the Work Order, which is
dated and the AGREEMENT, which is dated March 28, 2006.
In conformance with the Work Order and Contract Documents for this project, your
obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date:
Sincerely,
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
By:
Name and Title:
ATTEST:
Name and Title:
5/98 Section00640 Page 1
SECTION 00650
LIEN WAIVER RELEASE
(CONTRACTOR)
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER)
FROM: Hydro Construction Co., Inc. (CONTRACTOR)
WORK ORDER TITLE: DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control
WORK ORDER NUMBER: H-WRF-2007-10
1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage
from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and
performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the
construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above
described project.
2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the
receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR
voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to,
mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices,
equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may
now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or
materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design,
improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against
the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in
the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land
and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project.
3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered
or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or
repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR
or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by
various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants
and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any
and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the
project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project
or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of
the project.
4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender,
if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made
by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants,
agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers,
employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and
costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims.
5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above
constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which
5198 Section 00650 Page 1
this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver
Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if
any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project.
Signed this day of 20
CONTRACTOR
By:
Name and Title:
ATTEST:
Secretary
STATE OF COLORADO )
)ss.
COUNTY OF LARIMER )
by
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of .20
��N
Witness my hand and official seal.
My Commission Expires:
Notary Public
5/98 Section 00650 Page 2
THE CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
AAA
OF FORTco c
v; ;y Darin Atteberry City Manager
• 'N
L
DATE:
ATTEST: ••C�;••••••^A•.
City
FA-1
Attorney
SECTION 00651
LIEN WAIVER RELEASE
(Subcontractor)
TO: Hydro Construction Co., Inc. (CONTRACTOR)
FROM:
(Subcontractor)
WORK ORDER TITLE: DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control
WORK ORDER NUMBER: H-WRF-2007-10
The Subcontractor acknowledges having received payment, except retainage, from the
CONTRACTOR for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by
the Subcontractor for the CONTRACTOR or for anyone in the construction, design,
improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project.
2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt
and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the Subcontractor voluntarily waives all
rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40
U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which
the Subcontractor may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work,
labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design,
improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the
CONTRACTOR or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against the project or against
all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project.
3. The Subcontractor affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or
performed to or forthe construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repairof the
project were furnished, delivered or performed by the Subcontractor or its' agents,
employees, and servants, or by and through the Subcontractor by various sub -
subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms
the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible
future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or against the CONTRACTOR
or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project.
4. The Subcontractor agrees to defend and hold harmless the CONTRACTOR, the lender, if
any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the
Subcontractor's sub -subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants agents or assigns
against the project or against the CONTRACTOR or OWNER, lender or Surety or their
officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and
costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims.
5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and
adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release
pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and
may be relied upon by the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any
labor and material bonds for the project.
5/98 Section 00651 Page 1
Signed this day of
By:
Name and Title:
ATTEST:
Secretary
STATE OF COLORADO )
)ss.
COUNTY OF LARIMER )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
by
Witness my hand and official seal.
My Commission Expires:
Notary Public
row
, Subcontractor
day of 20_,
5/98 Section 00651 Page 2
SECTION 00660
CONSENT OF SURETY
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado
(hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER")
CONTRACTOR: Hydro Construction Co., Inc.
WORK ORDER TITLE: DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor Control
WORK ORDER NUMBER: H-WRF-2007-10
CONTRACT DATE: March 28, 2006
WORK ORDER DATE:March 30,2007
In accordance with the provisions of the Work Order and Contract between the OWNER
and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for the DWRF Preliminary & Solids Odor
Control on bond of (Surety)
hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final
Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its
obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day
of 20_
(Surety Company)
By:
(Name) Attorney -in -Fact
ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact.
5/98 Section 00660 Page 1
SECTION 00670
APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
(Insert State certificate here.)
5/98 Section 00670 Page 1
DR 0172 (12/98)
COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE
DENVER CO 80261
(303)232-2416
CONTRACTOR APPLICATION
FOR
EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
Pursuant to Statute
Section 3926.114(1)(a)(XIX)
No
DO NOT WRITE IN
The exemption certificate for which you are applying must be used only for the purpose of purchasing construction and building
materials for the exempt project described below. This exemption does not include or apply to the purchase or rental of equipment,
supplies, and materials which are purchased, rented, or consumed by the contractor and which do not become part of the structure,
highway, road, street, or other public works owned and used by the exempt organization.
Any unauthorized use of the exemption certificate will result in revocation of your exemption certificate and other penalties provided
by law.
A separate certificate is required for each contract.
Subcontractors will not be issued Certificates of Exemption by the Department of Revenue. It is the responsibility of the prime
contractor to issue certificates to each of the subcontractors. (See reverse side).
FAILURE TO ACCURATELY COMPLETE ALL BOXES WILL CAUSE THE APPLICATION TO BE DENIED.
Registration/Account No. (to be assigned by DOR)
89 -
Period
�� 70_750 999 $0.00
)
address (City, State, Zip):
address:
or corporate name:
Bid amount for your contract:
Fax Number. I Business telephone number: I Colorado withholding tax account number.
EXEMPM- N' INFOWATION sand (22)) ontac� g ror aA,ms of cttIr u bet P"�tss
Name of exempt organization (as shown on contract): I Exempt organization's number.
98 -
Address of exempt organization (City, State, Zip):
Principal contact at exempt organization: Principal contact's telephone number:
Physical location of project site (give actual address when applicable and Cities and/or County (ies) where project is located)
Scheduled Month Day Year Estimated Month Day Year
construction start date: completion date:
I declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree that the statements made in this application are true and
complete to the best of my knowledge.
of owner, partner or
Title of
DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE
Special Notice
Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes in procedure:
The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only prime contrac-
tors will receive a Contractor's Exemption Certificate on exempt projects.
Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor involved in the
project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor's name and address and signing it.
The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all Certificates that the
prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime contractor's place of business for a
minimum of three years and be available for inspection in the event of an audit.
Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any applications
submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For instance, if you were assigned 89-
12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeed-
ing numbers will be issued by the Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in
sequence as this may delay processing of your application.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
These GENERAL CONDITIONS have been developed by using the
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACT prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents
Committee, EJCDC No. 1910-5 (1990 Edition), as a base. Changes to
that document are shown by underlining text that has been added and
striking through text that has been deleted.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph
Number & Title Number Number & Title
1. DEFINITIONS...............................................................
I
1.1
Addenda.....................................................1
1.2
Agreement..................................................1
1.3
Application for Payment ............................1
1.4
Asbestos......................................................1
1.5
Bid..............................................................1
1.6
Bidding Documents....................................1
1.7
Bidding Requirements................................1
1.8
Bonds..........................................................1
1.9
Change Order .............................................
I
1.10
Contract Documents ...................................
I
1.11
Contract Price.............................................1
1.12
Contract Times...........................................1
1.13
CONTRACTOR........................................1
1.14
defective......................................................1
1.15
Drawings.....................................................1
1.16
Effective Date of the Agreement................1
1.17
ENGINEER................................................1
1.18
ENGINEER's Consultant ...........................1
1.19
Field Order.................................................1
1.20
General Requirements................................2
1.21
Hazardous Waste........................................2
1.22.a
Laws and Regulations; Laws or
Regulations..............................................2
1.22.b
Legal Holidays...........................................2
1.23
Liens...........................................................2
1.24
Milestone....................................................2
1.25
Notice of Award.........................................2
1.26
Notice to Proceed.......................................2
1.27
OWNER.....................................................2
1.28
Partial Utilization.......................................2
1.29
PCBs...........................................................2
1.30
Petroleum....................................................2
1.31
Project.........................................................2
1.32.a
Radioactive Material..................................2
1.32.b
Regular Working Hours .............................2
1.33
Resident Project Representative.................2
1.34
Samples......................................................2
1.35
Shop Drawings...........................................2
1.36
Specifications.............................................2
1.37
Subcontractor.............................................2
1.38
SubstantialCompletion ..............................2
1.39
Supplementary Conditions .........................2
1.40
Supplier......................................................2
1.41
Underground Facilities ...........................
2-3
1.42
Unit Price Work.........................................3
1.43
Work...........................................................3
1.44
Work Change Directive ..............................3
1.45
Written Amendment...................................3
Page
Number - \
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS.......................................3
2.1
Delivery of Bonds ..................................
3
2.2
Copies of Documents .............................
3
2.3
Commencement of Contract
Times; Notice to Proceed ...................
3
2.4
Starting the Work ...................................
3
2.5-2.7
Before Starting Construction;
CONTRACTOR's Responsibility
to Report; Preliminary Schedules;
Delivery of Certificates of
Insurance ..........................................
3-4
2.8
Preconstruction Conference...................4
2.9
Initially Acceptable Schedules ..............
4
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE ..................................................
4
3.1-3.2
Intent ......................................................
4
3.3
Reference to Standards and Speci-
fications of Technical Societies;
Reporting and Resolving Dis-
crepancies........................................4-5
3.4
Intent of Certain Terms or
Adjectives ...........................................
5
3.5
Amending Contract Documents ............
5
3.6
Supplementing Contract
Documents ..........................................
5
3.7
Reuse of Documents ..............................5
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;
SUBSURFACE
AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS ................................................
5
4.1
Availability of Lands ..........................5-6
4.2
Subsurface and Physical
Conditions...........................................
6
4.2.1
Reports and Drawings ...........................
6
4.2.2
Limited Reliance by CONTRAC-
TOR Authorized; Technical
Data.....................................................
6
4.2.3
Notice of Differing Subsurface
or Physical Conditions ........................
6
4.2.4
ENGINEER's Review ............................
6
4.2.5
Possible Contract Documents
Change................................................
6
4.2.6
Possible Price and Times
Adjustments.....................................6-7
4.3
Physical Conditions --Underground
Facilities..............................................
7
4.3.1
Shown or Indicated ................................
7
4.3.2
Not Shown or Indicated .........................
7
4.4
Reference Points....................................7
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9199)
Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page
Number & Title Number Number & Title Number
4.5 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum,
Hazardous Waste or
Radioactive Material ......................... 7-8
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE.........................................8
5.1-5.2
Performance, Payment and Other
Bonds.......................................................8
5.3
Licensed Sureties and Insurers;
Certificates of Insurance ..........................8
5.4
CONTRACTORSs Liability
Insurance ..................................................
9
5.5
OWNER' Liability Insurance....................9
5.6
Property Insurance... .............................
9-10
5.7
Boiler and Machinery or Addi-
tional Property Insurance .......................10
5.8
Notice of Cancellation Provision .............10
5.9
CONTRACTORSs Responsibility
for Deductible Amounts ........................10
5.10
Other Special Insurance ...........................10
5.11
Waiver of Rights......................................11
5.12-5.13
Receipt and Application of
Insurance Proceeds ..........................
10-11
5.14
Acceptance of Bonds and Insur-
ance; Option to Replace .........................11
5.15
Partial Utilization --Property
Insurance ................................................
I I
6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................11
6.1-6.2
Supervision and Superintendence ............
11
6.3-6.5
Labor, Materials and Equipment........
11-12
6.6
Progress Schedule....................................12
6.7
Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items;
CONTRACTOR's Expense;
Substitute Construction
Methods or Procedures;
ENGINEER's Evaluation ................
12-13
6.8-6.11
Concerning Subcontractors,
Suppliers and Others;
Waiver of Rights..............................13-14
6.12
Patent Fees and Royalties.........................14
6.13
Permits......................................................14
6.14
Laws and Regulations..............................14
6.15
Taxes..................................................14-15
6.16
Use of Premises........................................15
6.17
Site Cleanliness........................................15
6.18
Safe Structural Loading ............................15
6.19
Record Documents...................................15
6.20
Safety and Protection .........................
15-16
6.21
Safety Representative...............................16
6.22
Hazard Communication Programs ...........
16
6.23
Emergencies.............................................16
6.24
Shop Drawings and Samples....................16
6.25
Submittal Proceedures; CON-
TRACTOR's Review Prior
to Shop Drawing or Sample
Submittal ...........................................
16
6.26
Shop Drawing & Sample Submit-
tals Review by ENGINEER ........16-17
6.27
Responsibility for Variations
From Contract Documents ...............17
6.28
Related Work Performed Prior
to ENGINEER's Review and
Approval of Required
Submittals .........................................
17
6.29
Continuing the Work ...........................17
6.30
CONTRACTORSs General
Warranty and Guarantee ...................
17
6.31-6.33
Indemnification...............................17-18
6.34
Survival of Obligations ........................18
7. OTHER WORK..........................................................18
7.1-7.3
Related Work at Site ............................
18
7.4
Coordination........................................18
8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ..............................
18
8.1
Communications to CON-
TRACTOR.......................................18
8.2
Replacement of ENGINEER...............18
8.3
Furnish Data and Pay Promptly
When Due.........................................18
8.4
Lands and Easements; Reports
and Tests......................................18-19
8.5
Insurance..............................................19
8.6
Change Orders.....................................19
8.7
Inspections, Tests and
Approvals..........................................19
8.8
Stop or Suspend Work;
Terminate CONTRACTOR'S
Services.............................................19
8.9
Limitations on OWNER'S
Responsibilities .................................
19
8.10
Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum,
Hazardous Waste or
Radioactive Material ........................
19
8.11
Evidence of Financial
Arrangements....................................19
9. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION.....................................................19
9.1
OWNERSs Representative ...................19
9.2
Visits to Site .........................................
19
9.3
Project Representative ....................19-21
9.4
Clarifications and Interpre-
tations................................................
21
9.5
Authorized Variations in Work ...........
21
IM
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page
Number & Title Number Number & Title Number
9.6
Rejecting Defective Work ........................21
9.7-9.9
Shop Drawings, Change Orders
andPayments............................................21
9.10
Determinations for Unit Prices...........
21-22
9.11-9.12
Decisions on Disputes; ENGI-
NEER as Initial Interpreter ....................22
9.13
Limitations on ENGINEER's
Authority and Responsibilities ........
22-23
CHANGES IN
THE WORK................................................23
10.1
OWNER's Ordered Change .....................23
10.2
Claim for Adjustment...............................23
10.3
Work Not Required by Contract
Documents.............................................23
10.4
Change Orders..........................................23
10.5
Notification of Surety...............................23
CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE....................................23
11.1-11.3
Contract Price; Claim for
Adjustment; Value of
theWork..........................................23-24
11.4
Cost of the Work................................24-25
11.5
Exclusions to Cost of the Work ...............25
11.6
CONTRACTOR's Fee .............................25
11.7
Cost Records ......................................
25-26
11.8
Cash Allowances ......................................26
11.9
Unit Price Work.......................................26
CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES...................................26
12.1
Claim for Adjustment...............................26
12.2
Time of the Essence.................................26
12.3
Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's
Control.............................................
26-27
12.4
Delays Beyond OWNER's and
CONTRACTOR's Control ....................27
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION,
REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVEWORK...........................................................27
13.1
Notice of Defects......................................27
13.2
Access to the Work..................................27
13.3
Tests and Inspections;
CONTRACTOR's Cooperation.............27
13.4
OWNER's Responsibilities;
Independent Testing Laboratory ...........27
13.5
CONTRACTOR's
Responsibilities......................................27
13.6-13.7
Covering Work Prior to Inspec-
tion, Testing or Approval ......................27
iv
13.8-13.9 Uncovering Work at ENGI-
NEER's Request...........................27-28
13.10
OWNER May Stop the Work .............28
13.11
Correction or Removal of
Defective Work.................................28
13.12
Correction Period .................................
28
13.13
Acceptance of Defective Work ............
28
13.14
OWNER May Correct Defective
Work............................................28-29
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION..........................................................
29
14.1
Schedule of Values ..............................
29
14.2
Application for Progress
Payment............................................
29
14.3
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of
Title...................................................
29
14.4-14.7
Review of Applications for
Progress Payments .......................29-30
14.8-14.9
Substantial Completion ........................
30
14.10
Partial Utilization............................30-31
14.11
Final Inspection ...................................
31
14.12
Final Application for Payment ............
31
14.13-14.14
Final Payment and Acceptance
........... 31
14.15
Waiver of Claims............................31-32
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION........................................................ 32 1
15.1 OWNER May Suspend Work
.............32
15.2-15.4 OWNER May Terminate ....................
32
15.5 CONTRACTOR May Stop
Work or Terminate ......................32-33
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
33
17. MISCELLANEOUS...................................................33
17.1 Giving Notice .......................................
33
17.2 Computation of Times .........................
33
17.3 Notice of Claim ....................................
33
17.4 Cumulative Remedies ..........................33
17.5 Professional Fees and Court
Costs Included ..................................
33
17.6 Applicable State Laws....................33-34
Intentionally left blank ................................................
35
EXHIBIT GC -A: (Optional)
Dispute Resolution Agreement ...........................
GC -Al
16.1-16.6 Arbitration ....................................
GC -Al
16.7 Mediation .....................................
GC -Al
EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Page is too large to OCR.
INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
City of Fort Collins modifications to the General Conditions of the Construction Contract are not shown in this index
Article or Paragraph
Number
Acceptance of --
Bonds and Insurance..................................................5.14
defective Work...................................10.4.1,
13.5, 13.13
final payment ..................................................
9.12, 14. l5
insurance....................................................................5.14
other Work, by CONTRACTOR................................7.3
Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items.............................6.7.1
Work by OWNER ....................................
2.5, 6.30, 6.34
Access to the --
Lands, OWNER and CONTRACTOR
responsibilities.......................................................4.1
site, related Work.........................................................7.2
Work . ..................................................
13.2, 13.14, 14.9
Acts or Omissions--, Acts and Omissions
--
CONTRACTOR ..........................................
6.9.1, 9.13.3
ENGINEER ..................................................
6.20, 9.13.3
OWNER.............................................................
6.20, 8.9
Addenda --definition of (also see
definition of Specifications).............(1.6,
1.10, 6.19), 1.1
Additional Property Insurances...........................................5.7
Adjustments --
Contract Price or Contract
Times..................................1.5,
3.5, 4.1, 4.3.2, 4.5.2,
.....................................4.5.3,
9.4, 9.5, 10.2-10.4,
.................................................11,12,14.8,15.1
progressschedule.........................................................6.6
Agreement --
definition of.................................................................1.2
"All -Risk" Insurance, policy form
....................................5.6.2
Allowances, Cash...............................................................11.8
Amending Contract Documents..........................................3.5
Amendment, Written --
in general .......................1.10, 1.45, 3.5, 5.10, 5.12, 6.6.2
................................. 6.8.2, 6.19,10.1, 10.4,11.2
............................................12.1,
13.12.2, 14.7.2
Appeal, OWNER or CONTRACTOR
intent to .................................
9.10, 9.11, 10.4, 16.2, 16.5
Application for Payment --
definitionof.................................................................1.3
ENGINEER's Responsibility
.......................................9.9
final payment.........................9.13.4,
9.13.5, 14.12-14.15
in general ..................................
2.8, 2.9, 5.6.4, 9.10, 15.5
progress payment ..............................................
14.1-14.7
review of ..........................................................
. 14.4-14.7
Arbitration..............................................................16.1-16.6
Asbestos --
claims pursuant thereto ..................................
4.5.2, 4.5.3
CONTRACTOR authorized to stop Work...............4.5.2
definitionof...................................................................1.4
Article or Paragraph
Number
OWNER responsibility for....................................4.5.1,
8.10
possible price and times change................................4.5.2
Authorized Variations in Work.................3.6,
6.25, 6.27, 9.5
Availability of Lands...................................................4.1,
8.4
Award, Notice of --defined ...............................................
1.25
Before Starting Construction.......................................2.5-2.8
Bid --definition of ................................
1.5 (1.1, 1.10, 2.3, 3.3,
............................... 4.2.6.4, 6.13, 11.4.3, 11.9.1)
Bidding Documents --definition
of............................................................
1.6(6.8.2)
Bidding Requirements --definition
of ..................................................
1.7 (1.1, 4.2.6.2)
Bonds --
acceptanceof..............................................................
5.14
additional bonds..........................................10.5,
11.4.5.9
Cost of the Work.....................................................11.5.4
definitionof..................................................................1.8
delivery of.............................................................2.1,
5.1
final Application for Payment........................14.12-14.14
general ..............................................
1.10, 5.1-5.3, 5.13,
.................
9.13, 10.5, 14.7.6
Performance, Payment and Other
..........................5.1-5.2
Bonds and Insurance --in general ...........................................
5
Builder's risk "all-risk" policy form................................5.6.2
Cancellation Provisions, Insurance...............5.4.11,
5.8, 5.15
Cash Allowances..............................................................11.8
Certificate of Substantial Completion
..............1.38, 6.30.2.3,
...........................................................14.8,
14.10
Certificates of Inspection..........................9.13.4,
13.5, 14.12
Certificates of Insurance .....................2.7,
5.3, 5.4.11, 5.4.13,
... 5.6.5,
5.8, 5.14, 9.13.4, 14.12
Change in Contract Price --
Cash Allowances........................................................11.8
claim for price
adjustment ................. 4.1, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.15, 6.8.2, 9.4
......................... 9.5, 9.11,
10.2, 10.5, 11.2, 13.9,
............................. 13.13,
13.14, 14.7, 15.1, 15.5
CONTRACTOR's fee ................................................
11.6
Cost of the Work
general.........................................................11.4-11.7
Exclusionsto.......................................................11.5
CostRecords..............................................................11.7
in general ................... 1.19, 1.44,
9.11, 10.4.2, 10.4.3, 11
Lump Sum Pricing..................................................11.3.2
Notification of Surety ............................................
10.5
Scope of..............................................................10.3-10.4
Testing and Inspection,
Uncovering the Work ..........................................
13.9
Unit Price Work..................................................11.9
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Article or Paragraph
Number
Valueof Work...........................................................11.3
Change in Contract Times --
Claim for times adjustment ..............
4.1, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.15,
................. 6.8.2, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 10.5, 12.1,
.................... 13.9, 13.13, 13.14,
14.7, 15.1, 15.5
Contractual time limits...............................................12.2
Delays beyond CONTRACTOR's
control..................................................................12.3
Delays beyond OWNER's and
CONTRACTOR's control...................................12.4
Notification of surety .................................................10.5
Scope of change................................................10.3-10.4
Change Orders --
Acceptance of Defective Work................................13.13
Amending Contract Documents..................................3.5
Cash Allowances........................................................11.8
Change of Contract Price..............................................11
Change of Contract Times............................................12
Changes in the Work....................................................10
CONTRACTOR's fee................................................11.6
Cost of the Work...............................................11.4-11.7
CostRecords..............................................................11.7
definitionof..................................................................1.9
emergencies................................................................6.23
ENGINEER's responsibility............
9.8, 10.4, 11.2, 12.1
executionof...............................................................10.4
Indemnifiction.................................6.12,
6.16, 6.31-6.33
Insurance, Bonds and ..............................
5.10, 5.13, 10.5
OWNER may terminate....................................15.2-15.4
OWNER'sResponsibility ..................................8.6,
10.4
Physical Conditions --
Subsurfaceand.......................................................4.2
Underground Facilities--.....................................4.3.2
Record Documents.....................................................6.19
Scope of Change...............................................10.3-10.4
Substitutes......................................................
6.7.3, 6.8.2
Unit Price Work.........................................................11.9
value of Work, covered by........................................11.3
Changesin the Work............................................................10
Notification of surety .................................................10.5
OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's
responsibilities.....................................................10.4
Right to an adjustment...............................................10.2
Scope of change................................................10.3-10.4
Claims --
against CONTRACTOR............................................6.16
against ENGINEER...................................................6.32
against OWNER........................................................6.32
Change of Contract Price ...................................
9.4, 11.2
Change of Contract Times .................................
9.4, 12.1
CONTRACTOR's..................4, 7.1,
9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2,
................................. 11.2,
11.9, 12.1, 13.9, 14.8,
....................................................
15.1, 15.5, 17.3
CONTRACTOR's Fee................................................11.6
vi
CONTRACTOR's liability ................5.4, 6.12, 6.16, 6.31
Cost of the Work...............................................11.4,
11.5
Decisions on Disputes.......................................9.11,
9.12
Dispute Resolution.....................................................16.1
Dispute Resolution Agreement..........................16.1-16.6
ENGINEER as initial interpretor...............................9.11
Lump Sum Pricing..................................................11.3.2
Noticeof.....................................................................17.3
OWNER's......................... 9.4, 9.5, 9.11,
10.2, 11.2, 11.9
.............................12.1,13.9,13.13,13.14,17.3
OWNER's liability .......................................................
5.5
OWNER may refuse to make payment ......................14.7
Professional Fees and Court Costs
Included...............................................................17.5
request for formal decision on ...................................
9.11
Substitute Items......................................................6.7.1.2
Time Extension..........................................................12.1
Time requirements............................................9.11,
12.1
Unit Price Work......................................................11.9.3
Valueof......................................................................11.3
Waiver of --on Final Payment ........................14.14,
14.15
Work Change Directive.............................................10.2
written notice required.............................9.11,
11.2, 12.1
Clarifications and Interpretations ....................3.6.3,
9.4, 9.11
CleanSite......................................................................6.17
Codes of Technical Society, Organization
or Association............................................................
3.3.3
Commencement of Contract Times ...................................
2.3
Communications--
general.......................................................6.2,
6.9.2, 8.1
Hazard Communication Programs .............................
6.22
Completion --
Final Application for Payment.................................14.12
Final Inspection........................................................14.11
Final Payment and Acceptance......................14.13-14.14
Partial Utilization.....................................................14.10
Substantial Completion ............................
1.38, 14.8-14.9
Waiver of Claims.....................................................14.15
Computation of Times........................................17.2.1-17.2.2
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers
andOthers............................................................6.8-6.11
Conferences --
initially acceptable schedules.......................................2.9
preconstruction.............................................................
2.8
Conflict, Error, Ambiguity, Discrepancy --
CONTRACTOR to Report ................................
2.5, 3.3.2
Construction, before starting by
CONTRACTOR....................................................2.5-2.7
Construction Machinery, Equipment, etc ..........................
6.4
Continuing the Work...............................................6.29,
10.4
Contract Documents--
Amending.....................................................................
3.5
Bonds........................................................................5.1
Cash Allowances.......................................................11.8
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Change of Contract Price .............................................. I I
Change of Contract Times............................................12
Changes in the Work........................................10.4-10.5
checkand verify...........................................................2.5
Clarifications and
Interpretations ................................
3.2, 3.6, 9.4, 9.11
definition of...............................................................1.10
ENGINEER as initial interpreter of ..........................9.11
ENGINEER as OWNER's representative ...................9.1
general 3
Insurance......................................................................
5.3
Intent..................................................................
3.1-3.4
minor variations in the Work.......................................3.6
OWNER's responsibility to furnish data .....................8.3
OWNER'S responsibility to make
prompt payment ................................
8.3, 14.4, 14.13
precedence........................................................
3.1, 3.3.3
Record Documents.....................................................6.19
Reference to Standards and Specifications
of Technical Societies............................................3.3
RelatedWork...............................................................7.2
Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies...............2.5, 33
Reuseof.......................................................................3.7
Supplementing.............................................................3.6
Termination of ENGINEER's Employment................9.2
Unit Price Work.........................................................11.9
variations ...................................................
3.6, 6.23, 6.27
Visits to Site, ENGINEER's........................................9.2
Contract Price --
adjustment of.......................3.5, 4.1,
9.4, 10.3, 11.2-11.3
Changeof......................................................................
I I
Decision on Disputes.................................................9.11
definition of...............................................................1.11
Contract Times --
adjustment of .................................. 3.5,
4.1, 9.4, 10.3, 12
Changeof..........................................................12.1-12.4
Commencement of...........................................
............ 2.3
definition of...............................................................1.12
CONTRACTOR --
Acceptance of Insurance............................................5.14
Communications ...............................................
6.2, 6.9.2
Continue Work .................................................
6.29, 10.4
coordination and scheduling.....................................6.9.2
definition of................................................................1.13
Limited Reliance on Technical
Data Authorized..................................................4.2.2
May Stop Work or Terminate...................................15.5
provide site access to others ..............................
7.2, 13.2
Safety and Protection .........................
4.3.1.2, 6.16, 6.18,
..............................................
6.21-623, 7.2, 13.2
Shop Drawing and Sample Review
Prior to Submittal.................................................6.25
Stop Work requirements...........................................4.5.2
CONTRACTOR's—
Article or Paragraph
Number
Compensation.....................................................11.1-11.2
Continuing Obligation..............................................14.15
Defective Work ...................................... 9.6,
13.10-13.14
Duty to correct defective Work ................................
13.11
Duty to Report --
Changes in the Work caused by
Emergency ....................................................
6.23
Defects in Work of Others ....................................
7.3
Differing conditions ...........................................
4.2.3
Discrepancy in Documents .............2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2
Underground Facilities not indicated.................4.3.2
Emergencies...............................................................
6.23
Equipment and Machinery Rental, Cost
of the Work....................................................11.4.5.3
Fee --Cost Plus.................................11.4.5.6,
11.5.1, 11.6
General Warranty and Guarantee ..............................
6.30
Hazard Communication Programs .............................
6.22
Indemnification ............................... 6.12, 6.16,
6.31-6.33
Inspection of the Work ........................................
7.3, 13.4
Labor, Materials and Equipment...........................6.3-6.5
Laws and Regulations, Compliance by...................6.14.1
Liability Insurance.... .......... _ ............ ............
.... _ ...... . 5.4
Notice of Intent to Appeal.................................9.10,
10.4
obligation to perform and complete
theWork..............................................................6.30
Patent Fees and Royalties, paid for by .......................
6.12
Performance and Other Bonds .....................................
5.1
Permits, obtained and paid for by ..............................
6.13
Progress Schedule..................................2.6, 2.8, 2.9, 6.6,
.................................................6.29,
10.4, 15.2.1
Request for formal decision on disputes ....................9.11
Responsibilities—
Changes in the Work...........................................10.1
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers
and Others...............................................6.8-6.11
Continuing the Work..................................6.29,
10.4
CONTRACTOR's expense ................................
6.7.1
CONTRACTOR's General Warranty
and Guarantee ...............................................
6.30
CONTRACTOR's review prior to Shop
Drawing or Sample submittal .......................6.25
Coordination of Work........................................6.9.2
Emergencies........................................................
6.23
ENGINEER's evaluation, Substitutes
or "Or -Equal" Items ....................................
6.7.3
For Acts and Omissions
of Others ................................... 6.9.1-6.9.2, 9.13
for deductible amounts, insurance., .......................
5.9
general.................................................6,
7.2, 7.3, 8.9
Hazardous Communication Programs ................
6.22
Indemnification...........................................6.31-6.33
Labor, Materials and Equipment .....................6.3-6.5
Laws and Regulations .........................................
6.14
Liability Insurance .................................................
5.4
vii
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Article or Paragraph
Number
Notice of variation from Contract
Documents...................................................6.27
Patent Fees and Royalties....................................6.12
Permits.................................................................6.13
Progress Schedule..................................................6.6
Record Documents...............................................6.19
related Work performed prior to
ENGINEERs approval of required
submittals......................................................6.28
safe structural loading..........................................6.18
Safety and Protection .......................... 6.20, 7.2, 13.2
Safety Representative...........................................6.21
Scheduling the Work..........................................6.9.2
Shop Drawings and Samples...............................6.24
Shop Drawings and Samples Review
by ENGINEER.............................................6.26
Site Cleanliness....................................................6.17
Submittal Procedures...........................................6.25
Substitute Construction Methods
and Procedures.............................................6.7.2
Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items .......................6.7.1
Superintendence.....................................................6.2
Supervision............................................................6.1
Survival of Obligations........................................6.34
Taxes....................................................................6.15
Tests and Inspections...........................................13.5
ToReport ...............................................................2.5
Use of Premises............................6.16-6.18, 6.30.2.4
Review Prior to Shop Drawing or
Sample Submittal.................................................6.25
Right to adjustment for changes in the Work ............
10.2
right to claim..................4, 7.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11,
10.2,11.2,
............... 11.9, 12.1, 13.9, 14.8, 15.1,
15.5, 17.3
Safety and Protection........................6.20-6.22, 7.2, 13.2
Safety Representative................................................6.21
Shop Drawings and Samples Submittals ..........
6.24-6.28
Special Consultants.................................................11.4.4
Substitute Construction Methods and Procedures ....... 6.7
Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items,
Expense ...................................................
6.7.1, 6.7.2
Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others .................
6.8-6.11
Supervision and Superintendence ............... 6.1,
6.2, 6.21
Taxes, Payment by.....................................................6.15
Use of Premises ................................................
6.16-6.18
Warranties and guarantees .................................
6.5, 6.30
Warranty of Title.......................................................14.3
Written Notice Required --
CONTRACTOR stop Work or temvnate
...........15.5
Reports of Differing Subsurface
and Physical Conditions...............................4.2.3
Substantial Completion........................................14.8
CONTRACTORS--other........................................................7
Contractual Liability Insurance......................................5.4.10
Contractual Time Limits...................................................12.2
Coordination—
CONTRACTORs responsibility ..............................6.9.2
Copies of Documents.........................................................
2.2
Correction Period...........................................................13.12
Correction, Removal or Acceptance
of Defective Work--
in general ...........................................
10.4.1, 13.10-13.14
Acceptance of Defective Work................................13.13
Correction or Removal of
Defective Work.........................................6.30,
13.11
Correction Period.....................................................13.12
OWNER May Correct Defective Work...................13.14
OWNER May Stop Work........................................13.10
Cost —
of Tests and Inspections.............................................13.4
Records 11.7
Cost of the Work --
Bonds and insurance, additional..........................11.4.5.9
Cash Discounts........................................................11.4.2
CONTRACTORSs Fee...............................................11.6
Employee Expenses.............................................11.4.5.1
Exclusionsto..............................................................11.5
General 11.4-11.5
Home office and overhead expenses
.........................11.5
Losses and damages.............................................11.4.5.6
Materials and equipment.........................................11.4.2
Minor expenses....................................................11.4.5.8
Payroll costs on changes.........................................11.4.1
performed by Subcontractors..................................11.4.3
Records 11.7
Rentals of construction equipment
and machinery ...............................................11.4.5.3
Royalty payments, permits and
license fees....................................................11.4.5.5
Site office and temporary facilities ......................11.4.5.2
Special Consultants, CONTRACTORS .................11.4.4
Supplemental...........................................................11.4.5
Taxes related to the Work....................................11.4.5.4
Tests and Inspection...................................................13.4
Trade Discounts......................................................11.4.2
Utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities ......................11.4.5.7
Work after regular hours.........................................11.4.1
Covering Work.........................................................13.6-13.7
Cumulative Remedies..............................................17.4-17.5
Cutting, fitting and patching ...............................................
7.2
Data, to be furnished by OWNER .....................................
8.3
Day --definition of..........................................................17.2.2
Decisions on Disputes.............................................9.11,
9.12
defective --definition of.....................................................1.14
defective Work --
Acceptance of...............................................10.4.1,
13.13
Correction or Removal of............................10.4.1,
13.11
Correction Period.....................................................13.12
in general..................................................13,
14.7, 14.11
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Observation by ENGINEER.......................................9.2
OWNER May Stop Work.......................................13.10
Prompt Notice of Defects..........................................13.1
Rejecting......................................................................9.6
Uncovering the Work................................................13.8
Definitions............................................................................I
Delays..............................................4.1, 6.29,
12.3-12.4
Delivery of Bonds................................................................2.1
Delivery of certificates of insurance....................................2.7
Determinations for Unit Prices..........................................9.10
Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions --
Noticeof...................................................................4.2.3
ENGINEER's Review...............................................4.2.4
Possible Contract Documents Change ......................4.2.5
Possible Price and Times Adjustments .....................4.2.6
Discrepancies -Reporting
and Resolving ....................................... 2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2
Dispute Resolution--
Agreement.........................................................16.1-16.6
Arbitration.........................................................16.1-16.5
general 16
Mediation...................................................................16.6
Dispute Resolution Agreement.................................16.1-16.6
Disputes, Decisions by ENGINEER........................9.11-9.12
Documents --
Copiesof......................................................................2.2
Record 6.19
Reuseof.......................................................................3.7
Drawings --definition of.....................................................1.15
Easements.........................................................................4.1
Effective date of Agreement -- definition of.....................1.16
Emergencies.......................................................................6.23
ENGINEER —
as initial interpreter on disputes........................9.11-9.12
definition of...............................................................1.17
Limitations on authority and responsibilities
............9.13
Replacement of............................................................8.2
Resident Project Representative..................................9.3
ENGINEER's Consultant -- definition of ..........................1.18
ENGINEER's--
authority and responsibility, limitations on ...............9.13
Authorized Variations in the Work.............................9.5
Change Orders, responsibility for ............. 9.7, 10, 11, 12
Clarifications and Interpretations .....................
3.6.3, 9.4
Decisions on Disputes.......................................9.11-9.12
defective Work, notice of..........................................13.1
Evaluation of Substitute Items..................................6.7.3
Liability............................................................
6.32, 9.12
Notice Work is Acceptable......................................14.13
Observations...................................................
6.30.2, 9.2
OWNER's Representative...........................................9.1
Payments to the CONTRACTOR,
Responsibility for.............................................9.9,
14
Recommendation of Payment .........................
14.4, 14.13
Article or Paragraph
Number
Responsibilities --Limitations on........................9.11-9.13
Review of Reports on Differing Subsurface
and Physical Conditions.....................................4.2.4
Shop Drawings and Samples, review
responsibility .......................................................
6.26
Status During Construction --
authorized variations in the Work .........................9.5
Clarifications and Interpretations ..........................9.4
Decisions on Disputes.................................9.11-9.12
Determinations on Unit Price ..............................
9.10
ENGINEER as Initial Interpreter ................9.11-9.12
ENGINEER's Responsibilities ......................9.1-9.12
Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority
and Responsibilities ......................................
9.13
OWNER's Representative.....................................9.1
Project Representative ...........................................
9.3
Rejecting Defective Work.....................................9.6
Shop Drawings, Change Orders
and Payments............................................9.7-9.9
Visitsto Site..........................................................
9.2
Unit Price determinations ...........................................
9.10
Visitsto Site.................................................................
9.2
Written consent required .......................................
7.2, 9.1
Equipment, Labor, Materials and.................................6.3-6.5
Equipment rental, Cost of the Work..........................11.4.5.3
Equivalent Materials and Equipment .................................
6.7
error or omissions.............................................................
6.33
Evidence of Financial Arrangements ...............................
8.11
Explorations of physical conditions................................4.2.1
Fee, CONTRACTOR's--Costs Plus.................................11.6
Field Order --
definition of................................................................1.19
issued by ENGINEER........................................3.6.1,
9.5
Final Application for Payment .......................................
14.12
Final Inspection..............................................................
14.11
Final Payment —
and Acceptance..............................................14.13-14.14
Prior to, for cash allowances......................................11.8
General Provisions...................................................17.3-17.4
General Requirements —
definition of................................................................1.20
principal references to .................... 2.6, 6.4,
6.6-6.7, 6.24
Giving Notice...................................................................
17.1
Guarantee of Work --by CONTRACTOR.............6.30,
14.12
Hazard Communication Programs ...................................
6.22
Hazardous Waste --
definition of................................................................1.21
general........................................................................
4.5
OWNER's responsibility for ......................................
8.10
Indemnification ..................................... 6.12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33
Initially Acceptable Schedules ...........................................
2.9
Inspection --
Certificates of......................................9.13.4, 13.5, 14.12
Final....................................................................14.11
Ix
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Article or Paragraph
Number
Special, required by ENGINEER................................9.6
Tests and Approval ....................................
8.7, 13.3-13.4
Insurance --
Acceptance of, by OWNER......................................5.14
Additional, required by changes
in the Work ...................................................
11.4.5.9
Before starting the Work.............................................2.7
Bonds and --in general.....................................................5
Cancellation Provisions...............................................5.8
Certificates of ..........................2.7, 5, 5.3,
5.4.11, 5.4.13,
.............................. 5.6.5, 5.8, 5.14,
9.13.4, 14.12
completed operations..............................................5.4.13
CONTRACTOR's Liability.........................................5.4
CONTRACTOR's objection to coverage..................5.14
Contractual Liability...............................................5.4.10
deductible amounts, CONTRACTOR's
responsibility..........................................................5.9
Final Application for Payment.................................14.12
Licensed Insurers.........................................................5.3
Notice requirements, material changes ..............
5.8, 10.5
Option to Replace......................................................5.14
other special insurances.............................................5.10
OWNER as fiduciary for insureds ....................
5.12-5.13
OWNER's Liability......................................................5.5
OWNER's Responsibility............................................8.5
Partial Utilization, Property Insurance ......................5.15
Property...............................................................
5.6-5.10
Receipt and Application of Insurance
Proceeds......................................................
5.12-5.13
Special Insurance.......................................................5.10
Waiver of Rights........................................................5.11
Intent of Contract Documents .......................................
3.1-3.4
Interpretations and Clarifications .............................
3.6.3, 9.4
Investigations of physical conditions...................................4.2
Labor, Materials and Equipment ..................................
6.3-6.5
Lands --
andEasements..............................................................8.4
Availability of.......................................................4.1,
8.4
Reports and Tests.........................................................8.4
Laws and Regulations --Laws or Regulations--
Bonds..................................................................5.1-5.2
Changes in the Work.................................................10.4
Contract Documents....................................................3.1
CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities ...........................6.14
Correction Period, defective Work ..........................13.12
Cost of the Work, taxes ......................................
11.4.5.4
definition of...............................................................1.22
general 6.14
Indemnification.................................................
6.31-6.33
Insurance......................................................................
5.3
Precedence........................................................
3.1, 3.3.3
Referenceto..............................................................3.3.1
Safety and Protection .......................................
6.20, 13.2
Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others .................
6.8-6.11
x
Tests and Inspections ..........................................
13.5
Use of Premises..........................................................
6.16
Visitsto Site.................................................................9.2
Liability Insurance--
CONTRACTOR's........................................................
5.4
OW NER's.....................................................................
5.5
Licensed Sureties and Insurers ...........................................
5.3
Liens --
Application for Progress Payment.............................14.2
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title .........................14.3
Final Application for Payment.................................14.12
definitionof................................................................1.23
Waiver of Claims.....................................................14.15
Limitations on ENGINEER's authority and
responsibilities............................................................
9.13
Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR
Authorized.................................................................
4.2.2
Maintenance and Operating Manuals --
Final Application for Payment.................................14.12
Manuals (of others)--
Precedence.............................................................
3.3.3.1
Reference to in Contract Documents ........................
3.3.1
Materials and equipment --
furnished by CONTRACTOR .....................................
6.3
not incorporated in Work...........................................14.2
Materials or equipment --equivalent ...................................
6.7
Mediation (Optional)........................................................16.7
Milestones --definition of.................................................1.24
Miscellaneous --
Computation of Times...............................................17.2
Cumulative Remedies................................................17.4
Giving Notice.............................................................17.1
Notice of Claim..........................................................17.3
Professional Fees and Court Costs Included .............
17.5
Multi -prime contracts............................................................
7
Not Shown or Indicated ..................................................
4.3.2
Notice of --
Acceptability of Project...........................................14.13
Award, definition of...................................................1.25
Claim......................................................................17.3
Defects,13.1
Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ...........4.2.3
Giving......................................................................17.1
Tests and Inspections.................................................13.3
Variation, Shop Drawing and Sample .......................
6.27
Notice to Proceed --
definition of................................................................1.26
givingof.......................................................................
2.3
Notification to Surety .......................................................
10.5
Observations, by ENGINEER ..................................
6.30, 9.2
Occupancy of the Work .........................5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10
Omissions or acts by CONTRACTOR .....................6.9,
9.13
Open Peril policy form, Insurance ..................................
5.6.2
Option to Replace..............................................................
5.14
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
"Or Equal" Items.................................................................6.7
Other work 7
Overtime Work --prohibition of...........................................6.3
OWNER --
Acceptance of defective Work.................................13.13
appoint an ENGINEER...............................................8.2
as fiduciary........................................................
5.12-5.13
Availability of Lands, responsibility ...........................4.1
definition of................................................................1.27
data, furnish ..................................................................8.3
May Correct Defective Work...................................13.14
May refuse to make payment.....................................14.7
May Stop the Work..................................................13.10
May Suspend Work,
Terminate .................................. 8.8,
13.10, 15.1-15.4
Payment, make prompt ...........................
8.3, 14.4, 14.13
performance of other work..........................................7.1
permits and licenses, requirements............................6.13
purchased insurance requirements ......................
5.6-5.10
OWNER's--
Acceptance of the Work .....................................
6.30.2.5
Change Orders, obligation to execute ...............
8.6, 10.4
Communications..........................................................8.1
Coordination of the Work............................................7.4
Disputes, request for decision....................................9.11
Inspections, tests and approvals .........................
8.7, 13.4
Liability Insurance.......................................................5.5
Notice of Defects.......................................................13.1
Representative --During Construction,
ENGINEER's Status..............................................9.1
Responsibilities—
Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous
Waste or Radioactive Material
.....................8.10
Change Orders.......................................................8.6
Changes in the Work............................................10.1
communications.....................................................9.1
CONTRACTOR's responsibilities.
........................ 8.9
evidence of financial arrangements
.....................8.11
inspections, tests and approvals.............................8.7
insurance................................................................8.5
lands and easements...............................................8.4
prompt payment by................................................8.3
replacement of ENGINEER..................................8.2
reports and tests......................................................8.4
stop or suspend Work .......................
8.8, 13.10, 15.1
terminate CONTRACTOR's
services .................................................. 8.8, 15.2
separate representative at site......................................9.3
testing, independent..................................................13.4
use or occupancy
of the Work...............................5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10
written consent or approval
required ................................................. 9.1, 6.3, 11.4
Article or Paragraph
Number
written notice required................................7.1,
9.4, 9.11,
...........................................11.2,
11.9, 14.7, 15.4
PCBs --
definition of................................................................1.29
general........................................................................
4.5
OWNER's responsibility for......................................8.10
Partial Utilization --
definition of................................................................1.28
general 6.30.2.4, 14.10
Property Insurance.....................................................
5.15
Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................
6.12
Payment Bonds.............................................................5.1-5.2
Payments, Recommendation of ....................
14.4-14.7, 14.13
Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion --
Application for Progress Payments ............................
14.2
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title
.........................14.3
Final Application for Payment.................................14.12
Final Inspection........................................................14.11
Final Payment and Acceptance......................14.13-14.14
general..................................................................8.3,
14
Partial Utilization.....................................................
14.10
Retainage....................................................................
14.2
Review of Applications for
Progress Payments.......................................14.4-14.7
prompt payment...........................................................
8.3
Schedule of Values..... ... ____ ...... _ ......
___ ..... _ ...... 14.1
Substantial Completion......................................14.8-14.9
Waiver of Claims.....................................................14.15
when payments due.........................................14.4,
14.13
withholding payment..................................................14.7
Performance Bonds......................................................5.1-5.2
Permits 6.13
Petroleum --
definition of................................................................1.30
general........................................................................
4.5
OWNER's responsibility for......................................8.10
Physical Conditions —
Drawings of, in or relating to .................................
4.2.1.2
ENGINEER's review ................................................
4.2.4
existing structures......................................................4.2.2
general4.2.1.2..................................................................
Notice of Differing Subsurface or .............................
4.2.3
Possible Contract Documents Change ......................4.2.5
Possible Price and Times Adjustments .....................4.2.6
Reports and Drawings ...............................................
4.2.1
Subsurface and.............................................................
4.2
Subsurface Conditions...........................................4.2.1.1
Technical Data, Limited Reliance by
CONTRACTOR Authorized.............................4.2.2
Underground Facilities--
general...................................................................
4.3
Not Shown or Indicated .....................................
4.3.2
Protection of.................................................4.3,
6.20
Xi
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Article or Paragraph
Number
Shownor Indicated...........................................................4.3.1
TechnicalData..........................................................4.2.2
Preconstruction Conference.................................................2.8
Preliminary Matters................................................................2
Preliminary Schedules.........................................................2.6
Premises, Use of .......................................................
6.16-6.18
Price, Change of Contract .....................................................
I I
Price, Contract --definition of.............................................1.11
Progress Payment, Applications for..................................14.2
Progress Payment--retainage.............................................14.2
Progress schedule, CONTRACTOR'S .................
2.6, 2.8, 2.9,
......................................... 6.6, 6.29, 10.4, 15.2.1
Project --definition of.........................................................1.31
Project Representative—
ENGINEER's Status During Construction ..................9.3
Project Representative, Resident --definition of................1.33
prompt payment by OWNER..............................................8.3
Property Insurance--
Additional....................................................................
5.7
general 5.6-5.10
Partial Utilization ........................................
5.15, 14.10.2
receipt and application of proceeds ..................
5.12-5.13
Protection, Safety and......................................6.20-6.21,
13.2
Punchlist.....................................................................14.11
Radioactive Material—
defintionof................................................................1.32
general 4.5
OWNER's responsibility for......................................8.10
Recommendation of Payment ....................... 14.4, 14.5, 14.13
Record Documents ................................................
6.19, 14.12
Records, procedures for maintaining...................................2.8
ReferencePoints..................................................................4.4
Reference to Standards and Specifications
of Technical Societies..................................................3.3
Regulations, Laws and(or)................................................6.14
Rejecting Defective Work....................................................9.6
Related Work --
atSite..................................................................7.1-7.3
Performed prior to Shop Drawings
and Samples submittals review............................6.28
Remedies, cumulative ..............................................
17.4, 17.5
Removal or Correction of Defective Work .....................13.11
rental agreements, OWNER approval required
......... 11.4.5.3
replacement of ENGINEER, by OWNER ..........................8.2
Reporting and Resolving
Discrepancies ........................................ 2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2
Reports --
andDrawings............................................................4.2.1
and Tests, OWNER's responsibility ............................8.4
Resident and Project Representative—
definition of................................................................1.33
provisionfor.........................................................................9.3
xii
Resident Superintendent, CONTRACTOR's...................... 6.2
Responsibilities—
CONTRACTOR's-in general..........................................6
ENGINEER's-in general .................................................
9
Limitations on ......................................................
9.13
OWNER's-in general.......................................................
8
Retainage......................................................................14.2
Reuse of Documents..........................................................
3.7
Review by CONTRACTOR: Shop Drawings
and Samples Prior to Submittal ..................................
6.25
Review of Applications for
Progress Payments.............................................14.4-14.7
Right to an adjustment......................................................10.2
Rightsof Way.....................................................................4.1
Royalties, Patent Fees and ................................................
6.12
Safe Structural Loading ....................................................
6.18
Safety --
and Protection........................................4.3.2,
6.16, 6.18,
.............................................
6.20-6.21, 7.2, 13.2
general..............................................................6.20-6.23
Representative, CONTRACTOR's ............................
6.21
Samples --
definitionof................................................................1.34
general..............................................................6.24-6.28
Review by CONTRACTOR ......................................
6.25
Review by ENGINEER....................................6.26,
6.27
relatedWork...............................................................6.28
submittalof .............................................................
6.24.2
submittal procedures ..................................................
6.25
Schedule of progress.....................................2.6,
2.8-2.9, 6.6,
...........................6.29,
10.4, 15.2.1
Schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample
Submittals......................................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 6.24-6.28
Schedule of Values ......................................
2.6, 2.8-2.9, 14.1
Schedules --
Adherenceto...........................................................15.2.1
Adjusting......................................................................
6.6
Change of Contract Times.........................................10.4
Initially Acceptable...............................................2.8,
2.9
Preliminary...................................................................
2.6
Scope of Changes...............................................10.3-10.4
Subsurface Conditions.................................................4.2.1.1
Shop Drawings --
and Samples, general..........................................6.24-6.28
Change Orders & Applications for
Payments, and..................................................9.7-9.9
definition of................................................................1.35
ENGINEER's approval of .........................................
3.6.2
ENGINEER's responsibility
for review.............................................9.7,
6.24-6.28
relatedWork...............................................................6.28
review procedures.......................................2.8,
6.24-6.28
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
submittal required..........................................................6.24.1
Submittal Procedures..................................................6.25
use to approve substitutions.......................................6.7.3
Shown or Indicated..........................................................4.3.1
SiteAccess...............................................................
7.2, 13.2
Site Cleanliness..................................................................6.17
Site, Visits to --
by ENGINEER ..................................................
9.2, 13.2
byothers.....................................................................13.2
"special causes of loss" policy form,
insurance...................................................................5.6.2
definition of...............................................................1.36
Specifications—
definationof...............................................................1.36
of Technical Societies, reference to ..........................3.3.1
precedence................................................................3.3.3
Standards and Specifications
of Technical Societies..................................................3.3
Starting Construction, Before .......................................
2.5-2.8
Starting the Work.................................................................2.4
Stop or Suspend Work --
by CONTRACTOR...................................................15.5
by OWNER .............................................
8.8, 13.10, 15.1
Storage of materials and equipment.............................4.1,
7.2
Structural Loading, Safety.................................................6.18
Subcontractor_
Concerning ..........................................................
6.8-6.11
definition of...............................................................1.37
delays.......................................................................12.3
waiver of rights..........................................................6.11
Subcontractors --in general ..........................................
6.8-6.11
Subcontracts --required provisions...............5.11,
6.11, 11.4.3
Submittals --
Applications for Payment..........................................14.2
Maintenance and Operation Manuals
......................14.12
Procedures..................................................................6.25
Progress Schedules...............................................2.6,
2.9
Samples.............................................................
6.24-6.28
Schedule of Values ............................................
2.6, 14.1
Schedule of Shop Drawings and Samples
Submissions .............................................
2.6, 2.8-2.9
Shop Drawings ..................................................
6.24-6.28
Substantial Completion --
certification of.......................... ..........
6.30.2.3, 14.8-14.9
definition of................................................................1.38
Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures..............6.7.2
Substitutes and "Or Equal" Items........................................6.7
CONTRACTOR's Expense...................................6.7.1.3
ENGINEER's Evaluation..........................................6.7.3
"Or-Equal".............................................................6.7.1.1
Substitute Construction Methods
Article or Paragraph
Number
orProcedures...................................................... 6.7.2
Substitute Items.....................................................6.7.1.2
Subsurface and Physical Conditions --
Drawings of, in or relating to................................4.2.1.2
ENGINEER's Review..............................................4.2.4
general........................................................................
4.2
Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR
Authorized..........................................................
4.2.2
Notice of Differing Subsurface or
Physical Conditions...................................................4.2.3
Physical Conditions................................................4.2.1.2
Possible Contract Documents Change ......................4.2.5
Possible Price and Times Adjustments .....................4.2.6
Reports and Drawings...............................................4.2.1
Subsurface and.............................................................4.2
Subsurface Conditions at the Site..........................4.2.1.1
Technical Data..........................................................4.2.2
Supervision--
CONTRACTOR's responsibility .................................
6.1
OWNER shall not supervise ........................................
8.9
ENGINEER shall not supervise .......................9.2,
9.13.2
Superintendence.................................................................
6.2
Superintendent, CONTRACTOR's resident
......................6.2
Supplemental costs........................................................11.4.5
Supplementary Conditions --
definition of................................................................1.39
principal references to........................1.10,
1.18, 2.2, 2.7,
.............................4.2, 4.3, 5.1,
5.3, 5.4, 5.6-5.9,
..................... 5.11, 6.8, 6.13, 7.4,
8,11, 9.3, 9. 10
Supplementing Contract Documents .................................
3.6
Supplier --
definition of................................................................1.40
principal references to ................. 3.7, 6.5,
6.8-6.11, 6.20,
..................................................6.24,
9.13, 14.12
Waiver of Rights........................................................
6.11
Surety --
consent to final payment...............................14.12,
14.14
ENGINEER has no duty to ........................................
9.13
Notification of..........................................10.1,
10.5, 15.2
qualification of ..................................... ..................
5.1-5.3
Survival of Obligations....................................................
6.34
Suspend Work, OWNER May ..............................
13.10,15.1
Suspension of Work and Termination-- ..............................
15
CONTRACTOR May Stop Work
orTerminate........................................................15.5
OWNER May Suspend Work....................................15.1
OWNER May Terminate...................................15.2-15.4
Taxes --Payment by CONTRACTOR ..............................
6.15
Technical Data --
Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR ......................4.2.2
Possible Price and Times Adjustments .....................4.2.6
Reports of Differing Subsurface and
Physical Conditions............................................4.2.3
Temporary construction facilities ......................................
4.1
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Article or Paragraph
Number
Article or Paragraph
Number
Termination --
by CONTRACTOR....................................................15.5
by OWNER ................................................
8.8, 15.1-15.4
of ENGINEERS employment......................................8.2
Suspension of Work-in general.....................................15
Terms and Adjectives........................................................3.4
Tests and Inspections --
Access to the Work, by others...................................13.2
CONTRACTORs responsibilities............................13.5
cost of 13.4
covering Work prior to.....................................13.6-13.7
Laws and Regulations(or).........................................13.5
Noticeof Defects.......................................................13.1
OWNER May Stop Work.......................................13.10
OWNERS independent testing..................................13.4
special, required by ENGINEER.................................9.6
timely notice required................................................13.4
Uncovering the Work, at ENGINEER's
request.........................................................13.8-13.9
Times--
Adjusting......................................................................6.6
Change of Contract.......................................................12
Computation of..........................................................17.2
Contract Times --definition of....................................1.12
day 17.2.2
Milestones.....................................................................12
Requirements--
appeals...........................................................
9.10, 16
clarifications,
claims and disputes .......................
9.11, 11.2, 12
Commencement of Contract Times .......................2.3
Preconstruction Conference...................................2.8
schedules .................................................
2.6, 2.9, 6.6
Starting the Work...................................................2.4
Title, Warranty of..............................................................14.3
Uncovering Work.....................................................13.8-13.9
Underground Facilities, Physical Conditions—
definitionof...............................................................1.41
Not Shown or Indicated............................................4.3.2
protection of .......................................................
4.3, 6.20
Shown or Indicated...................................................4.3.1
Unit Price Work--
claims....................................................................11.9.3
definitionof................................................................1.42
general 11.9, 14.1, 14.5
Unit Prices --
general 11.3.1
Determination for.......................................................9.10
Use of Premises ........................................ 6.16,
6.18, 6.30.2.4
Utility owners.....................................6.13, 6.20, 7.1-7.3, 13.2
Utilization, Partial ..........................1.28, 5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10
Value of the Work.............................................................11.3
Values, Schedule of......................................2.6,
2.8-2.9, 14.1
Variations in Work --Minor
Authorized ................................................
6.25, 6.27, 9.5
xiv
Visits to Site --by ENGINEER............................................9.2
Waiver of Claims --on Final Payment.............................14.15
Waiver of Rights by insured parties .........................5.11,
6.11
Warranty and Guarantee, General --by
CONTRACTOR........................................................
6.30
Warranty of Title, CONTRACTOR's..............................14.3
Work --
Accessto....................................................................13.2
byothers..........................................................................
7
Changesin the...............................................................
10
Continuingthe............................................................
6.29
CONTRACTOR May Stop Work
orTerminate........................................................15.5
Coordination of............................................................
7.4
Costof the..........................................................11.4-11.5
definitionof................................................................1.43
neglected by CONTRACTOR.................................13.14
otherWork......................................................................
7
OWNER May Stop Work........................................13.10
OWNER May Suspend Work .........................13.10,
15.1
Related, Work at Site.............................................7.1-7.3
Startingthe...................................................................
2.4
Stopping by CONTRACTOR....................................15.5
Stopping by OWNER........................................15.1-15.4
Variation and deviation authorized,
minor..................3.6
Work Change Directive --
claims pursuant to .......................................................
10.2
definition of................................................................1.44
principal references to .............................
3.5.3, 10.1-10.2
Written Amendment --
definitionof................................................................1.45
principal references to.....................1.10,
3.5, 5.10,15.12,
.............................. 6.6.2, 6.8.2,
6.19, 10.1, 10.4,
....... ....11.2,12.1,13.12.2,14.7.2
Written Clarifications and
Interpretations ...........................................
3.6.3, 9.4, 9.11
Written Notice Required --
by CONTRACTOR...................................7.1,
9.10-9.11,
...................................................
10.4, 11.2, 12.1
by OWNER..........................9.10-9.11, 10.4, 11.2, 13.14
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Page is too large to OCR.
(This page left blank intentionally)
xv EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
No Text
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other
Contract Documents the following terms have the
meanings indicated which are applicable to both the
singular and plural thereof:
1.1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued
prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or
change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract
Documents.
1.2. Agreement --The written contract between OWNER
and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement
and made a part thereof as provided therein.
1.3. Application for Payment --The form accepted by
ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in
requesting progress or final payments and which is to be
accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents.
1.4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one
percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers
into the air above current action levels established by the
United States Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
1.5, Bid --The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted
on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work
to be performed.
1.6. Bidding Documents --The advertisement or
invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and
the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda
issued prior to receipt of Bids).
1.7. Bidding Requirements --The advertisement or
invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, and the Bid form.
1.8. Bonds --Performance and Payment bonds and other
instruments of security.
1.9. Change Order --A document recommended by
ENGINEER, which is signed by CONTRACTOR and
OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in
the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
1.10. Contract Documents --The Agreement, Addenda
(which pertain to the Contract Documents),
CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation
accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation
submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as
an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the
Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary
Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9199)
same are more specifically identified in the Agreement,
together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders,
Work Change Directives, Field Orders and ENGINEER's
written interpretations and clarifications issued pursuant to
paragraphs 3.5, 3.6.1 and 3.6.3 on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement. Shop Drawing submittals
approved pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27 and the
reports and drawings referred to in paragraphs 4.2.1 and
4.2.2 are not Contract Documents.
1.11. Contract Price --The moneys payable by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in
the Agreement (subject to the provisions of
paragraph 11.9.1 in the case of Unit Price Work).
1.12. Contract Times --The numbers of days or the
dates stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial
Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is
ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's
written recommendation of final payment in accordance
with paragraph 14.13.
1.13. CONTRACTOR --The person, firm or corporation
with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement.
1.14. defective --An adjective which when modifying
the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty
or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract
Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any
inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to
in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to
ENGINEEWs recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed
by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with
paragraph 14.8 or 14.10).
1.15. Drawings --The drawings which show the scope,
extent and character of the Work to be famished and
performed by CONTRACTOR and which have been
prepared or approved by ENGINEER and are referred to
in the Contract Documents. Shop drawings are not
Drawings as so defined.
1.16. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date
indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,
but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which
the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the
two parties to sign and deliver.
1.17. ENGINEER --The person, firm or corporation
named as such in the Agreement.
1.18. ENGINEER's Consultant —A person, firm or
corporation having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish
services as ENGINEER's independent professional
associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who
is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions.
1.19. Field Order --A written order issued by
ENGINEER which orders minor changes in the Work in
accordance with paragraph 9.5 but which does not involve
a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from
time to time.
1.20. General Requirements --Sections of Division I of
the Specifications.
1.21. Hazardous Waste --The term Hazardous Waste shall
have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid
Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended
from time to time.
1.22.a. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations --Any
and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances,
codes and orders of any and all governmental bodies,
agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
1 22 b Legal Holiday --shall be those holidays observed
by the City of Fort Collins.
1.23. Liens --Liens, charges, security interests or
encumbrances upon real property or personal property.
1.24. Milestone --A principal event specified in the
Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion
date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the
Work.
1.25. Notice of Award --A written notice by OWNER to
the apparent successful bidder stating that upon compliance
by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions
precedent enumerated therein, within the time specified,
OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement.
1.26. Notice to Proceed --A written notice given by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER)
fixing the date on which the Contract Times will
commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start
to perform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the
Contract Documents.
1.27. OWNER --The public body or authority,
corporation, association, firm or person with whom
CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for
whom the Work is to be provided.
1.28. Partial Utilization --Use by OWNER of a
substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose
for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work.
1.29. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls.
1.30. Petroleum --Petroleum, including crude oil or any
fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of
temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and
14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil,
petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene
and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Wastes and crude
oils.
1.31. Project --The total construction of which the Work
to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the
whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
1.32.a. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or
byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of
EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
1 32 b Regular Working Hours --Regular workine hours
are defined as 7.00am to 6.00nm unless otherwise
snecified in the General Requirements.
1.33. Resident Project Representative --The authorized
representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to the
site or any part thereof.
1.34. Samples --Physical examples of materials,
equipment, or workmanship that are representative of
some portion of the Work and which establish the
standards by which such portion of the Work will be
judged.
1.35. Shop Drawings --All drawings, diagrams,
illustrations, schedules and other data or information
which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for
CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
1.36. Specifications --Those portions of the Contract
Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and
workmanship as applied to the Work and certain
administrative details applicable thereto.
1.37. Subcontractor --An individual, firm or corporation
having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any
other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the
Work at the site.
1.38. Substantial Completion --The Work (or a
specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where,
in the opinion of ENGINEER as evidenced by
ENGINEER's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with
the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified
part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is
intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the
Work is complete and ready for final payment as
evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of
final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13. The
terms "substantially complete" and "substantially
completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to
Substantial Completion thereof.
1.39. Supplementary Conditions --The part of the
Contract Documents which amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
1.40. Supplier --A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier,
distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct contract
with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to
furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the
Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor.
1.41. Underground Facilities --All pipelines, conduits,
ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or
other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements
containing such facilities which have been installed
underground to furnish any of the following services or
materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum
products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other
control systems or water.
1.42. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis
of unit prices.
1.43. Work --The entire completed construction or the
various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be
furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes
and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and
furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into
the construction, and performing or furnishing services and
furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract
Documents.
1.44. Work Change Directive --A written directive to
CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of
the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended
by ENGINEER, ordering an addition, deletion or revision
in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen
physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed as provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to
emergencies under paragraph6.23. A Work Change
Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract
Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the
change directed or documented by a Work Change
Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its
effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times as
provided in paragraph 10.2.
1.45. Written Amendment --A written amendment of the
Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengineering
or nontechnical rather than strictly construction -related
aspects of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS
Delivery of Bonds.
2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed
Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also
deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may
be required to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1.
Copies of Documents.
2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten
copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary
Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably
necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies
will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed:
2.3. The Contract Times will commence to run on the
thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or,
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the
Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at
any time within thirty days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. in no event will the Gent_ et Times
eeatfRenee to Fan Wei: than the sixtieth day aftef the -day
of Bid epening r the thi ffieth day eAe.. the Eff etiye Tlet..
e fthe AgFeeme..te whieheyer date :s eaflier.
Starting the Work:
2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work
on the date when the Contract Times commence to run,
but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on
which the Contract Times commence to run.
Before Starting Construction:
2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work,
CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures shown thereon and all applicable field
measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in
writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and
shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from
ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected
thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to
OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict,
error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract
Documents, unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably
should have known thereof.
2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ENGINEER for review:
2.6.1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating
the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and
completing the various stages of the Work, including
any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents;
2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and
Sample submittals which will list each required
submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing and
processing such submittal;
2.6.2.1. In no case will a schedule be
acceptable which allows less than 21 calendar
days for each review by Engineer.
2.6.3. A preliminary schedule of values for all of
the Work which will include quantities and prices of
items aggregating the Contract Price and will
subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient
detail to serve as the basis for progress payments
during construction. Such prices will include an
appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable
to each item of Work.
2.7. Before any Work at the site is started,
CONTRACTOR and shall each deliver to the
etheF OWNER, with copies to
idepAified in Supplementai-y Conditions ENGINEER,
certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance
feasefmbl)' request requested by OWNER) which
CONTRACTOR is required
to purchase and maintain in accordance with
paragraphs 5.4, ` .7.
Preconstruction Conference:
2.8. Within twenty days after the Contract Times start to
run, but before any Work at the site is started, a conference
attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as
appropriate will be held to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work and to
discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6,
procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other
submittals processing Applications for Payment and
maintaining required records.
Initially Acceptable Schedules:
2.9. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, at least ten days befefe stibmission of fiFst
before my work at the site begins,
a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER
and others as eggrepFiete designated by OWNER, will be
held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided
below the schedules submitted in accordance with
paragraph 2.6. and Division 1 - General Requirements.
CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make
corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit
the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to
CONTRACTOR until the schedules are submitted to and
acceptable to ENGINEER as provided below. The
progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER as
providing an orderly progression of the Work to
completion within any specified Milestones and the
Contract Times, but such acceptance will neither impose on
ENGINEER responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling
or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve
CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOWs full
responsibility therefor. CONTRACTOR's schedule of
Shop Drawing and Sample submissions will be acceptable
to ENGINEER as providing a workable arrangement for
reviewing and processing the required submittals
CONTRACTOR's schedule of values will be acceptable to
ENGINEER as to form and substance.
ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE
Intent:
3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire
agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR
concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are
complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if
called for by all. The Contract Documents will be
construed in accordance with the law of the place of the
Project.
3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof)
to be constructed in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment that may
reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or
from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to
produce the intended result will be famished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When
words or phrases which have a well-known technical or
construction industry or trade meaning are used to
describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or
phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that
meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in
paragraph 9.4.
33. Reference to Standards and Specifications of
Technical Societies, Reporting and Resolving
Discrepancies:
3.3.1. Reference to standards, specifications,
manuals or codes of any technical society, organization
or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any
governmental authority, whether such reference be
specific or by implication, shall mean the latest
standard, specification, manual, code or Laws or
Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or,
on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were
no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically
stated in the Contract Documents.
3.3.2. If, during the performance of the Work,
CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error,
ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract
Documents or between the Contract Documents and
any provision of any such Law or Regulation
applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any
instruction of any Supplier referred to in paragraph 6.5,
CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGINEER in
writing at once, and, CONTRACTOR shall not
proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an
emergency as authorized by paragraph 6.23) until an
amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents
has been issued by one of the methods indicated in
paragraph 3.5 or 3.6; provided, however, that
CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or
ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict,
error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have
known thereof.
3.3.3. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the
Contract Documents or as may be provided by
amendment or supplement thereto issued by one of the
methods indicated in paragraph 3.5 or 3.6, the
provisions of the Contract Documents shall take
precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity
or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract
Documents and:
3.3.3.1. the provisions of any such standard,
specification, manual, code or instruction (whether
or not specifically incorporated by reference in the
Contract Documents); or
�1
1
3.3.3.2. the provisions of any such Laws or
Regulations applicable to the performance of the
Work (unless such an interpretation of the
provisions of the Contract Documents would result
in violation of such Law or Regulation).
own risk.
No provision of any such standard, specification, manual,
code or instruction shall be effective to change the duties
and responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR or
ENGINEER, or any of their subcontractors, consultants,
agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to OWNER,
ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents or
employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or
authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the
provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the
Contract Documents.
3.4. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as
ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as
approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the
adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper"
or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are
used to describe a requirement, direction, review or
judgment of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that
such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be
solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for
compliance with the requirements of and information in the
Contract Documents and conformance with the design
concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there
is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of
any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to
ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
famishing or performance of the Work or any duty or
authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the
provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the
Contract Documents.
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents:
3.5. The Contract Documents may be amended to
provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work
or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or
more of the following ways:
3.5.1. a formal Written Amendment,
3.5.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4),
or
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS I910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
3.5.3. a Work Change Directive (pursuant to
paragraph 10.1).
3.6. In addition, the requirements of the Contract
Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations
and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or
more of the following ways:
3.6.1. A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5),
3.6.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or
3.6.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or
clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4).
Reuse of Documents:
3.7. CONTRACTOR, and any Subcontractor or
Supplier or other person or organization performing or
furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect
contract with OWNER (i) shall not have or acquire any
title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings,
Specifications or other documents (or copies of any
thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or
ENGINEER's Consultant, and (ii) shall not reuse any of
such Drawings, Specifications, other documents or copies
on extensions of the Project or any other project without
written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific
written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER.
ARTICLE 4—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;
SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
Availability of Lands:
4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract
Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be
performed, rights -of -way and easements for access
thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the
use of CONTRACTOR.
of of filing a fneehwie's lien against stieh lands in
OWNER shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions
not of general application but specifically related to use of
lands so furnished with which CONTRACTOR will have
to comply in performing the Work. Easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If
CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on
entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustments
in the Contract Price or the Contract Times as a result of
any delay in OWNER's furnishing these lands, rights -of -
way or easements, CONTRACTOR may make a claim
therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and
access thereto that may be required for temporary
construction facilities or storage of materials and
equipment.
4.2. Subsurface and Physical Conditions:
4.2.1. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to
the Supplementary Conditions for identification of:
4.2.1.1. Subsurface Conditions: Those reports of
explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the site that have been utilized by
ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents;
and
4.2.1.2. Physical Conditions: Those drawings of
physical conditions in or relating to existing surface
or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site
(except Underground Facilities) that have been
utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract
Documents.
4.2.2. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized,,
Technical Data: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the
general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such
reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not
Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in
the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on
such "technical data", CONTRACTOR may not rely upon
or make any claim against OWNER, ENGINEER or any of
ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to:
4.2.2.1. the completeness of such reports and
drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes,
including, but not limited to, any aspects of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction to be employed by
CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or
4.2.2.2. other data, interpretations, opinions
and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings, or
4.2.2.3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of
or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or
any such data, interpretations, opinions or
information.
4.2.3. Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical
Conditions: If CONTRACTOR believes that any
subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site
that is uncovered or revealed either:
4.2.3.1. is of such a nature as to establish that
any "technical data" on which CONTRACTOR is
entitled to rely as provided in paragraphs 4.2.1 and
4.2.2 is materially inaccurate, or
4.2.3.2. is of such a nature as to require a
change in the Contract Documents, or
4.2.3.3. differs materially from that shown or
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
indicated in the Contract Documents, or
4.2.3.4. is of an unusual nature, and differs
materially from conditions ordinarily encountered
and generally recognized as inherent in work of —�
the character provided for in the Contract
Documents; then
CONTRACTOR shall, pmw-p4y immediately after
becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing
conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in
connection therewith (except in an emergency as
permitted by paragraph 6.23), notify OWNER and
ENGINEER in writing about such condition.
CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such conditions
or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as
aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.
4.2.4. ENGINEER's Review: ENGINEER will
promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine the
necessity of OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or
tests with respect thereto and advise OWNER in writing
(with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's
findings and conclusions.
4.2.5. Possible Contract Documents Change: If
ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract
Documents is required as a result of a condition that meets
one or more of the categories in paragraph 4.2.3, a Work
Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued as
provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the
consequences of such change.
4.2.6. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: An
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or in the
Contract Times, or both, will be allowed to the extent that
the existence of such uncovered or revealed condition
causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOWs cost
of, or time required for performance of, the Work; subject,
however, to the following:
4.2.6.1. such condition must meet any one or
more of the categories described in
paragraphs 4.2.3.1 through 4.2.3.4,inclusive;
4.2.6.2. a change in the Contract Documents
pursuant to paragraph 4.2.5 will not be an
automatic authorization of nor a condition
precedent to entitlement to any such adjustment;
4.2.6.3. with respect to Work that is paid for
on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of
paragraphs 9.10 and 11.9; and
4.2.6.4. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled
to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Times
if;
4.2.6.4.1. CONTRACTOR knew of
the existence of such conditions at the
time CONTRACTOR made a final
commitment to OWNER in respect of
Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a bid or becoming bound
under a negotiated contract; or
4.2.6.4.2. the existence of such
condition could reasonably have been
discovered or revealed as a result of any
examination, investigation, exploration,
test or study of the site and contiguous
areas required by the Bidding
Requirements or Contract Documents to be
conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior
to CONTRACTOR's making such final
commitment; or
4.2.6.4.3. CONTRACTOR failed to
give the written notice within the time and
as required by paragraph 4.2.3.
If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on
entitlement to or as to the amount or length of any such
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract
Times, a claim may be made therefor as provided in
Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER, ENGINEER and
ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to
CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages
sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any
other project or anticipated project.
4.3. Physical Conditions —Underground Facilities.
4.3.1. Shown or Indicated: The information and data
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with
respect to existing Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the site is based on information and data
furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of
such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is
otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary
Conditions:
4.3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be
responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any
such information or data; and
4.3.1.2. The cost of all of the following will be
included in the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR
shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and
checking all such information and data, (ii) locating
all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents,(iii) coordination of the Work
with the owners of such Underground Facilities
during construction, and (iv) the safety and
protection of all such Underground Facilities as
provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any
damage thereto resulting from the Work.
4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground
Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to
the site which was not shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, gFemptly
immediately after becoming aware thereof and before
further disturbing conditions affected thereby or
performing any Work in connection therewith (except
in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.23),
identify the owner of such Underground Facility and
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and
ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the
Underground Facility and determine the extent, if
any, to which a change is required in the Contract
Documents to reflect and document the consequences
of the existence of the Underground Facility. If
ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract
Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a
Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10
to reflect and document such consequences. During
such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
the safety and protection of such Underground
Facility as provided in paragraph 6.20.
CONTRACTOR shell may be allowed an increase in
the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable
to the existence of any Underground Facility that was
not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could
not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or
to have anticipated. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR
are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or
length of any such adjustment in Contract Price or
Contract Times, CONTRACTOR may make a claim
therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However,
OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's
Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for
any claims, costs, losses or damages incurred or
sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection
with any other project or anticipated project.
Reference Points.
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to
establish reference points for construction which in
ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable
CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the
Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without
the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR
shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point
is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of
necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of
such reference points by professionally qualified
personnel.
4.5. Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or
Radioactive Material:
4.5.1. OWNER shall be responsible for any
Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or
Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site
which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or
Specifications or identified in the Contract
Documents to be within the scope of the Work and
which may present a substantial danger to persons or
property exposed thereto in connection with the Work
at the site. OWNER shall not be responsible for any
such materials brought to the site by
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers or
anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is
responsible.
Y. •
Wei
.'.. �_
•. ._::
:.
:: ::.
1 WIN
., I
..
FJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
ARTICLE 5—BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance, Payment and Other Bonds:
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish Performance and
Payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and
payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the
Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect
at least until one year after the date when final payment
becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or
Regulations or by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds
shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents
except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations and
shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the
current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of
Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in
Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of
Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury
Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be
accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority
to act.
5.2. If the surety on any Bond furnished by
CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes
insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any
state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to
meet the requirements of paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR
shall within ten days thereafter substitute another Bond
and surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER.
5.3. Licensed Sureties and Insurers; Certificates of
Insurance:
5.3.1. All Bonds and insurance required by the
Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained
by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained
from surety or insurance companies that are duly
licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the
Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies
for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety
and insurance companies shall also meet such
additional requirements and qualifications as may be
provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
5.3.2. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER,
with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance
(and other evidence of insurance requested by
OWNER or any other additional insured) which
CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain
in accordance with paragraph 5.4. OWNER
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC.
DW RF Odor Cmtrol
p
Page 1
. . s�
+r ..Y } ,1 i s y>L'l{a i
CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance.
5.4. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such
liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work
being performed and furnished and as will provide
protection from claims set forth below which may arise out
of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance and
furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other
obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to
be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or famish
any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable:
5.4.1. claims under workers' compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts;
5.4.2. claims for damages because of bodily injury,
occupational sickness or disease, or death of
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.4.3. claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
CONTRACTOR's employees;
611 6�!!!�
. ..yyy. _
5.4.5. claims for damages, other than to the Work
itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use
resulting therefrom; and
5.4.6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or property damage arising out of
the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor
vehicle.
The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.4
to be purchased and maintained shall:
5.4.7. with respect to insurance required by
paragraphs 5.4.3 through 5.4.6 inclusive and 5.4.9,
include as additional insureds (subject to any
customary exclusion in respect of professional
liability), OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
Consultants and any other persons or entities identified
in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be
listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for
the respective officers and employees of all such
additional insureds;
5.4.8. include the specific coverages and be written
for not less than the limits of liability provided in the
Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or
Regulations, whichever is greater;
5.4.9. include completed operations insurance;
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
5.4.10. include contractual liability insurance
covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations
under paragraphs 6.12, 6.16 and 6.31 through 6.33;
5.4.11. contain a provision or endorsement that the
coverage afforded will not be cancelled, materially
changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days'
prior written notice has been given to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured
identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom
a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the
certificates of insurance furnished by the
CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.3.2 will so
provide);
5.4.12. remain in effect at least until final payment
and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may
be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work
in accordance with paragraph 13.12;and
5.4.13. with respect to completed operations
insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a
claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two
years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall
furnish OWNER and each other additional insured
identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom
a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence
satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional
insured of continuation of such insurance at final
payment and one year thereafter).
OWNER's Liability Insurance.
5.5. In addition to insurance required to be provided
by CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5.4, OWNER, at
OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at
OWNER's expense OWNER's own liability insurance as
will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from
operations under the Contract Documents.
Property Insurance.
.
..
. -
�.� - -
�. RON
,
watef damage,
and
seeh ether- perils as fflay be
lifnit d to -C_e_- ,l haFg s o f eft4fieer-sand-
anhiteets);j
EWW
• •1� !!T
�-! r, ::
1. 1 • • 1
•'.'1.1 • Yr ••
1.1
NO-- W, W00--,
. .....
Wi;v
1 1.
5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing
and maintaining any property insurance to protect the
interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others in
• •
- -
Pff!!M�—!Lweielz!Yr
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
10 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
-
•
1.
INN
I.
1. 1
• L
1
•
1. I
-
,01
A, I
a
•'1.1
Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance
required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with
OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the
insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of
paragraph 5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate
account any money so received, and shall distribute it in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach. If no other special agreement is reached the
damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so
received applied on account thereof and the Work and the
cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or
Written Amendment.
5.13. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the
parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen days
after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this
power. If such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary
shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with
such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no
such agreement among the parties in interest is reached,
OWNER as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with
the insurers and, if rvqviFed in A94ifig by any paAy if,
Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance, Option to Replace:
5.14. If
OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or
other provisions of the Bends eF insurance required to be
purchased and maintained by the ethOF Paffy
CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 5 on the basis
of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the
OWNER will
notify CONTRACTOR in writing within tart fifteen days
after feeeipt delivery of the certificates fef etheF evideHee
fegvestedj to OWNER as required by paragraph 2.7.
OM4NER and CONTRACTOR shall eaeh previde 'a the
the empense of the p--,
Partial Utilization —Property Insurance:
5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS I910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may
be accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.10;
provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence
before the insurers providing the property insurance have
acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any
changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers
providing the property insurance shall consent by
endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property
insurance shall not be cancelled or permitted to lapse on
account of any such partial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE 6—CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Supervision and Superintendence.
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect and
direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and
expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible
for the negligence of others in the design or specification
of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or
procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in
and expressly required by the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the
completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all
times during its progress a competent resident
superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written
notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under
extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
CONTRACTORS representative at the site and shall have
authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to CONTRACTOR.
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent,
suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and
construct the Work as required by the Contract
Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain
good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise
required for the safety or protection of persons or the
Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and
except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents,
all Work at the site shall be performed during regular
working hours and CONTRACTOR will not permit
overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday,
Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written
consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR shall submit requests to the ENGINEER
no less than 48 hours in advance of any Work to be
performed on Saturday, Sunday, Holidays or outside the
Regular Working Hours.
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General
Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume
full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery,
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water,
sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other
facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
6 4 1 Purchasing Restrictions: CONTRACTOR
must comply with the Citv's purchasing restrictions. A
copy of the resolutions are available for review in the
offices of the Purchasing and Risk Management
Division or the City Clerk's office.
6 4 2 Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins
Resolution 91-121 requires that suppliers and producers
of cement or products containing cement to certify that
the cement was not made in cement kilns that bum
hazardous waste as a fuel.
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good
quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees
specifically called for by the Specifications shall expressly
run to the benefit of OWNER. If required by ENGINEER,
CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence
(including reports of required tests) as to the kind and
quality of materials and equipment. All materials and
equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected,
used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with
instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents.
Progress Schedule:
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress
schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.9 as it
may be adjusted from time to time as provided below:
6.6.1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER
for acceptance (to the extent indicated in
paragraph 2.9) proposed adjustments in the progress
schedule that will not change the Contract Times (or
Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally
to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally
will comply with any provisions of the General
Requirements applicable thereto.
6.6.2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule
that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones)
shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements
of paragraph 12.1. Such adjustments may only be
made by a Change Order or Written Amendment in
accordance with Article 12.
6.7. Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever an item of material or equipment is
specified or described in the Contract Documents by
using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a
particular Supplier, the specification or description is
intended to establish the type, function and quality
required. Unless the specification or description
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
12 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
contains or is followed by words reading that no like,
equivalent or "or -equal" item or no substitution is
permitted, other items of material or equipment or
material or equipment of other Suppliers may be
accepted by ENGINEER under the following
circumstances:
6.7.1.1. "Or -Equal": If in ENGINEER's sole
discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally
equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that
no change in related Work will be required, it may
be considered by ENGINEER as an "or -equal"
item, in which case review and approval of the
proposed item may, in ENGINEER's sole
discretion, be accomplished without compliance
with some or all of the requirements for
acceptance of proposed substitute items.
6.7.1.2. Substitute Items: If in ENGINEER's sole
discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as
an "or -equal" item under subparagraph 6.7.1.1, it
will be considered a proposed substitute item.
CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient
information as provided below to allow
ENGINEER to determine that the item of material
or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to
that named and an acceptable substitute therefor.
The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will
include the following as supplemented in the
General Requirements and as ENGINEER may
decide is appropriate under the circumstances.
Requests for review of proposed substitute items
of material or equipment will not be accepted by
ENGINEER from anyone other than —�
CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR wishes to
furnish or use a substitute item of material or
equipment, CONTRACTOR shall first make
written application to ENGINEER for acceptance
thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will
perform adequately the functions and achieve the
results called for by the general design, be similar
in substance to that specified and be suited to the
same use as that specified. The application will
state the extent, if any, to which the evaluation
and acceptance of the proposed substitute will
prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of
Substantial Completion on time, whether or not
acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work
will require a change in any of the Contract
Documents (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with OWNER for work on the
Project) to adapt the design to the proposed
substitute and whether or not incorporation or use
of the substitute in connection with the Work is
subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
All variations of the proposed substitute from that
specified will be identified in the application and
available maintenance, repair and replacement
service will be indicated. The application will
also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or
credits that will result directly or indirectly from
acceptance of such substitute, including costs of
redesign and claims of other contractors affected
by the resulting change, all of which will be
considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the
proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require
CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about
the proposed substitute.
6.7.1.3. CONTRACTOR's Expense: All data to be
provided by CONTRACTOR in support of any
proposed "or -equal" or substitute item will be at
CONTRACTOR's expense.
6.7.2. Substitute Construction Methods or
Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence or procedure of construction is shown or
indicated in and expressly required by the Contract
Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a
substitute means, method, technique, sequence or
procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to
allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, to
determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to
that expressly called for by the Contract Documents.
The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be
similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.7.1.2.
6.7.3. Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be
allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate
each proposal or submittal made pursuant to
paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2. ENGINEER will be the
sole judge of acceptability. No "or -equal" or
substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without
ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be
evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved
Shop Drawing. OWNER may require
CONTRACTOR to fiunish at CONTRACTOR's
expense a special performance guarantee or other
surety with respect to any "or -equal" or substitute.
ENGINEER will record time required by
ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in
evaluating substitutes proposed or submitted by
CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and
6.7.2 and in making changes in the Contract
Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct
contract with OWNER for work on the Project)
occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER
accepts a substitute item so proposed or submitted by
CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse
OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and
ENGWEER's Consultants for evaluating each such
proposed substitute item.
6_8. Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and
Others:
6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
(including those acceptable to OWNER and
ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2), whether
initially or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or
ENGINEER may have reasonable objection.
CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom
CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edilion)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
6_9.
CONTRACTOR shall perform not less than 20
percent of the Work with its own forces (that is,
without subcontractinp,). The 20 percent requirement
shall be understood to refer to the Work the value of
which totals not less than 20 percent of the Contract
Price.
6.8.2. Biddine
Documents require the identity of certain
Subcontractors, Suppliers or other persons or
organizations (including those who are to furnish the
principal items of materials or equipment) to be
submitted to OWNER in advanee of the speeified
date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for
acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER,—,awl—i€
CONTRACTOR CTO has ....bfnisa a list thef e f in
OWNER's or ENGINEER's acceptance (either in
writing or by failing to make written objection thereto
by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in
the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of
Will
constitute a condition of the Contract requiring the
use of the named subcontractors, suppliers or other
persons or organization on the Work unless prior
written approval is obtained from OWNER and
ENGINEER. No acceptance by OWNER or
ENGINEER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or
other person or organization shall constitute a waiver
of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject
defective Work.
6.9.1. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to
OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions
of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons
and organizations performing or furnishing any of the
Work under a direct or indirect contract with
CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR is
responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and
omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall
create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person or organization any
contractual relationship between OWNER or
ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or
other person or organization, nor shall it create any
obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to
pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any
such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization except as may otherwise be required by
Laws and Regulations. OWNER or ENGINEER may
furnish to anv subcontractor, supplier or other person
or organization evidence of amounts paid to
CONTRACTOR in accordance with
CONTRACTOR'S "Applications for Payment".
13
6.9.2. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible
for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
organizations performing or furnishing any of the
Work under a direct or indirect contract with
CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons and
organizations performing or furnishing any of the
Work to communicate with the ENGINEER through
CONTRACTOR.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any Drawings shall not control
CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among
Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be
performed by any specific trade.
6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a
Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the
Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the
Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
OWNER and ENGINEER.
is %ith a SubeepAmeter er- Supplier- who is listed as a"
GONTRACTOR a i, a 1.....«tmet,._ ,... e«««uer
wai.ves an rights agaiam OWNER, ,
the WOFIE. if
h h pa e
SuWier-, CONTRACTOR will obtain the .
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and
royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work
of any invention, design, process, product or device which
is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
If a particular invention, design, process, product or device
is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the
performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of
OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights
or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or
royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be
disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the
fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,
CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless
OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants
of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs,
losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any
infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the
use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the
incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,
process, product or device not specified in the Contract
Documents.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition)
14 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Permits.
6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all
construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist
CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such
permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all
governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for
the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the
time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the
Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall
pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the
Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility
owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant
investment fees.
6.14. Laws and Regulations:
6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and
comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except
where otherwise expressly required by applicable
Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor
ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring
CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or
Regulations.
6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work
knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary
to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear
all claims, costs,. losses and damages caused by,
arising out of or resulting therefrom; however, it shall
not be CONTRACTOR's primary responsibility to
make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are
in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this
shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of
CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.3.2.
Taxes.
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer,
use and other similar taxes required to be paid by
CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and
Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
6.15. I OWNER is exempt from Colorado State and
local sales and use taxes on materials to be
permanently incorporated into the project. Said taxes
shall not be included in the Contract Price.
the project.
Address:
Colorado Department of Revenue
State Capital Annex
1375 Sherman Street
Denver, Colorado, 80261
Sales and Use Taxes for the State of Colorado
Regional Transportation District (RTD) and certain
Colorado counties are collected by the State of
Colorado and are included in the Certification of
Exemption.
All applicable Sales and Use Taxes (including_State
collected taxes), on any items other than construction
and building materials physically incorporated into the
project are to be paid by CONTRACTOR and are to
be included in anpropriate bid items.
Use of Premises.
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction
equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of workers to the site and land and areas
identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and
other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations,
rights -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not
unreasonably encumber the premises with construction
equipment or other materials or equipment.
CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any
damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or
occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be
made by any such owner or occupant because of the
performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly
settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise
resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution
proceeding or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and
hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
Consultant and anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or
action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or
occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER or any other party
indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based
upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR
shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the
Work. At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR
shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from
and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery and surplus
materials. CONTRACTOR shall leave the site clean and
ready for occupancy by OWNER at Substantial
Completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall restore to
original condition all property not designated for alteration
by the Contract Documents.
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part
of any structure to be loaded in any manner that wilt
endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject
any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or
pressures that will endanger it.
Record Documents.
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at
the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work
Change Directives, Field Orders and written
interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to
paragraph 9.4) in good order and annotated to show all
changes made during construction. These record
documents together with all approved Samples and a
counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be
available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion
of the Work, and prior to release of final payment, these
record documents, Samples and Shop Drawings will be
delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER.
Safety and Protection:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
6.20.1. all persons on the Work site or who may be
affected by the Work;
6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to
be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off
the site; and
6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto,
including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground
Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws
and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for
safety of persons or property or to protect them from
damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all
necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property
and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation
and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or
loss to any property referred to in paragraphs 6.20.2 or
6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or famish any of the
Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or
loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications
or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or
ENGINEER's Consultant or anyone employed by any of
them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in
part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety
and protection of the Work shall continue until such time
as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a
15
notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance
with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with
Substantial Completion).
6.21. Safety Representative.
CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and
experienced safety representative at the site whose duties
and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and
the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and
programs.
Hazard Communication Programs.
6.22. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or
other hazard communication information required to be
made available to or exchanged between or among
employers at the site in accordance with Laws or
Regulations.
Emergencies.
6.23. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of
persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent
thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or
authorization from OWNER or ENGINEER, is obligated to
act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss.
CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written
notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant
changes in the Work or variations from the Contract
Documents have been caused thereby. If ENGINEER
determines that a change in the Contract Documents is
required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in
response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive
or Change Order will be issued to document the
consequences of such action.
6.24. Shop Drawings and Samples.
6.24.1. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings
to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance
with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawings and
Sample submittals (see paragraph 2.9). All submittals
will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in
the number of copies specified in the General
Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings
will be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show ENGINEER the
materials and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to
provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the
information for the limited purposes required by
paragraph 6.26.
6.24.2. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to
ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance
with said accepted schedule of Shop Drawings and
Sample submittals. Each Sample will be identified
clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as
catalog numbers and the use for which intended and
otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable
ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
16 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
purposes required by paragraph 6.26. The numbers
of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in
the Specifications.
6.25. Submittal Procedures.
6.25.1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or
Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and
verified:
6.25.1.1. all field measurements, quantities,
dimensions, specified performance criteria,
installation requirements, materials, catalog
numbers and similar information with respect
thereto,
6.25.1.2. all materials with respect to intended
use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage,
assembly and installation pertaining to the
performance of the Work, and
6.25.1.3. all information relative to
CONTRACTOR's sole responsibilities in respect
of means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction and safety precautions
and programs incident thereto.
CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and
coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other
Shop Drawings and Samples and with the
requirements of the Work and the Contract
Documents.
6.25.2. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific
written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied
CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review
and approval of that submittal.
6.25.3. At the time of each submission,
CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific
written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop
Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice
to be in a written communication separate from the
submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and
Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and
approval of each such variation.
6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve Shop
Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of
Shop Drawings and Sample submittals accepted by
ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.9. ENGINEER's
review and approval will be only to determine if the items
covered by the submittals will, after installation or
incorporation in the Work, conform to the information
given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with
the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents. ENGINEER's review and approval will not
extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction (except where a particular
means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the
Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs
incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate
item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in
which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make
corrections required by ENGINEER, and shall return the
required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and
submit as required new Samples for review and approval.
CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to
revisions other than the corrections called for by
ENGINEER on previous submittals.
6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop
Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR
from responsibility for any variation from the requirements
of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in
writing called ENGINEER's attention to each such
variation at the time of submission as required by
paragraph 6.25.3 and ENGINEER has given written
approval of each such variation by a specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop
Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by
ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility
for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.25.1.
6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by
the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawing
and Sample submissions accepted by ENGINEER as
required by paragraph 2.9, any related Work performed
prior to ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent
submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of
CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or
postponed pending resolution of any disputes or
disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as
OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in
writing.
630. CONTRACTOR's Genera! Warranty and
Guarantee.
6.30.1. CONTRACTOR wan -ants and guarantees to
OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants
that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and will not be defective.
CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder
excludes defects or damage caused by:
6.30.1.1. abuse, modification or improper
maintenance or operation by persons other than
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or Suppliers; or
6.30.1.2. normal wear and tear under normal
usage.
6.30.2. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and
complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following
will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
accordance with the Contract Documents or a release
of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents:
6.30.2.1. observations by ENGINEER;
6.30.2.2. recommendation of any progress or
final payment by ENGINEER;
6.30.2.3. the issuance of a certificate of
Substantial Completion or any payment by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract
Documents;
6.30.2.4. use or occupancy of the Work or any
part thereof by OWNER;
6.30.2.5. any acceptance by OWNER or any
failure to do so;
6.30.2.6. any review and approval of a Shop
Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a
notice of acceptability by ENGINEER pursuant
to paragraph 14.13;
6.30.2.7. any inspection, test or approval by
others; or
6.30.2.8. any correction of defective Work by
OWNER.
Indemnification:
6.31. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold
harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including,
but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court
or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by,
arising out of or resulting from the performance of the
Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage:
(i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or
death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself), including the loss of use
resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part
by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization
directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform
or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any
of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused
in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity
indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed
upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations
regardless of the negligence of any such person or entity.
6.32. In any and all claims against OWNER or
ENGINEER or any of their respective consultants, agents,
officers, directors or employees by any employee (or the
survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by
17
any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.31 shall not
be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or
type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or
for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier or
other person or organization under workers' compensation
acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
6.33. The indemnification obligations of
CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.31 shall not extend to
the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants,
officers, directors, employees or agents caused by the
professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them.
Survival of Obligations.
6.34. All representations, indemnifications, warranties
and guarantees made in, required by or given in accordance
with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing
obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will
survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the
Work and termination or completion of the Agreement.
ARTICLE 7—OTHER WORK
Related Work at Site:
7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the
Project at the site by OWNER's own forces, or let other
direct contracts therefor which shall contain General
Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed
by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be
performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, then:
(i) written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR
prior to starting any such other work and
(ii) CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as
provided in Articles 11 and 12 if CONTRACTOR believes
that such performance will involve additional expense to
CONTRACTOR or requires additional time and the parties
are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof.
7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor
who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility
owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the
additional work with OWNER's employees) proper and
safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the
introduction and storage of materials and equipment and
the execution of such other work and shall properly connect
and coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR
shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that
may be required to make its several parts come together
properly and integrate with such other work.
CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by
cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and
will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of
ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected.
The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under
this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and
other contractors to the extent that there are comparable
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
18 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said
direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners
and other contractors.
7.3. If the proper execution or results of any part of
CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall
inspect such other work and promptly report to
ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies
in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable
for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR's
Work. CONTRACTOR's failure so to report will
constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and
proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work
except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies
in such other work.
Coordination:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the
performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:
7.4.1. the person, firm or corporation who will have
authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified;
7.4.2. the specific matters to be covered by such
authority and responsibility will be itemized; and
7.4.3. the extent of such authority and
responsibilities will be provided.
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
ARTICLE 8—OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.1. Except as otherwise provided in these General
Conditions, OWNER shall issue all communications to
CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER.
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of
ENGINEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer ageixst
Wxhem CONTRACT -OR makes no reasonable ebieefi
whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that
of the former ENGINEER.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of
OWNER under the Contract Documents promptly and
shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly when
they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13.
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands
and easements and providing engineering surveys to
establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1
and 4.4. Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying
and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of
reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site and drawings of physical conditions in existing
HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC.
DWRF Odor Control
z - .i, bs
GMr.J.,Li�ive�'k:•r.S.-wrr'Y.i$AO"wc
Daft & S.P.
020•
Misc Site Demolition
Demo Concrete Sidewalks
198
-
- 303
501
02616•
FA 24"
Trench 5mav & Lay Pipe 8-10'
2,241
-
- 1,893
25
4,160
Trench Box 10' Deep
-
-
- 374
-
374
Utility Bed Passions
39
411
- 53
503
Uglily Cover Peastone
39
411
- 53
-
503
Spoils to Waste
7
_
7
HD PE Pipe 24
1,121
0
- 374
31
1,525
HD PE 90 all 24
70
0
- 10
-
80
0330 2-
Sidewalk
S.O.O. Edys Form c 1
0
- -
0
SKIP & OS SOG Form
-
- -
-
Mash Support - bricks
16
-
-
16
3000 psi Concrete
-
285
- -
-
285
Buggy Place Slab on Grade
-
- -
Finish- Broom
Liquid Curing Compounds
-
-
unassigned
Material Testing -Pipe
300
-
3,110 100
50
3,560
Demo Metal ReXirgs
250
-
_ - 25
-
275
Gravel Area
115
425
- 85
-
625
HDPE Pipe Quote
0
18,838
- -
-
18.838
Weed Barrier - Polyethylene
220
330
77 -
-
627
Steel Edging Ships
59
139
- 33
-
231
Sub - Concrete
-
0
706 0
0
706
FRP Covers
2,160
27,419
- 605
303
30,486
Pipe Support Slip 8'
80
1,843
- 20
5
1,947
Pipe Support Fixed 12'
40
921
- 6
2
969
Pipe Support Fixed 8'
20
461
- 3
1
485
Pipe Support Slip 10'
8o
1,843
- 11
5
1.939
ally laver Damper 12"
20
0
- 5
1
26
_
Bty laver Damper 8'
60
0
- 15
4
79
Exp Joint 12'
26
0
- 5
1
33
Exp Joint 10'
26
0
- 5
1
33
Exp Joint 8'
105
0
- 20
6
130
'EKp Joint Quote (V.E.)'
0
2,009
- 0
-
2,009
*Rberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Pipe (V.E.)'
22,859
-
-
22.859
Fiberglass Pipe Vendor Quote Flerge Pks
0
10,254
- -
10,254
Fiberglass Pipe 12'
701
0
- W
15
776
Fiberglass Pipe 10"
163
0
- 14
4
180
Fiberglass Pipe 8'
937
0
- 72
18
927
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 12"
16
0
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 90 Ells 8"
16
0
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe Tee 12"x12'x8'
16
0
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe Tees 10'x10'xl8'
16
0
5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 12'x10' Reducer
16
0
- 5
1
21
Fiberglass Pipe 10'x8'Reducer
16
0
- 5
1
21
Page 2
9:10 AM
structures at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized
by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents.
8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as
indicated in paragraph 10.4.
8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain
inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in
paragraph 13.4.
8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or
suspend Work, see paragraphs 13.10 and 15.1.
Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right to terminate
services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances.
8.9. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct or have
control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations
applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work.
OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's
failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
..
TOO .9
M-0.14
ARTICLE 9—ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
OWNER's Representative.
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative
during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of
ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and
shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER
and ENGINEER.
Visits to Site.
9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals
appropriate to the various stages of construction as
ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an
experienced and qualified design professional the progress
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
that has been made and the quality of the various aspects
of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on
information obtained during such visits and observations,
ENGINEER will endeavor for the benefit of OWNER to
determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER
will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -
site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward
providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that
the completed Work will conform generally to the
Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on -
site observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER
informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to
guard OWNER against defective Work. ENGINEERS
visits and on -site observations are subject to all the
limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility
set forth in paragraph 9.13, and particularly, but without
limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's on -site
visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work
ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control or have
authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs
incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
furnishing or performance of the Work.
Project Representative.
9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER
will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
ENGINEER in providing more continuous observation of
the Work. The responsibilities and authority and
limitations thereon of any such Resident Project
Representative and assistants will be as provided in
paragraphs 9.3 and 9.13 and in the &appleffwntafy
Conditions of these General Conditions. If OWNER
designates another representative or agent to represent
OWNER at the site who is not ENGINEERSs Consultant,
agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and
limitations thereon of such other person will be as
provided in paragraph 9.3
of these General Conditions. If the ENGINEER furnishes
a Resident Project Representative CUR) or other
assistants, or if the OWNER designates a Representative
or agent, all as provided in paragraph 9.3 of the General
Conditions. these Representatives shall have the authority
and limitations as provided in paragraph 9.13 of the
General Conditions and shall be subject to the following
9.3.2. Duties and Responsibilities. Representative
will:
9.3.2.L Schedules - Review the prowess
19
schedule and other schedules prepared by the
CONTRACTOR and consult with the
ENGINEER concerning acceptability.
9 3 2 2 Conferences and Meeting - Attend
meeting with the CONTRACTOR such as
preconstruction conferences, profess meetings
and other iob conferences and prepare and
circulate copies of minutes of meetings.
9.3.2.3. Liaison
9.3.2.3.1. Serve as ENGINEER'S liaison
with CONTRACTOR, working principally
through CONTRACTOR'S superintendent to
assist the CONTRACTOR in understanding
the Contract Documents.
9 3 2 3 2 Assist in obtaining from OWNER
additional details or information, when
ree uired for proper execution of the Work.
9.3.2.3.3. Advise the ENGINEER and
CONTRACTOR of the commencement of
go Work requiring a Shop Drawing or
sample submission if the submission has not
been approved by the ENGINEER.
9.3.2.4. Review of Work. Rejection of Defective
Work. Inspections and Tests -
9.3.2.4.1. Conduct on -site observations of
the Work in progress to assist the ENGINEER
in determining that the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
9 3 2 4 3 Accompany visiting inspectors
presenting public or other agencies having
jurisdiction over the Project record the results
of these inspections and report to the
ENGINEER.
9 3 2 5 In=retation of Contract
Documents Report to ENGINEER when
clarifications and intemretations of the Contract
Documents are needed and transmit to
CONTRACTOR clarification and interpretation
of the Contract Documents as issued by the
ENGINEER.
9.3.2.6. Modifications. Consider and
evaluate CONTRACTOR'S suggestions for
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
20 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
modification in Drawings or Specifications and
report these recommendations to ENGINEER.
Accurately transmit to CONTRACTOR
decisions issued by the ENGINEER.
9.3.2.7. Records.
ENGINEER.
9.3.2.7.3. Record names
addresses and telephone numbers of all
CONTRACTORS, subcontractors and
major Mliers of euujpment and materials.
9.3.2.8. Reports.
9 3 2 8 1 Furnish ENGINEER periodic
r_ports as required of the progress of the
Work and of the CONTRACTOR'S
compliance with the progress schedule and
schedule of shop Drawing and sample
submittals.
9.3.2.8.2. Consult with ENGINEER in
advance of scheduling major tests,
inspections or start of important phases of the
Work.
9 3 2 8 3 Draft proposed Change Orders
and Work Directive Changes. obtaining
backup material from the CONTRACTOR
and recommend to ENGINEER Change
Orders Work Directive Changes and field
orders.
9 3 2 8 4 Report immediately to
ENGINEER and OWNER the occurrence of
any accident.
9 3 2 9 Payment Reouests Review applications
for payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance
with the established procedure for therr
submission and forward with recommendation to
ENGINEER. noting particularly the relationship of
the payment requested to the schedule of values
work completed and materials and a ui ment
delivered at the site but not incorporated in the
Work.
9.3.2.10. Completion.
9.3.2.10.1. Before ENGINEER issues a
Certificate of Substantial Completion. submit
to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items
requiring correction or completion.
9.3.2.10.2. Conduct final inspection in the
company of the ENGINEER. OWNER and
CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of
items to be corrected or completed.
9.3.2.10.3. Observe that all items on the
final list have been corrected or completed and
make recommendations to ENGINEER
concerning acceptance.
9.3.3. Limitation of Authority: The Representative shall
not:
9.3.3.1. Authorize any deviations from the
Contract Documents or accept any substitute
materials or equipment, unless authorized by the
ENGINEER.
9.3.3.2. Exceed limitations of ENGINEER'S
authority as set forth in the Contract Documents
9.3.3.3. Undertake any of the responsibilities
of the CONTRACTOR- Subcontractors. or
CONTRACTOR'S superintendent.
9.3.3.4. Advise on, or issue directions relative
to, or assume control over any aspect of the
means, methods techniques sequences or
procedures for construction unless such is
specifically called for in the Contract Documents
9.3.3.5. Advise on or issue directions
rei±ardinta or assume control over safety
precautions and programs in connections with the
Work.
9.3.3.6. Accept Shot) Drawings or sample
submittals from anyone other than the
CONTRACTOR.
9.3.3.7. Authorize OWNER to occupy the
Work in whole or in Hart
9.3.3.8. Participate in specialized field or
laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others
except as specifically authorized by the
ENGINEER.
Clarifications and Interpretations.
9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness
such written clarifications or interpretations of the
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of
Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and
reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such
written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on
OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER or
CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or
interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price
or the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree
to the amount or extent thereof, if any, OWNER or
CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as
provided in Article I 1 or Article 12.
Authorized Variations in Work:
9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in
the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible
with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order
and will be binding on OWNER and also on
CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved
promptly. If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that a
Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or
the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree as
to the amount or extent thereof, OWNER or
CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as
provided in Article 11 or 12.
Rejecting Defective Work.
9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or
reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective,
or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed
Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that
will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by
the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have
authority to require special inspection or testing of the
Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the
Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to
Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraphs 6.24 through
6.28 inclusive.
9.8. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to
Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to
Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
Determinations for Unit Prices:
9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities
and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with
CONTRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary
determinations on such matters before rendering a written
decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application
21
for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written decision
thereon will be final and binding upon OWNER and
CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days after the date of
any such decision, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR
delivers to the other and to ENGINEER written notice of
intention to appeal from ENGINEER's decision and: (i) an
appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time
limits and in accordance with the procedures set forth in
Exhibit GC -A, "Dispute Resolution Agreement", entered
into between OWNER and CONTRACTOR pursuant to
Article 16, or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement
has been entered into, a formal proceeding is instituted by
the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to
exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may
have with respect to ENGINEER's decision, unless
otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR. Such appeal will not be subject to the
procedures of paragraph 9.11.
Decisions on Disputes.-
9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the
requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and
other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or
the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract
Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of
the Work and claims under Articles 11 and 12 in respect of
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be
referred initially to ENGINEER in writing with a request
for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph.
Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter
will be delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER and the
other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event
later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or
event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will
be submitted to ENGINEER and the other party within
sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event unless
ENGINEER allows an additional period of time for the
submission of additional or more accurate data in support
of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party
shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant
within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last
submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time).
ENGINEER will render a formal decision in writing within
thirty days after receipt of the opposing parry's submittal, if
any, in accordance with this paragraph. ENGINEER's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will
be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR
unless: (i) an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken
within the time limits and in accordance with the
procedures set forth in EXHIBIT GC -A, "Dispute
Resolution Agreement", entered into between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR pursuant to Article 16, or (ii) if no such
Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a
written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's
written decision is delivered by OWNER or
CONTRACTOR to the other and to ENGINEER within
thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal
proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of
competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies
as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws
and Regulations within sixty days of the date of such
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
22 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER
and CONTRACTOR.
9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge under
paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not show
partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be
liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of
a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 or
9.11 with respect to any such claim, dispute or other
matter (except any which have been waived by the making
or acceptance of final payment as provided in
paragraph 14.15) will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or
remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract
Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
such claim, dispute or other matter .
9.13. Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and
Responsibilities.
9.13.1. Neither ENGINEER's authority or
responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other
provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision
made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the
undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority
or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose
or give rise to any duty owed by ENGINEER to
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
any other person or organization, or to any surety for
or employee or agent of any of them.
9.13.2. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct,
control or have authority over or be responsible for
CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any
failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the furnishing or
performance of the Work. ENGINEER will not be
responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform
or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9.13.3. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the
acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or
organization performing or furnishing any of the
Work.
9.13.4. ENGINEER's review of the final Application
for Payment and accompanying documentation and
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, Bonds and certificates of inspection, tests
and approvals and other documentation required to be
delivered by paragraph 14.12 will only be to
determine generally that their content complies with
the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of
inspections, tests and approvals that the results
certified indicate compliance with, the Contract
Documents.
9.13.5. The limitations upon authority and N
responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9.13 shall also
apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project
Representative and assistants.
ARTICLE 10—CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without
notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from
time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the
Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be
authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a
Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such
document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which will be performed under the
applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as
otherwise specifically provided).
10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to
agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Times that
should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive,
a claim may be made therefor as provided in Article 11 or
Article 12.
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times
with respect to any Work performed that is not required by
the Contract Documents as amended, modified and
supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6, except
in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.23
or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in
paragraph 13.9.
10.4. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute
appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER
(or Written Amendments) covering:
10.4.1. changes in the Work which are (i) ordered
by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, (ii) required
because of acceptance of defective Work under
paragraph 13.13 or correcting defective Work under
paragraph 13.14, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
10.4.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Times which are agreed to by the parties; and
10.4.3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Times which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to
paragraph 9.11;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order,
an appeal may be taken from any such decision in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents
and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such
appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in
paragraph 6.29.
10.5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope
of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
(including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract
Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be
given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be
CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each
applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
ARTICLE 11—CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total
compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties,
responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken
by CONTRACTOR shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense
without change in the Contract Price.
11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a
Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim
for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no
event later than thirty days) after the start of the
occurrence or event giving rise to the claim and stating the
general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty
days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless
ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit
additional or more accurate data in support of the claim)
and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement
that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to
which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. All claims for adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in
accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and
CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount
involved. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract
Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this
paragraph 11.2.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract
Price will be determined as follows:
11.3.1. where the Work involved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of such unit prices to the quantities of the
items involved (subject to the provisions of
23
paragraphs 11.9.1 through 11.9.3, inclusive);
11.3.2. where the Work involved is not covered by
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a
mutually agreed payment basis, including lump sum
(which may include an allowance for overhead and
profit not necessarily in accordance with
paragraph 11.6.2);
11.3.3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement to a lump sum is not reached under
paragraph 11.3.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work
(determined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5)
plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit
(determined as provided in paragraph 11.6).
Cost of the Work.
11.4. The tern Cost of the Work means the sum of all
costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in
the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise
may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall
be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the
locality of the Project, shall include only the following
items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in
paragraph 11.5:
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct
employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed
upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such
employees shall include without limitation
superintendents, foremen and other personnel
employed full-time at the site. Payroll costs for
employees not employed full-time on the Work shall
be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the
Work. Payroll costs shall iaehw6,-bua:-net be limited to-,
salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits
which shall include social security contributions,
unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers'
compensation, health arA fefifemew benefits;bennses,
applicable thereto.
The expenses of performing Work after regular
working hours, on Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays,
shall be included in the above to the extent authorized
by OWNER.
11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished
and incorporated in the Work, including costs of
transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field
services required in connection therewith. All cash
discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless
OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with
which to make payments, in which case the cash
discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade
discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of
surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to
OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions
so that they may be obtained.
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the
Subcontractors for Work performed or furnished by
Subcontractors. If required by OWNER,
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
24 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from
Subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to
OWNER who will then determine, with the advice of
ENGINEER, which bids, if any, will be accepted. If
any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to
be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee,
the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be
determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's
Cost of the Work and fee as provided in
paragraphs 11.4, 11.5, 11.6 and 11.7. All
subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of
the Contract Documents insofar as applicable.
11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including but
not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants)
employed for services specifically related to the
Work.
11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following:
11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary
transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of
CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in
discharge of duties connected with the Work.
11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and
maintenance, of all materials, supplies,
equipment, machinery, appliances, office and
temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not
owned by the workers, which are consumed in the
performance of the Work, and cost less market
value of such items used but not consumed which
remain the property of CONTRACTOR.
11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction
equipment and machinery and the parts thereof
whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in
accordance with rental agreements approved by
OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the
costs of transportation, loading, unloading,
installation, dismantling and removal thereof --all
in accordance with terms of said rental
agreements. The rental of any such equipment,
machinery or parts shall cease when the use
thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
11.4.5.4. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes
related to the Work, and for which
CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and
Regulations.
11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than
negligence of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any
of them may be liable, and royalty payments and
fees for permits and licenses.
11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related
expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained
by CONTRACTOR in connection with the
performance and furnishing of the Work (except
losses and damages within the deductible amounts
of property insurance established by OWNER in
accordance with paragraph 5.9), provided they
have resulted from causes other than the
negligence of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of
them may be liable. Such losses shall include
settlements made with the written consent and
approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages
and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the
Work for the purpose of determining
CONTRACTORS fee. If, however, any such loss
or damage requires reconstruction and
CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof,
CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee
proportionate to that stated in paragraph 11.6.2.
11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary
facilities at the site.
11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams,
long distance telephone calls, telephone service at
the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in
connection with the Work.
11.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds
and insurance required because of changes in the
Work.
11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of
the following:
11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of
CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of
partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers,
engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors,
accountants, purchasing and contracting agents,
expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel
employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in
CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for
general administration of the Work and not specifically
included in the agreed upon schedule of job
classifications referred to in paragraph 11.4.1 or
specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4--all of which
are to be considered administrative costs covered by the
CONTRACTOR's fee.
11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and
branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at
the site.
11.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOWs capital
expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S
capital employed for the Work and charges against
CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments.
11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all
insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required
by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain
the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by
subparagraph 11.4.5.9 above).
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
11.5.5. Costs due to the negligence of
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for
whose acts any of them may be liable, including but
not limited to, the correction of defective Work,
disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied
and making good any damage to property.
11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of
any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and
expressly included in paragraph 11.4.
11.6. The CONTRACTOR's fee allowed to
CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be
determined as follows:
11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
11.6.2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee
based on the following percentages of the various
portions of the Cost of the Work:
11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under
paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2, the
CONTRACTOR's fee shall be fifteen percent;
11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under
paragraph 11.4.3, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall
be five percent;
11.6.2.3. where one or more tiers of
subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work
plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the
intent of paragraphs 11.4.1, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 and
11.6.2 is that the Subcontractor who actually
performs or furnishes the Work, at whatever tier,
will be paid a fee of fifteen percent of the costs
incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs
11.4.1 and 11.4.2 and that any higher tier
Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be
paid a fee
the awEt !ewer tiff 8Hbe8fWWter-; to be negotiated
in good faith with the OWNER but not to exceed
five percent of the amount paid to the next lower
tier Subcontractor.
11.6.2.4. no fee shall be payable on the basis
of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5
and 11.5;
11.6.2.5. the amount of credit to be allowed
by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change
which results in a net decrease in cost will be the
amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a
deduction in CONTRACTORSs fee by an amount
equal to five percent of such net decrease; and
11.6.2.6. when both additions and credits are
involved in any one change, the adjustment in
CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the
basis of the net change in accordance with
paragraphs 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2.5, inclusive.
11.7. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be
25
determined pursuant to paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5,
CONTRACTOR will establish and maintain records
thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting
practices and submit in form acceptable to ENGINEER an
itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
Cash Allowances:
11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered
to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be
acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR
agrees that:
11.8.1. the allowances include the cost to
CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts)
of materials and equipment required by the allowances
to be delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and
handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the
allowances have been included in the Contract Price
and not in the allowances and no demand for
additional payment on account of any of the foregoing
will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be
issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual
amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered
by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
11.9. Unit Price Work.
11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that all
or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all
Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the
established unit prices for each separately identified
item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity
of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The
estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are
not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of
comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract
Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in
accordance with paragraph 9.10.
11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate
to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for
each separately identified item.
11.9.3.OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in
accordance with Article 11 if:
11.9.3.1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs
materially and significantly from the estimated
quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
26 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
and
11.9.3.2. there is no corresponding adjustment
with respect to any other item of Work; and
11.9.3.3. if CONTRACTOR believes that
CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in
Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or OWNER believes that
OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price
and the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount of any such increase or decrease.
ARTICLE 12—CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
12.1. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be
changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment.
Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Times (or
Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by
the party making the claim to the other party and to
ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty
days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the
claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice
of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be
delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless
ENGINEER allows additional time to ascertain more
accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be
accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the
adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the
claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of
the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in
the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be determined by
ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if
OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree.
No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or
Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance
with the requirements of this paragraph 12.1.
12.2. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Agreement.
12.3. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from
completing any part of the Work within the Contract
Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of
CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will
be extended in an amount equal to time lost due to such
delay if a claim is made therefor as provided in
paragraph 12.1. Delays beyond the control of
CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts
or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or
other contractors performing other work as contemplated
by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather
conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and
within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be
deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR.
12.4. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from
completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the
Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the
time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole
and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall
OWNER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, any other person or organization, or to any
surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for
damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of the CONTRACTOR, or
(ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including, but
not limited to, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather
conditions, acts of God or acts or neglect by utility owners
or other contractors performing other work as contemplated
by Article 7.
ARTICLE 13—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1. Notice of Defects.
Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER or
ENGINEER have actual knowledge will be given to
CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected,
corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
Access to Work.
13.2. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants,
other representatives and personnel of OWNER,
independent testing laboratories and governmental agencies
with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at
for their observation, inspecting and
testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and
safe conditions for such access and advise them of
CONTRACTOR's site safety procedures and programs so
that they may comply therewith as applicable.
Tests and Inspections.
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely
notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
13.4. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of
an independent testing laboratory to perform all
inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract
Documents except:
13.4.1. for inspections, tests or approvals covered
by paragraph 13.5 below;
13.4.2. that costs incurred in connection with tests
or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.9
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
below shall be paid as provided in said
paragraph 13.9; and
13.4.3. as otherwise specifically provided in the
Contract Documents.
13.5. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically
to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or
other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR
shall assume full responsibility for arranging and
obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs
in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the
required certificates of inspection, or approval.
CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for arranging
and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with
any inspections, tests or approvals required for OWNER's
and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs,
or equipment submitted for approval prior to
CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in
the Work.
13.6. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be
inspected, tested or approved is covered by
CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of
ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be
uncovered for observation.
13.7. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.6
shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless
CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of
CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and
ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in
response to such notice.
Uncovering Work.
13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written
request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by
ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation
and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.9. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable
that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or
inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at
ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise
make available for observation, inspection or testing as
ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in
question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and
equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing
and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction,
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,
and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
thereof, may make a claim therefor as provided in
Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be
defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in
the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times
(or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
27
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in
Articles 11 and 12.
OWNER May Stop the Work:
13.10. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails
to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, or fails to fumish or perform the Work in such a
way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop
the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such
order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER
to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part
of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of
CONTRACTOR or any surety or other party.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.11. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work,
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the
Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the
site and replace it with Work that is not defective.
CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and
damages caused by or resulting from such correction or
removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.12. Correction Period.
13.12.1. If within ene yeaf two years after the date of
Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the
terms of any applicable special guarantee required by
the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of
the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be
defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost
to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written
instructions: (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the site and
replace it with Work that is not defective, and (ii)
satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage
to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom.
If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the
terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where
delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage,
OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the
rejected Work removed and replaced, and all claims,
costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from
such removal and replacement (including but not
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of
others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR.
13.12.2.In special circumstances where a particular
item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the
correction period for that item may start to run from an
earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by
Written Amendment.
13.12.3. Where defective Work (and damage to other
EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition)
28 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99)
Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph 13.12, the
correction period hereunder with respect to such Work
will be extended for an additional period of exe yeaF
two years after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and
replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to
ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, also
ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so.
CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and
damages attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to
be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness). If any
such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's
recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to
the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor
as provided in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after
such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid
by CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
OWNER May Correct Defective Work.
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time
after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective
Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required
by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.11, or if
CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails
to comply with any other provision of the Contract
Documents, OWNER may, after seven days' written
notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such
deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under
this paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In
connection with such corrective and remedial action,
OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of
the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and
suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take
possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the site and
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment
stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid
CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere.
CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's
representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's other
contractors and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's
Consultants access to the site to enable OWNER to
exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All
claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by
OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against CONTRACTOR and a Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to
the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor
as provided in Article 11. Such claims, costs, losses and